LLC HSE Edition 1 Rev 1 2012

LABORDE MARINE
MANAGEMENT, L.L.C.
HSE
MANUAL
This document is controlled by Laborde Marine
EDITION 1, REVISION 1, JULY 1, 2012

LABORDE MARINE, L.L.C.
HSE MANUAL
Title: Revision Number: Date Effective: Section:
Statement 0 Sept. 1, 2011 SOA
Of Prepared By: Approved By: Page:
Authority Safety MRC Page 1 of 1
By affixing our signature below, we have granted approval to all information that is contained within
this documentation and that all such information, whether original in issue or revised, requires our
approval.
The signatures on this statement replace the need for signatures, initials, or any other approval
identity contained on each page of this controlled document.
HSE MANUAL
Record of 0 July 1, 2012 ROC
Change Prepared By: Approved By: Page:
Safety MRC Page 1 of 1
Section # Date Rev # Subject/Subsection
All 9/1/11 0 HSE MANUAL IMPLEMENTATION
52 7/1/2012 1 Clarification of SSE definition
36 7/1/2012 1 Add Section J Static Electricity Guidelines
44 7/1/2012 1 Add Jeff Fegenbush as Hazcom Administrator
44 7/1/2012 1 Add MSDS Inventory
38 7/1/2012 1 Add Pelican Hook and D Ring Requirements
HSE MANUAL
Table of 0 Sept. 1, 2011 TOC
Contents Prepared By: Approved By: Page:
Section Section Title Pages

SOA Statement of Authority 1 of 1
ROC Record of Change 1 of 1
TOC Table of Contents 1 of 10
Disclaimer Disclaimer 1 of 1
1 Environmental Statement 1 of 1
2 Mission Statement 1 of 2
3 Corporate Safety Policy 1 of 2
4 HSE Goals 1 of 1
5 HSE Performance Plan 1 of 2
6 General Rules Practices & Procedures 1 of 3
7 Basic Safety Rules Applicable to All Jobs 1 of 3
8 General Safety 1 of 34
9 Contractor Safety Program 1 of 6
10 Vehicle Policy 1 of 5
11 Helicopter Safety 1 of 6
12 Sexual Harassment 1 of 6
13 JSA 1 of 7
13.1 Risk Assessment Matrix 1 of 3
14 RCA 1 of 4
15 BBS 1 of 5
16 Offshore Orientation 1 of 8
17 Critical Stores & Supplies 1 of 1
18 Safe Lifting Program 1 of 6
19 Walking & Working Surfaces 1 of 7
20 OSHA Inspection 1 of 3
21 Workplace Violence 1 of 5
22 MOC 1 of 3
23 Permit to Work 1 of 9
24 Lockout Tagout 1 of 3
25 Confined Space 1 of 4
Handling, Shipping & Transportation of Hazardous
26 Materials 1 of 7
27 Hot Work 1 of 6
28 SWO 1 of 5
HSE MANUAL
Table of 0 Sept. 1, 2011 TOC
Contents Prepared By: Approved By: Page:
29 Journey Management 1 of 2
30 Fatigue Management 1 of 1
31 Access to Medical Records 1 of 3
32 Bloodborne Pathogens 1 of 11
33 Confined Space 1 of 23
34 Lockout Tagout 1 of 12
35 Disciplinary Program 1 of 3
36 Electrical Safety 1 of 33
37 Emergency Response 1 of 10
38 Fall Protection 1 of 14
39 Fire Protection & Prevention 1 of 10
40 First Aid 1 of 12
41 Forklift Operations 1 of 8
42 Grounding Conductor 1 of 6
43 Hand & Power Tools 1 of 11
44 Hazard Communications Right to Know 1 of 7
45 HAZWOPER 1 of 17
46 Hydrogen Sulfide H2S 1 of 6
47 NORM 1 of 5
48 Occupational Noise & Hearing Conservation 1 of 19
49 PPE 1 of 12
50 Respiratory Equipment 1 of 21
51 Rigging 1 of 19
52 SSE 1 of 4
AP 1 Lockout Tagout Form 1 of 1
AP 2 Fall Protection Work Plan Form 1 of 2
AP 3 Hot Work Permit Form 1 of 2
AP 4 Confined Space Entry Form 1 of 4
AP 5 Contractor Acknowledgement Form 1 of 1
AP 6 Sub Contractor Safety Review Form 1 of 4
AP 7 MOC Form 1 of 1
AP 8 SSE Form 1 of 1
HSE MANUAL
Disclaimer 0 Sept. 1, 2011 Disclaimer
Prepared By: Approved By: Page:
DISCLAIMER
The purpose of this safety manual is to serve as a guide and assist managements and personnel in
the efficient and safe performance of their work practices.
Further, this manual is presented with the full understanding and realization that it is impossible
to cover all potential unsafe acts and/or unsafe conditions or to guarantee absolute accuracy of the
material contained herein due to the constantly changing nature of government regulations; therefore,
Laborde Marine, LLC assumes no responsibility for any omission, error, misprinting, or ambiguity
contained herein and shall not be held liable for any loss caused by any such omission, error,
misprinting, or ambiguity presented in this publication.
This HSE Manual serves as supporting information and as a reference to the Laborde Marine,
LLC SOP Manual. While the contents of this HSE Manual have been reviewed for consistency with the
Laborde Marine, LLC SOP Manual, should any conflicts exist, the Laborde Marine SOP Manual always
takes precedence.
In addition, this manual is designed so that additions and or deletions can be made that would be
company specific, not regulatory. Nothing can take the place of constant vigilance and care in
performing one’s job. Management must depend on their key people to exercise their skills, training,
and knowledge. In order to ensure a safe and healthy work environment, the fundamental principles of
safety must be applied to the problems of today and tomorrow, as we understand them in a constantly
changing work place. There must also be room for new technological advances and directions or new
thoughts that come into the practice of safety in the workplace.
HSE MANUAL
Environmental 0 Sept. 1, 2011 1.0
Statement Prepared By: Approved By: Page:
ENVIRONMENTAL STATEMENT
Our key focus in the area of protecting the environment and waste management is source
reduction/elimination and environmentally sound recycling. Reduction and/or elimination of waste at its
source are the key to a sound program. For those products in which elimination is not possible only
environmentally sound recycling will be utilized. Our goals are as follows:
1. To use as few hazardous waste products as possible.

2. To replace hazardous waste products with non-hazardous waste products whenever possible.
3. To eliminate or alter processes that generates hazardous waste so that hazardous waste is not
generated.
4. Manage stocks to prevent expiration.
5. Ensure that all processes that do generate hazardous waste are designed to ensure that only
minimal amounts are generated.
6. Ensure that hazardous wastes that are generated are recyclable and/or returnable to the
supplier. Our objective is that we generate as little waste as possible and none that requires
disposal.
7. Ensure that only waste generated by our firm at our facility through pre-approved processes
is the only waste accepted or located at our facility.
(i.e. spent abrasive, paint waste, drums)
8. Demonstrate genuine concern for the environment through our actions.
9. The key is to avoid whenever possible the use of materials which become hazardous waste.
We must as well understand that we cannot legally transfer our responsibility for a hazardous
waste by allowing someone else to dispose of it.
INTEGRITY
 Earn and maintain customer trust and respect through open communication with them
and each other.
 Reflect fairness, respect and the highest quality standards of ethical conduct.
ENVIRONMENT
 Educate and ensure that we do not pollute our environment.
 Provide the resources required to protect our environment
 Demonstrate genuine concern for the environment through our actions
HSE MANUAL
Mission 0 Sept. 1, 2011 2.0
MISSION STATEMENT
To provide the highest quality service by continuous improvement and through the skillfulness of our
most valuable asset – OUR EMPLOYEES.
GOALS AND EXPECTATIONS
SAFETY
 Strive to reach our goal of zero accidents
 Continually improve upon the processes that directly or indirectly lead us to our goal of zero
accidents.
 All injuries and occupational illnesses are preventable.
 NO job is so important that we cannot take the time to do it safely
 Safety compliance is a condition of employment.
 If we have an accident we will handle it in as promptly and as professionally as possible.
 Strive to maintain employee retention. Minimize turnover.
PERFORMANCE
 Focus on the continuous improvement of our work processed as an organization and as
individuals in the areas of safety, protecting the environment, quality, integrity, caring for our
employees and responding to their needs, as well as that of the customers.
 Provide the resources necessary to ensure the highest quality of service.
EMPLOYEES
 Treat our employees as our most valuable asset.
 Ensure that they are properly trained and know our expectations as well as that of the customer.
INTEGRITY
 Earn and maintain customer and public trust and respect through open communication with them
and each other.
 Reflect fairness, respect and the highest quality standards of ethical conduct.
HSE MANUAL
Mission 0 Sept. 1, 2011 2.0
ENVIRONMENT
 Educate and ensure that we do no pollute the environment.
 Provide the resources required to protect the environment.
 Demonstrate genuine concern for the environment through our actions.
HSE MANUAL
Corporate 0 Sept. 1, 2011 3.0
Safety Prepared By: Approved By: Page:
Policy Safety MRC Page 1 of 2
CORPORATE SAFETY POLICY

1.0 Purpose:
To describe the Safety and Environmental Policies of the company
2.0 Scope:
All Corporations that use this System as Guidelines to Manage Safety
3.0 Responsibility:
All employees
4.0 Guidelines:
The Company has established Safety and Environmental policies and procedures to fulfill the
objectives of the Safety Management System.
4.1 Responsibilities
 The Master of each vessel has the responsibility for ensuring that these policies
are adhered to aboard the vessel.
 The responsibility and authority to monitor the safety and pollution prevention
aspects of the Company vessels, with the intention of ensuring that adequate
resources are provided, and reporting less than adequate conditions to the Vice
President Manager rest with the Designated Person.
 The responsibility for providing training requirements that support the goals of
the Safety and Environmental Policies of the Company rests with the Operations
Manager.
 The responsibility, authorities and accountabilities are placed on every employee

to perform all duties in a safe and environmentally friendly manner.
HSE MANUAL
Corporate 0 Sept. 1, 2011 3.0
Policy Safety MRC Page 2 of 2
SAFETY POLICY
HSE MANUAL
HSE 0 Sept. 1, 2011 4.0
Goals Prepared By: Approved By: Page:
HSE GOALS
Our HSE goals are continually monitored and reviewed annually and are communicated via our HSE
Performance Improvement Plan.
These are applied through policies, procedures and management systems. HSE performance is also a
key area of focus for our customers and our improvement initiatives are often implemented in
conjunction with them. LABORDE MARINE, LLC’s HSE goals for are:
HEALTH
Continue to improve the quality of occupational health management by:
 Controlling more effectively the health risks arising from our activities.
 Promoting the benefit of healthy lifestyles for our employees.
SAFETY
Reduce the number of injuries occurring by:
 Using leading indicators to measure proactive performance.

 Ensuring our personnel are properly inducted and trained.
 Ensuring proper security and emergency response plans are in place and tested.
 Combating complacency in routine activities by refresher campaigns on recurring at risk
behaviors.
 Maintaining a focus on high-risk areas.
ENVIRONMENT
Continue to improve environmental management by:
 Reporting on appropriate environmental indicators.

 Evaluating work practices and processes that could adversely affect the environment.
 Managing waste more efficiently.
HSE MANUAL
HSE 0 Sept. 1, 2011 5.0
Performance Prepared By: Approved By: Page:
Plan Safety MRC Page 1 of 2
HSE PERFORMANCE IMPROVEMENT PLAN
The HSE Performance Improvement Plan (PIP) is a plan with action items to address and effectively
close gaps in LABORDE MARINE, LLC’s HSE program. The plan is developed to deliver sustained
improvement in the HSE program.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
An HSE PIP will be developed when:
 Laborde Marine, LLC’s TRIR exceeds 2.0 based on a twelve month rolling average.
 Audit findings reveal significant gaps as compared to client requirements.
 A Client initiated performance improvement plan is requested.
 At least annually
KEY RESPONSIBILITIES
HSE Director:
 Prepare and submit a Management of Change document for all changes affecting the Company
as a whole.
 Set and facilitate meetings.
 Develop the PIP and track progress to closure.
PROCEDURE
General Procedure:
1. The HSE Performance Improvement Plan is owned and written by Laborde Marine, LLC.
2. Each action item should:
a. Address HSE gap(s) specific to underlying cause/condition(s)
b. Lead to sustained HSE improvement to protect against repeat incident/gaps.
c. Include the following elements:
i. Findings from audits or incident investigations.
ii. Corrective actions that are measurable/verifiable and intended to close the
finding.
iii. Responsible Party for closing the corrective action.
iv. Target date with an achievable date for closure.
v. Complete date which will be noted upon closure of each action item.
HSE MANUAL
HSE 0 Sept. 1, 2011 5.0
Performance Prepared By: Approved By: Page:
Plan Safety MRC Page 2 of 2
3. The HSE Director and Responsible Party will establish follow-up dates to track action item
closure.
4. Follow-up meeting dates will be set as listed below:

a. 30 days after the plan is written.
b. 90 day increments until action items are closed.
c. A close-out meeting will be held prior to end of 1 year anniversary of the development of
the PIP.
HSE MANUAL
General Rules 0 Sept. 1, 2011 6.0
Practices & Prepared By: Approved By: Page:
Procedures Safety MRC Page 1 of 3
GENERAL RULES, PRACTICES AND PROCEDURES
The safety and well being of each employee is of utmost concern. Therefore, willful disregard for
safety regulations, practices and/or procedures endangering the employee, the employee’s peers,
LABORDE MARINE, LLC customer property and/or the environment shall be subject to
disciplinary action. Promoting and working safely shall be a condition of employment throughout
the employee’s career with LABORDE MARINE, LLC.
A. CONTROLLED AREAS
A controlled area is defined as any environment where LABORDE MARINE, LLC is

solely responsible for the movements and operations of personnel and equipment. Controlled
areas will be clearly and appropriately defined/marked. Specific sections of a controlled area
may require special restrictions and/or regulations. Whether working or visiting these
controlled areas, all applicable rules and regulations shall be strictly followed.
B. SMOKING
LABORDE MARINE, LLC will promote a smoke free environment in all of its facilities
and assets. “No Smoking” notices will be posted where appropriate. All employees and
visitors to LABORDE MARINE, LLC facilities and assets shall abide by the no smoking
restrictions. In all areas/situations not clearly defined, common courtesy should prevail.
C. VISITORS
Visitors to LABORDE MARINE, LLC facilities and assets (controlled areas) will be
accompanied by a responsible party who has a thorough knowledge of all applicable safety,
environmental and operational policies. Visitors shall comply with all applicable rules and
policies while on company and asset premises.
D. CONTRACTOR SAFETY
Contractors and subcontractors performing work on LABORDE MARINE, LLC property

or equipment shall do so following industry safe work practices and LABORDE MARINE,
LLC policies. All applicable LABORDE MARINE, LLC Contractor (Subcontractor),
Federal and State regulations shall be adhered to at all times.
E. ALCOHOL AND CONTROLLED SUBSTANCE-CONTRABAND

HSE MANUAL
LABORDE MARINE, LLC has adopted Contraband policies and procedures complying
with standards established by Federal agencies governing Alcohol and Controlled Substance
abuse. Use of these substances is strictly forbidden while the employment of LABORDE
MARINE, LLC. Requirements for pre-employment, post-accident, and random drug and
alcohol testing are detailed in the Drug and Alcohol Testing Program. Employees are also
subject to testing required by the host facilities program.
F. TRAINING
All LABORDE MARINE, LLC personnel shall receive and participate in all safety and
environmental training programs for his/her job and/or work assignment. Training may
consist of practical experience, classroom instruction, or a combination of both. When
applicable, certification(s) will be maintained at all times.
G. PHYSICAL FITNESS
LABORDE MARINE, LLC must ensure that employees are physically capable of
performing their job function. All employees must undergo and pass a pre-employment
physical as part of the hiring process. Additionally, when changing job functions or work
environments the employee will undergo a physical to ensure he/she is capable of performing
the job function or working in the new environment.
H. SAFE WORK PROCEDURES
Various safe work procedures have been implemented by LABORDE MARINE

MANAGEMENT, LLC and are included in the Policy and HSE manuals (i.e.
Lockout/Tagout, Electrical Safety, Ladder Safety, etc.). Employees must adhere to these safe
work procedures or be subject to disciplinary action detailed in the disciplinary policy.
I. MEDICATION
Employees must notify their supervisor when taking prescription or over-the- counter medication.
Allergy or cold and flu medications may impair one’s ability to perform safely and must be reported
as well.
J. POLICY
HSE MANUAL
Each employee is expected to read, understand, and abide by the rules contained in this
Company Safety Policy. By endorsing the certificate attached to this Policy, you indicate
that you understand the general rules and safety procedures described in this manual.
The rules in the accompanying “Rules” portion of this Policy are there to prevent an (employee)
injury. By complying with them, you assure yourself that you are doing everything in your power to
prevent yourself and others from becoming a “statistic”.
Each and every employee of LABORDE MARINE, LLC has a personal and moral
responsibility to perform their job in a safe manner, either as an individual or LABORDE
MARINE, LLC team member. Accidents are normally the result of human error and can be
prevented by using good judgment, following proven safe work practices, being alert and
developing the proper mental attitude. Safety is a full time endeavor and should be practiced
at all times.
LABORDE MARINE, LLC WILL monitor all employee’s activities and behaviors and if
necessary, remove an employee from the worksite if it is determined that the worker is a
hazard to themselves or others.
1. Work according to good safety practices as posted, instructed, and discussed.
2. Report any unsafe situation or act to his/her supervisor immediately.
3. Report any injury, no matter how trivial, to his/her supervisor.
4. Keep walkways clear so as not to create a tripping hazard.
5. Smoking will be permitted in smoke areas only. There will be NO SMOKING in

vehicles at any time. Failure to obey this rule will be grounds for immediate termination.
6. Employees are responsible for notifying supervisors if they are fatigues to the point of not
being able to perform their duties safely.
7. Employees shall not report to work in a condition as to endanger the safety of their fellow
workers.
HSE MANUAL
Basic Safety 0 Sept. 1, 2011 7.0
Rules Applicable Prepared By: Approved By: Page:
To All Jobs Safety MRC Page 1 of 3
BASIC SAFETY RULES APPLICABLE TO ALL JOBS
1. Know how to perform the assigned task. If unsure, ask questions of your immediate supervisor
or peers who are knowledgeable.
2. Examine new tasks/jobs and identify potential hazards. Remove, minimize the hazards and
ensure all applicable safety rules, work practices and policies are followed.
3. All employees will be required to wear and properly maintain personal protective equipment.
This may include, but not limited to, steel toe boots, hard hats, safety glasses, slicker suits,
gloves, climbing harnesses, rope fall devices, respirators, hearing protection and face shields.
Wearing jewelry in areas requiring use of power tools, machinery and equipment is prohibited.
4. Provide instruction to inexperienced personnel by identifying potential safety hazards and
teaching the proper methods, procedures and tools required to accomplish the assigned task.
Proper lifting techniques should be exercised at all times.
5. Prior to beginning operations identify, correct and/or remove potential unsafe conditions.
Manholes, open hatches, loose grating, overhead loads, pinch points, chemical storage and
handling, pressurized lines, electrical equipment and working at elevated heights all pose
potential hazards. Prior identification and location of first aid kits and fire extinguishers is
essential.
6. Constantly be aware of your fellow employees. Your actions and reactions as a team member
may and can impact other crewmembers. Properly notify your team members before deviating
from previously agreed to work practices and/or schedules.
7. Review applicable procedures and employee responsibilities in case of emergency evacuation or
containment situations
8. Good housekeeping is essential to maintaining a safe work environment.
9. Immediately clean up and report, when applicable, all spills with approved soap cleaners,
10. Remove and properly store all unnecessary equipment and/or tools
11. Dispose of waste material in properly designated containers.
12. Secure all gas bottles, i.e. oxygen, acetylene and properly store in designated storage areas.
13. Trash should be disposed of in properly marked containers.
14. When warranted, applicable permits will be obtained before commencing operations.
15. Horseplay in the work environment is strictly prohibited.
16. Reporting to work under the influence of intoxicating beverages or drugs will be reported to your
foreman or safety coordinator.
17. Construction type work shoes are required on all job sites. Tennis shoes, loafers and sandals are
not work shoes and will not be permitted
18. Never climb on or work from barrels, boxes, racks, skids, or conveyors.
19. Never jump onto or off of a moving vehicle or piece of machinery.
20. Only AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL are to operate machinery or equipment.
21. Report any defective tools or equipment to your foreman or safety coordinator.
22. You are responsible for keeping a clean work area, regardless of who dirtied it.
23. Do not alter, tie-down or remove any safety device or guard.
24. Know the locations of all first aid kits and fire extinguishers.
HSE MANUAL
25. Be on the alert for any hazardous conditions and report them to the foreman or safety coordinator
if you are unable to correct them yourself.
26. Do not ride on equipment unless you are the operator.
27. Store flammable materials in a designated area. DO NOT smoke, burn, or weld within 35 feet of
such area.
28. Stop all engines before refueling.
29. Do not leave running equipment unattended – not even for a minute.
30. Always check slings, chains and hooks before using them, tag and discard damaged equipment.
31. Do not repair, adjust, or lubricate machinery while it is running.
32. Every employee should use the safety devices provided for his/her protection and should never
tamper with, render ineffective or remove any of these safeguards or machine guards.
33. Do not operate machinery until all guards or safety devices are in place and are in satisfactory
condition.
34. Never cut, weld or burn in or on a confined space cylinder or tank, unless the space has been
tested and certified gas free by a competent person or Marine Chemist. Compressed gas
cylinders should be capped and secured.
35. When transporting oxygen and acetylene bottles, make sure the gauges have been removed,
valves are removed and the caps are secured.
36. Always wear safety goggles or glasses when grinding, chipping, sanding, etc.
37. Fighting is immediate grounds for dismissal
38. Employees subject to high noise area shall be equipped with hearing protection.
39. Always obey “NO SMOKING” signs; they were put there for a reason.
40. ALWAYS do your part to keep your work area clean. All trash (coke cans, paper, etc.) should
be placed in a trash barrel.
41. If you see something that is hazardous or unsafe, don’t ignore it, tell someone or do something
about it yourself, then report it.
42. Help teach other employees these safety rules and if you see another employee doing something
unsafe, tell him/her and if that doesn’t work, tell his/her supervisor.
43. Random drug screen testing will be done.
44. Drivers are required to wear safety glasses while operating vehicles or machinery, emptying
trash bins, and driving in landfills.
45. Drivers and passengers must wear seat belts at all times. “BUCKLE UP! IT IS THE LAW!”
46. No “fishing” will be allowed at any of LABORDE MARINE, LLC vessels.
47. While at work, no outside visitors will be allowed on company property for any reason, unless
approved by the operations manager.
48. All accidents, regardless of how minor, shall be reported to the operations manager.
49. Accident reports shall be made out with all of the necessary information given. These must be
faxed into the HSE Director as soon as possible.
50. Accidents involving medical attention shall be immediately reported to the HSE Director
51. Accidents involving third party personnel on equipment shall be reported to the HSE Director.
52. Serious accidents involving employees or equipment damage to a third party will be investigated
by either a Company Representative and/or Third Party Investigator.
HSE MANUAL
53. Think before you act. Never take chances. If you are unable to safely perform your job, then
consult your supervisor.
54. Be alert at all times for the possibility of an accident during the operations. Always expect the
unexpected while working.
55. Tools are designed for specific types of use, so always use the right tools for the job.
56. Keep your tools in good condition. If you need replacement parts, order them.
57. Each employee should assist new employees as much as possible, in order to help them learn
their jobs safely.
58. Work gloves shall be work while handling wire rope, cables, chains and various hand tools.
59. Always wear proper clothing while working. Long pants are to be worn while working. No knit
pants!
60. Rings and other jewelry shall be removed before work begins.
HSE MANUAL
General 0 Sept. 1, 2011 8.0
GENERAL SAFETY
In addition to knowing their responsibilities, supervisors shall be aware that certain conditions present
safety hazards, which are most frequently the causes of injury and are often discovered in safety
inspections and surveys. Listed below are some of those conditions and activities with some suggestions
on how to minimize risk.
A. INTRODUCTION
The general safety procedures listed on the following pages must read carefully and followed. Your
safety and the safety of your fellow workers can be achieved only through the constant efforts of
each employee. Use this portion of the safety manual to refresh your safety know-how whenever
confronted with new work procedures or unfamiliar job assignments.
LABORDE MARINE, LLC policy is to ensure that every reasonable precaution is taken to
prevent accidents. Even though every possible precaution may be taken, employees may still
encounter unsafe conditions. Therefore, develop good safety practices & habits; be alert,
informed, and always aware of your co-workers and surrounding environment.
Always use the safety equipment provided for your protection. Unsafe conditions, practices and
injuries, regardless of how light, shall be reported to your supervisor immediately.
B. GENERAL RULES FOR THE SUPERVISOR
The immediate supervisor shall make certain all employees clearly understand all work and safety
procedures; the selected equipment and tools; individual job assignments; and all environmental
precautions required to execute the job without incident.
1. The supervisor shall make certain all equipment and materials added to, removed from, or
altered on gas/hydrocarbon producing and/or processing facilities are in accordance with
approved standards and applicable codes.
HSE MANUAL
2. Field supervisors shall hold crew safety meetings at the beginning of each
tour. In addition, when the crew is about to undertake a new type of operation or perform
hazardous work, a JSA shall be conducted to review safety procedures and identify
potentially unsafe conditions. Crew members shall, at all times, be given the opportunity to
ask questions and/or make suggestions. Customer and other service personnel shall be
briefed on any LABORDE MARINE, LLC operation impacting their safety and/or work
procedures.
3. In those rare cases where it is impossible to eliminate a location or operational hazard, the
supervisor is responsible for familiarizing the group with the situation via the JSA and
developing prevention measures minimizing personnel and equipment exposure to the
hazard.
4. In certain situations where special precautions must be taken, approval of the next level of
supervision is required before beginning operations. The immediate supervisor shall be
familiar with those situations listed in the JSA requiring such approval
C. HOUSEKEEPING
1. Encourage safe work habits by keeping the work environment orderly and free of
obstructions, unnecessary equipment, tools, and trash.
2. Keep tools and working materials in proper containers, toolboxes, etc.
3. All trash, waste, and scrap (such as scrap metal, oily rags, broken glass, and aerosol cans)
must be placed in properly labeled/marked containers.
4. Properly store all materials and tools.
5. Smoking shall be confined to designated smoking areas. Cigarette butts shall be disposed of
in containers provided.
6. Keep small items in boxes or bins.
7. Keep the floor clear of tools and other items, which may cause employees to slip, trip, and
fall.
8. Keep walkways clear of obstructions.
9. Ensure that worktables are occupied only with equipment, materials, and/or tools necessary
to complete the assigned task.
HSE MANUAL
10. Prevent potential fire hazards by properly storing or containing ignition sources. The
accumulation of flammable and/or combustible materials or residues shall be minimized at
all times.
11. Clean up tools and work areas as you job progresses.
12. Keep cords and hoses seven feet overhead, or lay them flat and outside walkways.
13. Keep all material, tools, and equipment in a stable position (tied, stacked, or blocked) to
prevent rolling or falling.
14. Maintain clear access to all work areas.
D. LIGHTING EQUIPMENT
1. Whenever changing a broken light bulb, make sure the current is de-energized. Eye
protection shall always be worn.
2. Keep the glass on all industrial fixtures clean to insure maximum illumination. Never
remove protective globes from vapor-proof or explosion-proof fixtures longer than necessary
to clean or replace.
3. Avoid handling broken fragments of fluorescent lamp tubes and do not breathe dust or vapors
from a broken tube. Allow the atmosphere to clear before cleaning up the broken pieces.
Thoroughly wash any wounds and seek immediate medical attention. Burned out tubes shall
be disposed of promptly in a container not frequented by people and/or accessible to
children.
4. Safety lights and extension cords must be kept in good working order. Cords must be
periodically checked for bad insulation and lamps checked for cracked or broken protection
globes. The cord shall not be used if it is defective. Care shall be taken to avoid wrapping
cord around the arms or any part of the body. Never stand in water while handling the cord
or light.
5. All portable hand lights used in hazardous locations must be explosion-proof.
6. No portable hand lights shall be used unless the outside globe and metal guard are in place.
HSE MANUAL
E. PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
General Requirements
Protective equipment, including personal protective equipment for eyes, face, head, and
extremities, protective clothing, respiratory devices, and protective shields and barriers, shall be
provided, used and maintained in a sanitary and reliable condition whenever it is necessary by
reason of hazards of processes or environment, chemical hazards, radiological hazards, or
mechanical irritants encountered in a manner capable of causing injury or impairment in the
function of any part of the body through absorption, inhalation or physical contact.
1. Equipment – LABORDE MARINE, LLC provides the majority of all necessary protective
equipment to perform any job encountered as they apply to our operations. These include,
but not limited to: eye, face, ear, and head protection, fall protection, protective clothing,
aprons and respiratory protection. Safety boots are generally furnished by the employee.
2. Training – LABORDE MARINE, LLC will also provide the necessary training to each
employee who is required to use the PPE. Training shall include:
 When PPE is necessary

 What PPE is necessary
 How to properly don & doff, adjust and wear properly
 PPE Limitations
 Proper care, maintenance
LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall also verify that each employee has understood the required
training through written testing along with documentation showing name of employee, dates of
training, and the instructor.
3. Hazard Assessment – LABORDE MARINE, LLC will assess the workplace to ascertain if
and where hazards exist or are likely to exist; at which time LABORDE MARINE, LLC
will select the respective PPE to be used, that will protect any affected employee from the
hazards identified in the assessment. This assessment will be performed with a written
certification identifying the workplace evaluated along with the person conducting the
assessment and the dates completed.
4. Employee Owned Equipment – Where PPE equipment is furnished or owned by the

employee, the HSE coordinator will be responsible for assuring the equipment meets
regulatory standards (OSHA, NIOSH, etc.) and is properly maintained, cleaned and sanitized.
The protective equipment to be used by employees will be determined by the advance analysis of
the job and by conditions that occur as work progresses. However, on all jobs the following are
the minimum:
HSE MANUAL
 Safety goggles or face shield shall be worn by employees who are engaged in chipping,
grinding or performing any other operations that present eye hazards.
 Safety hats and glasses will be worn by all employees and visitors at all times while on the
vessel’s designated area(s).
 Safety shoes are required for all employees on all projects. Tennis shoes, open-toed shoes
and sandals are prohibited.
 Long-sleeve shirts with sleeves rolled down and buttoned are suggested at all times on
projects.
 Personnel requiring respiratory protection with beards will not be permitted to enter certain
locations. This also will include contractor employees, subcontractor employees, and vendor
representatives, etc.
5. Protective Equipment and Clothing – Maintenance and Repair
 Personal protective equipment is vital to safety in your work location. The equipment
shall be properly cleaned, inspected after use, and stored in clearly marked and properly
designated area.
 Any equipment that no longer provides adequate protection shall be repaired or replaced
immediately. Unusable equipment shall be destroyed.
a. Ears
1) Appropriate hearing protection is provided by LABORDE MARINE, LLC and must

be worn by all personnel in areas where signs are posted warning of excessive noise
levels. Hearing protection shall also be worn in un-posted areas that are suspected of
temporary excessive noise.
b. Eyes
1) Approved ANSI z.87 safety glasses with side shields shall be provided by
LABORDE MARINE, LLC and must be worn by all employees.
 In areas designated by LABORDE MARINE, LLC facility safety program.

 During the execution of job assignments posing a potential eye hazard.
 As defined by customer safety procedures on location.
2) Complete coverage eye protection must be worn when dust hazards exist and when
using any type of pneumatic tools.
3) Individuals must wear splash-proof goggles when they are handling hazardous
chemical liquids, powders, or vapors. They must also wear the goggles when they are
in the immediate vicinity of these chemicals.
4) A person near other persons who are doing work that requires the use of safety
goggles must wear such goggles.
HSE MANUAL
5) Employees engaged in helping welders should not look directly at the welding
process and must use approved eye protection.
6) Goggles with the appropriate shade lenses must be worn by helpers when material is
cut with acetylene gas.
7) Electric arc welding requires the use of welding helmets or hand shields fitted with
No. 11 or darker shade lenses. Helpers in electric welding must wear No. 8 or darker
shade lenses.
8) Cover glasses must be used with all welding goggles, helmets, and shield.
9) Suitable goggles must be worn when inspecting tubing under hydraulic pressure.
c. Feet and Toes
1) Approved ANSI Z.41 or ASTM F2412/F2413 safety shoes or boots may be provided
by LABORDE MARINE, LLC and are required to be worn at all times.
2) Tennis shoes, sandals, and other similar shoe types are not to be worn at any time on
the job site. The wearing of low-quarter steel toe shoes is discouraged.
3) Rubber boots with safety toe protection shall be used on jobs where exposure to
hazardous chemicals is eminent, i.e. calcium chloride, zinc bromide.
d. Hands
1) Wearing gloves prevents many minor injuries resulting from rough materials or
irritating substances. Wear gloves whenever possible. Leather or leather-palm
gloves shall be worn when wire rope is being handled. Cloth gloves afford adequate
protection when normal work is done.
2) Appropriate gloves must be worn when acids, caustic soda, and soda ash are handled.
3) Insulted or heat-resistant gloves must be worn when regular work gloves cannot
adequately protect against burns.
4) LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall provide all cotton, latex and rubber gloves.
e. Head and Face
1) LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall supply safety hats to the employees and visitors.
These must be worn by employees and visitors in the field, the shop, or any location
where head injury hazards exist. Safety hats are selected for their protective qualities,
and no others may be worn on the job. Safety hats must fit properly to provide
maximum protection, and they must be maintained to ensure their protective qualities.
Safety hats must not be painted or modified in any manner.
2) Hair long enough to constitute as a hazard while a person is working near moving
machinery or rotating tools and equipment must be secured by a net or tied back.
3) Beards that constitute a hazard while a person is near moving machinery or rotating
tools are not permitted.
HSE MANUAL
f. Respiratory
Please refer to the Respiratory Equipment Program in the regulatory program section of
this Health, Safety, and Environmental Manual for more detailed safety policy
information.
1) Employees must be taught how to use respiratory protection before its actual use is
required. Specific training requirements vary for respiratory types. Training must be
conducted in accordance with applicable regulations. Periodic refresher training shall
be held as appropriate. This training will identify individuals who, because of their
physical conditions, cannot use the equipment.
2) Respirators must be worn when personnel are working in an atmosphere

contaminated with harmful mists, fogs, gasses, smokes, sprays, and vapors.
Respirators must be one of the following types approved by the National Institute of
Occupations Safety and Health (NIOSH):
a) Dust respirators – Used to protect from nuisance and toxic dusts. Not to be used
for vapors, mists, or fumes, unless specified by the manufacturer/supplier.
b) Chemical cartridge respirators – Used to protect from mist or vapor, such as paint
spray. Not to be used for dusts or fumes unless specified by the manufacturer or
supplier.
c) Make sure that all respiratory protective equipment is regularly inspected,
cleaned, and maintained in good working condition.
g. Other Protective Equipment

Other protection equipment shall be proved by LABORDE MARINE, LLC.
1) Chemical goggles, full face shield, protective gloves and an acid-proof apron shall be
worn for handling chemicals that may be harmful to the skin or eyes when exposure
to spillage is possible. Certain materials such as acids and caustic soda require
additional protection.
h. Clothing
Certain types of work clothing shall be provided by LABORDE MARINE, LLC.
1) If clothing becomes saturated with oil, gasoline, or chemicals, the employee shall
immediately wash the exposed skin area with soap and water and change clothes to
prevent skin irritation. The employee must avoid all sources of fire, including
cigarettes, pipes, or cigars before changing clothes and washing the affected skin with
soap and water. Doctor should be consulted if skin rash develops.
i. Personal Flotation Devices

HSE MANUAL
Personal Flotation Devices shall be provided by LABORDE MARINE, LLC. Each individual
must wear a personal flotation device (PFD Type V) as specified below, except in rare instances
where conditions make such use a greater hazard. A PFD must be a Type V approved for the service
intended by the United States Coast Guard and must be fastened when worn. A PFD must be worn:
1) When doing repairs and maintenance of warehouse wharf and bulkhead areas.
2) When loading and unloading barges of sack products and bulk type products.
F. HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
Hazardous materials may be defined as any material posing a health or physical hazard.
Health hazard – any chemical for which scientific evidence has been established suggesting
acute or chronic health effects may occur in exposed employees (Reference Federal Hazard
Communication Standard 29 CFR 1910.1200).
Physical hazard – any material/chemical scientifically determined to be a combustible liquid,

compressed gas, explosive, flammable, an organic peroxide, an oxidizer, pyrophoric, unstable
(reactive) or water reactive.
1. Do not store, handle, apply or use acids or caustics until your supervisor has given you
detailed instruction, safety precautions, and proper protective equipment.
2. When disconnecting flanges, expect to encounter corrosive liquid and protect yourself
accordingly. Where required, use acid coat, hood, boots, and gloves; barricade areas; and
have standby and emergency water immediately available.
3. Never add water to acid; if dilution is needed, add acid to water.
4. Dispose of chemically soaked material in the proper container.
5. Flammables, corrosives, toxic materials and highly reactive materials require special
disposal. See your supervisor or Safety and Environmental Coordinator for the proper
container for these materials.
6. Keep clear of all radioactive material and areas where work is being done with radioactive
material. These areas will be barricaded and posted with a radiation hazard sign.
HSE MANUAL
7. All liquid containers must be properly labeled per Federal guidelines. Labels shall be
removed from all empty containers.
8. MSDS will be required for all materials purchased, used by LABORDE MARINE, LLC
employees an/or stored premises. MSDS will be filed in a central location and readily
available to all employees. ALWAYS FOLLOW MSDS GUIDELINES.
9. All MSDS will be reviewed by the Safety and Environmental Committee (subcommittee) to
determine whether the product possesses properties making it a hazardous material.
10. Do not dispose or mix unidentified chemicals, liquids, and materials. Immediately notify
your supervisor and the Safety and Environmental Coordinator before disposal of any
unidentified materials.
G. SIGNS AND BARRICADES
1. Use signs when necessary and remove them promptly when no longer required. Pay
attention, SIGNS CONVEY AN IMPORTANT MESSAGE.
2. Signs are to be placed on barricade stands, posts, or other easily visible locations.
3. Signs must be effectively positioned before work begins and removed to proper storage areas
when the job has been completed.
4. Signs must be legible.
5. Danger tags are placed on switches and valves that must not be operated. These tags are
normally printed with the words “HANDS OFF – DO NOT OPERATE.”
6. Danger tags are used to prevent movement of a switch, valve, or piece of equipment where
operation of the switch/valve may endanger employees or cause equipment damage.
7. Observe the following guidelines for danger tags:
DO:
HSE MANUAL
 Place your tag personally – do not have someone else attach it for you.
 Sign the tag and date it.
 Use only the standard danger tag.
 Remove your tag when you have completed your work.
 Return your tag when you remove it, and use a new one when needed.
 All tags placed by “electricians” must be accompanied by their lock.
 TRY the switch after locking and tagging and before starting work to make sure the
switch has been immobilized.
DON’T:
 Remove someone else’s tag or operate a valve, switch, or device that has another
person’s danger tag attached. Disregard for lockout/tagout tags may be grounds for
disciplinary action up to dismissal.
 Neglect to lock or tag a device unless specifically instructed to do so by your supervisor.
 Place danger tags on defective tools and equipment.
8. The following written, properly authorized permits are required BEFORE beginning any of
the activities listed below.
a) Confined Space/Tank Entry Permit:
 Entering enclosures having limited means of access and egress, e.g., tanks, vessels,
bins, silos, boilers, pits, septic tanks, sewers, underground utilities, pipelines, and
similar structures.
 Do not enter a tank or confined space in operational areas until a valid Confined
space or Tank Entry Permit, signed by the responsible supervisor, is posted at the
work site and you are in compliance with this permit.
b) Work Permit:
 Work of any type as required by federal guidelines, customer or company policy.
c) Hot Work Permit:

HSE MANUAL
 Flame or spark producing activity regulated by federal guidelines, customer or
company policy.
9. Barricades are required around excavations, holes or openings in floors, edges of roofs,
elevated platforms and around certain types of overhead work. Barricades are used to warn
people against an impending danger, i.e. falling in, through, or off a work area.
10. ANYONE WHO MAKES A HOLE OR OPENING IS RESPONSIBLE FOR HAVING IT

BARRICADED.
11. Barricades and/or caution tape must be 42” high, square and level.
12. Barricades and/or caution tape shall be erected before the hole is cut and extended as the
excavation progresses. Barricades shall be returned to the designated storage area when no
longer needed.
13. Warning barricades call your attention to a hazard but offer no physical protection, e.g.,
colored synthetic tape on stands or posts.
14. Protective barricades serve 2 purposes: (1) warning and (2) physical protection from falling.
15. Barricades must be constructed with materials that prevent physical entry into the work area.
16. All holes or opening through floors or decks must be provided with hole covers or standard
railing. Do not store material or equipment on a hole cover.
17. Excluding the entrance, stairway floor openings shall be guarded by standard railing and toe
boards.
18. All wall openings from which there is a drop of more than 4’ above the working surface shall
be guarded.
19. All open-sided floors or platforms 6’ or more above adjacent floor or ground levels shall be
guarded by a standard railing or equivalent protection.
20. Temporary hole covers shall have a sign reading, “WARNING – TEMPORARY COVER –
DO NOT REMOVE”, or must be otherwise identified. Covers must be cleated, wired, or
HSE MANUAL
otherwise secured to prevent slipping horizontally beyond the hole. Covers must extend
adequately beyond the edge of the hole.
H. FIRE PROTECTION
TRAINING
Training for all employees who have been designated to operate fire extinguishers is to be given a
training program that will familiarize them with the proper use and hazards involved using portable
fire extinguishers on incipient stage fires.
The training shall include but not limited to the following:
1. Visual Inspection
2. Fire Prevention
3. Classes of Fires and Extinguishers
4. Proper selection and use of extinguishers
Training will be provided upon initial employment and annually thereafter:
Inspection and Maintenance
All portable fire extinguishers shall be visually inspected on a monthly basis by the Safety Officer.
All annual inspections shall be documented and records retained for one year. Alternate equipment
protection will be provided when portable fire extinguishers are removed from service for
maintenance or repair.
Procedures
1. Permits may be required before welding, burning, or using open flames. Check with the
immediate supervisor.
HSE MANUAL
2. Know the location of and procedures to activate a fire alarm.
3. Know the location of the nearest fire extinguisher and how to operate it. Know the type of
fire on which it should be used. Check the label. Be aware that certain toxic fumes may be
generated by a fire.
4. Fire extinguishers of the proper type and size must be within 30’ of each open-flame
operation performed. Return extinguishers for servicing promptly after use.
5. Combustible material under or near welding and burning operations must be moved a safe
distance away (35’) or covered with FIRE-RETARDING material. Where this is not
possible, all sparks and slag must be contained in an approved spark catcher.
6. Portable power equipment must not be refueled while running or when hot. If applicable,
attach a ground wire before refueling.
7. Smoke in approved smoking areas only. Discard butts in approved containers, never in
wastebaskets or trashcans.
8. Store flammables in properly labeled containers and in designated areas. Keep flammables
away from smoking, welding, burning, or other sources of heat.
9. Exercise special care and attention when using the following types of liquids:
 Petroleum fuels
 Solvents
 Thinners
 Degreasers
 Protective coatings
 Acids
 Caustics
10. Spraying these liquids will increase the presence of fumes or vapors and create a potential
fire or explosion hazard. Employees should be fully aware of respiratory, ventilation and
skin-protection requirements. Do not mix different liquids or chemicals unless specifically
told to do so.
Fire Safety
 The master is to be notified immediately of any fire.

HSE MANUAL
 Fire hydrants and/or extinguishers are located throughout all work areas. Each employee
shall become familiar with the location of extinguishers in his/her respective work area.
 Only a dry chemical or CO2 fire extinguisher shall be used on electrical fires.
 If an employee uses a fire extinguisher, the used extinguisher shall be turned into the
supervisor for replacement.
 Smoking, open fires or using open flam appliances in posted areas or near places where
gasoline, acid or similar flammable substances are stored or handled is prohibited.
A B C D Classification of Fires
 Fire classifications and the proper application to extinguish a particular class of fire is as
follows:
Class A Fire
Basically, a fire involving ordinary combustibles such as wood, cloth, paper, rubber, and
some plastics.
Method of Extinguishment:
Water, because it is a cooling, soaking and penetrating agent, but any extinguisher
can be used with reasonable success.
Class B Fire
Fires involving flammable or combustible liquids, gases, greases, and similar materials.
Fires of this nature require the use of a blanketing or smothering agent, such as
foam, carbon dioxide, dry chemical, water fog, or sand.
Class C Fire
Fires involving energized electrical equipment.

If possible, de-energize circuit. Use a nonconductive extinguisher such as dry
chemical or carbon dioxide – CO2 is preferred because it leaves no residue.
Caution – Use water or foam only as a last resort and ONLY after the electricity
has been secured.
Class D Fire
HSE MANUAL
Fires involving certain combustible metals, such as magnesium, sodium, potassium, etc.
A special dry chemical, because it is a smothering and coating agent.
I. LADDER AND SCAFFOLDS
1. Inspect ladders before use. Ladders are not to be painted except for numbering purposes. Do
not use ladders for skids, braces, workbenches, or for any purpose other than climbing.
2. Always face the ladder when climbing or descending.
3. Face the ladder when working from it.
4. If it is necessary to place a ladder in or over a doorway, barricade the door and post warning
signs.
5. While ascending or descending a ladder, do not carry anything that will prevent holding on
with both hands. Use a hand line.
6. Keep both feet on the ladder rungs.
7. If working from a ladder, do not reach out too far or place one foot on an adjacent piece of
equipment.
8. Change the position of the ladder as often as necessary.
9. A safety harness and de-acceleration device is required at all times when ascending,
descending and/or working from a ladder when exceeding a height of more than 6 feet from
the deck.
10. Metal ladders must not be used for electric welding or near any electric lines or services.
11. When not in use, the ladder shall be properly stored.
12. Place the ladder so that the bottom is positioned one-fourth the ladder’s extended height from
the base of the support object. In work environments limiting the proper positioning of
ladders, all precautions shall be taken and employee’s notified of the potential unsafe
condition.
13. Ladders must be equipped with non-skid safety feet and properly secured at the ladder’s base
and top.
HSE MANUAL
14. The top of the ladder must extend at least 3’ beyond the supporting object when the ladder is
used for access to an elevated work area.
15. After an extension section has been raised to the desired height, ensure safety dogs or latches
are engaged and the extension rope is secured to a rung on the base section of the ladder.
16. Extension ladders must be overlapped a minimum of three rungs.
17. Do not take extension ladders apart to use individual sections.
18. Stepladders shall always be opened, set level on all four feet and locking mechanisms fully
engaged. Stepladders shall never be used like a straight ladder.
19. Never stand on the top platform of a stepladder. Do not store tools or materials on the steps
or platform.
20. Identify specific safety assignments before using two-man stepladders.
21. Stepladders may require tying off under certain conditions.
22. Before starting work on a scaffold, inspect it to determine that handrails, toe boards, and
decking are in place, all wheels are locked (movable scaffolds), and locking pins are in place
at each joint (section).
23. When ascending, descending or working on a scaffold platform, the employee will wear and
use a safety harness and lanyards. Lanyards shall be properly tied off to objects capable of
supporting 500 pounds of dead weight.
24. Do not change or remove scaffold members unless authorized.
25. No one is allowed to ride on a rolling scaffold when it is being moved. Remove all tools and
material before moving scaffolding.
26. Do not climb on or work from any scaffold handrail, mid rail, or brace member. Use the
scaffold ladder to ascend or descend the scaffolding.
27. The erection of scaffolding, exceeding 50’ above the base plates must be approved by project
management. All scaffolds must be erected on a firm, level base.
28. Scaffolds must be tied off or stabilized when the height is more than three times the smaller
base dimension. Scaffolds must also be tied off horizontally every 30’.
HSE MANUAL
29. When space permits, all scaffold platforms must be equipped with: (1) rigidly secured (not
wired) standard 42” high handrails; (2) standard 21” high mid rails; (3) completely decked
with safety plank(s) or manufactured scaffold decking ; and (4) rigidly secured toe boards on
all four sides.
30. Adjusting or leveling screws must not be used on scaffolds equipped with wheels.
Adjustment screws must not be extended more than 12”.
31. Check with your supervisor for safe working loads on all scaffolds.
32. Rolling scaffolds shall be used only on level, smooth surfaces. If necessary, the wheels can
be contained in wooden or channel iron runners. Watch for overhead clearance when
moving.
33. Do not alter any scaffold member by welding, burning, cutting, drilling, or bending.
34. Do not execute work assignments from scaffolding handrails, mid rails, or braces
35. Generally, parts and sections of scaffolding made by one manufacturer are not to be used
with a second manufacturer’s equipment.
J. OXYGEN-ACETYLENE SAFETY
1. Oxygen and acetylene cylinders shall be handled with care, even when they are empty.
Rough handling may damage cylinders or cause leakage with the potential danger of fire and
explosion.
2. Dented or otherwise damaged cylinders shall never be used. These cylinders shall be so
marked and sent in as soon as possible.
3. All cylinder valves must be closed and the cap replace before cylinder are returned for refill.
4. Never lift cylinders by the cap and avoid dragging or sliding cylinders.
5. Cylinders shall be kept upright except as may be required for handling. Acetylene cylinders
shall be stored in a vertical position.
6. Cylinders shall be stored in an upright position in a safe, dry, well-ventilated place. These
cylinders shall not be stored in a place where they will be exposed to heat from stoves,
radiators, or direct sunlight.
7. The protective caps shall be installed when the bottles are not in use.
HSE MANUAL
8. Oxygen and acetylene bottles shall be securely fastened to prevent accidental falling. Bottles
in use shall be securely fastened at all times.
9. Oil, grease, and fuel oil must be kept off valves, hoses, gauge connections and the bottles.
10. Never shall the gas from one bottle be transferred to another.
11. Oxygen and acetylene cylinders must not be stored together. A minimum distance is 20’
apart.
12. The use of oxygen or acetylene cylinders as rollers or as supports for any reason is not
allowed.
13. Torches and blowpipes shall be examined closely for leaky valves, nozzles, and leaky or
clogged tips.
14. All O-rings shall be inspected periodically and changed as needed to minimize the possibility
of blow back and hose explosion.
15. Before a regulator is removed from a cylinder valve, the cylinder valve shall always be
closed and the gas released from the regulator.
16. The hose on oxygen/acetylene bottles shall be properly stored when not in use.
17. Hoses shall be inspected regularly. The few inches of that part of the hose near the torch,
which is subjected to the hardest use shall be cut off at intervals and the hose reattached.
18. Leaks in the oxygen and acetylene hoses must be repaired immediately.
19. Should a hose catch fire, the valve at the bottle shall be closed. No attempt shall be made to
extinguish the fire by pinching the hose, as this will cause the fire to follow the hand.
20. Always treat compressed cylinders with respect.
K. CHERRY PICKER SAFETY
1. Only qualified persons shall be allowed to operate a cherry picker and other machinery of
this type.
2. Each person before operating a cherry picker shall become familiar with that particular brand
or type, and read the Operators Manual if one is available.
HSE MANUAL
3. Never allow any part of a cherry picker or its line or load to come within 15’ of any power
line.
4. Never assume that a power line is dead or not in use.
5. The load capacity of the cherry picker in use shall never be exceeded as specified by the
manufacturer.
6. While operating a cherry picker in soft or unstable ground, caution shall be used.
7. While the boom is operating from the side position, the cherry picker is more likely to
overturn.
8. The cherry picker and its related parts shall be checked on a regular basis for excessive wear
and defects.
9. The cherry picker is designed for only one operator in the cab. Riders are not allowed in the
cab with the operator.
10. Someone shall be designated as a signal person, to assist the operator during loading and
unloading procedures.
11. Never leave a cherry picker or any other machine running attended.
12. Always use common sense and good judgment while operating a cherry picker.
13. Always extend outriggers before operating.
L. CHAINSAW
Chainsaws are involved in about 30% of all wood accidents and shall be handled with caution.
1. Hard hats, safety-toed shoes and safety pants or chaps shall be worn by saw operators.
2. When carrying the saw any distance, carry it by the handle with motor stopped and guide bar
to the rear in such a manner that it may be thrown clear in case of stumble or fall.
3. Always start saw on the ground, not on your knee or in the air.
4. When moving from tree to tree, make sure your finger is not on the saw trigger in case you
fall.
HSE MANUAL
5. Adjust idling screw so chain stops when motor idles.
6. Let the motor cool off before refueling. Refuel only in a cleared area.
7. Refuel power saw only with an approved gooseneck gas can. Haul gasoline to and from the
job in a safety gas can.
8. To prevent static electricity spark, bend gooseneck of the can when refueling.
9. Wipe gasoline spills of motor.
10. Keep first aid kit and fire extinguisher handy.
11. A sharp cutting chain will prevent jamming and other acts that could cause an accident.
12. Always use extreme caution when operating a chainsaw.
M. ENGINES AND PUMPS
1. Engines shall be located in well-ventilated areas away from such production facilities as
flowing headers, separators, and oil storage tanks to prevent accumulations of explosive
vapors near the engine.
2. Proper guards shall be installed around engine clutches, belts, and open fly wheels. Guards
shall be placed around cranks and other hazardous moving equipment on pumping units.
These guards shall be in place at all times while the units are operating.
3. If guards are removed for repairs, they should be replaced before the engine or pump is
restarted.
4. Vertical plunger type pumps with ceramic plungers shall have small mesh, expanded metal
guards around the plungers to protect personnel from flying pieces of broken rods.
5. A dry chemical type fire extinguisher shall be located near or adjacent to the engine.
6. All gasoline engines shall be killed by a switch, instead of by choking.
7. All couplings between motors, engines steam turbines, and centrifugal pumps shall be
guarded.
8. If the fuel tank is an integral part of the engine or unit, the engine shall be killed before
initiating refueling procedures.
HSE MANUAL
9. Always make certain personnel and tools are clear of the engine an/or killed pump before
starting.
10. Only approved spark plug wrenches shall be used to remove spark plugs. The workman shall
stand to one side of the spark plug, as cylinder pressure may be sufficient to blow out the
spark plug and cause personal injury.
11. The clutch on an internal combustion engine must not be adjusted while the engine is
running.
12. Guards should be placed over open-type clutches. Employees must not stand in line with an
open-type clutch while it is in motion, as there is always the danger of breakage and flying
debris.
13. Exhaust manifolds will be wrapped with heat and fire resistant materials.
14. Whenever design parameters allow, engine skid frames will be equipped with top mounted
splash plates.
N. WATER SURVIVAL
1. Fear of the unknown reduces your ability to think and plan. If you know what to do in the
event of a disaster, no survival situation will be completely strange or frightening. Being
prepared will maximize survival opportunities.
The time to prepare for emergencies is before they happen. When you first report aboard a
vessel or platform:
 Locate the station bill and learn your emergency duties.

 Take a tour of all areas right away.
 Familiarize yourself with all passageways, and know where they lead.
 Locate all of the exits.
 Think of yourself trapped in any part of the vessel or platform, in the dark. Plan your
escape route.
 Locate your lifejackets.
 Review the emergency signals.
 Locate the life raft and lifeboats.
 Locate the fire stations.
 Know where the fire alarm controls are. Several station alarms shall be available in
strategic locations.
HSE MANUAL
Be enthusiastic and interested during any fire and evacuation drills. They will provide
valuable training. Report any emergency equipment not working properly to your
supervisor. Ask questions about any part of the drill you don’t understand.
DO NOT PANIC! THINK AND KEEP CALM! Remember your training. Panic only
makes the initial danger worse. You must react in a predictable way. Remember what you
were taught. Think positively. Say to yourself, “What can I do to survive and help others
survive?”
You may have enough time to collect additional items to help you survive the situation.
Bring supplies/clothing that will provide some benefit and leave things that will hinder your
survival chances.
2. Survival Capsules:
Survival capsules of many kinds and shapes are found on oilrig platforms. Survival capsules
have the same safety features as enclosed lifeboats. These features include fire retardant
construction, sprinkler systems, seat belts and a self-righting design.
The 50-person capsule is oval in shape. Smaller capsules are round. They have only one fall
wire and rottmer releasing hook located in the center of the capsule. The capsule must never
be towed by the releasing hook. The capsule shall only be towed utilizing the bow towing
bridle to prevent capsizing.
Immediately after personnel board for emergency evacuation, seat belts shall be fastened and
all doors, vents and hatch covers closed and secured. If this is done, the capsule will right
itself it if overturns in heavy seas. If the capsule does remain capsized, it can be righted by
an inflatable bag, installed on the top of the dome. The bag is designed to right the capsule
and is inflated by pulling a handle inside the capsule.
3. Falls from vessels or structures:
If you fall from a vessel or structure, observe the following procedures:
 Orient yourself in the water, and then move under the platform and away from any boats.
 Look for rescue equipment and listen for instructions.
 Let rescuers come to you. Avoid swimming long distances because survival may depend
on conservation of energy.
4. Water entry from any height:

HSE MANUAL
Abandonment of a platform or vessel by jumping into the water can be hazardous and should
only be considered if no other means of escape is possible. If you must jump, observe the
following basic procedures:
 Before jumping, get as close as possible to the water.

 Remove your safety hat and other necessary equipment.
 Put on and firmly secure your personal floatation device (PFD).
 Look to see that your targeted landing is clear of other personnel, protruding objects and
debris.
 Protect your mouth and nose. Place the palm of your hand directly over your mouth and
pinch the nose with thumb and finger.
 Secure your PFD by clamping your free arm across your chest and grasping the shoulder
strap of the PFD.
 DO NOT DIVE. Look directly at the horizon and stand straight. Take a deep breath.
Step off – “DO NOT JUMP”, keeping your body erect and your ankles crossed or your
legs together.
5. Unfavorable water conditions without a Personal Floatation Device:
Under certain emergency conditions, you may have to abandon a platform or vessel without a
PFD.
You must be familiar with swimming in unfavorable water conditions.
 When swimming in rough water, turn your back to the wind or waves. Keep your head
out of the water and use a breaststroke.
 When swimming in cold water, conserve your body heat by minimizing movement. This
may prevent immersion hypothermia.
6. Rescue actions for person overboard:
Person overboard procedures shall be posted. Personnel shall be familiar with these
procedures and shall be able to recognize a person overboard audio alarm.
 Keep an eye on the person overboard while someone else sounds the alarm.
 Drop a lifesaving device straight down to the person overboard. This device will help
mark the point of entry and can be used by the person overboard to stay afloat.
 If the device must be thrown, be sure it does not hit the person overboard.
 If you reach out towards a person overboard, be sure you stretch without losing your
balance.
7. Hypothermia:
HSE MANUAL
Hypothermia is the loss of body heat. Your normal body temperature is 98.60F. If your
temperature becomes lower than normal, you may experience hypothermia. Hypothermia
can occur either in or out of the water. If it happens out of the water, such as working outside
on deck, it is because you have not properly prepared for cold weather. Hypothermia usually
develops when the air temperature is between 300F and 500F. When such low temperatures
are combined with wind, the possibility of hypothermia taking place increases.
This happens because of wind-chill (refer to hypothermia in the First Aid section). If you are
immersed in cold water, hypothermia may begin to develop in as little as 10-15 minutes, or it
may take as much as several hours. It takes place because the human body in water
temperatures 700F and lower cannot generate enough heat to maintain normal body
temperature.
O. PERSONAL FLOTATION DEVICES (PFD)
1. Working life vests (Type V, Coast Guard approved, with reflective material on all floatation
cells) must be worn when there is a risk of entering the water unexpectedly. Situations in
which a working life vest is required to be worn include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Anytime a person is working for or with LABORDE MARINE, LLC, and the
individual is aboard a vessel while offshore or in port when working over the side or near
an opening in the bulwarks;
b. While using ladders, ramps, gangways, pilings, or fender works to gain access to or from
a barge;
c. On the boat main deck when underway;
d. In the boat skiff; a Type I must be worn
e. In emergency response team boats.
f. When fire and/or emergency drills are being conducted.
g. When working at any over water location that does not proved handrail or bulwark
protection on all sides.
2. There are only a few exceptions to LABORDE MARINE, LLC life vest rule. When a
vessel is in the shipyard in dry dock or moored for long-term shipyard maintenance, life vests
need not be worn during performance of maintenance work except if working over the side
over water or near an opening in the bulwarks.
a. Life jackets (Type 1) must be kept available for emergency situations. If an employee
must enter the water because of an emergency, a Type 1 personal floatation device must
be donned, time permitting. If circumstances do not allow the use of Type 1 PFD, carry a
life jacket, working life vest, ring buoy, or any other available floatation device when you
must enter the water.
b. Life jackets, work vests, and personal floatation devices (PFD’s) must be worn snug to
the body with reflective tape on all cells, and fastened or zippered completely.
HSE MANUAL
c. LABORDE MARINE, LLC employees are not permitted to enter the water during the
performance of normal work duties.
If an emergency occurs and an employee enters deep water to save a life, he must wear carry an
appropriate type of floatation device.
3. Life Jackets or Work Vest shall be FASTENED, snuggly fitted and in good condition.
4. Captains are to insure that all personnel follow PFD rules while boarding, riding or leaving
their vessels. Captains and boat skippers will inform the appropriate company supervisor of
any and all violations of the rules and regulations of this standard. Captains and boat
skippers will refuse to allow persons not adhering to this standard to board their vessel.
5. Company and contractor supervisors or designated persons in charge will be responsible for
having personnel under their supervision adhere to the rules and regulations of this standard.
6. Contractors are to supply their personnel with the appropriate PFD’s to be worn on our
vessels, docks, locations or equipment.
7. These guidelines apply to ALL OVER WATER company locations at ALL TIMES.
P. BOATS & BARGES
1. General
c. All personnel will board and egress to and from all vessels with the utmost care and
awareness of their surroundings.
d. All personnel will wear shoes or boots that have oil resistant non-slip soles. (No flip-
flop shoes will be worn on vessels at any time.)
e. When stepping to or from a vessel, watch for any materials that may be a slip or trip
hazard and may result in an unstable or unsafe transfer.
f. Make sure that the area of transfer has adequate lighting for the transfer.
g. Personnel will wear their life vest or work vest when transferring from any vessel to any
other vessel or dock.
h. Always wear your work vest while on the tow when going to and from the vessel and at
any other time you are exposed to falling overboard.
i. DO NOT wrestle on the boat or barges. Horseplay is strictly forbidden.
j. Sit down when riding in a flat boat and you must wear your Type I life vest while
riding.
HSE MANUAL
k. Do not run on the barges, jump from barge to barge, or jump over timberheads.
l. Make sure that all gangways on boats and barges are clear and swept clean. Keep cargo
cleaned off walkways on boats and barges. Clean up oil and grease spots on the deck.
In emergencies, sprinkle sand on any icy or slippery spots on the decks of boats and
barges.
m. Keep loose gear, wires, ropes, ratchets, etc., stowed neatly on the boat or barges.
n. When walking on the barges in tow, walk up the middle between the barges and not
along line deck of a barge.
o. DO NOT go on the tow alone at night. If absolutely necessary to do so, advice the pilot
before going.
p. Keep all hatch covers and pump-box covers dogged down tightly.
q. Avoid hanging and stowage of gear so that it obstructs walkways.
r. Keep alert when maneuvering barges in a lock; watch for holes between the barges.
s. Lifelines and guardrails should be kept taut and intact. Do not hang on lifelines around
boat – one may break.
t. DO NOT stand in a bight of a line at any time. DO NOT put hands in a bight of a line
at any time.
u. Stand clear when handling a line on a timberhead or capstan.
v. Stand clear of lines or wires when they have a strain on them. DO NOT straddle wires
when tightening ratchets.
w. “Watch the Bump” – get down on your hands and knees and hold onto a timberhead or
barge coaming. Pass the word, “Watch The Bump”.
x. Wear appropriate goggles when chipping, burning, grinding or scraping.
y. DO NOT jump into the river to “swim” a line ashore. Use the yawl. Swimming off the
boat or barges is prohibited.
z. DO NOT lean against the lock wall when standing on barges in a lock.
aa. Wear proper clothing, especially gloves and safety-toed shoes.
bb. Know the safe way to perform your job. When in doubt consult your Captain.
cc. When not in use take cranks and crank wheels out of the hand winches.
dd. Set your ladder securely. Watch for broken or cracked rungs.
ee. When working around machinery in operation, check your clothing for loose ends so
you won’t get caught.
ff. Carry the load on your outside shoulder when walking along the outside of a barge.
gg. DO NOT lean over the edge of the boat or barge to grab a line. Use a pike pole.
hh. DO NOT make a line fast to a head when there is a line there already. Clear the head.
ii. Place ratchets on the barges so they will tighten inboard.
jj. Observe “No Smoking” rules. You must not smoke: a) in bed; b) on the decks of
petroleum or inflammable cargo barges; c) in paint lockers; d) on oil docks.
kk. Have a safe place for all cutting utensils (galley knives, axes, etc.) and keep them in
place.
ll. Keep your hands and feet from between the barges in tow and from between tow knees
and the barge.
mm. Never work around the edge of the boat or barge with your back to the river.
HSE MANUAL
nn. DRINKING OR THE POSSESSION OF INTOXICANTS IS PROHIBITED.
oo. Familiarize yourself with all whistles, alarm and hand signals.
pp. Keep fingers from between timberheads and wires when throwing off face wires.
qq. POSSESSION OF FIREARMS ABOARD BOATS IS PROHIBITED.
rr. Keep alert – avoid situations where you are exposed to danger.
ss. Report faulty equipment, pumps and tools to your Captain.
tt. Always lift load properly; that is by bending your knees. If the load is too heavy, ask
for help.
uu. REPORT ALL INJURIES IMMEDIATELY.
vv. DO NOT walk on barge covers.
ww. Always step over – NOT on manhole covers.
xx. Report any missing manhole covers to your Captain.
yy. Replace missing manhole covers as soon as possible after pumping is completed.
zz. DO NOT go into a void tank for any reason on a Tank Barge.
aaa. FLIP FLOPS ARE NOT ALLOWD ON THE VESSEL.
bbb. Walkman radios and similar devices are prohibited.
2. Engine Room
a. General
1) Engines are to be inspected at least every hour.

2) Oil and water levels in all engines are to be checked at least every hour. A record
must be kept of what is added.
3) Gear oil is to be checked daily. A record must be kept of what is added.
4) Engine oil and filters are to be changed every one hundred hours (100) or as per
manufacturer recommendations.
5) The bilge is to be kept clean and pumped out.
6) Inspections will be made to check for any exhaust or oil leaks.
7) Any problem with the engines or engine room is to be reported to Captain
immediately.
b. Engine Room Checklist
1) Inspect all engines. (BEFORE EACH ENGINE IS STARTED.)

2) Check engine oil and water levels. A record is kept of what is added.
3) Keep floor plates and deck clear and clean at all times.
4) Check and change filters on a scheduled basis.
5) Change engine oil on a scheduled basis. (250-300 hrs.)
6) Keep bilge CLEAN and pumped out. (DO NOT PUMP CONTAMINATED BILGE
OVERBOARD.)
HSE MANUAL
7) Check for exhaust and oil leaks.
8) Check for any indications of leaking gaskets.
9) Report any problems to the supervisor or to the office immediately.
3. Galley Safety
a. Maintain good housekeeping at all times.

b. Keep the floor clean and free from all litter, debris and supplies.
c. Keep the floor dry. Clean up any spills to eliminate a slip hazard.
d. Make sure all fire extinguishers are accessible and in good working condition.
e. Keep all range hood filters clean and grease free.
f. Wear shoes in the galley. Flip-flops, slippers or sandals are not permitted.
g. Be careful when handling or working with hot grease.
h. Be especially careful when working with or handling galley knives. Pay particular
attention when washing dishes as knives may not be visible in the wash water.
i. Post all notices in the galley. These notices shall be read by personnel on a regular basis.
j. Shirts must be worn at all time in the Galley.
4. Weather
a. General
1) Check all emergency and life saving equipment for proper location and working
condition.
2) Secure all loose objects and lines.
3) Close and secure all hatches, doors, manholes, windows and portholes.
4) Make sure that all mooring lines are slackened to allow for the rise and fall of tides
and that all lines are adequate to handle the additional strain caused by rough weather.
5) Make sure that all sounding equipment is operational for rough weather, including
fog.
6) Check the anchor and anchor chain for emergency use.
7) Be prepared to seek shelter at the nearest safest point.
8) Maintain a constant weather watch and adhere to advisories.
9) Maintain communication with office personnel and keep them informed of your
situation at all times.
10) Follow your hurricane procedure as conditions warrant.
11) DO NOT operate in heavy fog. If fog bound, stop the vessel and notify the office
immediately. Maintain a radio watch and communications with vessels in area until
the fog lifts.
5. Distress Signals
HSE MANUAL
a. All vessels are to be equipped with a flare gun and three hand-held daytime flares with
orange smoke.
b. Flares are to be inspected on a regular basis.
c. All out of date or damaged flares are to be replaced immediately.
d. All emergency signals, horns and lights are to be maintained in good operating conditions
at all times.
e. All emergency distress procedures are to be reviewed with all personnel on a regular
basis.
6. Man Overboard Drill
a. A man overboard drill should be conducted periodically. Participation should include all
personnel.
b. The drill should be pre-planned with prior notice of the drill given to the crew.
c. Occasionally the drill should be conducted during hours of darkness.
d. The cry “MAN OVERBOARD” should be shouted out as soon as the man goes
overboard. A life ring should be thrown over the side, in the vicinity of the man
overboard, as soon as word has been passed.
e. A lookout(s) should be posted whose sole responsibility it is to watch the man overboard
and continually point toward him. A medically trained person should be at the scene to
provide first aid.
f. The person in charge should call the rescue team together at the rescue boat or other
designated location. The standby boat, if available, should be notified for assistance.
g. The entire crew should be mustered at a pre-designated location. A roll call will be
taken, the results of which should be passed on to the person in charge, so that the
identity of the man overboard may be determined.
h. At the completion of the drill, appropriate log entries should be made, including the time
it took to recover the man overboard.
i. A critique should be held with the rescue team and the crew to review the drill.
7. Rules of the Road
a. All personnel are to review and be familiar with guidelines found in the U.S. Coast Guard
Manual known as “THE RULES OF THE ROAD”.
b. These “Rules” are designated to assist personnel in vessel navigation. Also included is
the proper use of lights while under way and during vessel navigation.
Q. SKIFF USE AND OPERATION

HSE MANUAL
1. Responsibility
a. The Captain is responsible for ensuring that the duties of this procedure are performed.
b. The wheelman on watch is responsible for supervising or performing the duties required
by this procedure.
2. Procedures
a. Skiffs are provided for use on LABORDE MARINE, LLC business only. Company
business includes, but is not limited to, the following:
1) Crew changes;
2) Grocery and supply pickup;
3) Emergencies; and,
4) Picking up shore representatives or other visitors with permission to be aboard the
vessel.
b. Except for emergencies, skiffs should be used in calm and/or protected waters only.
c. The wheelman on watch should ensure that the rated capacity and/or weight limit of the
skiff is not exceeded.
d. Personnel riding in or operating the skiff must wear a Type I life jacket.
e. Do not stand in the skiff.
f. When using an outboard motor with the skiff, ensure that the motor is securely fastened
to the boat and that the fuel tank has sufficient fuel for the expected duration of the trip.
g. Immediately remove the skiff from the water and return it to the skiff rack when the trip
is complete.
h. Personal use of the skiff is prohibited.
R. HYDROGEN SULFIDE (H2S)
1. H2S is a colorless, flammable and extremely toxic gas. In low concentrations, it first smells
like rotten eggs. Do not rely on your sense of smell, as H2S in higher concentrations rapidly
paralyzes the sense of smell.
HSE MANUAL
2. When mixing with air in concentrations of 5% to 45%, H2S becomes highly explosive and
only requires an ignition source of 5000F. Welding machines, lighters, cigarettes, exhaust
manifolds, and electric motors may serve as an ignition source.
3. All personnel who are potentially exposed to H2S must be trained and H2S certified. H2S
properties, dangers, emergency and first aid procedures, protective equipment, and respirator
use and care should be reviewed before entering the work area.
4. When an area has been tested and proven to contain H2S, air socks and/or signs shall be
utilized. Emergency telephone numbers will be posted and H2S detection equipment
installed.
5. Respirator equipment should be worn in areas with concentrations of H2S that exceed 10ppm
Threshold Limit Value (TLV).
6. Beards and/or long hair shall not be worn in H2S atmospheres as they may prevent a proper
face seal when using the respirator mask.
7. If H2S is present or suspected in Drilling or Well Servicing Operations:
 Review and comply with all applicable laws and regulations.

 Review safety procedures and use of respirator equipment with all personnel.
 Inspect respirator equipment for integrity and proper operation.
 Use H2S monitors if toxic concentrations are suspected.
 Have flare line connections available for downwind flaring. This may necessitate more
than one connection to allow for wind shifts.
 Permanent H2S flares shall have continuous pilots as well as automatic igniters.
S. SWING ROPE TRANSFERS
1. On offshore platforms, swing rope transfer is acceptable when done in a safe manner.
HSE MANUAL
2. Regardless of the method of transfer, every person must wear an approved life jacket or work
vest at all times while transferring between platforms and boats.
3. Properly installed swing ropes shall be attached from the top of platform.
4. Knots, to prevent hands slipping, should not be tied in the rope lower than dolphin platform
level. The knots can get caught in the dolphin or tires on boats and prevent free swinging on
or off boats.
5. A deckhand should be available to assist personnel in swing rope transfers (to or from the
boat).
6. The boat must be positioned properly before swinging. Under certain conditions, the boat
captain will direct personnel when and where to get off or on the vessel.
7. Transfer by rope (boat to platform) should be made at the peak of the vessel’s rise – never
while the vessel is falling away.
8. Platform to boat transfers should be made when the boat is approaching its highest point.
9. Take time to study the motion of the vessel.
10. Swing forward! Don’t jump upward.
11. Do not crowd one another on the vessel deck or on platform landing. Only swing if the
landing area is clear of any obstructions.
12. Hold onto the swing rope high enough up its length to insure clearing the boat landing.
Always keep feet and legs clear for proper landing and never let the swing rope get between
your legs.
13. In rough seas, if employee considers it too dangerous to utilize the swing rope, he should not
be required to try.
14. Boarding a platform across a second boat or barge is allowed in good weather, provided
direct permission is obtained from supervisory personnel. If optimum weather/sea conditions
do not exist, wait until the other vessel moves or conditions improve.
HSE MANUAL
T. PERSONNEL NET TRANSFERS
1. Personnel nets may be used to transfer personnel when transfer by rope is impractical due to
high, rough seas. Such nets shall be used only with the approval of a LABORDE MARINE,
LLC supervisor.
2. The deck of the vessel must be cleared of materials to insure sufficient room to land the net.
3. When transferring by personnel net, it is recommended that a deckhand or other competent

person be available to assist in loading, instruct new personnel, and assist in directing the
crane signalman when necessary.
4. Only personnel who will ride the net on the next trip and boat personnel should be allowed
on the vessel deck during transfer operations.
5. The number of persons allowed to ride the personnel net at one time shall not exceed the
manufacturer’s recommendations.
6. Occupants of a personnel net should: (1) stand on the outer rim of the net; (2) grasp the
netting with both hands; (3) face inward; and (4) be positioned in the openings between
webbing.
7. Before the lift is made, personnel in the basket should stand with one foot on the basket ring
and the other on the deck. Until the lift begins, weight should be kept on the foot positioned
on the deck, not on the basket ring.
8. Throughout the lift, keep your body’s center of gravity over your feet. Don’t lean back and
out of the basket.
9. When preparing to touch down, personnel should slightly bend their knees to absorb any
shock from the landing.
10. When the basket touches down, quickly step off and get out of the way. Move quickly but
carefully to collect any gear stowed in the net.
11. Only a limited amount of light luggage will be permitted inside the net when personnel are
being transferred.
HSE MANUAL
12. A personnel net should never be used as a cargo basket.
13. Personnel should not get off the personnel net until it has settled on the boat or platform
deck.
HSE MANUAL
Contractor 0 Sept. 1, 2011 9.0
Program Safety MRC Page 1 of 5
CONTRACTOR SAFETY PROGRAM
A. OBJECTIVE
Provide a safe working environment for LABORDE MARINE, LLC contractors. This manual
is intended to provide rules, regulations, standards and information to assist the contractor. This
program is intended to be a guide for the contractor to establish safety guidelines and prevent
work-related injuries or losses to both the contractor and/or LABORDE MARINE, LLC
employees.
B. SCOPE
This policy applies to all contractors, subcontractors, and vendors who provide services for
LABORDE MARINE, LLC.
C. INTRODUCTION
1. LABORDE MARINE, LLC is concerned for the health and safety of contractor’s
employees and seeks to provide a work environment consistent with those concerns.
2. Subcontractors must be pre-qualified prior to being awarded work. Pre-qualification will be

determined by reviewing safety programs, safety training documents, and safety statistics.
PEC SSQ, ISN or other industry standard methods may be used to evaluate these programs
prior to signing of a contract. The subcontractor must have a TRIR of 2.0 or below and any
significant HSE gaps will be reviewed and appropriate action will take place prior to the
commencement of work.
3. Subcontractors are required to attend any and all pre-job meetings, kick-off meetings, and
safety orientations required by the specific project.
4. Contractors working for LABORDE MARINE, LLC in any capacity must follow safety
and loss prevention standards (practices) that meet LABORDE MARINE, LLC minimum
safety standards. These policies should not only attempt to protect contract personnel, but
also LABORDE MARINE, LLC personnel and assets.
HSE MANUAL
5. Contractors working for LABORDE MARINE, LLC should have an active safety program
that includes (but is not limited to) planned safety meetings, formal training programs,
accident investigation and accident reporting. Sub-contractors will be required to participate
in any and all tailgate safety meetings, job safety analysis or hazard assessments, and on the
job safety inspections. Although the contractor is not required to have an employee safety
incentive program, it is highly recommended.
6. The contractor is required to follow all applicable Federal, State, and LABORDE MARINE,
LLC laws, regulations, and policies.
7. LABORDE MARINE, LLC Manual for Safety and Loss Prevention is an available
reference for the contractor to use.
D. GENERAL SAFETY RULES
The following safe practices must be followed by each LABORDE MARINE, LLC contractor
whether on LABORDE MARINE, LLC yard, enroute to location or on locations.
1. The use, possession, sale or transportation of narcotics, illegal drugs, controlled substances,
drug paraphernalia, firearms, or alcohol, or being impaired by such substances while on
LABORDE MARINE, LLC property is absolutely prohibited.
LABORDE MARINE, LLC property includes any facility where LABORDE MARINE,
LLC maintains a base of operations. This includes boats, barges, trucks, cars, and anything
owned or leased by LABORDE MARINE, LLC and being utilized for LABORDE
MARINE, LLC business. This policy also includes any and all sited belonging to
LABORDE MARINE, LLC clients or potential clients.
Reporting to LABORDE MARINE, LLC facilities or assets under the influence or

controlled substances is prohibited. In addition, driving a vehicle within 4 hours of
consuming alcohol or having a blood alcohol content of 0.04% or greater is considered
driving under the influence.
LABORDE MARINE, LLC reserves the right to have authorized personnel conduct
searches or inspections of any contractor personnel on either LABORDE MARINE, LLC or
client property to determine if any individual is in violation of LABORDE MARINE, LLC
policy concerning the use, possession or transportation of unauthorized items. LABORDE
MARINE, LLC also reserves the right to conduct drug and alcohol tests on either a random,
planned or regular basis.
HSE MANUAL
Cooperation with LABORDE MARINE, LLC Contraband policy is mandatory. Failure to

allow searches or tests will result in immediate removal from LABORDE MARINE, LLC
or client premises. People found in violation of the above policy will be immediately
removed from LABORDE MARINE, LLC or client locations and if warranted, reported to
the appropriate authorities.
2. Contract personnel must wear hardhat, steel toe shoes, safety glasses and any other required
personal protective equipment while on LABORDE MARINE, LLC facilities or assets.
3. Finger rings must not be worn by contract personnel.
4. Horseplay is expressly prohibited on LABORDE MARINE, LLC and/or client premises.
5. LABORDE MARINE, LLC strives to provide its employees with a smoke free
environment. Contractor’s personnel will use designated smoking areas and ensure the
designated area is safely outside the work area. At the well site, contractor’s personnel will
only use designated smoking areas as defined by the customer and/or LABORDE
MARINE, LLC policy.
6. Contractor personnel must obey all safety or warning signs posted by LABORDE
MARINE, LLC or its customer(s).
7. All contractors are responsible for ensuring their equipment is in proper working condition.
The use of “handmade” or worn-out tools is prohibited. Power hand tools and extension
cords must have proper grounding.
8. Safe Work Permits are required for welding, cutting, working in a vessel, and electrical work.
9. Certification is required for operation of an overhead crane. Contractor personnel will

request assistance from LABORDE MARINE, LLC personnel when overhead cranes,
cherry picker and/or forklift operation is required to complete work assignments.
10. Backing of contractor vehicles should be kept to a minimum. If possible, park where the first
move is forward. If backing is essential, USE A LAND GUIDE!
HSE MANUAL
11. Beware of low hanging utility lines in your work area. Do not attempt to raise or move a
utility line. Any movement of lines will be done by the appropriate utility company or a
certified electrician.
12. All contract personnel at the well site must be H2S certified where required by law and/or
where warranted by well conditions.
13. All contract personnel on an H2S well site must meet all LABORDE MARINE, LLC hair
and facial guidelines.
14. Upon arrival at a well site, contract personnel must be aware of any H2S warning signs and
will consult with LABORDE MARINE, LLC supervisor to determine the status of any H2S
hazards and required safety precautions.
15. All contractors working for LABORDE MARINE, LLC must fully comply with the
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Hazard Communication Standard.
Contractors will provide Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for any chemicals/products
being utilized and/or delivered to LABORDE MARINE, LLC facilities and assets.
16. Contractor personnel must be knowledgeable of and responsible for the initiation of
emergency response procedures in regard to as spill of any quantity of hazardous material
while being used or transported by contractor personnel.
17. The maximum speed limit at any LABORDE MARINE, LLC facility is 5 mph.
18. No contractor will begin work prior to reporting to the LABORDE MARINE, LLC person
in charge of the job site, to authorize the commencement of the work.
E. CONTRACTOR TERMS AND CONDITIONS
In the event a contractor fails to correct any safety and/or health violation, LABORDE
MARINE, LLC personnel may immediately suspend all operations. In addition to any other
rights LABORDE MARINE, LLC might have, and not withstanding any other contractual
provisions existing between both parties, LABORDE MARINE, LLC may at its sole discretion
take any one or more of the following actions it determines appropriate.
1. Suspend operations or correct any violation and either charge contractor for expenses
incurred, or offset such cost against any sums owed or to be owed to contractor for services
rendered.
HSE MANUAL
2. Require removal from LABORDE MARINE, LLC property contractor’s employees,

materials or equipment deemed hazardous, dangerous or in non-compliance with OSHA
and/or LABORDE MARINE, LLC regulations, guidelines, or policies.
3. Suspend operations until contractor has corrected any violation and/or hazard.
4. In the event of repeated non-compliance by contractor, terminate the contract, dismiss

contractor from the work site, and complete the work itself or employ other contractors to
complete the work. In the event of contract termination and equitable adjustment to the price
of such contract will be made by LABORDE MARINE, LLC based on the value of work
performed prior to termination less any additional expense incurred by LABORDE
MARINE, LLC to complete the work.
F. POST-JOB REVIEWS
1. Upon completion of the job, the sub-contractors performance will be reviewed. Items to be
reviewed will include, but are not limited to, safety performance, accident rate, participation
in HSE meetings and programs, quality of work, etc. If the performance review reveals
problems, the subcontractor will be removed from the pre-qualified list until the problems are
corrected.
G. ACKNOWLEDGMENT STATEMENT
The Contractor’s duly authorized representative will sign and return the “Acknowledgement
Statement” signifying the contractor has read, understands and agrees to abide by LABORDE
MARINE, LLC Contractor Safety and Health Policy before commencing operations.
HSE MANUAL
Vehicle 0 Sept. 1, 2011 10.0
Policy Prepared By: Approved By: Page:
VEHICLE POLICY
It is the policy of LABORDE MARINE, LLC to operate all LABORDE MARINE, LLC
equipment in a safe manner while complying with all applicable Federal, State, and Parish
regulations governing such use. Special emphasis will be placed on the operation of rolling stock
due to the serous potential exposure to personal injury and property damage. With this in mind,
LABORDE MARINE, LLC has established the following vehicle policies. Failure to comply with
all vehicle policies will be cause for disciplinary action up to and including termination.
A. VEHICLE APPEARANCE
1. It is the policy of LABORDE MARINE, LLC that the only decals, stickers and/or signs
which may be displayed on a company vehicle are:
a) Those required by State and/or Federal law. These include safety inspection stickers,
ICC permit decals, tax decals, etc.
b) Those specifically required by LABORDE MARINE, LLC for identification or safety
purposes. These include vehicle numbers, company logo decals, etc.
c) Those authorized in writing by LABORDE MARINE, LLC management.
2. All LABORDE MARINE, LLC vehicles having decal installed trademarks and colors must
have these decals removed prior to sale of the vehicle. Under no circumstances will any
LABORDE MARINE, LLC vehicle be sold without first removing all Company trademarks
from the exterior and interior of the vehicle.
B. VEHICLE/DRIVER REQUIREMENTS
1. Company vehicles will be driven by LABORDE MARINE, LLC personnel only.
2. The employee must have reached a minimum age of 21 years.
3. The employee must have a valid, current, driver’s license. Employees whose license has
been suspended or revoked by the state will report the suspension to their immediate
supervisor within one business day. Employees with a suspended license are not allowed to
drive LABORDE MARINE, LLC vehicles.
HSE MANUAL
Vehicle 0 Sept. 1, 2011 10.0
4. A pre-employment MVR (Motor Vehicle Record) check is mandatory for personnel required
to drive company vehicles. The MVR check will be obtained and evaluated during the
employment process. Annual MVR checks will be run on each employee and filed in the
employee’s personnel files (DOT Driver’s file).
5. Operators of LABORDE MARINE, LLC vehicles will be rested at all times and in proper
physical condition (not seriously ill, intoxicated, under the influence of drugs or prescribed
medication which may impair motor skills needed to safely operate a vehicle). If any of
these conditions exist, the employee should call his immediate supervisor or seek other
means of transportation.
6. Legal speed limits will not be exceeded. The speed of the vehicle will be adjusted according
to the prevailing weather and road conditions. The use of radar detecting equipment in
LABORDE MARINE, LLC vehicles is prohibited.
7. Vehicles will be maintained in safe operating condition at all times. It is the driver’s
responsibility to immediately report any unsafe conditions or faulty equipment to his
immediate supervisor. Pre-trip inspections, including but not limited to, checking tires,
windshields, mirrors, lights, turn signals and brakes, should be performed before operating
the vehicle.
8. Check all clearances, including those in front of, on both sides of and to the rear of the
vehicle, before moving the vehicle.
9. Picking up hitchhikers or other personnel not directly employed by LABORDE MARINE,

LLC is prohibited. No more than 3 persons may ride in the cab of a truck unless the cab is
designed for, and has seat belts for, more passengers (crew cabs, etc.)
10. Any vehicular accident involving personal injury and/or property damage (company, private,
public) shall be reported to LABORDE MARINE, LLC management immediately.
11. Vehicle accidents will require mandatory drug testing.
12. All company vehicles are equipped with seat belts to protect all occupants. SEAT BELTS
WILL BE WORN WHENEVER THE VEHICLE IS IN MOTION.
13. No LABORDE MARINE, LLC vehicles will be used to push, tow, or otherwise move a
non-LABORDE MARINE, LLC vehicle.
HSE MANUAL
Vehicle 0 Sept. 1, 2011 10.0
14. LABORDE MARINE, LLC vehicles shall not be left unattended unless the engine is off
and the vehicle has been safely parked/secured.
15. Any load extending beyond the normal width or length of the vehicle shall be appropriately
marked with warning signs or flags. No load shall be carried which completely obscures the
driver’s vision in any direction.
16. Grounding shall be assured on all liquid vacuum and pneumatic trucks before any material is
transferred. No material with a flash point below 140 degrees Fahrenheit shall be moved
with a pneumatic truck.
17. Vehicle engines shall not be started or allowed to run while refueling or while exposed to
potentially flammable vapors.
18. Drivers are responsible for storing equipment, tools and other materials in an orderly fashion
on or in the vehicle. Loads shall be secured to prevent shifting or falling while being
transported.
19. LABORDE MARINE, LLC drivers of DOT regulated vehicles must comply with all
applicable DOT regulations, including maintaining driver’s logs.
20. Unauthorized personal use of LABORDE MARINE, LLC vehicles is prohibited.

LABORDE MARINE MANGAMENT, LLC vehicles are provided to assist the employee
in fulfillment of his job responsibilities.
21. Drivers shall proceed to and from their assigned job using major streets, roads and highways.
Extreme caution with full consideration of road and weather conditions shall be exercised
when the job assignment requires use of private or temporary access roads.
22. The driver of any LABORDE MARINE, LLC vehicle is prohibited from using a cell phone
except when the vehicle is parked or when a hands free device is in use.
C. MAINTENANCE
It is the responsibility of the assigned driver and management to ensure the vehicle is properly
maintained. All company vehicles will be treated with a high degree of respect and care.
HSE MANUAL
Vehicle 0 Sept. 1, 2011 10.0
LABORDE MARINE, LLC vehicles will be driven with courtesy and thoughtfulness.
Employee responsibilities include:
1. No vehicle shall be operated when mechanical defects are known or suspected.
2. No vehicle shall be driven unless a valid inspection sticker, vehicle registration sticker and
license tags are appropriately displayed.
3. Each operator/driver has been properly instructed in the safe operation of the vehicle.
4. The vehicles safety devices are operative and free of tampering.
5. The speedometer is operative.
6. All vehicles will be included in a periodic inspection/maintenance schedule.
D. CELL PHONE USE POLICY
These tips are meant to protect you, your family and everyone else on the road. Cell phones are
wonderful tools, when used safely.
1. Do not use a cell phone while driving unless a hands free device is in use. Stay focused on
driving.
2. Use only when parked or have a passenger make the call.
3. Never dial your phone while driving.
4. Use hands free features of a cell phone. (remote microphone)
5. Never take notes or look up phone numbers while driving.
6. If your cell phone rings while driving, let your voicemail take the call, then check your
message later when you are parked.
7. Safely pull into a parking lot or on the side of the road to use a cell phone.
HSE MANUAL
Vehicle 0 Sept. 1, 2011 10.0
8. Never fill up a vehicle using a cell phone. Cell phone usage during fueling may cause
explosions.
HSE MANUAL
Helicopter 0 Sept. 1, 2011 11.0
HELICOPTER SAFETY
A. BAGGAGE LOADING AND UNLOADING
Cargo should be loaded and unloaded carefully and not thrown, dropped, or jammed in the cabin.
Hazardous cargo may only be loaded in accordance with regulations. Your pilot will advise you
how he wants the weight distributed. Make sure your pilot knows the true weight of the cargo.
Do not guess. When using cargo locker, ensure you have the correct door and that it is properly
closed again with nothing hanging out. Advise the pilot what weight you have put in there. If
the cargo is heavy; check with the pilot first.
B. CARGO LOADING CHECKLIST
 Get the pilot’s approval before loading or unloading any baggage or cargo from the
helicopter.
 Give the pilot your exact weight and the weight of each piece of baggage or cargo.
 Load and secure baggage or cargo according to the pilot’s instruction.
 Never approach the helicopter with any object over four feet in length, especially while the
blades are turning. Objects over 4’ must be carried parallel to the ground.
 Never lift any object above your head while the rotor blades are turning.
 Never throw anything around or from helicopter.
C. SEAT BELTS
A fastened seat belt is an important part of the safety equipment used to provide a safe flight for
all personnel. Fasten the seat belt across the lap, and then adjust to a comfortable tightness. If
the shoulder harness is available, the pilot should instruct you as to its proper use and how to
make the adjustments.
HSE MANUAL
Rules:
 Seat belts are to be worn at all times.
 Make yourself familiar with the buckling mechanism.
 Never unfasten the seat belt while the helicopter is in-flight.
 Keep seat belts fastened until the pilot signals it is safe to disembark.
D. LIFE VESTS
On all over-water flights, it is required that all personnel on board the aircraft wear inflatable life
vests. These inflatable vests are to be inflated outside the aircraft only. Put on the inflatable
vest; pull down on the waist straps firmly around the abdomen. Know your egress points before
taking off and how to open the doors.
OUTSIDE the AIRCRAFT
When you get outside the aircraft, inflate the vest by pulling down on the two lanyards.
If more air is needed in the vest after inflation, this is done by simply blowing into one or both of
the oral tubes provided.
E. EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
All helicopters have an emergency kit containing signaling equipment. The pilot will brief you
on its use, should it become necessary.
F. LIFE RAFTS
Depending on the type of helicopter and the area of flight, there may be one or more life rafts
onboard the aircraft. The rafts are inflated by a CO2 cartridge when you pull the operating
handle. Never inflate a raft until it is outside the cabin of the helicopter.
HSE MANUAL
G. SMOKING
Smoking is not permitted at anytime while on board the helicopter or anywhere around the
helicopter during takeoffs, landing, and refueling.
H. WATER SURVIVAL FOR HELICOPTER DITCHING
All helicopters contain a basic assortment of emergency equipment. This equipment is designed
to be lightweight, compact, and provide easy access should the need arise for its use. You as a
passenger should become familiar with its location and use should the pilot instruct you to do so.
Remember always wait for the pilot’s instruction before using any emergency equipment.
I. EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT LIST
 Life Jacket
 Life Raft
 Fire Extinguishers
 Survival Kit
 First Aid Kit
J. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
All aircraft have a hand held fire extinguisher. The pilot is trained in their use and will advise all
personnel on board the aircraft of their use and if appropriate to discharge.
K. FLOATATION GEAR
All helicopters that operate over water are equipped with floatation gear, which can keep a fully
loaded helicopter afloat even in heavy seas.
HSE MANUAL
Caution:
 Do not step on pop-out floats. In case of an emergency landing, remain in your seat (make
sure that the vest remains un-inflated) until the pilot gives instruction to leave the aircraft.
L. DOORS & WINDOWS
The windows and doors are vital to a safe operation in normal or emergency use. The pilot will
brief you on normal and emergency use of doors and/or windows. It is important to operate them
correctly to avoid costly damage. (Always review the briefing card found in seat pockets.)
Close doors firmly, but do not slam. The door handle locks the door in the closed position.
Do not throw anything out of the windows.
REMEMBER that loose items such as hard hats, sheet metal, plywood, mud sacks, and plastic
sheeting are all potential hazards when caught up in the helicopters rotor wash.
When approaching or departing with long items (over 4’), hold them horizontal (flat at or below
the waist, never carry item vertical or upright.)
If working in uneven surfaces, such as slopes or hills, always approach and depart the helicopter
from the down slope side.
DANGER: Stay clear of tail rotor blades at all times.
M. BOARDING AND DEPARTING
A helicopter is normally very safe, but must be approached with caution. Those areas that
present a hazard should be avoided at all times.
Always approach and depart within the pilot’s normal field of vision. Never walk behind the
helicopter toward the tail rotor and never, under any circumstances, get into the habit of ducking
HSE MANUAL
under the tail boom. REMEMBER if you can see the pilot, then he can see you. If you are near
the rear of the cabin section, you are in a potentially dangerous area. ALWAYS observe the
plane of the main rotor blades while they are turning. Keep well under them. At times, the main
rotor blades on some helicopters may dip down below the six-foot level.
ROTORS CAN KILL
Loose objects on/or around heliports are dangerous objects. Rotor wash can pick up objects and
send them with sufficient force to cause damage to equipment and injury to personnel.
Passengers shall ensure that all personal gear (caps, hats, gloves, etc.) in the vicinity of the
helicopter operations is properly stowed inside a bag or container. Hard hats and boots may be
securely strapped to the exterior of a bag or container.
Personnel wearing hard hats on or around the heliport area should have chinstraps on tight
enough to keep the hard hat in place. If chinstraps are not used, then hold the hard hat in your
hand when around the heliport or when the helicopters are approaching or departing.
N. HELICOPTER OPERATIONS
1. Never board, depart or approach aircraft until signaled to do so.
2. Always approach helicopters from the front to avoid being struck by the tail rotor.
3. On fixed wing aircraft, always remain to the rear of the wing struts until the propeller(s)
stop(s).
4. No running to or from the aircraft is allowed, nor is any type of horseplay.
5. Particular attention shall be given to carried objects around helicopters, taking care that they
are not drawn or put into the path of moving rotor blade(s). All items over 4’ must be carried
horizontally.
6. Life vests are required to be worn in helicopters over water.
7. Smoking is not permitted in helicopters.

HSE MANUAL
8. Passengers must be escorted by a competent person at all times while on the helideck.
Competent persons include a member of flight crew, HLO, or a qualified platform escort.
9. Use of cell phones during flight is not permitted and cell phones must be turned off and
stowed during flight.
HSE MANUAL
Sexual 0 Sept. 1, 2011 12.0
Harassment Prepared By: Approved By: Page:
SEXUAL & OTHER TYPES OF HARASSMENT
LABORDE MARINE, LL has established a zero-tolerance standard for any type of harassment.
As an equal opportunity employer, LABORDE MARINE, LLC is committed to providing all of its
employees with a workplace that is free of harassment. This includes sexual harassment as well as
verbal, physical, or psychological harassment due to race, color, religion, sex, national origin,
disability, age or any other protected characteristic under state or federal law.
LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall follow all applicable state and federal (Equal Employment
Opportunity Commission) laws in prohibiting sexual harassment or harassment of any type, in our
workplace and while performing any and all work related duties. LABORDE MARINE, LLC
defines its workplace as not being limited to a LABORDE MARINE, LLC facility, and includes all
company functions (on- and off-site), business travel, vendor locations, customer locations, and any
other location where LABORDE MARINE, LLC business is conducted.
This policy applies to all LABORDE MARINE, LLC employees and all non-employees with
whom a LABORDE MARINE, LLC employee may come into contact with during the daily
performance of his/her job, including:
 Customers,
 Visitors,
 Suppliers,
 Vendors,
 Contractors,
 Temporary employees, and/or
 Other individuals
It is further understood that any of these individuals may be a victim or a violator under this
policy.
HSE MANUAL
Sexual 0 Sept. 1, 2011 12.0
A. SEXUAL & OTHER TYPES OF HARASSMENT PROCEDURES
1. LABORDE MARINE, LLC sexual and other harassment procedures have been developed
to achieve several goals. They include:
a. To clearly define sexual and other types of harassment.

b. To ensure all LABORDE MARINE, LLC employees are trained and provided periodic
retraining on sexual and other types of harassment issues.
c. To make sure all LABORDE MARINE, LLC employees understand that LABORDE
MARINE, LLC will not tolerate any sexual or other forms of harassment.
d. To make sure all LABORDE MARINE, LLC employees understand that violators of
this policy may be subject to disciplinary action, up to and including termination of
employment.
e. To ensure employees understand they will not be subject to retaliation or discipline for
reporting or complaining any type of harassment.
B. DEFINITION OF HARASSMENT
1. LABORDE MARINE, LLC defines harassment as a single incident or a pattern of behavior

which entails verbal, physical, or psychological harassment/abuse of any nature which:
a. Has the purpose or effect of creating an intimidating, hostile, or offensive work

environment.
b. Has the purpose or effect of unreasonably interfering with an individual’s work
performance.
c. Adversely affects an individual’s employment or advancement opportunities.
C. DEFINITION OF SEXUAL HARASSMENT
1. According to the EEOC’s guidelines, sexual harassment is a form of discrimination

prohibited by Title VII of the Civil Rights Act. It can include several forms, including
unwelcome sexual advances, requests for sexual favors, and other verbal or physical conduct
of a sexual nature (including same-sex harassment) when:
a. Submission to such conduct is made either explicitly or implicitly a term or condition of

an individual’s employment.
b. Submission to or rejection of such conduct by an individual is used as either the basis for,
or a factor in, an employment decision affecting such individual.
HSE MANUAL
Sexual 0 Sept. 1, 2011 12.0
c. Such conduct has the purpose or effect of unreasonably interfering with an individual’s
work performance or creating an intimidating hostile, or offensive working environment.
D. CONDUCT AND BEHAVIOR WHICH MAY BE CONSIDERED SEXUAL

HARASSMENT
1. LABORDE MARINE, LLC expects each employee to exercise sound personal judgment
concerning the possible effects on others of his/her actions – specifically, but not limited to,
personal behavior and language. Inappropriate, unacceptable, or offensive behavior and
language that could be considered sexual harassment may include:
a. Unwelcome or unwanted sexual advances. This means patting, pinching, hugging,

cornering, kissing, fondling, brushing up against, or any other similar physical contact
considered unacceptable by another individual.
b. Requests or demands for sexual favors. This includes subtle or blatant expectations,
pressures, or requests for any type of sexual favor accompanied by an implied or stated
promise of preferential treatment or negative consequence concerning one’s employment
status or advancement opportunity.
c. Verbal abuse (even if intended as kidding) that is of a sexual nature and considered
unacceptable or offensive by another individual. This includes graphic comments about
an individual’s body or appearance, sexually degrading words to describe an individual,
or telling sexually graphic jokes or stories that may be offensive to others.
d. Engaging in unwanted sexually oriented conduct with someone that interferes with
his/her work activities or performance.
e. Creating a hostile, offensive, or intimidating work environment. This includes the
display in the workplace of sexually suggestive objects, materials, or pictures.
E. CONDUCT AND BEHAVIOR WHICH MAY NOT BE CONSIDERED SEXUAL

HARASSMENT
1. Normal, courteous, mutually respectful, non-coercive conversations and interactions between

employees, customers, visitors, suppliers, vendors, contractors, temporary employees, and/or
other individuals that are acceptable to both parties may not be considered sexual harassment.
Isolated comments of a sexual nature, while possibly objectionable, are not necessarily
sexual harassment.
Furthermore, as a general rule, conduct between consenting parties, or actions arising out of
current personal or social relationships where there is no coercion involved, may not be
viewed as sexual harassment.
HSE MANUAL
Sexual 0 Sept. 1, 2011 12.0
F. CONDUCT AND BEHAVIOR WHICH MAY BE CONSIDERED HARASSMENT
1. LABORDE MARINE, LLC is committed to creating an environment that is free of all

forms of harassment – both verbal and nonverbal. Language and personal behavior that
could be considered harassment (other than sexual) may include:
a. Verbal Harassment
 Telling offensive (ethnic or religious) jokes, taunting, or mimicking others.

 Making disparaging or derogatory comments or remarks that perpetuate stereotypes
about a protected individual or group.
 Directing denigrating slurs, epithets, insults or comments towards a protected
individual or group.
 Making verbal threats of physical violence, intimidating other employees, or making
harassing telephone calls.
b. Nonverbal Harassment
 Displaying offensive, derogatory, inappropriate, or other graphic materials in

common areas.
 Segregating or discriminating against an employee or coworker.
 Physically assaulting, abusing or threatening specific employees or coworkers.
G. COMPLAINT REPORTING
1. Any LABORDE MARINE, LLC employee believing he/she has been the victim of sexual
or other harassment should promptly report the complaint/incident or alleged discrimination
without fear of retaliation. The complaint should be reported within 48 hours. The report
should be made to:
 The employee’s immediate supervisor

 Manager, if the complaint involves the employee’s immediate supervisor.
 Any management individual with whom the employee feels comfortable.
H. INVESTIGATION PROCEDURES
HSE MANUAL
Sexual 0 Sept. 1, 2011 12.0
1. All complaints will be promptly and thoroughly investigated by the HSE Director, who will
conduct a fair and impartial investigation.
2. The investigator shall discuss the complaint with both parties, and shall question all
employees who may have knowledge of either the actual incident or similar situations. The
complaint, investigative steps and findings, and disposition shall be documented.
3. Complaints shall remain confidential except where circumstances arise in which others may
have a need to know.
4. When the investigation is complete, results of the investigation and any recommended
corrective or disciplinary action shall be communicated to the individual who filed the
complaint.
5. If the investigation reveals that an employee has engaged in harassment, that individual shall
be subject to disciplinary action up to and including termination.
6. An employee who is dissatisfied with the resolution of a complaint should discuss the matter
with the HSE Director, who will review the matter and determine whether additional action
is justified or warranted.
I. COMPLAINTS OF HARASSMENT AGAINST NON-EMPLOYEES
1. Any LABORDE MARINE, LLC employee who feels that he/she has been harassed by a
non-employee while performing normal work-related duties or during a normal workday, or
at a LABORDE MARINE, LLC function, the employee should report the incident to the
attention of his/her immediate supervisor, or other LABORDE MARINE, LLC personnel as
soon as possible. LABORDE MARINE, LLC management personnel are expected to
assess the situation and take prompt and appropriate action.
2. LABORDE MARINE, LLC employee involved should report the incident to managers as
soon as possible and the complaining employee should do the same.
3. An employee who is dissatisfied with the resolution of a complaint against a non-employee

should discuss the matter with his/her Manager, who will review the matter and determine
whether additional action is justified or warranted.
J. OTHER RELATED INFORMATION

HSE MANUAL
Sexual 0 Sept. 1, 2011 12.0
1. Any LABORDE MARINE, LLC employee who presents a knowingly false or frivolous
claim that is proven to be untrue could be subject to civil repercussions from the falsely
accused party.
K. FINAL RECOURSE
1. LABORDE MARINE, LLC employees are entitled to file complaints of harassment with
the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission or other appropriate government agency.
However, LABORDE MARINE, LLC believes any and all complaints can be resolved
internally.
HSE MANUAL
JSA 0 Sept. 1, 2011 13.0
JOB SAFETY ANALYSIS
A. INTRODUCTION
Job safety analysis is a careful study and record of each step of a job, focusing on the
identification of existing or potential hazards to workers’ health and safety. By describing
hazards in detail, it enables those concerned to devise methods and procedures that can reduce or
eliminate these hazards. It is especially well suited to the discovery of hidden dangers, thus
achieving one of the principal objectives of any comprehensive audit. Hidden dangers are the
most insidious because they threaten us without our knowing it and keep us from taking
appropriate precautions.
The identification of hazards is a crucial component of any successful safety program, and
requires careful attention. This program will help you to devise a practical and reliable hazard
identification system, from detailed, single-job safety analyses to comprehensive company wide
audits.
B. COMMITMENT
Our Management is totally committed to the JSA process and will be involved in establishing the
quality and implementation of these JSA’s.
C. THE JSA TEAM
The purpose of the JSA is to ensure that those executing the task understand the hazards and
corresponding control measures, and so the appropriate people must be involved. Feedback from
both field and shop personnel can point to a number of situations that need to be planned for:
 JSA’s must be conducted before the job begins and reviewed as necessary to ensure all
affected personnel are aware of the work plan and safe work practices.
 Third Party Inspectors and/or contractors need to be familiar with the JSA prior to starting
work.
HSE MANUAL
JSA 0 Sept. 1, 2011 13.0
 All affected personnel, whether Laborde Marine, LLC employees or others, need to be
included in the JSA development and review.
Sign in sheets are one way or providing ensuring who was involved in the JSA process and
review.
 Involving different personnel in the JSA can bring fresh perspectives and help develop
trending
 Full involvement and true understanding leads to employee ownership of the JSA, giving the
best chance of success.
 Review JSA each morning as per-job start up.
D. JOB HAZARDS AND SAFE PRACTICES
Because the job safety analysis describes the precautions and corrective measures that are
appropriate to each hazard noted, it not only serves to reveal latent hazards, but also forms the
basis for a safe practices code. A JSA is also the basis for some of our employee-training
program. As an incidental benefit, the safe practices discovered through job safety analysis often
produce improvements in job methods that lead to increased productivity. Whenever a short
service employee is used on a job, that employee should be identified on the JSA and must
adhere to the LABORDE MARINE, LLC Short Service Employee policy.
1. Jobs to be Analyzed
Each task undertaken should include, as the first step, development of a JSA.
2. Prioritizing Jobs to be Analyzed
a. Accident Frequency – A job that has repeatedly produced accidents is a candidate for a
JSA. The greater the number of accidents associated with the job, the greater its priority
should be. These jobs should be analyzed as soon as possible.
b. Accident Severity – Every job that has produced an injury that resulted in lost time or
required medical treatment should be analyzed. The injuries prove that the preventive
action taken prior to their occurrence was not successful.
HSE MANUAL
JSA 0 Sept. 1, 2011 13.0
c. Judgment and Experience – Many jobs qualify for Job Safety Analysis because of the
potential hazards involved. An example is one involving the lifting of heavy equipment.
d. New Jobs, Non-routine Jobs, or Job Changes – These are also prime candidates for
JSA’s. Because these jobs are not done often or possibly have never been done at a
particular site, the hazards of the job might not be fully known. By applying the JSA
process to these jobs, the likelihood of an accident occurring is significantly reduced.
e. Routine Jobs – In routine or repetitive jobs with inherent hazards the employee is
exposed repeatedly to these hazards. For example, exposures to high levels of noise over
a period of time will affect the hearing of a worker.
f. Accident statistics, the ability to recognize hazards and good common sense coupled with
the guidelines we’ve discussed will help you to prioritize which JSA’s should be
developed first. With the goal that all jobs with sequential steps will ultimately be
analyzed.
E. THE JOB SAFETY ANALYSIS WORKSHEET (Exhibit)
1. After a job has been defined and the Job Safety Analysis has been initiated, a worksheet is
prepared listing the basic job steps, the corresponding hazards and the methods to eliminate
or otherwise control identified risks for each step. The basic form generally has three
columns.
2. In the left column, the Sequence of Basic Job Steps are listed in the order in which they
occur.
3. In the middle column, the Corresponding Hazards are identified for each job step.
4. In the right column are listed the Recommended Safe Job Procedures or Hazard
Elimination/Mitigation items that should be followed to guard against these hazards in order
to prevent potential accidents.
5. In the JSA process, it is easiest to deal with each column of the form separately. Logically,
we should break the job down into its basic steps first.
F. SEPARATING THE JOB INTO ITS BASIC STEPS
1. Each step or activity should briefly describe what is done. Each activity should be listed on
the form in the order it is accomplished.
HSE MANUAL
JSA 0 Sept. 1, 2011 13.0
2. Avoid the common errors of making the breakdown so detailed that an unnecessarily large
number of steps result, or making the job breakdown so general, that basic steps are omitted.
If a large number of steps result from the analysis (over 10), you should consider breaking
that job into more than one JSA.
3. It is important that the JSA accurately describes the work.
4. Keep in mind that a JSA that is too broad is also a poor JSA.
G. IDENTIFYING THE HAZARDS ASSOCIATED WITH EACH JOB STEP
1. After all basic steps of the operation have been listed, examine each job step to IDENTIFY
HAZARDS ASSOCIATED WITH EACH JOB STEP. The purpose is to identify and list the
hazards are more likely to occur than others, and some are more likely to produce serious
injuries than others. Consider all reasonable possibilities when identifying hazards.
2. Hazards must be prioritized based on the potential consequence and likelihood of re-
occurrence. Hazards with greater potential consequences and a higher likelihood of re-
occurrence take higher priority.
3. To make this task manageable we will work with basic types of accidents. The question we
will ask ourselves is, “Could any of these accident types or hazards inflict injury to a
worker?”
4. Provided on the reverse side of the JSA form is a list of potential hazards that are not all
encompassing, but can be used to assist in the thought process.
5. All employees will be trained in the hazard identification process, including the use and care
of proper PPE.
H. CONTROLLING EACH HAZARD
1. The next part of the JSA process is to develop a Safe Practice to eliminate or reduce potential
accidents or hazards that have been identified for the job step:
a. Less Hazardous Way to do the Job
1) Can a less hazardous way to do the job be found?

HSE MANUAL
JSA 0 Sept. 1, 2011 13.0
2) Can an engineering revision take place to make the job or work area safer?
3) Is there a better way to do the job? This requires determining the work goal and then
analyzing various ways to reach the goal to see which way is safest.
4) Are there work-saving tools and equipment available that can make the job safer?
b. Physical Conditions
1) Can the physical conditions that created the hazard be changed? Physical conditions
may be tools, materials, and equipment that may not be right for the job. These
conditions can be corrected by either engineering revisions, administrative revisions,
or a combination of both.
c. Change Job Procedures
1) If hazards cannot be engineered out of the job, can the job procedure be changed? Be
careful here because changes in job procedures to help eliminate the hazards must be
carefully studied. If the job changes are too difficult, long, or uncomfortable, then the
employee will take risks or shortcuts to avoid these procedures. Caution must be
exercised when changing job procedures to avoid creating additional hazards.
d. Personal Protective Equipment
1) Can personal protective equipment be used? The use of personal protective

equipment should always be the last consideration in reducing the hazards of a job.
Personal protective equipment usefulness depends entirely on the worker’s
willingness to use it faithfully. It is always better to control the hazards of a job by
administrative or engineering revisions. Personal protective equipment should only
be considered as a temporary solution to protecting a worker from a hazard, or a
supplemental protection to other solutions.
2) During the JSA process, safety problems are going to surface. Some of these
problems will be easily solved with suggestions you have made to upper
management. Administrative revisions are the easiest to make because there is little
if any capital outlay. New, better or additional personal protective equipment
normally takes minimum expenditures and can be instituted promptly. Work-saving
tolls and other equipment may take large expenditures, and might be phased in over
time as tools or equipment are replaced. Engineering revisions may take time to
design and install. Changes in physical conditions may have to be engineered.
HSE MANUAL
JSA 0 Sept. 1, 2011 13.0
1. To ensure identified hazards are addressed and mitigated, each mitigation action must be
assigned to an individual performing the task
2. To ensure corrective measures utilized do not created additional hazards, an analysis of each
corrective action must take place to identify the potential for additional created hazards.
I. JSA EVALUATION
Evaluating the JSA after the job is completed should be simple, straight forward and short, and
completed out by those performing the task. A simple format addressing the following concerns
should be sufficient:
 Did everything match the original planned JSA? If there were differences, were they
substantial enough to warrant revising the JSA?
 Were the results as expected? Were risks anticipated and mitigated correctly?
 If not, what went wrong?
 What improvements can be made to the permanent JSA?
 If the JSA is to be revised, who will be responsible for the revision before the next time the
job is done?
J. SUMMARY
1. There are many advantages in using Job Safety Analysis. JSA provides training to new
employees on safety rules and how the rules are applied to their work. This training is
provided before the new employees perform the job task(s).
2. With JSA, experienced employee can maintain safety awareness behavior and receive clear
instructions for job changes or new jobs.
3. It is important to involve the workers in the Job Safety Analysis process. The workers are
familiar with the jobs and can combine their experience to develop the JSA. This results in a
more thorough analysis of the job. A complete Job Safety Analysis program is a continuing
HSE MANUAL
JSA 0 Sept. 1, 2011 13.0
effort to analyze one hazardous job after another until all jobs with sequential steps have a
written JSA. Once established, the JSA should be followed by all employees.
4. Job Safety Analysis is an accident prevention technique used in many successful safety
programs. The JSA process is not difficult if it is taken with a common sense approach on a
step-by-step basis.
5. JSA’s should be reviewed often and updated with input from both supervisors and workers
who do the job every day.
6. Job Safety Analysis takes a little extra effort, but the results are positive and helpful for
everybody.
7. It’s not the written JSA that we value; it’s the thought process that counts. If only we would
ask ourselves prior to each task, “What are the hazards associated with this task?” And not
perform the task until a safe practice can be devised.
HSE MANUAL
Risk Assessment 0 Sept. 1, 2011 13.1
Matrix Prepared By: Approved By: Page:
Risk Assessment Matrix

HSE MANUAL
Steps to Risk Assessment
1. List all steps of your job task on JSA form in the first column.
2. Identify risk associated with each step of the job task in the second column of the JSA form. Be
sure to think broadly about potential risk.
3. Use the matrix to determine the level of risk associated with each step before applying any risk
management strategies to the third column of the JSA form.
4. Brainstorm methods to manage risks. Find strategies you can apply to reduce the severity of the
risk and the probability that something will go wrong.
5. Use the matrix to re-assess the activities, now that you have applied risk management strategies.
6. Determine if you have reached an acceptable level of risk by applying risk management
strategies. Consider modifying or eliminating activities that have unreasonable risk associated
with them. Remember to consider how the job task relates to the mission & purpose of your
organization.
7. After risk assessment strategies are applied and the risk is determined to be in the Low Risk to
Moderate Risk level on the matrix continue with the operation as it is planned using the JSA.
8. If risk assessment is completed and the risk level is determined to be in the High Risk, to
Extremely High Risk quadrants of the matrix use SWA and initiate the MOC process. At no
time will a risk assessment process or MOC process override the master authority.
HSE MANUAL
Risk Matrix
HSE MANUAL
RCA 0 Sept. 1, 2011 14.0
THE ROOT CAUSE(S) OF THE ACCIDENT
Identifying root causes to accidents is one of the central ideas behind accident investigation, and
getting to the contributing factors of the accident is what identifying the root cause(s) is all about.
Before looking for root causes to accidents, it’s important that you understand the difference
between a symptom and a root cause.
A symptom is a contributing factor to an accident whereas; a root cause is the likely cause of the
accident itself.
 A symptom/direct cause is the condition, event or action which directly resulted in the
occurrence.
 A contributing cause is a cause associated with the occurrence, but which, by itself, would
not have caused the occurrence.
 The root cause is a fundamental cause which, if identified, would permit root action to be
taken, thus correcting and preventing a similar type of occurrence.
The tendency of accident investigations has been to focus on the immediate actions and conditions
of the accident. While it is important to evaluate immediate actions and conditions, doing so will
often lead to an emphasis on the individuals involved, which then tends to focus blame. Remember,
the overall tone of any accident investigation should be that health and safety matters to this
organization.
Root Cause Analysis is a consistent and repeatable process for analyzing incidents with a non-
punitive objective. However, Root Cause Analysis is not a means to eliminate all hazards or to
search for “the guilty”. Neither does it intend to be a replacement for thinking of and caring for
employees nor does it intend to replace accident investigation or reporting.
Root Cause Analysis is a thinking tool that can be used to analyze failures in processes. Root Cause
Analysis is a methodology that systematically probes a problem to determine the basic (root)
underlying cause of the failure.
Root Cause Analysis is to be completed for the following:
 All OSHA Recordable accidents.
 All LTA’s
HSE MANUAL
RCA 0 Sept. 1, 2011 14.0
 All incidents which could have resulted in serious injury, property damage, environmental
damage or public disruption.
 Groups of recurring theme accidents (i.e., falls, eye injuries, hand tool usage,..)
 Major potential problems (i.e., falls electrocution,…)
A. EXAMINE EACH POTENTIAL CAUSE
Once all of the possible causes have been identified, each one should be examined until a root
cause is identified. At this point, it is important not to focus on one particular suspected cause,
because all factors that led up to the accident need to be examined and eventually corrected.
The examination process is actually a series of questions, because identifying the root causes to
accidents will usually center around the question “why” or “why not.” By asking a series of
“why” and “why not” questions, you should be one step closer to determining the root cause(s)
of the accident. These questions might also help you determine the reasons for certain employee
actions that led up to the accident.
B. EXAMINE THE REASONS FOR EMPLOYEE ACTIONS
When looking for root causes to an accident, determine why an employee acted the way they did
prior to the accident. Or look at the specific conditions of the task just prior to the accident.
Some questions you may want to consider include:
 Was there something unusual or different about the job or task on the day of the accident?
 Was there a production push at the time the accident occurred?
 Was there a communications breakdown between employees or supervisors?
 Was the employee properly trained?
 Was personal protective equipment available?
 Was the employee in a hurry?
 Was the employee fatigued?
 Was there a lack of teamwork?
 Was the employee taking shortcuts to complete their task?

HSE MANUAL
RCA 0 Sept. 1, 2011 14.0
 Were there procedures that were inaccurate?
 Was the accident due to any external factor?
 Were tools being incorrectly used?
Identify the failures at a deep level in order to prevent, not only a reoccurrence of the
accident, but all of the potential accidents stemming from the same root cause.
C. DETERMINE A ROOT CAUSE
Deciding on a root cause is ultimately what the accident investigation process is all about. There
may be several causes of the accident, and not just one.
Root Cause Analysis involves:
a. Looking at the overall effect that the accident had on people, property, products, and
processes at your facility.
b. Examining all potential causes of the accident; and
c. Determining the reasons behind the employee actions that led up to the accident.
Utilize these three steps to determine a root cause or root causes of the accident. Next, use this
information to develop the corrective and preventive actions that will help prevent future
accidents.
D. DEVELOP CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE ACTIONS
Develop a list of corrective and preventive actions that will prevent future accidents. Corrective
and preventive actions that should be recommended to upper management should be determined
by:
a. Evaluation of the root cause(s) of the accident.

b. How to reduce or eliminate root causes from all workplace activities.
Now that the root cause(s) of the accident has been determined, corrective and preventive actions
must be put in place that will eliminate, or at least reduce, the chances of another accident
occurring at your facility.
Re-examine the list of determined root causes of the accident. After the root cause(s) have been
determined, recommendations for corrective and preventive actions are to follow. Developing an
effective set of corrective and preventive actions starts with an evaluation of the identified root
cause(s).
HSE MANUAL
RCA 0 Sept. 1, 2011 14.0
E. EVALUATE THE ROOT CAUSE(S) OF THE ACCIDENT
After the root cause(s) of the accident have been identified, evaluate it/them to determine how
the cause can be prevented from occurring in the future. With the help of other supervisors,
managers, and employees, discuss quantitative ways to remove the root cause(s) from the
system.
HSE MANUAL
BBS 0 Sept. 1, 2011 15.0
BEHAVIOR BASED SAFETY

Achieving safety excellence requires going beyond the traditional safety focus of engineering and
regulations. Because human behavior is a contributing cause to most incidents and injuries, safety
excellence can only be achieved by addressing the human dimensions of safety. Therefore reducing
at-risk behavior and increasing safe behavior requires understanding how these behaviors are
motivated. We call this actively caring for our employees and will become an integral part of our
total safety culture.
A. PURPOSE
To identify behaviors that define safe and at risk performance and to develop a means to monitor
that performance. This behavior based safety process will strive to improve worker safety in all
facets of our operation by facilitating employee involvement in the development, implementation
and continuous improvement in the safety process. It will provide our employees with exposure
to the various principles of Total Quality Management and continuous improvement with regards
to safety.
B. SCOPE
Our behavior process approach will be employee driven and will establish the basis for pro-
active management of and continuous involvement in occupational Safety and the factors that
contribute to the occurrence of an incident – in other words – worker behavior and workplace
culture. That process will allow us to track the ratio of safe to at risk behaviors through the use
of observation data.
Our proposed behavior approach should empower workers to be more actively involved in
specifying, defining and assessing correct safety practices. Safe behaviors are defined and
objectively described through observation so that it is clear to all parties (management and
workers) exactly what the employees should do and how they should do it. These expectations
will be documented. Employees will be randomly observed and both safe and at risk behaviors
will be defined, and measure to positively identify areas in need of improvement. This employee
based “self-managed” process should increase behavioral awareness and motivate worker
adherence to our safety performance standards.
C. OBJECTIVES
The program is designed to deliver a number of beneficial outputs. The level of management
commitment and the employees’ involvement and support will ultimately determine the quality
of these outputs. Some key items necessary to the success of this program that will be carried
out are:
HSE MANUAL
BBS 0 Sept. 1, 2011 15.0
 Orientation of personnel and management to provide understanding of concepts and

methods that we will use to implement the program.
 Evaluate prior years accident data and accumulate any supplemental data to assess our
present safety culture.
 Establish a baseline as well as achievable goals.
 Establish a JSA (Job Safety Analysis) system that will focus on the pro-active approach
to accident prevention.
 Utilize a proven method of accident investigation (i.e. – Root Cause Analysis) to

establish any at risk causes of accidents.
 Develop a non-punitive observation system that will assist in the identification of both
safe as well as at risk behaviors.
 Develop a system to ensure efficient communication of any problem areas and an

ultimate solution to those at risk areas.
 Timely meetings to discuss the progress of the overall progress and voice concerns,
successes, or changes needed to ensure success.
D. TRAINING
Training will be provided to all personnel involved in the behavioral based safety process. At a
minimum all employees will be trained in general awareness of the behavioral based safety
process. This training is provided as part of the new employee orientation training. Personnel
performing observations are required to go through additional training. Additionally
management will have specific training on their responsibilities in the behavioral based safety
process as well. Training for observers and management will include:
 Program objectives and incident metrics
 How to conduct the observation
 How to complete the observation form
 Definitions of the behaviors
 Feedback process
HSE MANUAL
BBS 0 Sept. 1, 2011 15.0
 Coaching and mentoring
 Awareness of being observed
Refresher training shall occur if a change has been made to the critical behavior list or if it is
apparent that observations are not being performed and documented as required.
E. CRITICAL BEHAVIOR INDEX
This will be a list of critical behaviors that are critical to safety. A list more or less of do’s and
don’ts related to our operation (i.e.: fall protection, rigging, hotwork, etc.) that are critical to
everyone’s safety.
These behaviors should focus on a brief list to start with and gradually build based on
observations as well as group employee/management meetings.
F. OBSERVATIONS/REPORTING
Observations are a key component to the behavioral based safety process. Observations allow us
to obtain direct, measurable information on employee’ work practices to identify both safe and at
risk behaviors. Observations should be performed openly so the person(s) being observed are
aware of the observation. Data gathered during the observation shall be documented on the
observation card.
Cards will be designed and administered to management and supervisors. They will define safe,
as well as, at risk behavior based on company principles, not by our own perception of safety.
As managers, we must educate our supervisors in accordance with LABORDE MARINE,
LLC’s perception of safe or at risk behavior.
This is not a punitive type program, therefore, at NO TIME should the name of an employee
observed performing an at risk behavior be revealed or mentioned in anyway.
There are two (2) important factors that must be remembered in order to achieve the success
desired.
1. The best way to get anyone to exhibit the desired behavior is to give them some type of
positive reinforcement. It can be as simple as a good word indicating that you notice them
taking the time to get the right equipment to do the job safely, and that effort is appreciated.
2. IMPORTANT!!! On the other hand, if you notice a person doing something unsafe or in
contradiction to our established safe work practice, no matter how small, and you let it slide,
without mentioning it, you will be providing reinforcement for that person to continue to
perform in the same manner. ALWAYS address any at risk behavior.
HSE MANUAL
BBS 0 Sept. 1, 2011 15.0
All observation cards must be completed, signed and dated by the observer and turned in to your
respective supervisor for evaluation and documentation.
G. FEEDBACK
Feedback is an essential consequence of an observation that will reinforce safe behaviors and
help change at-risk behaviors. Immediately following an observation the observer must provide
the observed employee(s) feedback on the observation. In order for this feedback to be most
effective the feedback must occur immediately, be consistent, and be positive in nature. The
feedback process is as follows:
 Emphasize no name, no blame
 Review the observation with all employees observed
 Start with positive comments
 Reinforce safe behaviors observed
 Describe and discuss what was unsafe
 Ask the observed employee(s) to explain why they performed the behavior in that manner
(use open ended questions)
 Identify any barriers to safe behaviors
 Attempt to remove any identified barriers to safe behavior
 Re-emphasize no name, no blame
 Document the feedback on the observation card.
H. DATA COLLECTIONS/TREND ANALYSIS
Observation cards must be turned in as soon as possible so the data can be reviewed. Data
should be gathered in a manner that allows for tracking individual departments, as well as
LABORDE MARINE, LLC, as a whole. Data will be compiled each month and compared
against the previous month’s observation data as well as incident rates for the corresponding
HSE MANUAL
BBS 0 Sept. 1, 2011 15.0
month. The data will also be compiled into quarterly and annual statistics for analysis and
trending.
I. ACTIONS PLANS
Once the data has been compiled and analyzed, appropriate action plans must be developed to
address unsafe behaviors. Action planning will include:
 Evaluation and prioritization of unsafe behavior.
 Development of action plans for unsafe behaviors based on actual comments and
feedback data on observation cards
 Designation of responsibility and time frame for action items
 Management involvement and approval of action plan
Action plans must be followed up on to ensure close out of action items and effectiveness of the
plan. The action plan must include the frequency for review, and assign accountability for
closeout of action plans. After the action plan is closed out, it must be archived for future
references.
HSE MANUAL
Offshore 0 Sept. 1, 2011 16.0
Orientation Prepared By: Approved By: Page:
OFFSHORE ORIENTATION
A. OFFSHORE WORK ENVIRONMENT
The offshore work environment has the potential to contain most of the hazards found at
industrial facilities on land.
Offshore work has some hazards that are not commonly encountered on land locations, these
include, but are not limited to:
 Drowning
 Hypothermia
 Swing rope/personnel basket transfers
 Vessel collisions
 Helicopter crashes
Sometimes, the procedures for dealing with these hazards offshore differ from the procedures
used on land locations.
Because of different emergency response procedures and various hazards while working offshore
personnel need special training.
1. Preparing to Go Offshore
There are several things you need to do to prepare for your trip offshore, some of these
include:
 Packing enough clothing and personal items for the duration of your stay
 Packing all materials, tools and PPE you will need to do your job
 Check your baggage and vehicle for items that might be considered contraband
 Make sure you get enough rest and allow yourself adequate time to get to the
shorebase
HSE MANUAL
2. Arrival at the Shorebase
Driving to the shorebase can be very dangerous. Do not speed and be sure to use your
seatbelts.
Try to arrive well before your designated departure time. If you are late, they may not hold
the boat or helicopter for you.
Park in the designated contractor parking area and report to the dispatcher as soon as
possible.
The dispatcher will need information from you, such as:
 Your name
 Your employer’s name
 The name of the customer you are working for
 The name and location of the facility you will be working on
 Your weight and the weight of your baggage
 In some cases, your training accomplishments
B. BOARDING/DISEMBARKING A VESSEL AT THE DOCK
Before approaching the dock for boarding, don your work-vest and securely fasten it.
If you are boarding a vessel by means of a gangway, check to make sure there are no obvious
safety hazards, such as damaged handrails or loose materials on the walking surface. Check the
gangway to make sure that the ends are secured.
Always keep one hand free to hold on to the handrail of the gangway as you walk.
At some shorebases, you may have to transfer from the dock to the boat by climbing over the
stern or the side of the vessel. If you must do this:
 The boat must be secured to the dock

HSE MANUAL
 Both hands must be free for climbing
 Your PFD must be on and properly fastened
 Always maintain three points of contact as you climb
 Select footing and handholds that are solid and secure
C. SAFETY ABOARD THE VESSEL
Once on board, there are certain rules you should follow:
 You must report to the cabin and sign the manifest as soon as you board.
 The Captain is always in command, when it comes to the safety of the passengers.
 Pay attention to the safety briefing and review the station bill.
 Avoid walking around.
 Passengers are not permitted in the wheelhouse.
 Do not leave the cabin while the vessel is underway.
If you feel sick, let someone know and you will be provided with a container. This will make the
trip much more pleasant for everyone.
Passenger Orientation
Before getting underway, the master must ensure that suitable public announcements, instructive
placards, or both, are provided in a manner that affords all passengers the opportunity to become
acquainted with:
 Stowage locations of life preservers;
 Proper method of donning and adjusting life preservers of the type(s) carried on the
vessel;
 The type and location of all lifesaving devices carried on the vessel; and
 The location and contents of the Emergency Check-off List

HSE MANUAL
Emergency Check-Off List
Rough weather at sea or crossing hazardous bars.
 All weathertight and watertight doors, hatches and airports closed to prevent taking
water aboard.
 Bilges kept dry to prevent loss of stability.
 Passengers seated and evenly distributed.
 All passengers wearing life preservers in conditions of very rough seas or if about to
cross a bar under hazardous conditions.
 An international distress call and a call to the Coast Guard over radiotelephone made
if assistance is needed (if radiotelephone equipped).
Man overboard
 Ring buoy thrown overboard as close to the victim as possible.
 Lookout posted to keep the victim in sight.
 Crewmember, wearing a life preserver and lifeline, standing by ready to jump into the
water to assist the victim back aboard.
 Coast Guard and all vessels in the vicinity notified by radiotelephone (if
radiotelephone equipped).
 Search continued until after radiotelephone consultation with the Coast Guard, if at
all possible.
Fire at Sea
 Air supply to the fire cut off by closing hatches, ports, doors, and ventilators, etc.
 Portable extinguishers discharged at the base of the flames of flammable liquid or

grease fires or water applied to fires in combustible solids.
HSE MANUAL
 If fire is in machinery spaces, fuel supply and ventilation shut off and any installed
fixed firefighting system discharged.
 Vessel maneuvered to minimize the effect of wind of the fire.
 Coast Guard and all vessels in the vicinity notified by radiotelephone of the fire and
vessel location (if radiotelephone equipped).
 Passengers moved away from fire and wearing life preservers.
D. BOARDING/DISEMBARKING AT THE OFFSHORE FACILITY
Upon reaching the offshore facility, you will use either a swing rope or a personnel basket to
board the platform.
1. To use a swing rope safely:
a) You must wear your PFD.

b) Remove any jewelry that might get caught on the swing rope.
c) Select the proper rope (inboard or outboard, depending upon direction you’re swinging)
d) Inspect the swing rope and make sure it will support your weight.
e) Test the rope by giving it several hard pulls.
f) Carefully evaluate the sea conditions before swinging. Is it too rough?
g) Begin the swing by firmly grasping the rope with both hands and positioning them
properly.
h) Position the rope to the side of your body. Never between your legs.
i) Time your swing so that you are either taking off from the boat or landing on the boat
when the boat is at the top of the swell. Focus on the boat’s movement.
j) Once landed, help the next person who is transferring.
2. Personnel Basket
The personnel basket is another device commonly used to transfer personnel from boats to
platforms.
The crane operator will play a key role in safely conducting this type of transfer. He/She is
responsible for making sure that the crane is in acceptable condition. The crane operator or
another qualified person must also inspect the personnel basket for any damage or defects,
such as frayed ropes or cracks in the floatation ring.
HSE MANUAL
The boat captain will also play a key role in the safe use of the personnel basket. The captain
must properly position the boat and make sure the deck area is clear. The deck hand may
serve as a helper.
To use a personnel basket safely:
a) Passengers must be positioned in an area where they will not be struck by the basket.
b) Make sure that your PFD is properly fastened.
c) Approach the basket when the deckhand signals you to approach.
d) Place your light baggage inside the netting.
e) Begin boarding the personnel basket.
f) Firmly grasp the netting on either side of the gap.
g) Make sure your hands are positioned at shoulder height or higher.
h) Place one foot on the floatation ring and the other foot on the deck.
i) Keep your knees slightly bent.
j) Maintain a tight grip and step onto the floatation ring with your other foot, as soon as the
basket breaks contact with the deck.
k) Continue to hold on tightly, keep your knees flexed, and your back straight.
l) As the basket is lowered to the deck, keep your knees bent and your back straight.
m) When the floatation ring lands, step off with one foot and then the other.
n) Release the net and step back when contact is made.
o) Walk away and do not return to retrieve your baggage until you are sure the crane has
stopped lowering the personnel basket and it is under control.
E. HELICOPTER TRANSPORTATION
If you have never flown in a helicopter or in the particular model you are boarding, let the pilot
know so that they can give you a safety briefing.
The pilot is in command when it comes to the safety of the aircraft and his/her passengers.
Safety precautions necessary when approaching a helicopter include:
1. wearing hearing protection
2. securing loose items
3. stopping and making eye contact with the pilot before approaching
4. being aware of both tail and main rotors
5. keeping long items horizontal to the ground

HSE MANUAL
6. securing baggage in the baggage compartment
Safety precautions necessary when inside the helicopter include:
1. sitting in the seat assigned by the pilot – this is critical to the safe operation of the aircraft
2. if you are not already wearing it, wear your hearing protection
3. wearing an inflatable lifevest and properly securing it
4. tightly fastening the safety belt during the entire flight
5. locating any emergency equipment and the emergency door release
6. close your eyes and simulate using the emergency door release and unbuckling your seat belt
7. no smoking
F. ARRIVAL AT THE OFFSHORE FACILITY
After arriving at the offshore facility, take a minute to look around and identify any hazards, such
as:
1. any deteriorated walking surfaces, stairways, and handrails
2. any materials in the walkways
3. any overhead work
If you must use stairs, keep one hand free to use the handrailing, many injuries have occurred
offshore from falls on stairways.
Proceed to the office, if any, sign in, and participate in the facility safety orientation. The facility
safety orientation will cover the following information:
1. what to do in emergencies
2. alarm signals
3. assigned survival capsule or life raft
4. any additional safety requirements

HSE MANUAL
5. any special training, such as H2S safety
G. EMERGENCIES ONBOARD OFFSHORE FACILITIES AND ASSETS
You will be required to participate in regular emergency drills – take these seriously.
Put on your Personal Floatation Device (PFD) for all emergencies.
If evacuation is necessary, avoid jumping into the water. If you must jump into the water, jump
into the water from the lowest possible level. Always check over the side before jumping. Make
sure your life jacket is fastened.
Bodily entry into the water can be hazardous because there is always the potential for:
1. drowning
2. hypothermia
Also, lone individuals in the water are extremely difficult for rescuers to find.
Instead of jumping into the water, make use of life floats and survival capsules in emergencies
whenever possible.
HSE MANUAL
Critical 0 Sept. 1, 2011 17.0
Stores & Supplies Prepared By: Approved By: Page:
PROCEDURES FOR IDENTIFYING CRITICAL STORES AND SUPPLIES

The purpose of this procedure is to establish uniform guidelines for identifying critical stores and
supplies to be ordered for LABORDE MARINE, LLC vessels.
A. RESPONSIBILITY
The master is responsible for ensuring that routine store and supply requisitions are sent to
LABORDE MARINE, LLC main office, and for limiting and controlling the number of routine
store and supply requisitions.
B. PROCEDURES
1. Routine store and supply requests should be sent in to the Vessel Operations Department on
requisition forms during crew changes or by fax transmission.
2. Each requisition is to be reviewed, signed and dated by the master before it is forwarded to
the Vessel Operations Department, where it will be logged in and recorded.
3. Crewmembers submitting requisition forms to the Master for review should verify all part
numbers and list all possible information on any non-standard supplies requested.
4. Attention to correct part numbers is essential when completing store and supply requisition
forms.
5. Items should only be ordered via voice communication if they are necessary for the vessel to
perform a particular job at hand or to ensure the immediate safety of the crew or the vessel
HSE MANUAL
Safe 0 Sept. 1, 2011 18.0
Lifting Program Prepared By: Approved By: Page:
SAFE LIFTING PROGRAM
A. INTRODUCTION
Back safety awareness is necessary, due to the prevalence and severity of back injuries
throughout business and industry. Sprains and strains are the most common causes of lower
back pain. Backs can be injured by improper lifting, falling, auto accidents, and sports activities.
But of these, lifting improperly is the largest single cause of back pain and injury. Instituting
proper lifting techniques and other safety measures can significantly reduce back injury
incidences.
This safe lifting plan will be used to create an awareness of the hazards among our workforce,
standardize lifting techniques, and specify alternative material-handling measures when lifting or
moving materials by hand that could pose an injury hazard. Problems with the lower back are a
frequent cause of lost work time and worker’s compensation claims. This plan will help
eliminate avoidable injuries resulting from improper lifting and keep you and your back healthy.
B. PURPOSE
LABORDE MARINE, LLC requires the procedures in this plan to be followed to provide a
safe working environment. LABORDE MARINE, LLC has implemented these procedures on
safe lifting practices to ensure that employees are trained to protect themselves from the hazards
of improper lifting practices.
It is the responsibility of management at LABORDE MARINE, LLC to ensure that these

policies are implemented. It is the responsibility of management to ensure that these policies and
the information necessary to carry out these policies are communicated to employees. It is the
responsibility of all employees to follow safe work practices and comply with these rules
regarding work practices. Work areas and employee’s work techniques will periodically be
evaluated to assess the potential for and prevention of injuries. New operations will be evaluated
for manual lifting hazards prior to implementation.
The effectiveness of the back safety plan depends upon the active support and involvement of all
affected employees.
C. AFFECTED EMPLOYEES/DEPARTMENTS
All employees have job duties that, at some time, require lifting or material handling. These
employees are to be trained on and follow the rules of this Safe Lifting Program.
HSE MANUAL
Safe 0 Sept. 1, 2011 18.0
D. SAFE LIFTING TECHNIQUES
Prior to performing any manual lift, a hazard assessment must be completed. The assessment
must consider size, bulk, and weight of the object(s), if mechanical lifting equipment is required,
if two-man lift is required, whether vision is obscured while carrying and the walking surface
and path where the object is to be carried.
The following points outline good lifting practices and procedures, safe lifting techniques that
may be taught to employees to minimize their risk of back injury and pain. These practices are
written with the lifter in mind. Lifting remains an important function, despite the level of
mechanization found in the workplace today, so attention must be directed toward safe lifting
practices.
The basics of good lifting are:
1. Size up the load before you lift. Test by lifting one of the corners or pushing. If it’s heavy or
feels too clumsy, get a mechanical aid or help from another worker. When in doubt, don’t
lift alone!
2. BEND THE KNEES. There’s a reason for that, it is the single most important aspect of
lifting.
3. When performing the lift:
 Place your feet close to the object and center yourself over the load.
 Get a good hand hold.
 Lift straight up, smoothly and let your legs do the work, not your back!
 Avoid overreaching or stretching to pick up or set down a load.
4. Do not twist or turn your body once you have made the lift.
5. Make sure, beforehand, that you have a clear path to carry the load.
6. Set the load down properly.
7. Always push, not pull, the object when possible.
8. Change the lifting situation, if possible, to minimize a lifting hazard:
 If it’s a long load, get some help – work as a team, lift, walk, and lower the load together.
 Split the load into several smaller ones when you can, to achieve manageable lifting
weight.
HSE MANUAL
Safe 0 Sept. 1, 2011 18.0
 Avoiding lifts from below the knees or above the shoulders by using mechanical aids,
positioning yourself so that the object to move is within an acceptable lifting range
(between the shoulders and knees), and/or getting help from your coworkers.
 Let one person call the shots and direct the lift.
E. ALTERNATIVE MATERIAL-HANDLING TECHNIQUES
Alternative material-handling techniques and manual lifting equipment for carrying or moving
loads will be provided and are to be used whenever possible to minimize lifting and bending
requirements. Use of this equipment when required will be enforced under the disciplinary
policy.
These alternative material-handling techniques include use of manual lifting equipment as well
as other engineering controls such as:
 Hoists,
 Forklifts,
 Cranes,
 Dollies,
 Carts, and
 Other mechanical devices.
 Conveyors, lift tables, and work station design
Where use of lifting equipment is impractical or not possible, two man lifts must be used.
F. OTHER SAFE WORK TECHNIQUES
Work issues other than lifting can also cause serious back pain or injury. You can avoid them or
improve work techniques related to them by utilizing the following:
1. Working Low – If you’re working on something low, bend your knees. Keep your back as
straight as possible. Bending from the waist can lead to back pain. If you have to use your
back, keep your knees bent and your back flat. In both of these situations, frequent rest
breaks are necessary and will help to keep from getting back fatigue.
2. Extended Sitting/Standing – Certain jobs require long hours of standing or sitting. These
conditions can also create back troubles. Get up and stretch frequently if you are required to
sit for long periods. If standing, ease the strain on your lower back by changing foot
positions often, placing one foot on a rail or ledge. However, keep your weight evenly
balanced when standing. Don’t lean to one side.
HSE MANUAL
Safe 0 Sept. 1, 2011 18.0
3. Other Materials Handling Tasks – Tasks such as lowering, pushing, pulling, and carrying
can create hazards to the back as well. If the task feels uncomfortable or unnatural, utilize
the alternative materials-handling techniques listed in the Plan.
4. Housekeeping – Poor housekeeping: slippery floors, crowded work conditions, tools or

other hazards on the floor can create slip, trip, or fall hazards when lifting.
5. Poor Posture at Work – Be aware of proper posture when sitting, standing, or reclining.
When sitting, your knees should be slightly higher than your hips and your shoulders and
upper back should be straight. When lying down or sleeping, keep you knees slightly bent.
6. Poor Lighting – Poor lighting in the work area can lead to poor work practices that result in
injuries of many types. Make sure lighting is adequate for the task at hand, replace burnt out
bulbs, and point out hazardous areas to your immediate supervisor.
G. TRAINING
All employees will be trained on proper lifting techniques and avoidance of musculoskeletal
injuries.
At a minimum this training will include:
 General principles of ergonomics

 Recognition of hazards and injuries
 Procedures for reporting hazardous conditions
 Methods and procedures for early reporting of injuries
Additional job specific training will be given on safe lifting, work practices, hazards and
controls.
H. INJURY INVESTIGATION
Injuries caused by improper lifting may be investigated and documented. Investigation findings
will be incorporated into work procedures to prevent future injuries.
I. REPORTING
All injuries must be recorded and reported as required by LABORDE MARINE, LLC accident
reporting policy which complies with 29 CFR part 1904.
HSE MANUAL
Safe 0 Sept. 1, 2011 18.0
PROPER LIFTING TECHNIQUES
GENERAL RULES for all situations____________________________________

HSE MANUAL
Safe 0 Sept. 1, 2011 18.0
SPECIAL RULES for special situations
Think things through before you start:
1. Look object over. Decide where and how to hold it. Check for grease, oil, moisture, and
sharp edges.
2. Clear path of obstructions, tripping hazards.
3. Know where and how you’ll let object down.
4. Get Help if you have any doubts about lifting objects. Avoid carrying loads that extend
above eye level or otherwise obstruct vision.
HSE MANUAL
Walking & 0 Sept. 1, 2011 19.0
Working Surfaces Prepared By: Approved By: Page:
WALKING & WORKING SURFACES
A. GENERAL
LABORDE MARINE, LLC will ensure that all walking and working surfaces within our
facility(s) are evaluated. This standard practice instruction is intended to address
comprehensively the issues of evaluating and identifying potential deficiencies, evaluating the
associated potential hazards, communicating information concerning these hazards, and
establishing appropriate procedures, corrective measures, and protective measures for
employees.
B. COMPANY POLICY
LABORDE MARINE, LLC will review and evaluate this standard practice instruction on an
annual basis, or when changes occur to 29 CFR 1910.21-23 that prompt revision of this
document, or when facility operational changes occur that require a revision of this document.
All facilities and assets owned by LABORDE MARINE, LLC will be maintained in a safe and
healthful manner. Certain environments with the facility(s) of LABORDE MARINE, LLC
may contain a reasonable probability of injury that can be prevented by proper maintenance and
supervision. LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall do all possible to ensure the safety of our
employees. NO employee shall knowingly be subjected to a hazardous condition without all
possible protective measures first being implemented. Measures for the control of toxic
materials are considered to be outside the scope of this instruction.
C. HOUSEKEEPING
1. All offices, work stations, work areas, passageways, storerooms, restrooms, and service
rooms shall be kept clean, orderly, sanitary, and free of know hazards.
2. The floor of every workroom shall be maintained in a clean and, so far as possible, a dry
condition. Platforms, mats, or other dry standing places will be provided where practicable.
3. To facilitate cleaning, every floor, working place, and passageway shall be kept free from
protruding nails, splinters, holes, or loose boards or other hindrances that would prevent
efficient maintenance.
4. Sufficient illumination will be provided in all areas. Employees discovering lighting

deficiencies should report them to their supervisor for correction.
5. Work areas. All employees are responsible for maintaining their immediate work areas in a
clean and orderly manner, and for notifying maintenance of conditions beyond their control.
HSE MANUAL
Walking & 0 Sept. 1, 2011 19.0
6. Machines and equipment. Supervisors will ensure that machines and equipment under their
control are maintained in a clean and orderly manner. Crowding should be avoided wherever
possible.
7. Aisles. All employees are responsible to ensure that aisles are kept clean, free of material,
finished parts, scrap, or any type of debris.
8. Floors. Supervisors will ensure that all floor spaces are maintained in a clean and orderly
manner.
9. Storage facilities. Appropriate procedures will be followed based on the type of storage
facility.
10. Emergency exit doors. Will be kept free of any obstacles at all times. Any employee finding
an emergency door blocked should immediately report the condition to the Safety
Coordinator for correction. Exit lights and signs will also be maintained in proper condition
at all times, and immediately reported if deficient.
D. AISLES AND PASSAGEWAYS
1. Where mechanical handling equipment is used, sufficient safe clearances will be maintained
for aisles, at loading docks, through doorways and wherever turns or passage must be made.
Aisles and passageways shall be kept clear and in good repairs, with no obstruction across or
in aisles that could create a hazard.
2. Permanent aisles and passageways should be appropriately marked.
E. COVERS AND GUARDRAILS
Covers and/or guardrails shall be provided to protect personnel from the hazards of open pits,
tanks, vats, ditches, etc.
1. Supervisory responsibilities. Work areas under their control will be properly guarded,
covered, cordoned off, or marked to prevent injury. Supervisors will ensure the following
are properly secured and reported to maintenance:
a. Stairways unguarded/containing holes.

b. Ladderway floor openings unguarded.
c. Hatchway and chute floor opening unguarded.
d. Manhole floor openings unguarded.
e. Temporary floor openings unguarded.
f. Floor holes/openings unguarded.
HSE MANUAL
Walking & 0 Sept. 1, 2011 19.0
g. Window wall openings unprotected.
h. Open-sided floor or platforms unguarded.
i. Runways unprotected.
j. Stairways unprotected.
F. FLOOR LOADING PROTECTION
1. Whenever loads or single items exceeding 350lbs are to be placed on floor areas or roofing
structures, employees will determine the safe load capacity before taking this action.
2. Safe floor loading capacities will be marked on plates of approved design, which shall be
supplied and securely affixed in a conspicuous place in each space to which they relate.
3. Such plates will not be removed or defaced. If lost, removed, or defaced, they will be
reported to the Safety Coordinator and replaced immediately.
4. All employees must note that it is unlawful to place, or cause, or permit to be placed, on any
floor or roof of a building or other structure, a load greater than that for which such floor or
roof is approved by the building official.
G. GUARDING FLOOR AND WALL OPENINGS AND HOLES
1. Protection for floor openings.
a. Stairway floor openings. Stairway floor openings shall be guarded by a standard railing
constructed in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.23, paragraph (e). The railing shall be
provided on all exposed sides (except at entrances to stairways).
b. Manhole floor openings. Manhole floor openings shall be guarded by a standard
manhole cover, which need not be hinged in place. While the cover is not in place, the
manhole opening shall be constantly attended by someone or shall be protected by
removable standard railings.
c. Temporary floor openings. Temporary floor opening shall have standard railings, or shall
be constantly attended by someone.
d. Floor holes. Floor holes into which persons can accidentally walk shall be guarded by
either:
1) A standard railing with standard toeboard on all exposed sides, or

2) A floor hole cover of standard strength and construction. While the cover is not in
place, the floor hole shall be constantly attended by someone or shall be protected by
a removable standard railing.
3) Every floor hole into which persons cannot accidentally walk (on account of fixed
machinery, equipment, or walls) shall be protected by a cover that leaves no openings
HSE MANUAL
Walking & 0 Sept. 1, 2011 19.0
more than 1 inch wide. The cover shall be securely held in place to prevent tools or
materials from falling through.
e. Floor hole covers. Floor opening covers may be of any material that meets the following
strength requirements:
1) The construction of floor opening covers may be of any material that meets the
strength requirements. Covers projecting not more than 1 inch above the floor level
may be used providing all edges are chamfered to an angle with the horizontal of not
over 30 degrees. All hinges, handles, bolts or other parts shall set flush with the floor
or cover surface.
2. Protection for wall openings and holes.
a. Wall openings. Wall openings from which there is a drop of more than 4 feet shall be
guarded by one of the following:
1) Extension platforms onto which materials can be hoisted for handling, will have side
rails or equivalent guards of standard specifications.
2) Wall opening barriers (rails, rollers, picket fences, and half doors) shall be of such
construction and mounting that, when in place at the opening, the barrier is capable of
withstanding a load of at least 200 pounds applied in any direction (except upward) at
any point on the top rail or corresponding member.
a. Where there is a hazard of materials falling through a wall hole, and the lower edge of the
near side of the hole is less than 4 inches above the floor, and the far side of the hole
more than 5 feet above the next lower level, the hole shall be protected by either a
standard toeboard, or an enclosing screen of solid construction.
H. PROTECTION OF OPEN-SIDED FLOORS, PLATFORMS, & RUNWAYS
1. Open-sided floors or platforms. Open-sided floors or platforms 4 feet or more above

adjacent floor or ground level shall be guarded by a standard railing on all open sides except
where there is an entrance to a ramp, stairway, or fixed ladder. The railing shall be provided
with a toeboard, beneath the open sides where:
a. Persons can pass

b. There is moving machinery
c. There is equipment with which falling materials could create a hazard.
2. Runways. Runways shall be guarded by a standard railing on all open sides 4 feet or more
above floor or ground level. Wherever tools, machine parts, or materials are likely to be used
on the runway, a toeboard shall also be provided on each exposed side. Runways used
HSE MANUAL
Walking & 0 Sept. 1, 2011 19.0
exclusively for special purposes (such as oiling, shafting, or filling tank cars) may have the
railing on one side omitted where operating conditions necessitate such omission, providing
the falling hazard is minimized by using a runway of not less than 18 inches wide.
3. Open-sided access ways. Regardless of height, open-sided floors, walkways, platforms, or

runways above or adjacent to dangerous equipment, pickling or galvanizing tanks,
degreasing units, and similar hazards shall be guarded with a standard railing and toe board.
I. STAIRS, RAILINGS AND GUARDS
1. Stairs. Flights of stairs having four or more risers shall be equipped with standard stair
railings or standard handrails. The width to be measured clear of all obstructions except
handrails:
a. On stairways less than 44 inches wide having both sides enclosed, at least one handrail,
preferably on the right side descending.
b. On stairways less than 44 inches wide, having one side open, at least one stair railing on
open side.
c. On stairways less than 44 inches wide having both sides open, one stair railing on each
side.
d. On stairways more than 44 inches wide, but less than 88 inches wide, one handrail on
each enclosed side and one stair railing one each open side.
e. On stairways 88 or more inches wide, one handrail on each enclosed side, one stair
railing on each open side, and one intermediate stair railing located approximately
midway of the width.
2. Winding stairs. Winding stairs shall be equipped with a handrail offset to prevent walking on
all portions of the treads having width less than 6 inches.
3. Railings.
a. Standard railings. A standard railing shall consist of top rail, intermediate rail, and posts,
and shall have a vertical height of 42 inches nominal from upper surface of top rail to
floor, platform, runway, or ramp level. The top rail shall be smooth-surface throughout
the length of the railing. The intermediate rail shall be approximately halfway between
the top rail and the floor, platform, runway, or ramp. The ends of the rails shall not
overhang the terminal posts except where such overhang does not constitute a projection
hazard.
b. Stair railings. A stair railing shall be construction similar to a standard railing but the
vertical height shall be not more than 34 inches nor less than 30 inches from upper
surface of top rail to surface of tread in line with face of riser at forward edge of tread.
c. Pipe railings. Pipe railings, posts and top and intermediate railings shall be at leas 1 ¼
inches nominal diameter with posts spaced not more than 8 feet on centers.
HSE MANUAL
Walking & 0 Sept. 1, 2011 19.0
d. Structural steel railings. Structural steel railings, posts and top and intermediate rails
shall be of 2 inch by 2 inch by 3/8 inch angles or other metal shapes of equivalent
bending strength with posts spaced not more than 8 feet on centers.
J. DEFINITIONS
Floor hole – An opening measuring less than 12 inches but more than 1 inch in its least
dimension, in any floor, platform, pavement, or yard, through which materials but not persons
may fall; such as a belt hole, pipe opening, or slot opening.
Floor opening – An opening measuring 12 inches or more in its least dimension, in any floor,
platform, pavement, or yard through which persons may fall; such as a hatchway, stair or ladder
opening, pit, or large manhole. Floor openings occupied by elevators, dumb waiters, conveyors,
machinery, or containers are excluded.
Handrail – A single bar or pipe supported on brackets from a wall or partition, as on a stairway
or ramp, to furnish persons with a handhold in case of tripping.
Platform – A working space for persons, elevated above the surrounding floor or ground; such as
a balcony or platform for the operation of machinery and equipment.
Runway – A passageway for persons elevated above the surrounding floor or ground level, such
as a footwalk along shafting or a walkway between buildings.
Standard railing – A vertical barrier erected along exposed edges of a floor opening, wall
opening, ramp, platform, or runway to prevent falls of persons.
Standard strength and construction – Any construction of railings, covers, or other guards that
meets the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.23.
Stair railing – A vertical barrier erected along exposed sides of a stairway to prevent falls of
persons.
Toeboard – A vertical barrier at floor level erected along exposed edges of a floor opening, wall
opening, platform, runway, or ramp to prevent falls of materials.
Wall hole – An opening less than 30 inches but more than 1 inch high, of unrestricted width, in
any wall or partition; such as a ventilation hole or drainage scupper.
Wall opening – An opening at least 30 inches high and 18 inches wide, in any wall or partition,
through which persons may fall; such as a yard-arm doorway or chute opening.
HSE MANUAL
OSHA 0 Sept. 1, 2011 20.0
Inspection Prepared By: Approved By: Page:
OSHA INSPECTION PROCEDURES

A. PURPOSE
To communicate LABORDE MARINE, LLC procedures for handling Federal or State OSHA
inspections, including fatalities and other catastrophic events.
B. SCOPE
This corporate Safety Standard applies to all of LABORDE MARINE, LLC facilities,
subsidiary facilities and assets.
C. GENERAL
To ensure consistency in responding to Federal or State OSHA inspections, the instructions herein
have been established.
D. MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS
1. On-Site Visit
a. The Compliance Officer must be directed to the Facility Manager’s Office for meeting
and discussion for the reason of the visit.
b. Request to see the OSHA Compliance Officer’s credentials.
c. Determine the reason for the Compliance Officer’s visit (i.e.; general scheduled
inspection, employee complaint inspection, follow-up or referral inspection, and health or
safety inspection.)
d. Communicate to the compliance officer that all contacts and/or visits by regulatory
agency representatives require notification to LABORDE MARINE, LLC Management,
and that such notification must be accomplished before proceeding any further with the
discussion or inspection. If the compliance officer asks if entrance is being denied,
respond that you do not have the authority to permit an inspection without authorization
from the Corporate Safety Department, and that you must follow procedures established
by LABORDE MARINE, LLC.
e. Do not allow the compliance officer to review any documents, enter work areas, and do
not provide further information regarding number of employees, facility, or type of
products manufactured before contacting the Corporate Safety Department.
HSE MANUAL
OSHA 0 Sept. 1, 2011 20.0
f. If the visit is for a “compliance inspection,” request that the compliance officer provide
you a copy of form OSHA-7 (the complaint is recorded on this form, OSHA is obligated
by law to provide you with a copy of this document).
g. If the compliance officer has a search warrant, FAX copies of these documents to the
Corporate Safety Department.
h. Contact one of the following individuals as soon as possible:
1) Operations Manager
2) HSE Director
i. If you are unable to contact any of the above listed personnel, inform the Compliance
Officer that you were unable to make the required contacts and request that he/she leave a
business card and that you will telephone them as soon as you have contacted the
necessary person(s).
j. The Compliance Officer may:
1) Ask you to use the telephone,
2) Ask again if you are denying entry, or
3) Both
You should allow the CSHO to use the telephone. However, regarding entry, you should
restate that you do not have the authority to allow an inspection without instructions from
LABORDE MARINE, LLC Corporate Safety Department
k. If the CSHO states that he/she will proceed with the inspection unless entry is explicitly
denied, and if you are unable to contact any of the listed corporate personnel, then you
should state that you are denying entry until you are able to contact the Corporate Safety
Department.
l. The Corporate Safety Department will provide instructions as to actions to be taken for
each situation.
2. Letters/Faxes/Other Forms of Communication
i. Immediately refer any and all correspondence from OSHA to LABORDE MARINE,
LLC Corporate Safety Department for guidance on its disposition.
j. The Facility Manager or official representative must respond to correspondence from
OSHA within the required time frame. However, the response must first be sent to the
Corporate Safety Department for review and approval.
3. Fatalities and/or Catastrophes
Notification must be made immediately to LABORDE MARINE MANGEMENT, LLC

Corporate Safety Department or other designated Corporate official upon learning that an
occupational injury or exposure resulted in a fatality or hospitalization of three (3) or more
employees. In no instance should you notify OSHA or other regulatory agency. Notification
HSE MANUAL
OSHA 0 Sept. 1, 2011 20.0
will be made by Corporate Safety Department as per OSHA and/or other applicable State
requirements.
E. CORPORATE ASSISTANCE
The Corporate Safety Department is available to provide assistance, upon request, in the
implementation of this Corporate Safety Standard.
F. EVALUATION
This Corporate Safety Standard will be evaluated annually by the Corporate Safety Department to
determine its adherence to applicable safety standards.

HSE MANUAL
Workplace 0 Sept. 1, 2011 21.0
Violence Prepared By: Approved By: Page:
WORKPLACE VIOLENCE POLICY
A. MANAGEMENT STATEMENT
LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall not condone any act and/or situations that will lead to workplace
violence. It shall be the intention of Management to provide employees a working environment free
of violence. The following shall define and set standards to recognize, identify and establish rules to
help prevent workplace violence. Although workplace violence cannot be totally eliminated,
management feels that through proper supervision, safety meetings, training and supervisory
involvement workplace violence will be greatly reduced.
B. DEFINITIONS
1. Workplace violence shall be defined as the following: The extreme behavior intended to
abuse, injure, murder, causing bodily harm to a person or persons and destroy or damage an
individual’s property. All acts or threats of violence should be taken as serious.
2. Violence may involve the following acts:
 Physical conduct – The use of presence of force to inflict harm or damage.

 Verbal conduct – The use of language to intimidate or imply violence.
 Visual conduct – The use of facial and/or bodily motions to imply violence.
 Written conduct – The use of written medium to imply violence.
HSE MANUAL
3. There are two objects of violence:
 People
 Property
4. Physical conduct against people shall be defined as acts of violence involving assaults, fights,
homicide, rape, stalking, stabling and/or any other act causing bodily harm. Suicide is an act
of self-inflicted violence.
5. Physical conduct against property shall be defined as the destruction, damaging, sabotaging,
or arson of equipment and/or other property.
6. Verbal conduct shall be defined as the use of abusive language to intimidate, threaten
property and/or bodily harm to an individual. This may be in the form of direct contact or
anonymous calls to an individual or individuals.
7. Visual conduct includes making bodily gestures that are threatening, offensive or abusive to
people. Visual acts of violence may include, but not be limited to, the following:
1) Facial expressions
2) Hand and/or finger motions
8. Written acts of violence include the use of letters, notes or other types of media to ridicule,
abuse, imply violence to people or threats of sabotage, destruction or render equipment
useless.
 Verbal and written acts of violence may be made by an individual that is know or
threats may be anonymous.
HSE MANUAL
C. THE FOLLOWING ARE EXAMPLES THAT CAN LEAD TO WORKPLACE
VIOLENCE
1. Horseplay: This type of behavior, no matter how innocent, may lead to violence.
2. Harassment: The person being harassed may retaliate against the party or parties doing the
harassing.
Example: Grabbing someone in a sexual manner, name calling, etc.
3. Arguments: Can lead to fights and/or violence. If you cannot agree with a person, consult
your supervisor.
4. Racial or ethnic remarks: People are very sensitive and may retaliate with violence to
offensive remarks or this type of behavior.
All of the above are prohibited by company policy and are stated in the safety manual.
D. REPORTING
The following guidelines should be used to report workplace violence.
1. Offshore
a. The supervisor in charge of the job should be notified immediately.

b. The supervisor should investigate the complaint and separate the parties involved.
HSE MANUAL
1) Get help to stop fights/assaults
2) Try to determine if weapons (guns, knives, etc.) are involved.

If weapons are involved:
a) Go to a safe place.
b) Dial 911 if inshore. If you are offshore, notify the person-in-charge.
c) Make the people involved aware that they are in Federal waters and are under the
U.S. Coast Guard Rules and regulations. The supervisor has the authority to call
the U.S. Coast Guard and have both parties involved arrested and removed from
the platform.
d) Get the name or names of the persons involved.
e) The parties involved should be sent in from offshore immediately.
f) If possible, send the parties involved inshore at separate times. When you are
unable to send the persons involved inshore at separate times or use different
modes of transportation, it is advisable to send in a third employee to intervene
and keep the involved parties separated.
2. Notify the Safety Director or the person on call at LABORDE MARINE, LLC
immediately. When possible, fax the report to the office.
3. The proper forms are in the Safety Manual and should be used.
4. The supervisor on the job may be your first choice to report violence.
E. DISCIPLINARY ACTION
1. All parties involved in acts of violence will be discipline up to and/or terminated.
a. Letter or reprimand.
b. Reduction of salary.
c. Suspension from work without pay.
d. Termination
HSE MANUAL
MOC 0 Sept. 1, 2011 22.0
MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE
1.0 Purpose:
To describe the Management of Change policies and procedures utilized by Laborde Marine,
LLC
2.0 Scope:
All vessels and facilities operated by Laborde Marine, LLC
3.0 Responsibility:
All employees
4.0 Guidelines:
This policy and associated Management of Change procedures have been developed to ensure
that changes affecting operations are effectively evaluated for risks that may be introduced by the
change, that these risks are mitigated, affected personnel are made aware of the changes, risks
and mitigation methods and to provide a means to ensure that any permanent changes to policies
or procedures are approved by shore based management and disseminated to the facilities
operated by Laborde Marine, LLC.
Changes may include:
Temporary changes to equipment or procedures required to accomplish a task; or
Permanent changes to policies, procedures or equipment that should be communicated to all

facilities.
Management of change procedures do not apply to situations involving equipment replacement
in kind (such as, replacement of one component by another component with the same
performance capabilities), shift or watch changes and crew changes.
While Laborde Marine, LLC recognizes that normal crew changes and shift changes represent
changes, provisions within the SOP Manual cover these changes, specifically the Handover
Procedures which require documentation as well as the Officer of the Watch’s standing orders.
As such, additional documentation, such as the Management of Change Form, need not be
completed in those cases where other documentation exists.
You must review all changes prior to their implementation.

HSE MANUAL
MOC 0 Sept. 1, 2011 22.0
Under this policy, covered changes must be documented on the attached Management of Change
form and maintained aboard the vessel until the change is no longer effective. A copy of the
Management of Change form should be forwarded to the Laborde Marine, LLC shore base at the
time of implementation of the change (or as soon as practical thereafter). as well as when the
change is closed out (no longer effective). All of the following items MUST be addressed.
 The technical basis for the change;
 The impact of the change on safety, health, and the coastal and marine environments;
 The necessary time period to implement the change; and
 Management approval procedures for the change.
Employees, including contractors whose job tasks will be affected by a change in the
operation, must be informed of, and trained in, the change prior to startup of the process or
affected part of the operation.
No part of this policy diminishes the Master’s Overriding Authority with respect to the
operation of the vessel or the Stop Work Authority policies of Laborde Marine, LLC.
Approvals Authority
If a Management of Change event results in a change in the operating procedures of the

Laborde Marine, LLC SOP or HSE manuals, shore based management approval MUST be
obtained from the VP-Operations or the Operations Manager, prior to implementation, noting
specifically who approved the change, the date and time of the approval, and the specific
procedural change being made as well.
If a change is implemented on a temporary basis for the purposes of completing a specific

task affecting a specific facility, the facility manager or vessel master is authorized to
implement the change in accordance with this MOC policy.
IN ALL CASES, A MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE FORM MUST BE COMPLETED,

FORWARDED TO THE LABORDE MARINE, LLC SHOREBASE AND
MAINTAINED ABOARD THE VESSEL UNTIL THE CHANGE IS NO LONGER
EFFECTIVE. ONCE CLOSED OUT, THE MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE FORM
ABOARD THE VESSEL SHOULD BE FORWARDED TO THE LABORDE
MARINE, LLC SHOREBASE FOR MAINTENANCE FOR AT LEAST 2 YEARS.
HSE MANUAL
MOC 0 Sept. 1, 2011 22.0
MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE REPORT FORM
Report originated by Facility or Shorebase: Date:
Description of Change: MOC, What Procedure, if any, is involved?
TEMPORARY _________ PERMANENT __________

Mitigation: (includes actions taken on board, requested shorebase assistance, MOC and any other
recommendations that would correct this change)
Any permanent changes to the facility Plan Approval:

or ANY procedure changes require
Signature _________________
Laborde Marine Shorebase approval.
Print Name ________________
Date:__________
CLOSEOUT APPROVAL: DATE:

HSE MANUAL
Permit to 0 Sept. 1, 2011 23.0
Work Prepared By: Approved By: Page:
PERMIT TO WORK
A. INTRODUCTION
The Permit to Work system is a formal written document designed to control certain types of
work that have been identified as potentially hazardous. It not only authorizes the performance
of potentially hazardous work, but is designed to identify the hazardous aspects of the work and
to specify appropriate safety measures to be taken in the performance of that work.
The implementation of this policy is a line management responsibility and to this end all
managers and supervisors are urged and required to plan an active role in the development of
personnel. In this program, we will identify the levels of permitting authority, and discuss the
responsible person and the competent worker.
B. PERMIT TO WORK
The Permit to Work system is designed to ensure that authorized and properly trained personnel
have considered all potential hazards and that all reasonable precautions have been taken to
reduce risk to personnel involved in performing the task. It is essential that all personnel who are
signatory to the permit fully understand their responsibilities.
No work, which may be considered potentially hazardous, shall be carried out by any person on
any operation other than in accordance with the written instruction of the manager/supervisor in
charge of that operation (Permit Authority) and given to the Responsible Person.
RESPONSIBILITY
It is the primary responsibility of every individual working on a company site to ensure compliance
with safe working practices and to maintain and foster a safe working environment. The effort of
each individual in observing safe working practices is the cornerstone of our safety program.
Within LABORDE MARINE, LLC, the designation of supervisor is not restricted to those
personnel who are designated supervisory personnel by the virtue of their position. The term
“supervisor” includes all personnel who by their knowledge, skill and experience, are capable of
working safely and efficiently without direct supervision and can assist others in doing so.
HSE MANUAL
C. PERMIT AUTHORITY
The Permit Authority should be fully acquainted with the Permit to Work System. They should
ensure that:
 A JSA is completed for each job and reviewed with all workers.
 All work requiring a permit must be clearly identified.
 The permit contains a clear description of the work scope, location, start time and
duration.
 Coincidental permits (in the event two permits exist for a given task) are cross-referenced
clearly and effectively.
 Simultaneous work, which could cause a hazard if allowed to continue at the same time,
is made safe or suspended.
 All persons involved in permit-controlled operations are identified.
 The effectiveness of permit control is not impaired by shift changes.
 Records are maintained in compliance with statutory requirements.
 All personnel working within the Permit to Work System are trained in its use and
maintenance of adequate records.
 All checklists are referenced.
 The time period in which the work may be done (the period of validity) should not extend
beyond a 12-hour period.
 Any change in personnel, or scope of work, requires that the work be stopped and a Pre-
Job Safety Meeting be conducted to discuss the change with all personnel involved, the
requirements of the work itself and the Permit as issued.
 A new Permit to Work should be completed and the old permit closed out at anytime the
permit in force does not provide for the safety of the operation and personnel involved.
HSE MANUAL
D. RESPONSIBLE PERSON (Permit Holder)
The Responsible Person (Permit Holder) shall also be fully acquainted with the operation and
function of the Permit to Work System and in particular, individual functions within the system. The
Responsible Person (Permit Holder) is, among other things, the person who completes the permit.
The Responsible Person (Permit Holder) will be of supervisor status and could also be a
company or third party employee. This should be dependent upon the scope of the work
involved and the nature of the permit.
The Responsible Person (Permit Holder) should be completely familiar with the area concerned
as well as the task and is charged with ensuring that:
All hazards associated with the proposed task have been identified.
All steps to ensure the safety of the site, the workers, and the unit have been identified.
The work site has been examined and all precautions specified, including isolation, to be taken
prior to the work starting, have been taken and will remain effective while the permit is in force.
 Appoint the competent worker(s).
 Appoint the person(s) who may have to accompany the competent worker(s).
 The competent worker(s) is/are fully aware of the precautions taken, any additional
precautions to be taken, and procedures to be followed for the duration of the permit.
 Any additional requirements may be recorded on the permit.
 Ensure that the attached instructions are fully understood and adhered to.
 Issue the Permit to Work to the competent worker(s).
 A copy of the permit is on display at the work site.
 The work site is examined upon completion of the work and/or close out of the permit,
whichever comes first.
 Detail circumstances under which the permit automatically becomes invalid.

HSE MANUAL
 Details of the permit requirements, status of work and work site on non-completed work
are handed over at shift change.
 Any necessary training or instruction is given to workers to ensure that they understand
the Permit to Work System and procedures in general and specific precautions required
for their particular job.
 Any work requiring a permit is not started until the permit has been authorized, signed,
and issued.
 The Permit Authority is informed of any invalidation of the permit due to a change in
work scope or identification of new or additional hazards.
 The Responsible Person (Permit Holder) signs agreeing and accepting responsibility for
the safe implementation of the task.
E. COMPETENT WORKER
The Competent Worker shall:
 Have a good general understanding of the Permit to Work System as well as procedures,
which may be required in any location at which they may have to work.
 Have a good detailed working knowledge of the Permit to Work System and specific
procedures that apply to the job.
 Ensure that they do not start any work on any job requiring a permit until the permit has
been authorized and issued.
 Ensure that they fully understand and comply with the conditions and precautions
specified on the permit issued.
 The Responsible Person (Permit Holder) reports immediately any changes, which may
affect the validity of the permit.
 Be responsible and accountable to work safely in accordance with the Permit to Work
instructions.
F. PERMIT CANCELLATION
Permit Cancellation gives details of the status of the work and the condition of the work site at
the time of completion, or work close out, whichever is soonest.
HSE MANUAL
When the work to which a permit relates has been completed, it is the duty of the Competent
Worker to whom the permit has been issued to:
 Make the work site safe.
 Indicate on the permit the status of the work and the work site.
 Inform ‘Other persons to be notified’ of the status of the work.
 Deliver the work permit to the Responsible Person (Permit Holder).
 Upon receipt of the work permit, the Responsible Person (Permit Holder) shall check and
ensure that the work details provided by the Competent Worker are correct and shall
confirm that the work site has been left in safe condition.
 The Responsible Person shall then sign and return the completed permit to the Permit
Authority for cancellation.
 The Permit Authority shall ensure that a record of issue and return to work permit is
preserved and kept for a period of one year from the date of issue.
 If there is a delay in completion of the work, such as waiting on parts, the permit should
be cancelled and reissued.
 Permits which have not been closed out but for which work has not been completed
should be kept visible and identifiable. They should not be removed/filed until reissue of
Permit to Work has been completed.
G. PRE-JOB SAFETY MEETINGS
This program is designed to be used prior to beginning any job that is out of the ordinary or which
may contain unexpected hazards to personnel. It is not intended to replace the existing safety
meeting format currently being used.
The Pre-Job Safety Meeting is designed to be a simple and effective safety tool for your use.
Using proper planning techniques prior to beginning any job can prevent unwanted incidents and
accidents before they occur.
HSE MANUAL
Pre-Job safety meetings should make sure that:
 You have the right equipment for the job
 Personnel understand how to safely do the job
 The proper safety procedure to do the job is in place
If there are personnel involved in the work that have never performed the job before, a Pre-Job
Safety Meeting (JSA) should be conducted. If there is any doubt about whether or not to conduct
the Pre-Job Safety Meeting, the job supervisor will conduct a Pre-Job safety meeting.
Pre-Job Safety Meeting (JSA) topics include, but are not limited to:
 Hazards involved with the job.
 Operations that involve the crane or rigging.
 Any transfer operations where applicable.
 Any change in personnel or job conditions (environmental, mechanical, etc.) after the job
has begun.
 Proceeding with a job in which a near miss, an incident, or lack of performance occurred.
 Using or handling hazardous chemicals.
 Any job requiring a Permit to Work for:
 Confined space entry

 Lock-out/tag-out (electrical/mechanical isolation)
 Hot work/cold work (working at heights)
 Any time a member of the work group requests a Pre-Job Safety Meeting.
The Pre-Job Safety Meeting (JSA) is one of the most valuable tools available in accident
prevention. The Pre-Job safety meeting checklist format should be used at the beginning of each
work shift to discuss general guidelines for the work to be accomplished during the shift.
HSE MANUAL
*PERMIT TO WORK FLOW CHART

HSE MANUAL
HSE MANUAL
Lockout 0 Sept. 1, 2011 24.0
Tagout Prepared By: Approved By: Page:
LOCKOUT/TAGOUT PROCEDURE
These procedures shall be used to ensure that any area/equipment has been isolated from all potentially
hazardous energy prior to personnel performing any service or maintenance activities where the
unexpected energizing, start up or release of stored energy could cause injury to personnel.
RESPONSIBILITY
Appropriate employees shall receive training in the use of the Lockout/Tagout procedure.
All employees will receive training in understanding the importance of maintaining the integrity of the
Lockout/Tagout procedure.
PREPARATION FOR LOCKOUT/TAGOUT
 Make a survey to locate and identify all isolating devices to be certain which switches,
valves, or other energy isolating devices apply to the equipment to be locked or tagged
out.
 More than one energy source (electrical, mechanical or others) may be involved.
 All equipment shall be locked out or tagged out to protect against accidental or
inadvertent operation when such operation could cause injury to personnel.
 Do not attempt to operate any switch, valve or other energy isolating device when it is
locked or tagged out.
LOCKOUT/TAGOUT SEQUENCE
 Notify all affected employees that the Lockout/Tagout Procedure is being utilized and the
reason for its use.
 The authorized Permit Holder shall know the type and magnitude of energy that the
machine or equipment utilizes and shall understand the hazards involved.
 Do not attempt to operate or remove any switch, valve, or other isolating device where it
is locked or tagged out.
HSE MANUAL
Lockout 0 Sept. 1, 2011 24.0
 If the machine or equipment is operating, it shall be shut down by the normal stopping
procedure (depress stop button, open toggle switch, etc.).
 Operate the switch, valve, or other energy isolating device so that the equipment is
isolated from its energy source. Stored energy (such as that in springs, elevated machine
members, air, gas, steam, or water pressure, etc.) must be dissipated or restrained by
methods such as repositioning, blocking, bleeding down, etc.
 Lockout and/or Tagout the energy isolating devices with proper locks or tags designed
for the purpose. Use additional safety measures as necessary.
 After ensuring that no personnel are exposed, and as a check to ensure that all energy
sources have been disconnected, operate the push button or other normal operating
controls to make certain that the equipment will not operate
Caution: Return operation control(s) to the neutral or off position after the test.
RESTORATION OF MACHINES OR EQUIPMENT TO NORMAL OPERATION
 After servicing and/or maintenance is complete and equipment is ready for normal
operation, check the are to ensure that no one is exposed.
 After all tools have been removed from equipment or machine, guards have been re-
installed and employees are in the clear, remove all Lockout/Tagout devices. Operate the
energy isolating devices to restore energy to the machine or equipment.
HSE MANUAL
Lockout 0 Sept. 1, 2011 24.0
*LOCKOUT/TAGOUT FLOW CHART FOLLOWS THIS PAGE
HSE MANUAL
Confined 0 Sept. 1, 2011 25.0
Space Prepared By: Approved By: Page:
CONFINED SPACE PROCEDURES

Confined spaces, such as tanks or other areas surrounded by surfaces that prevent sufficient ventilation
through normal air movement, may potentially contain dangerous or combustible gases, or may lack
enough oxygen to sustain life.
Therefore, no personnel shall enter any confined space known or suspected to contain any hazards until
the area has been tested, declared safe, and permission given to enter by the Work Permit Authority and
a JSA completed & reviewed with all workers.
TESTING AND PRECAUTIONS FOR CONFINED SPACE ENTRY
 Personnel working in or around confined spaces must be aware of the dangers involved.
Becoming familiar with pre-entry planning and with simple safety measures can ensure
that most dangers are avoided.
 Before personnel are allowed to enter a confined space, testing shall be performed by the
Work Permit authority to assure that the atmosphere in the confined space is free of
dangerous or combustible gases and contains a normal atmospheric oxygen concentration
of between 19.5% and 23.5%. Anything below 19.5% will be considered oxygen
deficient.
 All pumps and lines which may reasonably cause contaminates to flow into the confined
space shall be disconnected, blinded and locked out, or effectively isolated by other
means to prevent development of dangerous air contamination or engulfment.
 A space that is cleared for entry to perform work inside shall be re-tested periodically to
ensure that the atmosphere where the work is being performed remains safe. To maintain
approval for entry and work inside a confined space, re-testing must be done at the
beginning of every shift change when a new permit is implemented, or when a noted
atmospheric change or work location change occur within the tank.
 Any confined space, which is oxygen deficient, shall have a notice conspicuously posted
on or near every personnel access opening to such space. The notice shall include a
warning not to enter the space until testing indicates that the oxygen level is sufficient.
(above 19.5%)
 When ventilating a tank or confined space that has a hazardous atmosphere, consideration
should be given to venting in a manner that does not create a hazard in another space or
to other workers in adjacent areas.
HSE MANUAL
 Oxygen, other than normal air (atmospheric oxygen), should NEVER be used to ventilate
a confined space.
 Continuous ventilation of normal outside air (atmospheric oxygen) shall be provided at

all times while work is being performed in a confined space.
 Personnel may not enter the confined space until air ventilation has eliminated the
hazardous atmosphere and the oxygen is between 19.5% and 23.5%.
 The air ventilation shall be directed to ventilate the immediate areas where personnel will
be present within the space and shall continue until all personnel have left the space.
 The supply of air shall be from a clean source and must not increase the hazards in the
space.
 The atmosphere within the space shall be periodically tested to ensure an uncontaminated
air supply and prevention of accumulation of a hazardous atmosphere.
 If a hazardous atmosphere is detected during entry, personnel shall leave the space
immediately.
 The space should be evaluated to determine how the atmosphere developed and measure
should be implemented to protect personnel prior to any subsequent entry.
 Whenever work inside a confined space is stopped for any significant time (30 min.)
(exclusive of normal breaks) all equipment and tools being used inside the space shall be
removed.
 Personnel required to work inside a tank or other confined space shall wear appropriate
breathing apparatus, depending on previous contents or ventilation inside the tank or
confined space. A person shall be posted outside the space as a watch and must remain at
their post at all times while work is being performed inside the confined space, ready to
render any assistance in case of an emergency.
 This person shall be aware of the hazards that may be faced during entry into the
confined space including information on the mode, signs, or symptoms, and
consequences of exposure.
 They must be aware of behavioral effects of hazard exposure to personnel inside the
confined space.
 An accurate count and identity of personnel inside the confined space must be
maintained.
HSE MANUAL
 The watch must remain outside the confined space during entry operations until relieved
by another qualified person.
 The watch will maintain periodic communication with personnel inside the confined
space and take appropriate measures at any time there is questionable action inside the
confined space.
TEAMWORK
 Safe confined space entry takes teamwork between all partied involved, the entrant, the
watch and the Permit Authority.
 Everyone must do their part, so that any employee who enters a confined space will be
able to complete the task efficiently and safely.
PERMIT AUTHORITY/RESPONSIBILITIES
 Understands the hazards that may be faced during entry, including information on the
signs, consequences, or symptoms and mode of exposure.
 Verifies that the Permit to Work has been properly completed and that all required tests
including JSA’s have been conducted according to proper procedure, before signing the
permit and allowing work to begin.
 Terminates the entry and cancels the permit, as required.
 Removes unauthorized individuals who enter, or attempt to enter, the permitted space
during entry operations.
 Determines that entry operations remain consistent with the terms of the permit and that
acceptable entry conditions are maintained.
 Reissues, or terminates, permit when shifts or conditions change.

HSE MANUAL
*CONFINED SPACE FLOW CHART
HSE MANUAL
Handling, Shipping & 0 Sept. 1, 2011 26.0
Transportation of Prepared By: Approved By: Page:
Hazardous Materials Safety MRC Page 1 of 7
DOT 49 – PARTS 171-180

Handling, Shipping & Transportation of
Hazardous Materials Safely
A. INTRODUCTION
The purpose of this procedure is to provide guidelines for LABORDE MARINE, LLC
personnel to properly transport and handle Hazardous Materials as defined by the Department of
Transportation (DOT). The following information will help to protect the environment and
public, from incidents involving the transportation of hazardous materials, and aid LABORDE
MARINE, LLC in complying with the regulations in Title 49 of the Code of Federal
Regulations 171-180.
This program is designed to regulate the packaging, labeling and transportation of hazardous
materials. It covers the requirements of Transportation of Hazardous Materials.
DOT 49 establishes procedures in:
 The role of the DOT Hazmat Employee
 Describing the purpose of the Hazardous Materials Table
 Understanding the requirements concerning labels and placards
 Describing the contents on shipping papers
 Providing emergency response information
 Employee & Employers role in HM Security
B. RESPONSIBILITIES
The Manager, or his designee, is responsible for ensuring that employees have completed the
required training. Additional responsibilities include the implementation of this policy, and
taking corrective actions on all violations or suspected violations of this policy & program.
The Safety Director is responsible for aiding in the implementation of this policy and program
by:
 Keeping management informed of any incidents related to this procedure.

HSE MANUAL
 Conducting inspections to identify any violation of this policy.
 Follow up on possible non-compliance issues.
The Supervisors are responsible for protecting the safety of personnel and the environment while
properly handling, shipping and/or receiving hazardous materials in their day-to-day work
activities according to the requirements of this policy. In addition they will:
 Ensure that all affected company personnel have been made aware of LABORDE
MARINE, LLC shipping and receiving procedures.
 Ensure that all employees follow the procedures in this policy.
 Report any environmental incidents to their supervisor or manager.
Company personnel are responsible for helping the supervisor in protecting the safety of
personnel and the environment while properly handling, shipping and/or receiving hazardous
materials in their day-to-day work activities according to the requirements of this policy.
C. DEFINITIONS
Hazmat Employee
A HAZMAT employee is a person that can perform any of the following:
 Loading, unloading, and handling of hazardous materials.
 Testing, reconditioning, repairing, modifying, marking, or otherwise representing

containers, drums, or packaging as qualified for use in the transportation of hazardous
materials.
 Preparing hazardous materials for transportation.
 Has the responsibility for the safety of transporting hazardous materials.
 Operates a vehicle used to transport hazardous materials.
Hazardous Materials Table
Hazardous Materials are defined and categorized in the DOT regulations

HSE MANUAL
 The DOT lists the substances that may pose a danger during transportation in the
Hazardous Material Table (49 CFR 172.101).
 The Hazardous Materials Table is an index that references specific safety requirements
pertaining to a particular material in ten (10) major categories.
DOT Hazard Classes
The DOT classification system is designed to identify the precautions necessary to ship
particular hazardous materials. Each Hazard Class has specific regulatory requirements
concerning packing, segregation, and marking. Hazardous materials within the same
classification behave in much the same way. Some of the classifications are further subdivided
into divisions. The level of hazard decreases as the division number increases. There are nine
DOT Hazard Classes:
1. Class 1 – explosive materials
2. Class 2 – gases
3. Class 3 – flammable liquids
4. Class 4 – materials that are flammable solids
5. Class 5 – oxidizers and organic peroxides
6. Class 6 – poisonous and etiologic materials
7. Class 7 – radioactive material
8. Class 8 – corrosive material
9. Class 9 – miscellaneous materials.
Labels and Placards
The DOT requires that packages or containers of hazardous materials be marked to indicate their
contents. The placards are large, brightly colored, diamond shaped signs applied to all four sides
of bulk shipments of hazardous materials. They show a symbol at the top indicating the type of
hazard, a number at the bottom that indicates the DOT Hazard Class, and a description of the
hazard (“Flammable”), or the UN Chemical ID Number in the middle
Labels are similar to placards, but they are smaller and do not usually have the UN Chemical ID
Number printed on them.
HSE MANUAL
Labels are used on non-bulk shipments of individual packages. The UN Chemical ID Number
must be written on the package near the label. The DOT requires that certain colors be used on
placards and labels. These are the colors associated with particular hazards:
1. Orange – explosive hazards
2. Red – flammable chemicals
3. Green – nonflammable chemicals
4. Yellow – oxidizers, organic peroxides, radioactive materials
5. Blue – water reactive chemicals
6. Black – poisons and corrosives
Shipping Papers
A Shipping Paper(s) is a document that must accompany a hazardous material shipment and must
include these seven items:
1. Proper Shipping Name
2. Hazard Class
3. UN/NA Identification Number
4. Packing Group
5. Total Quantity
6. Shipper’s Certification
7. RQ if shipment meets RQ amount.
Emergency Response Information

HSE MANUAL
Emergency Response Information must accompany a shipment of hazardous materials. This
information must be kept on the vehicle away from the hazardous material being transported.
Regardless of the format, the Emergency Response Information must include the following:
1. The basic description and technical name of the hazardous material.
2. Immediate hazards to health.
3. Risks of fire or explosion.
4. Immediate precautions to be taken in the event of an accident or incident.
5. Immediate methods for handling fires.
6. Initial methods for handling spills or leaks in the absence of fire.
7. Preliminary first aid measures.
8. The products MSDS is most often used (shipped) with the material to serve as emergency
information. It can be substituted with a copy of the materials 3-digit guide page
information as found in the Emergency Response Guide Book (ERG).
DOT Labeling
When transporting hazardous chemicals to and from work sites, LABORDE MARINE, LLC is
required by law to use the (DOT) Department of Transportation Identification, meaning:
a. All chemicals being transported must have an MSDS sheet accompanying it.
b. This applies to all work operations where LABORDE MARINE, LLC employees may
be exposed to hazardous substances under normal working conditions or during an
emergency situation.
D. SAFETY TRAINING
Safety training must cover:
 Emergency response information required by 49 CFR Part 172, Subpart G-Emergency

Response Information.
HSE MANUAL
 Measures to protect the individual employee from the hazards associated with hazardous
materials to which he or she may be exposed in the workplace, including specific
measures our company has implemented to protect employees from exposure.
 Methods and procedures for avoiding accidents, such as the proper procedures for
handling packages containing hazardous materials.
There is, however, a limitation on the coverage of requirements for safety training. Any hazmat
employee who repairs, modifies, reconditions, or tests packaging as qualified for use in the
transportation for hazardous materials, and who does not perform any other function subject to
the requirements of the DOT regulations for shippers, transporters, and manufacturers, is not
subject to the safety training requirement.
E. SECURITY AWARENESS TRAINING
Hazmat employees must receive training that provides an awareness of security risks associated
with hazardous materials transportation and methods designed to enhance security. This training
must cover how to recognize and respond to possible security threats, such as a shipment of
hazardous materials being stolen for use as a weapon.
Security awareness training may be completed on the hazmat employee’s regularly scheduled
refresher training date or within 90 days for new employees. As of March 24, 2006, all hazmat
employees must have security awareness training.
F. TRAINING FREQUENCY
Initial Training
Initial training is required for all hazmat employees subject to the following conditions:
 Training must be completed within 90 days after employment.
 Any hazmat employee who changes hazardous materials job functions must complete
training in the new job function(s) within 90 days after the change.
Recurrent Training
Hazmat employees must receive the DOT training required for their positions at least once every
three years.
HSE MANUAL
Any relevant training received from a previous employer or other source may be used to satisfy
the DOT requirements for initial or recurrent hazmat training, provided that a current record of
training is obtained from the hazmat employee’s previous employee
Testing and Recordkeeping
Each hazmat employee must be tested by appropriate means on the training subjects covered by
the general awareness, function-specific, and safety training.
LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall create and retain a record of current training for all hazmat
employees. The record must include at least the last three years. It must be retained for as long
as that employee is employed by that employer as a hazmat employee and for 90 days after
termination of employment as a hazmat employee.
Training records shall include the following information:
 Hazmat employee’s name
 Most recent completion date of the hazmat employee’s training
 Description, copy, or location of training materials used to meet the requirements for
general awareness, function-specific, and safety training.
 Name and address of the person providing the training
 Certification that the hazmat employee has been trained and tested as required by the
DOT hazmat training regulations
HSE MANUAL
Hot 0 Sept. 1, 2011 27.0
HOT WORK
A. INTRODUCTION
This section defines the minimum requirements for conduction hot work safely. If applicable,
local requirements should be followed.
B. RESPONSIBILITY
It is the responsibility of the site supervisor to ensure that all hot work at the location, including
that of contractors, is performed in accordance with this policy.
The responsibility for having the work area, tanks, trucks, vessels, pipelines, and other
equipment cleaned and issuing hot work permits rests with the Management, or designee.
Responsibility for establishing procedure and providing methods or communications that assure
the work will be done in a safe manner rests jointly with the HSE Director, the Supervisor, and
those performing the work.
Management and the HSE Director are responsible for identifying the following:
1. An approved list of Company personnel competent to use welding or burning equipment.
2. A list of Company qualified individuals to maintain combustible gas indicators. These

personnel should be thoroughly familiar with the instruments owned by the Company, the
use and the calibration thereof, including instrument limitations.
C. HOT WORK ENVIRONMENTS
This section covers procedures required for the following:
1. Hot work or work involving flame or spark-producing equipment in the area or on equipment
that contains or has contained flammable materials or acids.
2. Personnel entry of vessels or enclosures which must be entered through a manhole or

constricted opening more than 4 feet (1.2 meters) deep in which hot work will be performed.
3. Breaking into pipelines, pumps, compressors, or any other equipment that contains or has
contained toxic, flammable, or corrosive materials, hazardous temperatures or hazardous
pressures.
4. High voltage equipment.

HSE MANUAL
Hot 0 Sept. 1, 2011 27.0
D. PROCEDURES
First consideration must be given to removing the equipment from the hazardous area, then ask:
1. Is hot work necessary?
2. Can the job be done without using spark-producing or flame-producing equipment?
Experienced or trained welders must do all hot work activities including welding, cutting, or
burning.
Before allowing a third party contractor to perform Hot Work, the responsible Supervisor must
ensure that tanks or other Hot Work locations and/or equipment are properly cleaned and
prepared for hot work.
Liquid tanks, liquid trailers, vessels, or other equipment on which hot work is to be done must be
cleared of hazardous material.
1. A test for flammables must be made. Any positive reading must result in a thorough
cleaning.
2. All equipment must be made ready for hot work by draining, steaming, and/or washing.
After cleaning, a test for flammables must be made. Any positive reading must result in
further cleaning. Make sure there is an approved method for disposing of, or recycling,
contaminated water.
Flammable or combustible materials in the immediate area of hot work must be removed or
protected to prevent a fire from slag or sparks.
Fuel tanks shall be protected from sparks or slag. Tanks should be filled to capacity to avoid
vapor space.
Job planning for hot work shall include fire-extinguishing equipment positioned nearby, within
easy reach, and in the exit direction for each hot work location. A truck extinguisher or water
hose can be used for this purpose.
If isolation of lines, tanks, vessels, or equipment is necessary, this must be accomplished by

blinding or disconnecting as close as possible to the equipment to be worked on and may require
following the Lockout/Tagout procedures.
HSE MANUAL
Hot 0 Sept. 1, 2011 27.0
Contaminated tanks must be filled with water or purged with an air mover. As an option, fill the
tank with an inert atmosphere, such as carbon dioxide, before starting hot work.
The area where flammables are handled or produced must be tested with a reliable combustible
gas indicator.
1. The qualified person making the check shall be familiar with limitations of the instrument.
2. The combustible gas instrument used for such tests must have been properly checked within
the same day, prior to the test.
3. To assure the instrument is operative, make a simple check (with the approved calibration
kit) not more than 15 minutes prior to and after taking a test or series of tests.
4. Do not, under any circumstances, check the instrument with lighter fluid, gasoline, or
alcohol. These liquids can severely damage the instrument.
5. Any positive reading on the combustible gas meter must be accepted as an unsafe condition,
and no hot work shall be permitted until the situation is corrected. Be sure to allow the
instrument to purge itself with clean air before another check is made.
E. THE HOT WORK PERMIT
Many safety steps that are not needed for general confined space entry are necessary for hot
work. Below are some of the steps often listed, either on the entry permit or on a separate hot
work permit.
a. Inspection
 Inspect hot work equipment before each use, to make sure it is in good condition
b. Combustibles
 Remove or protect combustibles adjacent to the hot work location.
 If possible, take all flammable liquids and combustibles, such as paper and
scrap wood out of the confined space.
 If these materials cannot be removed, shield them with flame-proof
covers.
 Sweep the floor free of combustibles.
 Lagging cloth or tarps may be needed to protect machinery and other
workers from sparks and spatter.
HSE MANUAL
Hot 0 Sept. 1, 2011 27.0
 Protect combustible floors and walls
 Combustible floors can be protected with fire-resistant covers or damp

sand, or by wetting them down with water.
 For arc welding, if floors are wetted down, protect workers from shock.
 Shield combustible walls and ceilings with fire resistant covers.
 Do not weld on metal walls that have combustible coverings, or on pipes
that are touching combustible walls close enough to catch fire.
 Protect nearby areas.
 Inspect areas bordering the confined space. Clean or ventilate them if

needed.
 Before performing hot work on a metal wall, remove combustibles from
the other side of the wall, or post a fire watch in that area.
 Place flame-proof covers over any ducts or other openings in the floor or
walls adjacent to the hot work.
c. Fire Hazards
 If sprinklers are needed to protect the area, make sure they are in working order.
 Fire-extinguishing equipment must be on hand and ready for instant use.
Pails of water, bucket of sand, hoses or portable fire extinguishers can be used.
 A fire watch is needed in case a fire starts, or if combustible materials are
exposed to fire.
 The fire watch must be properly trained and equipped.
 If hot work creates a fire hazard in nearby areas, a watch is needed there too.
 In case of fire, the watch notifies the person doing the hot work.
 The fire watch should not try to fight the fire unless the watch has the ability and
equipment to put it out.
 If the fire watch is unable to handle the fire, the alarm should be sounded.
 The watch must stay at the post at least one-half hour after the hot work is
finished.
d. Hot Work Equipment
 Never take compressed gas cylinders or welding machines into any confined
space.
 Leave this equipment outside in a place where it will not block any exit from the
space.
 Block wheel-mounted equipment to keep it from moving.
 Do not use torches to soften or remove combustible materials.
HSE MANUAL
Hot 0 Sept. 1, 2011 27.0
 Shut down all equipment when it is not in use.
 If gas welding is stopped for any significant time, such as during lunch:
 Close the torch valve.

 Shut off the gas supply at a point outside the confined space.
 If practical, remove the torch and hose from the space.
 Remove all open-ended fuel gas or oxygen hoses from the space
immediately after disconnecting them from the torch.
 If arc welding is stopped for a significant time:
 Remove all electrodes from their holders.

 Place the holders where accidental contact cannot occur.
 Disconnect the machine from its power source.

 Close all gas manifold isolation valves at the end of your shift.
 Overnight, remove all hot work equipment from the confined space.
F. TRAINING
Each employee authorized to perform hot work operations shall receive training and be tested in
order to ensure their ability to effectively evaluate the hot work area. This training shall include
the minimum:
1. Knowledge of facility operations.
2. Company Safety Procedures and facility rules.
3. Nature of the products/chemicals that may be involved
4. Hazards associated with the hot work
5. Special hazards associated with in-service equipment
6. Unsafe situations that may, or have the potential to develop
7. Hot work procedures
8. Confined Space procedures
9. Lockout/Tagout procedures
10. Fire extinguisher equipment

HSE MANUAL
Hot 0 Sept. 1, 2011 27.0
11. Proper operation and limitations of combustible gas indicators
12. Emergency procedures
13. Authority and responsibility of the position
Each employee should have sufficient on-the-job experience to fully understand the potential
hazards; operational conditions and procedures prior to being assigned hot work permit
responsibility.
Fire watches shall be trained to recognize a potential unsafe condition, how to conduct an
inspection of the work area, the proper use of fire extinguishers, how to assess the magnitude of
an incident, and how to summons additional emergency action.
HSE MANUAL
SWO 0 Sept. 1, 2011 28.0
STOP WORK OBLIGATION PROGRAM
A. POLICY AND PROGRAM OVERVIEW
This program formally establishes the Stop Work Obligation (SWO) of all LABORDE
MARINE, LLC employees to suspend individual tasks or group operations when the control of
HSE risk is not clearly established or understood.
It is the policy of LABORDE MARINE, LLC that:
 All employees and contractors have the authority and obligation to stop any task or
operation where concerns or question exist regarding the control of HSE risk,
 No work will resume until all stop work issues and concerns have been adequately
addressed, and
 Any form of retribution or intimidation directed at any individual or company for

exercising their authority as outlined in this program will not be tolerated.
As with any policy, accountability for non-compliance will follow established LABORDE
MARINE, LLC procedures.
B. ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES
Persons in the following roles have responsibilities in support of this program:
 All LABORDE MARINE, LLC employees are responsible to initiate a “stop work”
intervention when warranted, support the intervention of others and properly report
all “stop work” actions.
 Line Supervisors are responsible to create a culture where SWO is exercised freely,
honor request for ‘stop work’, to resolve issues before operations resume, recognize
proactive participation and ensure that all ‘stop work’ actions are properly reported
with required follow-up report completed.
 Management must establish the clear expectation to exercise SWO, create a culture
where SWO is exercised freely, resolve SWO conflicts when they arise and hold
those accountable that choose not to comply with established SWO policies.
HSE MANUAL
SWO 0 Sept. 1, 2011 28.0
 HSE is support of operations is responsible for monitoring compliance with the
requirements of this program, maintenance of associated documents, processes and
training materials, identification of trends, sharing of lessons learned and publication
of required scorecards.
C. INTERVENTION PROCEDURE
In general terms, the SWO process involves a stop, notify, correct and resume approach for the
resolution of a perceived unsafe work action(s) or condition(s).
Much like behavior based safety processes, a workforce that clearly understands how to initiate,
receive and respond to a “stop work” intervention is more likely to participate. Though obvious
to some, the following procedures create an environment where people know how to act and
respond. Though situations may differ, the following steps should be the framework for all stop
work interventions.
D. SWO PROCEDURES
STEP:
1. When a person identifies a perceived unsafe condition, act, error, omission, or lack of
understanding that could result in an undesirable event, a “stop work” intervention shall
be immediately initiated with the person(s) potentially at risk.
2. If the supervisor is readily available and the affected person(s) are not in immediate risk,
the “stop work action” should be coordinated through the supervisor. If the supervisor is
not readily available or the affected person(s) are in immediate risk, the “stop work”
intervention should be initiated directly with those at risk.
3. “Stop work” interventions should be initiated in a positive manner by briefly introducing

yourself and starting a conversation with the phrase “I am using my stop work authority
because…” Using this phrase will clarify the users intent and set expectations as detailed
in this procedure.
4. Notify all affected personnel and supervision of the stop work issue. If necessary, stop
associated work activities, remove person(s) from the area, stabilize the situation and
make the area safe as possible.
5. All parties shall discuss and gain agreement on the stop work issue.
HSE MANUAL
SWO 0 Sept. 1, 2011 28.0
6. If determined and agreed that the task or operation is OK to proceed as is (i.e., the stop
work initiator was unaware of certain facts or procedures) the affected persons should
thank the initiator for their concern and proceed with the work.
7. If determined and agreed that the stop work issue is valid, then every attempt should be
made to resolve the issue to all affected person’s satisfaction prior to the commencement
of work.
8. If the stop work issue cannot be resolved immediately, work shall be suspended until
proper resolution is achieved. When opinions differ regarding the validity of the stop
work issue or adequacy of the resolution actions, the location’s “person in charge” shall
make the final determination. Details regarding differences of opinions and resolution
actions should be included in the documented report.
9. Positive feedback should be given to all affected employees regarding resolution of the
stop work issue. Under no circumstances should retribution be directed at any person(s)
who exercise in good faith their stop work authority as detailed in this program.
10. All stop work interventions and associated detail shall be documented and reported as
detailed in this program.
E. REPORTING
All “stop work” interventions exercised under the authority of this program shall be documented for
lessons learned and corrective measures to be put in place utilizing existing reporting protocols (i.e.
near miss or BBS report forms). The near miss report should contain the words “STOP WORK” at
the beginning of the incident description in order to differentiate if from traditional near miss reports.
“STOP WORK” reports shall be reviewed by line supervision in order to:
 Measure participation
 Determine quality of interventions and follow-up
 Trend common issues and identify opportunities for improvement
 Facilitate sharing of lessons learned.

HSE MANUAL
SWO 0 Sept. 1, 2011 28.0
The HSE department will regularly publish incident details regarding the number of “stop work”
actions reported by location as well as details regarding common trends and learning’s.
F. FOLLOW-UP
It is the desire outcome of any ‘stop work’ intervention that the identified safety concerns be
addressed to the satisfaction of all involved persons prior to the resumption of work. Although most
issues can be adequately resolved in a timely fashion at the job site, occasionally additional
investigation and corrective actions may be required to identify and address root causes.
“Stop Work” interventions that require additional investigation or follow-up will be handled
utilizing existing procedures for incident investigation and follow-up.
G. RECOGNITION
In order to build and reinforce a culture in which SWO is conducted properly, line supervisors are
encouraged to positively recognize employee participation in the program.
At a minimum, each line supervisor should informally recognize individuals when they exercise
their authority to “stop work” or demonstrate constructive participation in our “stop work”
intervention program. This informal recognition need be no more than an expression of
appreciation for a job well done. Additionally, formal recognition of selected examples of “stop
work” interventions and those responsible should be made during regularly scheduled safety
meetings.
The HSE department will regularly publish selected “stop work” actions that occur throughout
LABORDE MARINE, LLC, recognizing those responsible for the SWO program and
contribution to HSE continuous improvement.
HSE MANUAL
SWO 0 Sept. 1, 2011 28.0
H. TRAINING
Training regarding this SWO Policy and Program will be conducted as part of all new employee
orientation prior to their initial assignment. Additionally, a review of the SWO Policy shall be
completed as part of all field location JSA safety briefings and regularly in safety meetings.
Documentation of training will include the employee’s name, the date(s) of training and the
subject.
HSE MANUAL
Journey 0 Sept. 1, 2011 29.0
Management Prepared By: Approved By: Page:
JOURNEY MANAGEMENT POLICY

Journey management provides a systematic approach to travel to work sites. Due to remote work
locations this policy was developed to help ensure safe travel to and from work sites.
A. PRE-TRAVEL PREPARATION
1. Training: Prior to traveling, an assessment must be made to ensure the employee has the
required training based on the mode of transportation and/or geographic location of the work
site. Training required may include, but is not limited to:
a) Defensive Driving if driving a company vehicle

b) Marine Debris awareness if traveling offshore
c) Water survival if traveling offshore
d) HUET if traveling offshore by helicopter
2. Credentials: Required credentials must be identified based on the destination and role at the
work location. All credentials must be valid. Credentials may include, but are not limited to:
a) Government Issued ID
b) Passport
c) TWIC
d) SafeGulf
e) Company ID
3. Health Requirements: If traveling internationally, LABORDE MARINE, LLC will consult

with LABORDE MARINE, LLC physician to determine the need for required
immunizations or medical testing required based on the location of the work site.
4. Work Schedule: When planning travel, employees are to take into consideration when the
work is to begin or when the employee will finish working and the amount of time it takes to
travel to or from the work site. Plans should include arriving early and arranging housing if
travel time will result in the employee exceeding safe work hours.
B. TRAVEL REQUIREMENTS
1. All incidents occurring during travel must be reported according to the accident
reporting policy.
HSE MANUAL
Journey 0 Sept. 1, 2011 29.0
2. Notify LABORDE MARINE, LLC of any special medical needs.
3. Keep in contact with LABORDE MARINE, LLC during the journey and at completion of
the journey.
4. Always act in favor of the safety and the protection of people, environment, and company
assets.
5. Be physically and mentally fit, paying attention to hours worked, amounts of sleep, time of
the day, position in the natural alertness cycle, food intake, etc.
6. Follow only the authorized route and itinerary.
7. Take part of any facility orientations at any destination or provider of transportation.
8. Complete a vehicle inspection prior to starting any trip.
9. Follow all requirements of LABORDE MARINE, LLC vehicle and driving policy.
10. Report any changes in your travel plan to LABORDE MARINE, LLC ASAP.
HSE MANUAL
Fatigue 0 Sept. 1, 2011 30.0
FATIGUE MANAGEMENT
A. INTRODUCTION
Fatigue affects a person’s health and increases the chance of workplace injuries occurring. It
also reduces performance and productivity in the workplace.
Factors contributing to fatigue outlined in this program are:
 Mental and physical demands of work
 Work scheduling and planning
 Working time
 Environmental conditions, and
 Individual factors
B. FATIGUE
Fatigue is an acute and/or ongoing state of tiredness that leads to mental or physical exhaustion
and prevents people from functioning within normal boundaries. Fatigue has obvious
implications for the workplace and can also lead to long-term effects on health.
C. TRAINING
All employees will receive Fatigue Management training at the time of hire and annually
thereafter. At a minimum the training will consist of:
 The body clock and how fatigue can affect it
 Risk factors for fatigue
 Symptoms of fatigue
 Effective control measures for fatigue such as work scheduling
 Procedures for preventing fatigue such as incident reporting

HSE MANUAL
Fatigue 0 Sept. 1, 2011 30.0
 Effects of medication, drugs and alcohol
 Nutrition, fitness and heal issues relating to fatigue
 Balancing work and life demands, and
 Specific training and education for managers and supervisors
D. CONTROLLING FATIGUE
Mental and Physical Demands of Work
Measures that can be used to address the risk associated with the mental and physical demands of
work include:
 Use machinery and equipment (e.g. ergonomic furniture, lifting equipment and anti-
fatigue matting for repetitive tasks performed while standing) to eliminate or reduce the
excessive physical demands of the job
 Eliminate excessive mental and physical demands from the job
 Redesign the job to include a variety of mental and physical tasks
 Introduce job rotation to limit a build-up of mental and physical fatigue, and
 Use rest periods (in addition to scheduled meal breaks)
LABORDE MARINE, LLC will periodically evaluate and improve work task as necessary to
control fatigue.
Work Scheduling and Planning
Measures that can be used to address the risks associated with work scheduling and planning
include:
HSE MANUAL
Fatigue 0 Sept. 1, 2011 30.0
 Reduce the amount of time workers need to spend performing physically and mentally
demanding work
 Schedule, to the best of your ability, safety critical work outside low body clock periods
(i.e. not between 2am and 6am and, to a lesser degree between 2pm and 4pm)
 Manage workload and work-pace change caused by machinery breakdowns and planned
and unplanned absences
 Avoid working arrangements that provide incentives to work excessive hours
 Include adequate rest periods in the work schedule and accommodate for napping and
sleeping if necessary
 Provide adequate breaks between shifts to allow workers enough recovery time (e.g. time
needed for traveling, eating, sleep and socializing)
 Ensure there are adequate workers and other resources to do the job without placing
excessive demands on staff, and
 Ensure work demands gradually increase towards the middle of the shift and decrease
towards the end
Measures that can be used to address the risk associated with working at night include:
 Consider whether night work is necessary and rearrange schedules so non-essential work
isn’t carried out at night
 Allow an adequate rest period between each set of shifts for night-shift workers
 Keep sequential night shifts to a minimum
 Provide adequate period of non-work following a sequence of night shifts
 Allow regular night workers periods of normal night’s sleep to catch up on their sleep
debts
 Arrange shifts so that day sleep is not restricted, and

HSE MANUAL
Fatigue 0 Sept. 1, 2011 30.0
Working Time
Measures that can be used to address the risks associated with working time include:
 Develop a working-hours policy on daily work hours, maximum average weekly hours,
total hours over a three-month period and work-related travel
 Eliminate or reduce the need to work extended hours of overtime
 Design working hours to allow for good quality sleep and enough recovery time between
work days or shifts for traveling, eating, washing and sleeping
 Eliminate or reduce the need to work long shifts for more than three consecutive days,
and
 Schedule work for hours when the risks may be lower – for example, complex and safety-
critical tasks are best undertaken during normal day shifts when workers are less likely to
be fatigued.
Measures that can be used to address the risks associated with shift work include:
 Avoid quick shift changeovers, such as finishing at 11pm and starting again at 7am
 Control overtime, shift swapping and on-call duties
 Use a forward-rotation shift system (i.e. morning to afternoon, afternoon to night)
 Allocate shift workers consecutive days off, including some weekends, depending upon
their fatigue risk level
 Try to fit shift times in with the availability of public transport
 Provide alternative transport at end of overtime/long shift
 Limit shifts to 12 hours
 Set shift rosters ahead of time and avoid sudden changes of shifts to allow workers to
plan leisure time
HSE MANUAL
Fatigue 0 Sept. 1, 2011 30.0
 Where split shifts are used, arrange timing so sleep of workers is not disrupted due to the
times they are required to work
 Set standards and allow time for communication at shift handovers, and
 Offer alternatives to workers who may have difficulties adjusting to working hours
Environmental Conditions
Measures that can be used to address the risks associated with environmental conditions include:
 Avoid working during periods of extreme temperature
 Install heating devices in cold work environments
 Install cooling devices and/or provide access to cooled area in hot work environments
 Provide shelter in hot work environments
 Install ventilation and mechanical cooling devices in hot, confined work environments
 Provide adequate facilities for rest, sleep, meal breaks, onsite accommodation (if
appropriate) and other essential requirements, such as bathroom facilities
 Install adjustable, vibration-free seats in appropriate machinery and vehicles, and
 Ensure the workplace and surroundings are well lit, safe and secure
Individual Factors and Factors Outside Work
Ways to address individual factors and factors outside work include:
 Provide training and information on fatigue management, and
 Use the following tips on avoiding fatigue
o Sleep
 The best sleep is night sleep

HSE MANUAL
Fatigue 0 Sept. 1, 2011 30.0
 If sleeping during the day, darken the room and allow more time than
normal to fall asleep
 Choose a quiet, peaceful place to sleep and adhere to a routine
 Seven to eight hours of uninterrupted sleep is adequate
 Seek medical advice for excessive snoring, irregular breathing and
insomnia
o Drugs and Alcohol
 Avoid excessive consumption of alcohol – it affects quality of sleep

 Avoid stimulants – they delay the need for sleep
 Do not consume coffee or tea before going to bed
o Medical Conditions
 If you have medical condition, you should seek advise from your doctor if
you are in a job that involves shift work or long working hours
 Tell your employer any medical conditions that may limit your ability to
work or make you susceptible to fatigue
 Avoid chronic use of over the counter or prescription drugs to increase
your mental alertness (i.e., energy drinks, pills, etc.)
 As your doctor for an alternative medication if it causes you drowsiness
when you need to be awake
o Fitness
 Maintain a basic level of fitness

 Exercise regularly
 Keep your weight in check – obesity contributes to sleeping disorders
E. REPORTING
Employees who believe they are suffering from fatigue/tiredness and lack of mental acuity must
report this to their supervisor immediately. The supervisor must investigate the report and take
appropriate action to prevent loss.

HSE MANUAL
Access to 0 Sept. 1, 2011 31.0
Medical Records Prepared By: Approved By: Page:
ACCESS TO EMPLOYEE EXPOSURE AND MEDICAL RECORDS
A. DEFINITIONS
Access: Means the right and opportunity to examine and copy.

Designated representative: Means any individual or organization to whom an employee give written
authorization to exercise a right of access.
Employee Exposure Record: Means a record containing any of the following kinds of information;
environmental (workplace) monitoring, biological monitoring, or material safety data sheets or a
chemical inventory.
Employee Medical Record: Means a record concerning the health status of an employee which is
made or maintained by a physician, nurse, or other health care personnel or technician, including;
medical and employment questionnaires or histories, results of medical examinations, medical
opinions, first aid records, descriptions of treatments, and employee medical complaints.
B. PRESERVATION OF RECORDS
LABORDE MARINE, LLC will assure the preservation and retention of records as follows:
Employee Medical Records – Preserved and maintained for the duration of employment plus thirty
(30) years.
Employee Exposure Records – Preserved and maintained for at least thirty (30) years.
In the event that LABORDE MARINE, LLC ceases to do business, all records subject to this
section will be transferred to the successor company. If there is no successor company or there are
plans to dispose of records required to be preserved for at least 30 years, records will be transferred
to the Director of the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) if so required
by a specific occupational safety and health standard.
C. ACCESS TO RECORDS
Whenever an employee or designated representative requests access to a record, LABORDE

MARINE, LLC shall assure that access is provided in a reasonable time, place, and manner. If
access to the record cannot reasonably be provided within fifteen (15) working days, LABORDE
MARINE, LLC shall within the fifteen (15) working days apprise the employee or designated
representative requesting the record of the reason for the delay and the earliest date when the record
can be made available.
HSE MANUAL
Whenever an employee or designated representative requests a copy of a record, a copy of the record
will be provided without cost to the employee or representative.
Whenever access is requested to an analysis, which reports the contents of employee medical records
by either direct identifier (name, address, social security number, payroll number, etc.) or by
information which could reasonably be used under the circumstances indirectly to identify specific
employees (exact age, height, weight, race, sex, date of initial employment, job title, etc.), any
personal identifiers will be removed before access is provided. If removal of these identifiers is no
feasible, access to the personally identifiable portions of the analysis will not be provided.
OSHA Access
Upon request, LABORDE MARINE, LLC will provide prompt access of the representatives of the
Assistant Secretary of Labor for Occupational Safety and Health to employee exposure and medical
records and to analyses using exposure or medical records.
Trade Secrets
If due to Trade Secrets LABORDE MARINE, LLC denies a written request for disclosure of a
specific chemical identity, the denial must:
 Be provided to the health professional, employee or designated representative within

thirty days of the request
 Be in writing
 Include evidence to support the claim that the specific chemical identity is a trade secret
 State the specific reasons why the request is being denied
 Explain in detail how alternative information may satisfy the specific chemical identity
D. WHO MUST BE TRAINED
All employees.
E. TRAINING FREQUENCY
At initial assignment with an annual refresher. Retraining can be done through either of the
following options:
HSE MANUAL
 By posting an employee notification form once a year indicating where the exposure and
medical records are maintained, the person responsible for maintaining and providing
access to the records, and each employee’s right of access to the records, or
 By providing annual refresher training covering the aspects listed below.
F. TRAINING CONTENT
 The existence, location, and availability of records.
 The identification of the person responsible for maintaining and providing access to the
records.
 Each employee’s right of access to the records.
 Explanation of how to access records.
G. TRAINER QUALIFICATIONS
Not specified by the standard, however, training should be provided by a person who is
knowledgeable of OSHA recordkeeping requirements.
H. RECORDKEEPING REQUIREMENTS
 Training documented on LABORDE MARINE, LLC Safety Meeting Form, to include

the date of training, the name and job title of person providing training, contents of
training materials, and names of all attendees or
 Post a copy of the LABORDE MARINE, LLC Employee Notification Form annually
on employee bulletin boards
I. ADDITIONAL COMMENTS/REQUIREMENTS
LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall keep a copy of Section 1910.20 and its appendices, and make
copies readily available, upon request, to employees. LABORDE MARINE, LLC will also
distribute to current employees any information materials concerning this section, which are made
available to the employer by the Assistant Secretary of Labor for Occupational Safety and Health. A
copy of 1910.20 is available, upon request, from the Corporate Department of OSHA compliance.
HSE MANUAL
Bloodborne 0 Sept. 1, 2011 32.0
Pathogens Prepared By: Approved By: Page:
BLOODBORNE PATHOGENS
A. INTRODUCTION
The purpose of this program is to inform all employees of LABORDE MARINE, LLC
exposure control plan. It also provides awareness information regarding universal precautions
necessary for protecting company employees from exposure to bloodborne pathogens.
LABORDE MARINE, LLC has developed the following exposure control plan to comply with
the OSHA bloodborne pathogens standard 29 CFR 1910.1030.
B. SCOPE
LABORDE MARINE, LLC has determined that company personnel are not designated
Emergency First Responders as defined under LABORDE MARINE, LLC’s Exposure Control
plan, and field personnel do not have job duties that include reasonably anticipated occupational
exposure, or contact with blood, or other potentially infectious materials.
C. RESPONSIBILITIES
LABORDE MARINE, LLC management is responsible for ensuring that employees have
completed the training required by this procedure, as well as:
1. The implementation of the program
2. Documentation of the program
3. Ensure that all employees have access to the exposure control plan.
The HSE Director is responsible for maintaining and managing LABORDE MARINE, LLC’s
written bloodborne pathogens exposure control program. These responsibilities include the
following:
1. Recordkeeping required to ensure compliance with current standards.
2. Notifying LABORDE MARINE, LLC doctor of any exposure incident.
3. Contacting LABORDE MARINE, LLC doctor to request post-incident follow-up

procedures, including any required medical test.
4. Ensuring that non-designated employees have been provided post exposure evaluation
and follow-up in the event of an accidental on-the-job exposure.
HSE MANUAL
5. The responsibility for the overall effectiveness of the exposure control program.
All company personnel are required to obtain the awareness training on bloodborne pathogens
awareness. For company designated employees, this includes:
1. Exposure determination
2. Training
3. Monitoring
4. Medical testing
5. Vaccination
6. Post exposure evaluation and follow up
7. Post exposure prophylaxis
Should an employee become exposed, they must follow the universal precautions contained in
this procedure, and immediately report any exposure incident to their supervisor, Safety Director
and/or the President
D. PROCEDURE
Due to the fact that LABORDE MARINE, LLC can “reasonably anticipate exposure” of blood
or other potentially infectious materials to its employees, they have established and implemented
this exposure control program. It applies to all occupational exposure to blood or other
potentially infectious materials. A copy of the program is accessible to all employees.
E. EXPOSURE DETERMINATION
LABORDE MARINE, LLC has determined that only specified field personnel designated as
emergency first responders have the potential for occupational exposure to blood borne
pathogens. Field personnel, other than the designated emergency responder, do not have job
duties that include reasonably anticipated occupational exposure, contact with blood, or other
potentially infectious materials.
This exposure determination was made without regard to the use of personal protective
equipment, and the information contained in this procedure is for the employee’s personal
knowledge to prevent exposure to bloodborne pathogens, as well as to direct them to the Safety
Coordinator for follow-up evaluation in the event of accidental on-the-job exposure.
HSE MANUAL
Company Employees:
1. Other than designated emergency first responders, employees are not required to provide
first aid or CPR services as a part of their job duties, but are required to attend training
for first aid and CPR for their own well being.
2. Other than designated emergency first responders, employees are not expected to conduct
other related activities where there is a possibility of or actual blood or potentially
infectious body fluids and materials.
3. Other than designated emergency first responders, employees are not required to aid in
the movement or handling of any injured or sick personnel.
4. Other than designated emergency first responders, employees are not trained in cleanup
and must not attempt a biomedical waste cleanup.
5. Employees should keep in mind that personal protection is the key to prevent
transmission of bloodborne pathogens.
F. HEPATITIS B VACCINATION (HBV)
The employees are required to be trained in the knowledge that certain pathogenic microorganisms
may be present in human blood and can cause disease in humans. As a personal precaution, it is
recommended that all designated emergency first responders and field employees receive the
Hepatitis B vaccine. The vaccination will be made available at no cost to all employees after they
have been trained or within 10 working days of initial assignment to a position that could have
occupational exposure.
The only exceptions will be:
1. If the employee has previously received the complete Hepatitis B series.
2. An antibody test has revealed that the employee is immune or the vaccine is
contraindicated for medical reasons.
HSE MANUAL
G. UNIVERSAL PRECAUTIONS
In general, the best method of ensuring the health safety for workers at risk is to understand the
follow concept of UNIVERSAL PRECAUTIONS as it applies to an employee’s duties and
work practices. This concept refers to the assumption that all blood and bodily fluids are
contaminated with pathogens. Universal precautions while administering first aid or CPR must
include the following:
1. Engineering and Work Practice Controls
2. Clean Up Procedures
3. Work Area Restriction
4. Housekeeping
5. Hazardous Waste Disposal
6. PPE
H. ENGINEERING AND WORK PRACTICE CONTROLS
Hand washing is a primary work practice control. Hands must be thoroughly washed with soap
and water, and dried immediately after all direct contact with blood or other potentially
infectious materials, or after handling soiled or contaminated equipment or immediately after
removal of gloves or other PPE. Other skin surfaces must also be washed immediately if
contaminated with blood or other potentially infectious materials or body fluid.
LABORDE MARINE, LLC will provide hand-washing facilities for employees to use
following exposure. If this is not available or feasible, then alternative methods, such as
antiseptic hand cleaners, in conjunction with clean cloths or paper towels or antiseptic towelettes
will be provided.
All Engineering Control procedures will be examined and maintained, revised or replaced yearly
to ensure their effectiveness.
I. CLEAN UP PROCEDURES
In the event of an incident involving the release of blood or other potentially infectious material,
the area should be barricaded to keep people from tracking the blood or other potentially
infectious material into other areas. Biomedical waste cleanup shall be done only be designated
emergency responders.
HSE MANUAL
LABORDE MARINE, LLC personnel are not trained in cleanup and must not attempt a
biomedical waste cleanup. Items such as clothing, medical gloves, etc., that have been
contaminated with blood or other potentially infectious materials must be placed in the red
biomedical waste bags or container labeled BIOHAZARD, and given to the emergency
responders for disposal.
J. WORK AREA RESTRICTIONS
A copy of the Bloodborne Pathogens Exposure Control Program will be kept in the main office
and made available to any employee, or his designee, upon request. In work areas where there is
a reasonable likelihood of exposure to blood or other potentially infectious materials, employees
are not to:
1. Eat
2. Drink
3. Apply cosmetics or lip balm
4. Smoke
5. Handle contact lenses
Food and beverages are not to be kept in refrigerators, freezers, shelves, cabinets, counter tops or
bench tops where blood or other potentially infectious materials are present.
Engineering controls shall be examined and maintained or replaced in order to ensure continued
effectiveness.
K. HOUSEKEEPING
Exposed surfaces shall be decontaminated after contact with blood or other infectious materials
by wiping with an appropriate disinfectant/germicide. Contaminated laundry shall be handled
with care and placed in leak-proof, labeled and/or color coded bags at the worksite. Gloves shall
be worn by employees who work with contaminated laundry. If laundry services are provided by
independent contractors, documentation shall be reviewed by Company management that the
contractor’s employees have had the required training mandated by the Bloodborne Pathogen
Standard.
Broken glassware that may be contaminated shall not be picked up directly with the hands.
Instead, it shall be cleaned up using mechanical means, such as a brush and dust pan, tongs, or
forceps.
HSE MANUAL
L. POTENTIALLY INFECTIOUS WASTE DISPOSAL
All medical wastes, blood specimens and other body fluids shall be placed in containers that are
color-coded. Medical wastes include, but are not limited to:
1. Needles
2. Disposable equipment
3. Soiled dressings
4. Sponges
5. Used gloves
6. Blood soaked clothing or other fabric
The containers for all potentially infectious waste, besides needles and other sharp objects, shall
be constructed so that they are closable, leak-proof, fluorescent orange, orange-red or red in
color, displaying the biohazard legend. Documentation of all waste disposal shipments shall be
maintained indefinitely by the Medical Department.
Contaminated needles and other contaminated sharps shall not be bent, or recapped and must be
disposed of in a container that meets the same criteria as the container mentioned above, but
shall be puncture resistant.
If any leakage, puncture, or other damage is done or anticipated to the primary container, it shall
be placed in a secondary container that meets the same requirements.
M. PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
1. PPE shall be used unless the employer shows the employees temporarily decline to use PPE
under rare circumstances where it was the employee’s professional judgment that in the
specific instance its use would have prevented the delivery of health care or public safety
services or would have posed an increased hazard to the safety of the worker or co-worker.
In such cases an investigations will be performed and documented to determine whether
changes can be instituted to prevent such occurrences in the future.
2. Medical gloves must be worn when there is the potential for direct skin contact with blood or
other potentially infectious body fluids and materials, or when handling items or surfaces
soiled with blood or other potentially infectious body fluids or material. Gloves will be
changed when visibly soiled, torn, punctured, or when their ability to function as a barrier is
compromised. Single use gloves will not be re-used.
HSE MANUAL
3. Mask along with Safety glasses with side shields, goggles, or face shields will be used when
there is a potential for eye contamination through splashing or spraying.
4. When the possibility of occupational exposure is present, PPE shall be provided at no cost to
the employee.
5. LABORDE MARINE, LLC will ensure that appropriate PPE in the appropriate sizes is
readily accessible for all personnel involved.
6. PPE will be properly cleaned, laundered, stored and/or disposed of.
7. LABORDE MARINE, LLC will repair and/or replace PPE as needed to maintain
effectiveness.
8. Gowns, aprons, and other protective body clothing shall be worn in exposure situations,
depending upon the task and the degree of exposure anticipated.
N. LABELS AND SIGNS
Warning labels shall be affixed to containers or regulated waste or other potentially infectious
material. The label shall include the biohazard logo depicted in OSHA 29 CFR 1910.1030 (g)
Communication of Hazards to Employees and below. These labels shall be fluorescent orange or
orange-red or predominantly so, with lettering or symbols in a contrasting color.
O. RECORDKEEPING INFORMATION
HSE MANUAL
The Safety Director has the overall responsibility for the effectiveness of the program and will
maintain training and medical records for each employee covered under the exposure control
program, or for an employee involved in an exposure incident in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR
1910.1020 (h). All records are confidential and will not be disclosed without the employee’s
express written consent. A copy of the employee’s records may be released, with the employee’s
written consent, to any person within or outside of the workplace. These records shall also be
made available upon request to the Assistant Secretary of Labor or OSHA, to the Director of
National Institute for Occupational Health and Safety, U.S. Department of Health and Human
Services or to their designated representatives. Medical records will be kept for the duration of
the employee’s employment plus 30 years to comply with 29 CFR 1910.1020 (h).
At a minimum, medical records shall include:
 Name and social security number of the employee
 A copy of the employee’s hepatitis B vaccination status including the dates of all the
hepatitis B vaccinations and any medical records relative to the employee’s ability to
receive vaccination and any documentation of refusal of the hepatitis B vaccination.
 A copy of all results of examinations, medical testing, and follow-up procedures in

regards to an exposure.
 The employer’s copy of the healthcare professional’s written opinion as required by 29

CFR 1910.1030(f) (5).
 The information provided to the healthcare professional as required by 29 CFR

1910.1030(f) (4) (ii)(B)(C) and (D).
At a minimum, training records shall include:
 The dates of the training sessions
 The contents or a summary of the training session
 The names and qualifications of persons conducting the training
 The names and job titles of all persons attending the training session
Training records shall be maintained for three years from the date on which the training
occurred.
P. AVAILABILITY OF RECORDS
HSE MANUAL
Employees may review their medical and training records during normal business hours and
copies of their records will be provided to them or their authorized representative upon written
request. These records shall also be made available upon request to the Assistant Secretary of
Labor for OSHA, to the Director of the National Institute for Occupational Health and Safety,
U.S. Department of Health and Human Services or to their designated representatives for
examination and copying. LABORDE MARINE, LLC will comply with the requirements
involving transfer of records set forth in 29 CFR 1910.1020 (h). Records should show dates,
names and titles of attendees.
Q. TRAINING REQUIREMENTS
Training will be conducted by someone who is knowledgeable in the subject matter in relation to
the workplace.
Training material will be presented in content and vocabulary appropriate to the education level,
literacy, and language of the employees.
Bloodborne pathogen awareness training will be conducted during normal business hours and at
no cost to the employee for all employees who have or are subject to have occupational exposure
and will include instruction on the following topics.
1. Applicable regulations on bloodborne pathogens.
2. General explanation of the epidemiology and symptoms of bloodborne diseases.
3. Modes of transmission for bloodborne disease.
4. Recognition of tasks that could involve exposure to potentially infectious body fluids and
materials.
5. Methods, work practices, and protective equipment that will prevent or reduce exposure.
6. Proper handling and disposing of personal protective equipment.
7. Hepatitis B vaccination information including efficacy, safety, administration, benefits,

and cost to employee.
8. Selecting personal protective equipment.
9. Appropriate emergency actions including incident reporting and medical follow-up.
10. Explanations of signs, labels, and color coding.

HSE MANUAL
11. The contents of this procedure and how to obtain a written copy of the plan.
12. Information on post-exposure evaluation and follow-up that the employer is required to
provide for the employee following an exposure.
13. An opportunity for interactive questions and answers with the person conducting the
training session.
Training for all designated first aiders shall include:
1. The role of rendering first aid.
2. The availability of the full Hepatitis B vaccination series at no cost to the employee, to be
made as soon as possible, but in no event later than 24 hours, to all unvaccinated first aid
providers who have rendered assistance in any situation involving the presence of blood
or OPIM, regardless of whether or not a specific “exposure incident”, as defined by the
standard, has occurred.
3. The specific reporting procedure (as outlined above) ensures that all first aid incidents
involving the presence of blood or OPIM will be reported to the employee’s Supervisor
and the information forwarded to the Safety Department.
R. TRAINING FREQUENCY
LABORDE MARINE, LLC personnel will be trained according to the following schedule:
1. Initial assignment.
2. Within 90 days of the standard’s effective date.
3. Annually.
4. When changes, such as modification of tasks or procedures or institution of new task or

procedures, affect the employee’s exposure.
HSE MANUAL
CONFINED SPACE
A. INTRODUCTION
Over 1 ½ million workers enter confined spaces on an annual basis. Serious injury or death in a
confined space can be the result of asphyxiation, engulfment, electric shock, falls, and heat
stress. The Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) estimate that 85 percent of
these accidents can be prevented if proper safety precautions at job sites are initiated. This poses
a serious problem for exposed workers and their employer. The OSHA Confined Space
Standard establishes uniform requirements to ensure that the hazards of confined spaces in U.S.
workplaces are evaluated, safety procedures implemented, and that the proper hazard
information is transmitted to all effected workers.
LABORDE MARINE, LLC will ensure that all potential confined spaces within our facility(s)
are evaluated. This standard practice instruction is intended to address comprehensively the
issues of; evaluating and identifying potential confined spaces, evaluating the associated
potential hazards, communicating information concerning these hazards, and establishing
appropriate procedures, and protective measure for employees.
B. RESPONSIBILITY
LABORDE MARINE, LLC HSE Director is solely responsible for all facets of this program
and has full authority to make necessary decisions to ensure success of the program. The HSE
Director is authorized to amend these instructions and is authorized to halt any operation of
LABORDE MARINE, LLC where there is danger of serious personal injury. This policy
includes respiratory hazards.
C. WRITTEN PROGRAM
annual basis, or when changes occur to 29 CFR 1910.146, that prompt revision of this document,
or when facility operational changes occur that require a revision of this document.
Additionally, LABORDE MARINE, LLC will review the permit-required confined space
program, using the canceled permits retained within 1 year after each entry and revise the
program as necessary, to ensure that employees participating in entry operations are protected
from permit space hazards.
D. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
LABORDE MARINE, LLC will establish confined space operational procedures through the use of
this document.
HSE MANUAL
1. After facility evaluation, spaces that meet the following criteria will be designated as a
confined space:
a. It is large enough and so configured that an employee can bodily enter and perform
assigned work.
b. Has limited or restricted means for entry or exit (for example, tanks, vessels, silos,
storage bins, hoppers, vaults, and pits are spaces that may have limited means of entry.)
c. Is not designed for continuous employee occupancy.
d. Contains or has a potential to contain a hazardous atmosphere.
e. Has an internal configuration such that an entrant could be trapped or asphyxiated by
inwardly converging walls or by a floor, which slopes downward and tapers to a small
cross-section.
f. Contains any other recognized serious safety or health hazard.
2. Confined Space Identification.
a. Permit-required confined spaces. Those spaces meeting the criteria delineated in this
section and having a known potential to contain hazardous atmospheres will be
designated as permit-required confined spaces. All spaces shall be considered permit-
required confined spaces until the pre-entry procedures demonstrate otherwise.
LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall inform exposed employees, by posting danger signs,
conducting awareness training, or by any other equally effective means, of the existence
and location of and the danger posed by the permit confined spaces. A sign reading
“DANGER PERMIT REQUIRED CONFINED SPACE, DO NOT ENTER” or similar
language will be used to satisfy the requirement for a sign.
b. Non-permit confined spaces. Those spaces meeting the criteria delineated in this section
that do no have a known potential to contain a hazardous atmosphere will be designated
as non-permit confined spaces.
3. Confined Space listing. LABORDE MARINE, LLC, once having evaluated our facility(s)
will maintain a detailed listing that permanently identifies locations meeting the criteria for a
confined space.
4. If LABORDE MARINE, LLC decides that only specific employees will enter permitted
spaces, LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall take effective measures to prevent non-trained
employees from entering the permit-required confined spaces
5. For employees required to perform work in permit-required confined spaces. LABORDE

MARINE, LLC shall implement the permit-required confined space entry program as
delineated within this instruction. This written program will be available for inspection by
employees, their authorized representatives, and authorized government inspectors.
HSE MANUAL
6. Non-permit required confined spaces. Non-permit required confined spaces will be
designated where the atmosphere and safety conditions can be controlled. Confined spaces
may be entered without the need for a written permit to attend provided that: 1. The pace is
determined not to be a permit-required confined space. 2. The space can be maintained in a
safe condition for entry by mechanical ventilation alone. ALL SPACES SHALL BE
CONSIDERED PERMIT-REQUIRED CONFINED SPACES UNTIL THE PRE-
ENTRY PROCEDURES DEMONSTRATE OTHERWISE. LABORDE MARINE,
LLC will ensure that any employee required or permitted to pre-check or enter a confined
space shall have successfully completed the required training. A written copy of operating
and rescue procedures as required shall be at the work site for the duration of the job. A site
specified Confined Space Pre-Entry Check List must be completed by the LEAD WORKER
before entry into a confined space. This list will verify completion of the items required to
verify safe entry, and shall be kept at the job site for the duration of the job. If circumstances
dictate an interruption in the work, the permit-required confined space must be re-evaluated
and a new check list must be completed. Such as:
a. It can be demonstrated that the only hazard posed by the permitted space is an actual or
potentially hazardous atmosphere.
b. It can be demonstrated that continuous forced air ventilation alone is sufficient to
maintain the space safe for entry.
c. Monitoring and inspection data supports the demonstrations required by paragraphs 6.a.
and 6.b.
7. Entry can be performed by company personnel, once determinations and supporting data
required by paragraphs 6.a., 6.b., and 6.c. are documented, and are made available to each
employee who enters the permit space.
8. Reclassification of a permit space after all hazards within the space have been eliminated.
The following requirements apply to entry into permit spaces that meet the conditions set
forth in paragraphs 6.a., 6.b., and 6.c. No company personnel will enter the confined space
unless:
a. Conditions making it unsafe to remove an entrance cover are eliminated before the cover
is removed.
b. The opening at entrance covers are guarded by a railing, temporary cover, or other
temporary barrier that will prevent accidental fall-through and will protect each employee
working in the space from foreign objects entering the space.
c. The internal atmosphere has been tested, with a calibrated direct-reading instrument, for
the following conditions in the order given:
1) Oxygen content. (19.5% - 23.5%) OSHA Mandated

2) Flammable gases and vapors. OSHA Mandated
3) Potential toxic air contaminants. OSHA Mandated
HSE MANUAL
4) Airborne combustible dusts Site Specific
9. There may be no hazardous atmosphere within the space whenever any employee is inside
the space.
10. Continuous air ventilation shall be used, as follows:
a. No employee may enter the space until testing confirms that the air ventilation has
eliminated any hazardous atmosphere.
b. The air ventilation shall be so directed as to ventilate the immediate areas where an
employee is or will be present within the space and shall continue until all employees
have left the space.
c. The air supply for the air ventilation shall be from a clean source and may not increase
the hazards in the space.
d. The atmosphere within the space shall be periodically tested as necessary to ensure that
the continuous air ventilation is preventing the accumulation of a hazardous atmosphere.
e. If a hazardous atmosphere is detected during entry:
1) All employees will evacuate.

2) The space shall be evaluated to determine how the hazardous atmosphere developed.
3) Measures shall be implemented to protect employees from the hazardous atmosphere
before any subsequent entry takes place.
11. Permit Required Confined Space Certification. LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall verify
that the space is safe for entry and that the measures required by a written certification permit
meeting the criteria in 29 CFR 1910.146 are accomplished. This written certification will
contain as a minimum; the date, the location of the space, and the signature of the person
providing the certification. The certification shall be made before entry and shall be made
available to each employee entering the space.
a. The following personnel are qualified to certify safe entry for company personnel
entering confined spaces.
________________________TITLE____________________________
1._________________________________________________________
2._________________________________________________________
3._________________________________________________________
4._________________________________________________________
5._________________________________________________________
6._________________________________________________________
12. Non-Permit Required Confined Space Certification. When there are changes in the use of
configuration of a non-permit confined space that might increase the hazards to entrants,
HSE MANUAL
LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall re-evaluate that space, and if necessary, reclassify it as a
permit-required confined space.
13. Permit to Non-Permit Reclassification. A space classified by LABORDE MARINE, LLC

as a permit-required confined space will be reclassified as a non-permit confined space under
the following conditions:
a. If the permit space poses no actual or potential atmospheric hazards and if all hazards
within the space are eliminated without entry into the space, the permit space may be
reclassified as a non-permit confined space for as long as the non-atmospheric hazards
remain eliminated.
b. If it is necessary to enter the permit space to eliminate hazards, such entry shall be
performed under the assumption that a hazard exists. If testing and inspection during that
entry demonstrate that the hazards within the permit space have been eliminated, the
permit space may be reclassified as a non-permit confined space for as long as the
hazards remain eliminated.
NOTE: Control of atmospheric hazards through forced air ventilation alone does not
constitute elimination of the hazards. Periodic monitoring will be conducted to ensure forced
air ventilation maintains a safe worker environment for reclassification to a non-permit
confined space.
c. LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall document the basis for determining that all hazards in
a permit space have been eliminated, through a certification that contains as a minimum;
the date, the location of the space, and the signature of the person making the
determination. The certification shall be made available to each employee entering the
space.
d. If hazards arise within a permit space that has been declassified to a non-permit space,
each employee in the space shall immediately exit the space and notify their supervisor.
LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall then reevaluate the space and determine whether it
must be reclassified as a permit space, in accordance with other applicable provisions of
this instruction.
14. When LABORDE MARINE, LLC arranges to have employees of another employer
(contractor) perform work that involves permit space entry, the LABORDE MARINE, LLC
shall:
a. Inform the contractor that the workplace contains permit spaces and that permit space
entry is allowed only through compliance with LABORDE MARINE, LLC permit
space program meeting the requirements of this instruction.
b. Apprise the contractor of the elements, including the hazards identified and the host
employer’s experience with the space, that make the space in question a permit space.
HSE MANUAL
c. Apprise the contractor of any precautions or procedures that LABORDE MARINE,
LLC has implemented for the protection of employees in or near permit spaces where
contractor personnel will be working.
d. Coordinate entry operations with the contractor, when both company personnel and
contractor personnel will be working in or near permit spaces.
e. Debrief the contractor at the conclusion of the entry operation regarding LABORDE
MARINE, LLC permit space program, and any hazards confronted or created in the
concerned permit spaces during entry operations.
15. Contractor Responsibilites. In addition to complying with the permit space requirements that
apply to all employees of LABORDE MARINE, LLC, each contractor who is retained to
perform permit space entry operations shall:
a. Obtain any available information regarding permit space hazards and entry operations
from LABORDE MARINE, LLC.
b. Coordinate entry operations with LABORDE MARINE, LLC, when both company
personnel and contractor will be working in or near permit spaces.
c. Inform LABORDE MARINE, LLC of the permit space program that the contractor will
follow and of any hazards confronted or created in permit spaces within this facility or
others belonging to LABORDE MARINE, LLC, either through a debriefing or during
the entry operation.
E. PERMIT-REQUIRED CONFINED SPACE PROGRAM
Under the permit-required confined space program required by 29 CFR 1910.146, LABORDE
MARINE, LLC shall:
1. Implement the measures necessary to prevent unauthorized entry.
2. Identify and evaluate the hazards of permit spaces before employees enter them.
3. Develop and implement the means, procedures, and practices necessary for safe permit space
entry operations, including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Specifying acceptable entry conditions.

b. Isolating the permit space.
c. Purging, inerting, flushing, or ventilating the permit space as necessary to eliminate or
control atmospheric hazards.
d. Provide pedestrian, vehicle, or other barriers as necessary to protect entrants from
external hazards.
e. Verity that conditions in the permit space are acceptable for entry throughout the duration
of an authorized entry.
HSE MANUAL
f. Develop and utilize checklists based on this standard practice instruction and 29 CFR
1910.146.
4. Provide the following equipment at no cost to employees, maintain that equipment properly,
and ensure that employees are trained in the proper use of the equipment:
a. Ventilating equipment needed to obtain acceptable air quality entry conditions.

b. Unless otherwise provided, communications equipment necessary for communication
between personnel involved in the entry operation.
c. Unless otherwise provided, personal protective equipment insofar as feasible engineering
and work practice controls do not adequately protect employees.
d. Unless otherwise provided, lighting equipment needed to enable employees to see well
enough to work safely and to exit the spaces quickly in an emergency.
e. Barriers and shields as required to protect workers from pedestrian, and vehicular traffic.
f. Ladders, needed for safe ingress and egress, by authorized entrants.
g. Unless otherwise provided, rescue, retrieval, and emergency equipment needed to extract
or treat injured personnel, except to the extent that the equipment and or service is
provided by rescue services that are immediately available.
h. Any other equipment needed to conduct confined space operations.
i. Unless otherwise provided, principal equipment needed to conduct confined space
operations. The below listed instinsicaly safe equipment as a minimum will be
maintained where required for confined space operations.
1) Multi-gas monitors
2) Ventilation Equipment
3) Rescue tripod/davit arm and winch system
4) Body harness’s
5) Extraction cable and lanyards
6) Air Compressors (as required)
7) Supplied Air respirators (as required)
8) Air purifying respirators (as required)
9) SCBA equipment (as required)
10) Emergency escape breathing app. (as required)
11) Radio communication system (as required)
12) Signage (as required)
13) Lock-out/Tag-out Equipment (as required)
14) Intrinsically safe lighting equipment
15) Personal protective clothing
16) Hearing protection equipment
17) Head protection equipment
18) Eye Protection equipment
19) First Aid kits
20) Time keeping equipment
HSE MANUAL
21) Hand tools
22) Escape ladders for depths of four feet or shoulder height
23) ________________________________
24) ________________________________
25) ________________________________
26) ________________________________
27) ________________________________
28) ________________________________
5. Evaluation of Permitted Space Conditions
LABORDE MARINE, LLC will evaluate permit space conditions as follows when entry
operations are conducted:
a. Test conditions in the permit space to determine if acceptable entry conditions exist
before entry is authorized to begin, except that, if isolation of the space is infeasible
because the space is large or is part of a continuous system (such as a sewer), pre-entry
testing shall be performed to the extent feasible before entry is authorized and, if entry is
authorized, entry conditions shall be continuously monitored in the areas where
authorized entrants are working.
b. Test or monitor the permit space as necessary to determine if acceptable entry conditions
are being maintained during the course of entry operations.
c. When testing for atmospheric hazards, use the following protocol; first for oxygen, then
for combustible gases and vapors, and then for toxic gases and vapors.
Note: Atmospheric testing conducted in accordance with the “procedures for

atmospheric testing” section of 29 CFR 1910.146 will be used to satisfy this requirement.
Note: Attendants may be assigned to monitor more than one permit space provided their
duties can be effectively performed for each permit space that is monitored. Likewise,
attendants may be stationed at any location outside the permit space to be monitored as
long as their duties can be effectively performed for each permit space that is monitored.
d. If multiple spaces are monitored by a single attendant, the permit will be annotated to
provide the means and procedures by which the attendant is to respond to an emergency
affecting one or more of the permit spaces being monitored.
e. When a confined space entry is to take place as part of the preplanning process,
LABORDE MARINE, LLC will designate in advance the persons who are to have
active roles in the entry operation.
Additionally, the duties of each such employee will be identified, and provided with the
required training required by the training section of this instruction. The confined space
entry team will include, but is not limited to, the following:
HSE MANUAL
1) Authorized entrants
2) Attendants
3) Entry supervisors
4) Atmospheric monitoring personnel
5) Certifying personnel
6) Rescue/Emergency services personnel
7) ____________________________
8) ____________________________
9) ____________________________
10) ____________________________
f. LABORDE MARINE, LLC will develop procedures prior to the commencement of

confined space operations for the following:
1) Summoning rescue and emergency services

2) Rescuing entrants from permit spaces
3) Providing necessary emergency service for rescue
4) Preventing unauthorized personnel from attempting a rescue
5) _______________________________________
6) _______________________________________
7) _______________________________________
8) _______________________________________
9) _______________________________________
10) _______________________________________
g. Development and implementation for the preparation, issuance, use, and cancellation of
entry permits will be as follows:
1) When employees of contractor personnel or non-company employees are working

simultaneously as authorized entrants in a space, the certifying official of the permit
(or pre-designated representative) will ensure that all parties concerned are aware of
the accepted entry procedures for the specific operation. This will ensure entry
operations are properly coordinated
2) The certifying official of the permit (or pre-designated representative) will ensure that
all parties concerned are aware of the accepted procedures necessary for concluding
the entry after entry operations have been completed (such as closing off a permit
space and canceling the permit).
3) LABORDE MARINE, LLC will immediately review and as necessary halt and
revise entry operations when there is reason to believe that the measures taken under
the permit space program may not protect employees. The focus will be directed at
the correction of deficiencies found to exist before subsequent entries are authorized.
HSE MANUAL
Examples of circumstances requiring the review of the permit-required confined
space program are as a minimum:
a) Any authorized entry of a permit space.

b) The detection of a permit space hazard not covered by the permit.
c) The detection of a condition prohibited by the permit.
d) The occurrence of an injury or near-miss during entry.
e) A change in the use or configuration of a permit space.
f) Employee complaints about the effectiveness of the program.
g) Employees or their representatives are entitled to request additional monitoring at
any time.
h) _________________________________________
i) __________________________________________
j) __________________________________________
k) __________________________________________
l) __________________________________________
F. PERMIT SYSTEM
To comply with the permit-system required by 29 CFR 1910.146, LABORDE MARINE, LLC
shall:
1. Before entry is authorized, review of the permit should take place covering the following:

external hazards.
e. Verify that conditions in the permit space are acceptable for entry throughout the duration
f. Discuss unauthorized entry
g. Procedures for reporting injury or near miss.
h. Discuss possible unknowns
2. Before entry begins, the entry supervisor identified on the permit shall sign the entry permit
to authorize entry.
HSE MANUAL
3. The completed permit shall be made available at the time of entry to all authorized entrants,
by posting it at the entry portal or by any other equally effective means, so that the entrants
can confirm that pre-entry preparations have been completed.
4. The duration of the permit may not exceed the time required to complete the assigned task or
job identified on the permit.
5. The entry supervisor shall terminate entry and cancel the entry permit when:
a. The entry operations covered by the entry permit have been completed.
b. A condition that is not allowed under the entry permit arises in or near the permit space.
6. LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall retain each canceled entry permit for at least 1 year to
facilitate the review of the permit-required confined space program. Any problems
encountered during an entry operation shall be noted on the pertinent permit so that
appropriate revisions to the permit space program can be made.
G. ENTRY PERMIT
LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall develop or use a standardized entry permit form that
documents compliance with this section and authorizes entry to a permit space. As a minimum,
the permit shall identify the following:
1. The permit space to be entered.
2. The purpose of the entry.
3. The date and the authorized duration of the entry permit.
4. The authorized entrants within the permit space, by name or by such other means (for
example, through the use of rosters or tracking systems) as will enable the attendant to
determine quickly and accurately, for the duration of the permit, which authorized entrants
are inside the permit space. If a tracking system is used for certain entries, this requirement
may be met by inserting a reference on the entry permit as to the means used, such as a roster
or tracking system, to keep track of the authorized entrants within the permit space.
5. The personnel, by name, currently serving as attendants.
6. The individual, by name, currently serving as entry supervisor, with a space for the signature
or initials of the entry supervisor who originally authorized entry.
HSE MANUAL
7. The hazards of the permit space to be entered.
8. The measures used to isolate the permit space and to eliminate or control permit space
hazards before entry. Such as; the lockout or tagging of equipment and procedure for
purging, inerting, ventilating, and flushing permit spaces.
9. The acceptable entry conditions.
10. The results of initial and periodic atmospheric test performed, accompanied by the names or
initials of the testers and by an indication of when the test were performed.
11. The rescue and emergency services that can be summoned and the means (such as the
equipment to use and the numbers to call) for summoning those services.
12. The communication procedures used by authorized entrants and attendants to maintain
contact during the entry.
13. Equipment, such as personal protective equipment, testing equipment, communications

equipment, alarm systems, and rescue equipment, to be provided for compliance with the
permit requirement.
14. Any other information whose inclusion is necessary, given the circumstances of the
particular confined space, in order to ensure employee safety.
15. Any additional permits, such as for hot work, that have been issued to authorize work in the
permit space.
16. LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall provide training so that all employees whose work is
regulated by this section acquire the understanding, knowledge, and skills necessary for the
safe performance of the duties assigned under this section.
H. TRAINING
LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall develop a standardized training format to meet the
requirement for a safe confined space entry.
1. Training shall be provided to each affected employee:
a. Before the employee is first assigned duties that require a confined space entry.
b. Before there is a change in assigned duties.
c. Whenever LABORDE MARINE, LLC has reason to believe that there are deviations
from the permit space entry procedures required by this instruction or inadequacies in the
employee’s knowledge or use of these procedures.
HSE MANUAL
2. The training shall establish employee proficiency in the duties required by this instruction
and shall introduce new or revised procedures, as necessary, for compliance with this
instruction or when future revisions occur
3. LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall certify that the training required by this section has bee
accomplished. The certification shall contain each employee’s name, the signatures or
initials of the trainers, and the dates of training. The certification shall be available for
inspection by employees and their authorized representatives.
I. DUTIES OF AUTHORIZED ENTRANTS
LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall ensure that all authorized entrants:
1. Know the hazards that may be faced during entry, including information on the mode, signs
or symptoms, and consequences of the exposure.
2. Properly use equipment as required by 29 CFR 1910.146 (1915.12, 13, 14, 15).
3. Communicate with the attendant as necessary to enable the attendant to monitor entrant
status and to enable the attendant to alert entrants of the need to evacuate the space as
required by this section.
4. Alert the attendant whenever:
a. The entrant recognizes any warning sign or symptom of exposure to a dangerous

situation.
b. The entrant detects a prohibited condition.
5. Exit from the permit space as quickly as possible whenever:
a. An order to evacuate is given by the attendant or the entry supervisor.

b. The entrant recognizes any warning sign or symptom of exposure to a dangerous
situation.
c. The entrant detects a prohibited condition.
d. An evacuation alarm is activated.
J. DUTIES OF AUTHORIZED ATTENDANTS
LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall ensure that each attendant:

HSE MANUAL
1. Knows the hazards that may be faced during entry, including information on the mode, signs
2. Is aware of possible behavioral effects of hazard exposure in authorized entrants.
3. Continuously maintains an accurate count of authorized entrants in the permit space and
ensures that the means used to identify authorized entrants under this section accurately
identifies who is in the permit space.
4. Remains in a pre-designated location outside the permit space during entry operations until
relieved by another attendant.
Note: When LABORDE MARINE, LLC’s permit entry program allows attendant entry for
rescue, attendants may enter a permit space to attempt a rescue if they have been trained and
equipped for rescue operations as required by the “rescue and emergency services” section of
this program and if they have been relieved as required by this section.
5. Communicates with authorized entrants as necessary to monitor entrant status and to alert
entrants of the need to evacuate the space.
6. Monitors activities inside and outside the space to determine if it is safe for entrants to
remain in the space and orders the authorized entrants to evacuate the permit space
immediately under any of the following conditions.
a. If the attendant detects a prohibited condition.

b. If the attendant detects a situation outside the space that could endanger the entrants.
c. If the attendant detects a situation outside the space that could endanger the entrants.
d. If the attendant cannot effectively and safely perform all the duties required under this
sections.
7. Summon rescue and other emergency services as soon as the attendant determines that
entrants may need assistance to escape form permit space hazards.
8. Takes the following actions when unauthorized persons approach or enter a permit space
while entry is underway:
a. Warn the unauthorized persons that they must stay away from the permit space.
b. Advise the unauthorized persons that they must exit immediately if they have entered the
permit space.
c. Inform the authorized entrants and the entry supervisor if unauthorized persons have
entered the permit space.
9. Performs non-entry rescues as specified by LABORDE MARINE, LLC’s rescue procedure.

HSE MANUAL
10. Performs no duties that might interfere with the attendant’s primary duty to monitor and
protect the entrants.
K. DUTIES OF ENTRY SUPERVISORS
LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall ensure that each entry supervisor:
1. Knows the hazards that may be faced during entry, including information on the mode, signs
2. Verifies, by checking that the appropriate entries have been made on the permit, that all tests
specified by the permit have been conducted and that all procedures and equipment specified
by the permit are in place before endorsing the permit and allowing entry to begin.
3. Terminates the entry and cancels the permit as required in accordance with the “permit
section” of this program.
4. Verifies that rescue services are available and that the means for summoning them are
operable.
5. Ensures removal of unauthorized individuals who enter or who attempt to enter the permit
space during entry operations.
6. Determines, whenever responsibility for a permit space entry operation is transferred and at
intervals dictated by the hazards and operations performed within the space, that entry
operations remain consistent with terms of the entry permit and that acceptable entry
conditions are maintained.
7. Reviews all aspects of the entry permit, including atmospheric testing data, ventilation
procedures with all entrant and attendants prior to commencing work, both attendants and
entrants must sign the permits.
L. RESCUE AND EMERGENCY SERVICES
For all confined space rescue operations either by company, personnel, or third party, including
IDLH environments, rescue services will be on site during the confined space operation. All
required PPE needed for rescue operation including respiratory protection shall be provided at no
cost to the employee.
The following requirements apply to company personnel who enter permit spaces to perform
rescue services.
HSE MANUAL
1. LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall ensure that each member of the rescue service is provided
with, and is trained to use properly, the personal protective equipment and rescue equipment
necessary for making rescues from permit spaces.
2. Each member of the rescue service shall be trained to perform the assigned rescue duties.
Each member of the rescue service shall also receive the training required of authorized
entrants under the “duties of authorized entrants” section of this program.
3. Each member of the rescue service shall practice making permit space rescues at least once
every 12 months, by means of simulated rescue operations in which they remove dummies,
mannequins, or actual persons from the actual permit spaces or from representative permit
spaces. Representative permit spaces shall, with respect to opening size, configuration, and
accessibility, simulate the types of permit spaces from which LABORDE MARINE, LLC
anticipates rescue is to be performed.
4. Each member of the rescue service shall be trained in basic first-aid and in cardiopulmonary
resuscitation (CPR). At least one member of the rescue service holding current certification
in first aid and in CPR shall be available.
5. Non-company rescue personnel. When non-company rescue personnel are designated to

perform permit space rescue, LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall:
a. Inform the rescue service of the hazards they may confront when called on to perform
rescue.
b. Provide the rescue service with access to all permit spaces from which rescue may be
necessary so that the rescue service can develop appropriate rescue plans and practice
rescue operations.
6. To facilitate non-entry rescue, retrieval systems or methods shall be used whenever an

entrant enters a permit space, unless the retrieval equipment would increase the overall risk
of entry or would not contribute to the rescue of the entrant. Retrieval systems used by
LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall meet the following requirements.
a. Each authorized entrant shall use a chest or full body harness, with a retrieval line
attached at the center of the entrant’s back near shoulder level, or above the entrant’s
head. Wristlets may be used in lieu of the chest or full body harness if it is demonstrated
that the use of a chest or full body harness is infeasible or creates a greater hazard and
that the use of wristlets is the safest and most effective alternative.
b. The other end of the retrieval line shall be attached to a mechanical device or fixed point
outside the permit space in such a manner that rescue can begin as soon as the rescuer
becomes aware that rescue is necessary. A mechanical device shall be available to
retrieve personnel form vertical type permit spaces more than 5 feet deep.
HSE MANUAL
7. If an injured entrant is exposed to a substance for which a Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) or other similar written information is required to be kept at the worksite, that
MSDS or written information shall be made available to the medical facility treating the
exposed entrant.
8. When our company employees are asked to assist in rescue operations, along with non-
company personnel, the entry supervisor will ensure that all parties concerned are aware of
the accepted entry and rescue procedures. This should be stated and agreed to in contract
language.
M. PROCEDURES FOR ATMOSPHERIC TESTING
Atmospheric testing for confined space entry is required for two distinct purposes: Evaluation of
the hazards of the permit space and verification that acceptable entry conditions for entry into
that space exist.
1. Evaluation testing. LABORDE MARINE, LLC will ensure that the atmosphere of a
confined space is analyzed using equipment of sufficient sensitivity and specificity to
identify and evaluate any hazardous atmospheres that may exist or arise. This is required to
ensure that appropriate permit entry procedures specific to the operation can be developed
and acceptable entry conditions stipulated for that specific space. Evaluation and
interpretation of these data, and development of the entry procedure, will be done by, or
reviewed by, a technically qualified professional (e.g., OSHA consultation service, or
certified industrial hygienist, registered safety engineer, certified safety professional, certified
marine engineer, competent person, etc.) based on evaluation of all serious hazards.
Authorized entrants or their representatives shall be given the opportunity to participate in or
witness the testing. The internal atmosphere will be tested, with a calibrated direct-reading
instrument, for the following conditions in the order given:
a. Oxygen content. (19.5% - 23.5%) OSHA Mandated

b. Flammable gases and vapors. OSHA Mandated
c. Potential toxic air contaminants. OSHA Mandated
d. Airborne combustible dusts Site Specific
2. Verification testing. The atmosphere of a permit space which may contain a hazardous
atmosphere will be tested for residues of all contaminants identified by evaluation testing
using permit specified equipment to determine that residual concentrations at the time of
testing and entry are within the range of acceptable entry conditions. Results of testing (i.e.,
actual concentration, etc.) will be recorded on the permit in the space provided adjacent to
HSE MANUAL
the stipulated acceptable entry condition. The atmosphere will be verified, with a calibrated
direct-reading instrument, for the following conditions in the order given:

3. Duration of testing. Measurement of values for each atmospheric parameter will be made for
at least the minimum response time of the test instrument specified by the manufacturer.
4. Testing stratified atmospheres. When monitoring for entries involving a descent into
atmospheres that may be stratified, the atmospheric envelope will be tested a distance of
approximately 4 feet (1.22 m) in the direction of travel and to each side. If a sampling probe
is used, the entrant’s rate of progress will be slowed to accommodate the sampling speed and
detector response. The stratified atmosphere will be tested, with a calibrated direct-reading

N. FORMAT FOR CONFINED SPACE PERMIT
Confined Space Entry Permit
Job Site:______________________ Permit Number:_________________
Permit Validity Period: (day/time)____________to_____________

HSE MANUAL
Confined space identification code (id identified) (______________)
Notes:________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________
Authorized Personnel
Workers Authorized Entry Attendants Fire watch (hot work)

_____________________ ______________ _________________
_____________________ ______________ _________________
_____________________ ______________ _________________
_____________________ ______________ _________________
_____________________ ______________ _________________
_____________________ ______________ _________________
Known hazards (indicates specific hazards with initials)
_________Oxygen deficiency (less than 19.5%)

_________Oxygen enrichment (more than 23.5%)
_________Flammable gases or vapors (more than 10% of LEL)
_________Airborne combustible dust (meets or exceeds LFL)
_________Toxic gases or vapors (more than PEL) _____________________
_________Mechanical hazards
_________Electrical hazards
_________Engulfment hazards
_________Materials harmful to skin
_________Other:___________________________________________________
_________Other:___________________________________________________
_________Other:___________________________________________________
_________Other:___________________________________________________
_________Other:___________________________________________________
Employee Training and Pre-Entry Briefing
1. Safe Entry and Rescue Training Conducted on? ______________________

2. Mandatory Pre-Entry Briefing Conducted on? ________________________
3. Does this job require any special training? Yes_________ No___________
If yes, type of training required. ___________________________________
HSE MANUAL
Contractor Notification
Contractor Notified of: Permit Conditions: Yes______ No_______

Potential Hazards: Yes______ No_______
Communication Requirements: Intrinsically Safe? Yes______ No_______

Visually Inspected? Yes______ No_______
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Lighting Requirements: Intrinsically Safe? Yes______ No______

Visually Inspected? Yes______ No______
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
__________________
Special Tools/Equipment: Intrinsically Safe? Yes______ No______

Visually Inspected? Yes______ No______
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
__________________
Site Preparation
1. Work area isolated with signs and/or barriers Yes____ No____

2. All energy sources locked/tagged out? Yes____ No____
3. All input lines capped/blinded? Yes____ No____
4. If vessel, drained, flushed, neutralized? Yes____ No____
5. If vessel, cleaned, purged? Yes____ No____
HSE MANUAL
6. Ventilation initiated 30 min. before entry? Yes____ No____
7. Fire extinguishers on hand? Yes____ No____
8. _______________________________ Yes____ No____
9. _______________________________ Yes____ No____
10. _______________________________ Yes____ No____
Pre-Entry Atmospheric Testing
Action Requirement Reading Time Intervals Levels
1. Testing for oxygen content ______%02 _____ __________ _____

2. Test for flamm. Content _____<10%LEL _____ __________ _____
3. Test for H2S _____<10PPM _____ __________ _____
4. Test for Cl2 _____<.5PPM _____ __________ _____
5. Test for CO _____<35PPM _____ __________ _____
6. Test for SO2 _____<2PPM _____ __________ _____
7. Test for toxic content. ______PPM _____ __________ _____
______of____(TLV= _____)
8. Test for heat stress ______of _____ __________ _____
9. Test for ____________ _______ _____ __________ _____
10.Test for ____________ _______ _____ __________ _____
Tester: Name:_____________________ Signature:________________________
Title______________________ Date:_____________ Time:_________________
Emergency/Rescue Procedures
1. Location of written Emergency/Rescue Plan:___________________________

2. Type of Emergency/Rescue Team required:
On-site: Yes___ No___ Contact:____________ Phone:__________________

HSE MANUAL
Off-site: Yes___ No___ Contact:____________ Phone:__________________
3. Additional Information:
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
__________________
Safety Equipment
Personal Protective Equipment Required
1.________________________________________________________________
2.________________________________________________________________
3.________________________________________________________________
4.________________________________________________________________
5.________________________________________________________________
6. Air purifying respirator? Type:__________________ Yes____ No_____
7. Self-contained Breathing Apparatus Required? Yes____No____
8. Atmospheric Monitor Required? Type:_____________ Yes____No____
Area Safety Equipment Required
1.________________________________________________________________
2.________________________________________________________________
3.________________________________________________________________
4.________________________________________________________________
5.________________________________________________________________
Permit Authorization
I certify that I have inspected the work area for safety and reviewed all safety precautions
recorded on this permit.
1. Name:________________________ Signature:_____________________
Title:____________________________ Date:__________ Time:__________
HSE MANUAL
2. Name:________________________ Signature:_____________________
Title:____________________________ Date:___________ Time:_________
HSE MANUAL
Lockout 0 Sept. 1, 2011 34.0
CONTROL OF HAZARDOUS ENERGY

(LOCKOUT/TAGOUT)
A. INTRODUCTION
LABORDE MARINE, LLC will ensure that all machinery meeting the criteria for
lockout/tagout within our facility(s) are evaluated, and that information and training programs,
and lockout/tagout procedures are implemented. This program is intended to address
comprehensively the issues of; evaluating and identifying potential uncontrolled energy sources,
evaluating the associated potential hazards, communicating information concerning these
hazards, and establishing appropriate procedures, and protective measures for employees.
B. WRITTEN PROGRAM
annual basis, or when changes occur to 29 CFR 1910.147, that prompt revision of this document,
or when facility operational changes occur that require a revision of this document. Effective
implementation of this program requires support from all levels of management within our
company. This written program will be communicated to all personnel that are affected by it. It
encompasses the total workplace, regardless of the number of workers employed or the number
of work shifts. It is designed to establish clear goals and objectives.
C. RESPONSIBILITY
LABORDE MARINE, LLC HSE Director is solely responsible for all facets of this program
and has full authority to make necessary decisions to ensure success of the program. The HSE
Director will develop written detailed instructions covering each of the basic elements in this
program, and is the sole person authorized to amend these instructions. This company has
expressly authorized the HSE Director to halt any operation of LABORDE MARINE, LLC
where there is danger of serious personal injury. This policy includes respiratory hazards.
D. PROGRAM SCOPE/IMPLEMENTATION
LABORDE MARINE, LLC will establish a program and utilize procedures for affixing
appropriate lockout devices or tagout devices to energy isolating devices, and to otherwise
disable machines or equipment to prevent unexpected energization, start-up or release of stored
energy in order to prevent injury to employees.
1. Energy control program. LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall establish a program consisting
of energy control procedures, employee training and periodic inspections to ensure that
HSE MANUAL
Lockout 0 Sept. 1, 2011 34.0
before any employee performs any servicing or maintenance on a machine or equipment
where the unexpected energizing, start up or release of stored energy could occur and cause
injury, the machine or equipment shall be isolated from the energy source, and rendered
inoperative.
a. Tagout. If an energy isolating device is not capable of being locked out, this employer’s
energy control program shall utilize a tagout system.
b. Lockout. If an energy isolating device is capable of being locked out, this employer’s
energy control program shall utilize lockout, unless it can be demonstrated that the
utilization of a tagout system will provide full employee protection.
c. Future requirements. Whenever replacement or major repair, renovation or modification

of a machine or equipment is performed, and whenever new machines or equipment are
installed, energy isolating devices for such machine or equipment shall be designed to
accept a lockout device.
E. FULL EMPLOYEE PROTECTION
1. Tagout location. When a tagout device is used on an energy isolating device which is not
capable of being locked out, the tagout device shall be attached at the same location that the
lockout device would have been attached, and this employer shall demonstrate that the tagout
program will provide a level of safety equivalent to that obtained by using a lockout program.
2. Lockout equivalency demonstration. In demonstrating that a level of safety is achieved in

the tagout program which is equivalent to the level of safety obtained by using a lockout
program, this employer shall demonstrate full compliance with all tagout-related provisions
together with such additional elements as are necessary to provide the equivalent safety
available from the use of a lockout device. Additional means to be considered as part of the
demonstration of full employee protection shall include where possible the implementation
of additional safety measures such as the:
a. Removal of an isolating circuit elements.

b. Blocking of a controlling switches.
c. Opening of an extra disconnecting devices.
d. Removal of a valve handle to reduce the likelihood of inadvertent energization.
F. ENERGY CONTROL PROCEDURE EXCEPTIONS

HSE MANUAL
Lockout 0 Sept. 1, 2011 34.0
Once a facility evaluation has been accomplished, documented procedures will not be developed
when the following conditions exist:
1. The machine or equipment has no potential for stored or residual energy or reaccumulation of
stored energy after shut down which could endanger employees.
2. The machine or equipment has a single energy source, which can be readily identified and
isolated.
3. The isolation and locking out of that energy source will completely de-energize and
deactivate the machine or equipment.
4. The machine or equipment is isolated from that energy source and locked out during
servicing or maintenance.
5. A single lockout device will achieve a locked-out condition.
6. The lockout device is under the exclusive control of the authorized employee performing the
7. The servicing or maintenance does not create hazards for other employees.
8. This employer, in utilizing this exception, has had no accidents involving the unexpected
activation or re-energization of the machine or equipment during servicing or maintenance in
the event of such occurrences, energy control procedures will be developed.
G. ENERGY CONTROL PROCEDURES
1. Once a facility evaluation has been accomplished, procedures shall be developed,

documented and utilized for the control of potentially hazardous energy.
2. Procedural format. The following format will be followed for each machine requiring
procedures. The HSE Director will be responsible for the implementation of these
procedures. The procedures shall clearly and specifically outline the scope, purpose,
authorization, rules, and techniques to be utilized for the control of hazardous energy, and the
means to enforce compliance including, but not limited to, the following:
a. A specific statement of the intended use of the procedure.

b. Specific procedural steps for shutting down, isolating, blocking and securing machines or
equipment to control hazardous energy (manufacturers specification will be followed
whenever possible).
c. Specific procedural steps for the placement, removal and transfer of lockout devices or
tagout devices and the person(s) responsible for them.
HSE MANUAL
Lockout 0 Sept. 1, 2011 34.0
d. Specific requirements for testing a machine or equipment to determine and verify the
effectiveness of lockout devices, tagout devices, and other energy control measures.
H. FACILITY/DEPARTMENT EVALUATION
LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall evaluate our facility(s) by department to determine which
machines or pieces of equipment require steps for shutting down, isolating, blocking and
securing machines or equipment to control hazardous energy.
I. PROTECTIVE MATERIALS AND HARDWARE
Appropriate lockout devices such as; locks, tags, chains, wedges, key blocks, adapter pins, self-
locking fasteners, or other hardware shall be provided by this employer for isolating, securing or
blocking of machines or equipment form energy sources.
1. Selection criteria
a. Lockout/tagout devices shall be singularly identified; shall be the only device(s) used for
controlling energy; shall not be used for other purposes; and shall meet the following
requirements:
b. Selected lockout and tagout devices shall be capable of withstanding the environment to
which they are exposed for the maximum period of time that exposure is expected.
c. Selected tagout devices shall be constructed and printed so that exposure to weather
conditions or wet and damp locations will not cause the tag to deteriorate or the message
on the tag to become illegible.
d. Tags shall not deteriorate when used in corrosive environments such as areas where acid
and alkali chemicals are handled and stored.
e. Lockout and tagout devices shall be standardized within the facility in at least one of the
following criteria: Color; shape; or size; and additionally, in the case of tagout devices,
print and format shall be standardized.
f. Removal requirements.
1) Lockout devices. Lockout devices shall be substantial enough to prevent removal

without the use of excessive force or unusual techniques, such as with the use of bolt
cutters or other cutting tools.
2) Tagout devices. Tagout devices, including and their means of attachment, shall be
substantial enough to prevent inadvertent or accidental removal. Tagout device
attachment means shall be of a non-reusable type, attachable by hand, self-locking,
and non-releasable type, attachable by hand, self-locking, and non-releasable with a
minimum unlocking strength of no less than 50 pounds and having the general design
and basic characteristics of being at least equivalent to a one-piece, all-environment-
tolerant nylon cable tie.
HSE MANUAL
Lockout 0 Sept. 1, 2011 34.0
g. Identification requirements.
1) Lockout/tagout devices shall indicate the identity of the employee applying the
device(s).
2) Tagout devices shall warn against hazardous conditions if the machine or equipment
is energized and shall include a legend such as the following: Do Not Start, Do Not
Open, Do Not Close, Do Not Energize, Do Not Operate, etc.
J. PERIODIC INSPECTIONS AND CERTIFICATIONS
1. Inspections. LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall conduct periodic inspections of the energy
control procedure for each machine or piece of equipment at least annually to ensure that the
procedure and the requirements of this instruction are being followed.
a. The periodic inspection shall be performed by an authorized employee accompanied by

the HSE Director and/or a member of management other than the one(s) utilizing the
energy control procedure being inspected.
b. The periodic inspection shall be conducted to correct any deviations or inadequacies
identified.
c. Lockout inspections. Where lockout is used for energy control, the periodic inspection
shall include a review, between the inspector and each authorized employee, of that
employee’s responsibilities under the energy control procedure being inspected.
d. Tagout inspections. Where tagout is used for energy control, the periodic inspection shall
include a review, between the inspector and each authorized and affected employee, of
that employee’s responsibilities under the energy control procedure being inspected.
2. Certifications. LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall certify that the periodic inspections have
been performed and documented. The certification shall as a minimum identify:
a. The machine or equipment on which the energy control procedure was being utilized.
b. The date of the inspection.
c. The employees included in the inspection.
d. The person performing the inspection.
3. Equipment. The following is a list of equipment requiring lockout/tagout procedures:

________________________________________________
________________________________________________
________________________________________________
________________________________________________
________________________________________________
________________________________________________
________________________________________________
________________________________________________
HSE MANUAL
Lockout 0 Sept. 1, 2011 34.0
K. INITIAL TRAINING
1. LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall provide training to ensure that the purpose and function
of the energy control program is understood by employees and that the knowledge and skills
required for the safe application, usage, and removal of the energy controls are acquired by
employees. The training shall include the following:
a. Each authorized employee shall receive training in the recognition of applicable

hazardous energy sources, the type and magnitude of the energy available in the
workplace, and the methods and means necessary for energy isolation and control.
b. Each affected employee shall be instructed in the purpose and use of the energy control
procedure.
c. All other employees whose work operations are or may be in an area where energy
control procedures may be utilized, shall be instructed about the procedure, and about the
prohibition relating to attempts to restart or re-energize machines or equipment which are
locked our or tagged out.
2. When tagout systems are used, employees shall also be trained in the following limitations of
tags:
a. Tags are essentially warning devices affixed to energy isolating devices, and do not
provide the physical restraint on those devices that is provided by a lock.
b. When a tag is attached to an energy isolating means, it is not to be removed without
authorization of the authorized person responsible for it, and it is never to be bypassed,
ignored, or otherwise defeated.
c. Tags must be legible and understandable by all authorized employees, affected
employees, and all other employees whose work operations are or may be in the area, in
order to be effective. Non-legible or missing tags will be reported immediately.
d. Tags and their means of attachment must be made of materials which will withstand the
environmental conditions encountered in the workplace.
e. Tags may evoke a false sense of security, and their meaning needs to be understood as
part of the overall energy control program.
f. Tags must be securely attached to energy isolating devices so that they cannot be
inadvertently or accidentally detached during use.
L. REFRESHER TRAINING
1. Retraining shall be provided for all authorized and affected employees whenever there is a
change in their job assignments, a change in machines, equipment or processes that present a
new hazard, or when there is a change in the energy control procedures.
HSE MANUAL
Lockout 0 Sept. 1, 2011 34.0
2. Additional retraining shall also be conducted whenever a periodic inspection reveals, or
whenever this employer has reason to believe, that there are deviations from or inadequacies
in the employee’s knowledge or use of the energy control procedures.
3. The retraining shall re-establish employee proficiency and introduce new or revised control
methods and procedures, as necessary.
4. LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall certify that employee training has been accomplished and
is being kept up to date. The certification shall contain each employee’s name and dates of
training
M. ENERGY ISOLATION
Lockout or tagout shall be performed only by the authorized employees who are performing the
N. NOTIFICATION OF EMPLOYEES
Affected employees shall be notified of the application and removal of lockout devices or tagout
devices. Notification shall be given before the controls are applied, and after they are removed
from the machine or equipment.
O. APPLICATION OF CONTROL
The lockout or tagout procedures shall cover the following elements and actions and shall be
done in the following sequence:
1. Preparation for shutdown. Before an authorized or affected employee turns off a machine or
equipment, the authorized employee shall have knowledge of the type and magnitude of the
energy, the hazards of the energy to be controlled, and the method or means to control the
energy.
2. Machine or equipment shutdown. The machine or equipment shall be turned off or shut
down using the procedures established for the machine or equipment. An orderly shutdown
must be utilized to avoid any additional or increased hazard(s) to employees as a result of the
equipment stoppage.
3. Machine or equipment isolation. All energy isolating devices that are needed to control the
energy to the machine or equipment shall be physically located and operated in such a
manner as to isolate the machine or equipment from the energy source(s).
4. Lockout device application.

HSE MANUAL
Lockout 0 Sept. 1, 2011 34.0
a. Lockout or tagout devices shall be affixed to each energy isolating device by authorized
employees.
b. Lockout devices, where used, shall be affixed in a manner to that will hold the energy
isolating devices in a “safe” or “off” position.
c. Tagout devices, where used, shall be affixed in such a manner as will clearly indicate that
the operation or movement of energy isolating devices from the “safe” or “off” position is
prohibited.
5. Tagout device application.
a. Where tagout devices are used with energy isolating devices designed with the capability
of being locked, the tag attachment shall be fastened at the same point at which the lock
would have been attached.
b. Where a tag cannot be affixed directly to the energy isolating device, the tag shall be
located as close as safely possible to the device, in a position that will be immediately
obvious to anyone attempting to operate the device.
6. Stored energy.
a. Following the application of lockout or tagout devices to energy isolating devices, all
potentially hazardous stored or residual energy shall be relieved, disconnected, restrained,
and otherwise rendered safe.
b. If there is a possibility of reaccumulation of stored energy to a hazardous level,
verification of isolation shall be continued until the servicing or maintenance is
completed, or until the possibility of such accumulation no longer exists.
7. Verification of isolation. Prior to starting work on machines or equipment that have been
locked out or tagged out, the authorized employee shall verify that isolation and de-
energization of the machine or equipment have been accomplished.
P. RELEASE FROM LOCKOUT OR TAGOUT
1. Before lockout or tagout devices are removed and energy is restored to the machine or
equipment, procedures shall be followed and actions taken by the authorized employee(s) to
ensure the following:
a. The machine or equipment. The work area shall be inspected to ensure that nonessential
items (locks, tags, etc.) have been removed and to also ensure that machine or equipment
components are operationally intact.
b. Employees. The work area shall be checked to ensure that all employees have been
safely positioned or removed.
c. This should be documented by the person verifying the operation.
HSE MANUAL
Lockout 0 Sept. 1, 2011 34.0
2. After lockout or tagout devices are removed and before a machine or equipment is started,
affected employees shall be notified that the lockout or tagout device(s) have been removed.
3. Each lockout or tagout device shall be removed from each energy isolating device by the
employee who applied the device. When the authorized employee who applied the lockout
or tagout device is not available to remove it, that device may be removed under the direction
of the supervisor, provided that specific procedures and training for such removal have been
developed, documented and incorporated into this employer’s energy control program.
LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall demonstrate that the specific procedure provides
equivalent safety to the removal of the device by the authorized employee who applied it.
The specific procedure shall include at least the following elements:
a. Verification that the authorized employee who applied the device is not at the facility.
b. Making all reasonable efforts to contact the authorized employee to inform him/her that
his/her lockout or tagout device has been removed.
c. Ensuring that the authorized employee has this knowledge before he/she resumes work at
that facility.
Q. TESTING OF MACHINES AND/OR EQUIPMENT TEMPORARILY REMOVED

FROM SERVICE
1. In situations in which lockout or tagout devices must be temporarily removed from the
energy isolating device and the machine or equipment energized to test or position the
machine, equipment or component thereof, the following sequence of actions shall be
followed:
a. Clear the machine or equipment of tools and materials.

b. Remove employees from the machine or equipment area.
c. Remove the lockout or tagout devices as specified as part of the individual machine
procedures.
d. Energize and proceed with testing or positioning.
e. De-energize all systems and reapply energy control measures in accordance with machine
procedures and continue the servicing and/or maintenance.
R. NON-COMPANY PERSONNEL (CONTRACTORS, ETC.)
1. Whenever outside servicing personnel are to be engaged in activities covered by the scope
and application of this program, LABORDE MARINE, LLC and the outside employer shall
inform each other of their respective lockout or tagout procedures.
2. LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall ensure that his/her employees understand and comply
with the restrictions and prohibitions of the outside employer’s energy control program.
HSE MANUAL
Lockout 0 Sept. 1, 2011 34.0
S. GROUP LOCKOUT OR TAGOUT
1. When servicing and/or maintenance is performed by a crew, craft, department or other group,
they shall utilize a procedure which affords the employees a level of protection equivalent to
that provided by the implementation of a personal lockout or tagout device.
2. Group lockout or tagout devices shall be used in accordance with the procedures required by
this program governing individual procedures which shall include, but not necessarily limited
to, the following specific requirements:
a. Primary responsibility will be vested in an authorized employee for a set number of

employees working under the protection of a group lockout or tagout device (such as an
operations lock).
b. Provision for the authorized employee to ascertain the exposure status of individual group
members with regard to the lockout or tagout of the machine or equipment will be made.
c. When more than one crew, craft, department, etc. is involved, assignment of overall job-
associated lockout or tagout control responsibility will be vested to an authorized
employee designated to coordinate affected work forces and ensure continuity of
protection.
d. Each authorized employee shall affix a personal lockout or tagout device to the group
lockout device, group lockbox, or comparable mechanism when he or she begins work,
and shall remove those devices when he or she stops working on the machine or
equipment being serviced or maintained.
e. Departments which could come under group lockout/tagout procedures:

____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
T. SHIFT OR PERSONNEL CHANGES
Specific procedures shall be utilized during shift or personnel changes to ensure the continuity of
lockout or tagout protection, including provision for the orderly transfer of lockout or tagout device
HSE MANUAL
Lockout 0 Sept. 1, 2011 34.0
protection between off-going and oncoming employees, to minimize exposure to hazards from the
unexpected energization or start-up of the machine or equipment, or the release of stored energy.
U. DEFINITIONS APPLICABLE TO THIS INSTRUCTION
Affected employee – An employee whose job requires him/ her to operate or use a machine or
equipment on which servicing or maintenance is being performed under lockout or tagout, or
whose job requires him/her to work in an area in which such servicing or maintenance is being
performed.
Authorized employee – A person who locks out or tags out machines or equipment in order to
perform servicing or maintenance on that machine or equipment. An affected employee
becomes an authorized employee when that employee’s duties include performing servicing or
maintenance covered under this section.
Capable of being locked out – An energy isolating device is capable of being locked out if it has
a hasp or other means of attachment to which, or through which, a lock can be affixed, or it has a
locking mechanism built into it. Other energy isolating devices are capable of being locked out,
if lockout can be achieved without the need to dismantle, rebuild, or replace the energy isolating
device or permanently alter its energy control capability.
Energized – Connected to an energy source or containing residual or stored energy
Energy isolating device – A mechanical device that physically prevents the transmission or
release of energy, including, but not limited to the following:
1. A manually operated electrical circuit breaker.
2. A disconnect switch.
3. A manually operated switch, by which the conductors of a circuit can be disconnected

from all ungrounded supply conductors, and, in addition, no pole can be operated
independently.
4. A line valve; a block; and any similar device used to block or isolate energy.
5. Push buttons, selector switches and other control circuit type devices are not energy
isolating devices.
HSE MANUAL
Lockout 0 Sept. 1, 2011 34.0
Energy source – Any source of electrical, mechanical, hydraulic, pneumatic, chemical, thermal,
or other energy.
Hot tap – A procedure used in the repair, maintenance and services activities, which involves
welding on a piece of equipment (pipelines, vessels or tanks) under pressure, in order to install
connections or appurtenances. It is commonly used to replace or add sections of pipeline without
the interruption of service for air, gas, water, steam, and petrochemical distribution systems.
Lockout – The placement of a lockout device on an energy isolating device, in accordance with
an established procedure, ensuring that the energy isolating device and the equipment being
controlled cannot be operated until the lockout device is removed.
Lockout device – A device that utilizes a positive means such as a lock, either key or
combination type, to hold an energy isolating device in a safe position and prevent the energizing
of a machine or equipment. Included are blank flanges and bolted slip blinds.
Normal production operations – The utilization of a machine or equipment to perform its

intended production function.
Servicing and/or maintenance – Workplace activities such as constructing, installing, setting up,
adjusting, inspecting, modifying, and maintaining and/or servicing machines or equipment.
These activities include lubrication, cleaning or un-jamming of machines or equipment and
making adjustments or tool changes, where the employee may be exposed to the unexpected
energization or startup of the equipment or release of hazardous energy.
Setting up – Any work performed to prepare a machine or equipment to perform its normal
production operation.
Tagout – The placement of a tagout device on an energy isolating device, in accordance with an
established procedure, to indicate that the energy isolating device and the equipment being
controlled may not be operated until the tagout device is removed.
Tagout device – A prominent warning device, such as a tag and a means of attachment, which
can be securely fastened to an energy isolating device in accordance with an established
procedure, to indicate that the energy isolating device and the equipment being controlled may
not be operated until the tagout device is removed.
HSE MANUAL
Disciplinary 0 Sept. 1, 2011 35.0
Program Prepared By: Approved By: Page:
DISCIPLINARY PROGRAM
LABORDE MARINE, LLC has the exclusive right to administer appropriate disciplinary action,
including discharge, to employees for just or proper cause. Generally, a documented progressive
discipline approach is indicated whenever a policy or procedure, work rule, or safety violation
occurs.
A. PROGRESSIVE DISCIPLINE APPROACH
1. A typical progressive discipline approach includes the following action levels:
a. Verbal Warning:
Documented in writing, by supervisor or location manager, but administered in an
informal setting. Documentation should include the nature of the violation and the
measures to be taken by the employee to rectify the violation. The documentation is
placed in employee’s personnel file.
b. Written Warning:
Letter of reprimand
Documented in writing by the location supervisor or manager with the original given to
the employee and a copy placed in the employee’s personnel file. Documentation should
include the nature of the violation, measures to be taken by the employee to rectify the
violation and the consequences of another violation.
c. Suspension:
Either days away from work without pay or a temporary reassignment with or without a
corresponding pay reduction. Documented in writing by the location supervisor or
manager and placed in employee’s personnel file. Documentation should include the
nature of the violation, measures to be taken by the employee to rectify the violation and
the consequences of another violation.
d. Discharge
Documented in writing, signed by location supervisor or manager and placed in
employee’s personnel file. The documentation should include a narrative of the violation
and the reason for discharge.
2. All levels of disciplinary action short of discharge must include counseling and retraining
with a clear goal in mind of FAVORABLY modifying the offending employee’s future
behavior.
HSE MANUAL
B. STEP DISCIPLINE
The step discipline approach should never preclude decisive action. When necessary, in cases
involving immediate threat to life, limb, or property, significant increases in employee risk (such
as poor Motor Vehicle Record or repeated violation of safety rules), or in cases where customer
relations, public relations, other employees or LABORDE MARINE, LLC itself is threatened
by the offending employee’s actions or omissions.
1. The following are examples of just cause for discharge (this list is not all inclusive):
a. Unsatisfactory job performance.

b. Falsification of time-keeping records
c. Falsification of business expense account records.
d. Insubordination or other disrespectful conduct to supervisors and/or customers.
e. Excessive absenteeism with or without notice.
f. Reporting late for work or excessive lateness, which interferes with job performance.
g. Disregard of safety rules or practices. Examples (not limited to)
1) Not wearing hardhat in the shop or offshore as required.

2) Not wearing safety glasses as required.
3) Not wearing steel toe shoes as required.
h. Fighting, horseplay, or other disruptive activities on Company premises or while on duty.

i. Refusal or failure to perform assigned work or to comply with written or verbal
instructions of the supervisor.
j. Violation of LABORDE MARINE, LLC Substance Abuse Policy and/or related safety
rules.
k. Unauthorized possession of weapons, explosives, alcoholic beverages, drugs and/or other
items deemed contraband are not allowed offshore, on company premises, in company
vehicles, and/or customer property, premises or plants.
l. Theft, misappropriation, or deliberate damage of a fellow employees, LABORDE
MARINE, LLC, and/or customer’s property or equipment.
m. Misrepresentation or other fraudulent action relative to LABORDE MARINE, LLC
benefits plans (i.e., group health, worker compensation, disability leave, vacation, etc.).
n. Misuse or removal without proper authorization of employee or customer lists, blue
prints, or models, Company records, Company training materials, or any confidential
Company information.
o. Unauthorized disclosure of business information, transactions, plans, or other confidential

Information.
p. Neglect of duty (including leaving job or duty assignment without just cause or
permission or sleeping on duty).
HSE MANUAL
C. MANAGEMENT/SUPERVISOR REVIEWS
Periodic evaluations (minimum annually) will be conducted, documented and used as an integral
part of our performance review systems. These reviews will take into consideration both
company as well as departmental goals, safety goals and objectives and will reflect the degree
any individual bonus or promotion is received. LABORDE MARINE, LLC is depending on
the seriousness of any violation that reflects a lack of commitment towards established company
goals could also result in the same level of disciplinary action as stated earlier in this program.
D. EMPLOYMENT
Employment with LABORDE MARINE, LLC is at the mutual consent of LABORDE

MARINE, LLC and the Employee. Either party may terminate the relationship at any time with
or without advanced notice.
E. ENDORSEMENT
This policy is endorsed and shall be enforced by upper management.

HSE MANUAL
Electrical 1 July 1, 2012 36.0
ELECTRICAL SAFETY
(QUALIFIED/NON-QUALIFIED)
A. INTRODUCTION
The Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) recommends that certain guidelines be
adhered to regarding electrical hazards. This program is intended to address comprehensively the
issues of; evaluating and identifying potential energy sources where work is, evaluating the
associated potential hazards, communicating information concerning these hazards, and establishing
appropriate procedures, and protective measures for our employees. LABORDE MARINE, LLC
will review and evaluate this program on an annual basis, or when changes occur to 29 CFS
1910.331-335, that prompt revision of this document, or when facility operational changes occur that
require a revision of this document.
B. RESPONSIBILITY
LABORDE MARINE, LLC HSE Director is solely responsible for all facets of this program and
has full authority to make necessary decisions to ensure success of the program. The HSE Director
will develop written detailed instructions covering each of the basic elements in this program, and is
the sole person authorized to amend these instructions. LABORDE MARINE, LLC has expressly
authorized the HSE Director to halt any operation of LABORDE MARINE, LLC where there is
danger of serious personal injury.
C. FACILITY/DEPARTMENT EVALUATION
LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall evaluate its facility(s) by department to determine where high
risk from electrical hazards exist. Jobs/areas that present such risks will meet the criteria for
designation as an electrical hazard area.
1. Employee notification. LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall inform exposed employees, by

posting danger signs, conducting awareness training, or by any other equally effective means,
of the existence and location of and the danger posed by electrical hazard areas. A sign
reading “DANGER ELECTRICAL HAZARD, AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY” or
similar language in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.145 will be used to satisfy the requirement
for untrained employee/visitor notification.
HSE MANUAL
2. High-risk electrical hazard jobs/areas.
High Risk Electrical Hazard Jobs/Areas Listing
Department Area/Job Date Evaluated
3. Alerting techniques. The following alerting techniques shall be used to warn and protect
employees from hazards that could cause injury due to electric shock, burns, or failure of
electric equipment parts:
a. Safety signs, safety symbols, or accident prevention tags shall be used where necessary to
warn employees about electrical hazards that may endanger them, as required by 29 CFR
1910.145.
b. Barricades shall be used in conjunction with safety signs where it is necessary to prevent
or limit employee access to work areas exposing employees to uninsulated energized
conductors or circuit parts. Conductive barricades may not be used where they might
cause an electrical contact hazard.
c. Attendants. If signs and barricades do not provide sufficient warning and protection from
electrical hazards, an attendant shall be stationed to warn and protect employees.
D. SCOPE
This program will cover work by both qualified and unqualified persons and will be detailed to cover
electrical safety-related work practices for both qualified persons (those who have training in
avoiding the electrical hazards of working on or near exposed energized parts) and unqualified
persons (those with little or no such training) working on, near, or with the following installations:
HSE MANUAL
1. Premises wiring. An installation of electric conductors and equipment within or on buildings
or other structures and on other premises such as yards, carnival, parking, and other lots, and
industrial substations.
2. Wiring for connection to supply. Installations of conductors that connect to the supply of
electricity.
3. Other wiring. Installations of other outside conductors on the premises.
4. Other fiber cable. Installations of optical fiber cable where such installations are made along
with electric conductors.
5. General electrical safety work practices by LABORDE MARINE, LLC’s employees.
E. TRAINING
1. Employees to be trained. Once an evaluation of jobs and areas of our facility is performed.
Training will be conducted for employees who face a risk of electric shock that is not
reduced to a safe level by the existing source.
2. Content of training
a. Electrical safety policy. The HSE Director will develop a facility wide electrical policy
that details LABORDE MARINE, LLC’s electrical safety policy.
b. Employee job specific training (unqualified). Employees who are classified as
“unqualified” (i.e., those not permitted to work on or near exposed energized parts)
persons shall also be trained in and familiar with any electrically related safety practices
inherent to their jobs which are necessary for their safety. First line supervisors in
coordination with the Maintenance Manager (where required) will develop a training
outline detailing the electrical hazards associated with a work area or job when an initial
evaluation reveals a risk of electrocution.
c. Employee job specific training (qualified). Employees who are classified as “qualified”
(i.e., those permitted to work on or near exposed energized parts) persons shall be trained
in and familiar with the safety-related work practices that pertain to their respective job
assignments. First line supervisors in coordination with the Maintenance Manager
(where required) will develop a training outline detailing the electrical hazards associated
with a work area or job when an initial evaluation reveals a risk of electrocution.
Qualified persons (i.e., those permitted to work on or near exposed energized parts) shall,
at a minimum, be trained in and familiar with the following:
HSE MANUAL
1) The skills and techniques necessary to distinguish exposed live parts from other parts
of electric equipment.
2) The skills and techniques necessary to determine the nominal voltage of exposed live
parts, and
3) The clearance distances and the corresponding voltages to which the qualified person
will be exposed.
NOTE 1: For the purposes of this program, Employee’s must have the training required by
the definition of a “qualified person” detailed above in order to be considered a qualified
person.
NOTE 2: Qualified persons whose work on energized equipment involves either direct
contact or contact by means of tools or materials must also have the training needed for safe
exposure to energized parts.
3. Type of Training
The training required by this program shall be of the classroom or on-the-job type. The
degree of training provided shall be determined by the evaluated risk to the employee.
a. Initial Training. LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall provide training to ensure that
employees understand the electrical hazards associated with their job and that the
knowledge and skills required for the safe application, usage, of work place equipment,
and removal of the energy controls are acquired by employees. The training shall include
the following:
1) Each authorized employee shall receive training in the recognition of applicable

hazardous energy sources, the type and magnitude of the energy available in the
workplace, and the methods and means necessary for energy isolation and control.
2) Each affected employee shall be instructed in the purpose and use of the energy
control procedure.
3) All other employees whose work operations are or may be in an area where energy
control procedures may be utilized, shall be instructed about the procedure, and about
the prohibition relating to attempts to restart or reenergize machines or equipment
which are locked out or tagged out. Tags are essentially warning devices affixed to
energy isolating devices, and do not provide the physical restraint on those devices
that is provided by a lock. Non-legible or missing tags will be reported immediately.
HSE MANUAL
4. Refresher Training.
a. Retraining shall be provided for all authorized and affected employees whenever there is
a change in their job assignments, a change in machines, equipment or processes that
present a new hazard, when their work takes them into hazardous areas, or when there is
a change in the energy control procedures.
b. Additional retraining shall also be conducted whenever a periodic inspection reveals, or
whenever this employer has reason to believe, that there are deviations from or
inadequacies in the employee’s knowledge of known hazards, or use of the energy
control procedures.
c. The retraining shall reestablish employee proficiency and introduce new or revised
control methods and procedures, as necessary.
5. Certifications. LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall certify that employee training has been
accomplished and is being kept up to date. The certification shall contain each employee’s
name and dates of training.
F. SELECTION AND USE OF WORK PRACTICES
Supervisors shall develop and ensure use of standardized safety-related work practices to prevent
electric shock or other injuries resulting from either direct or indirect electrical contacts. This will
be accomplished whenever work is performed near or on equipment or circuits that are or may be
energized. The specific safety-related work practices shall be consistent with the nature and extent
of the associated electrical hazards.
1. De-energized parts. Live parts to which an employee may be exposed shall be de-energized
before the employee works on or near them, unless it can be demonstrated that de-energizing
introduces additional or increased hazards or is unfeasible due to equipment design or
operational limitations. Live parts that operate at less than 50 volts to ground need not be de-
energized if there will be no increased exposure to electrical burns or to explosion due to
electric arcs. Conductors and parts of electrical equipment that have been de-energized but
not locked or tagged out shall be treated as live parts.
2. Lockout and tagging. While any employee is exposed to contact with parts of fixed electric
equipment or circuits which have been de-energized, the circuits energizing the parts shall be
locked out or tagged or both in accordance with the requirements of LABORDE MARINE,
LLC’s lockout/tagout procedures program. Lockout/Tagout also applies to other forms of
energy as well, i.e., thermal, radiation, gravity, steam, etc.
HSE MANUAL
3. Energized parts. If the exposed live parts are not de-energized (i.e., for reasons of increased
or additional hazards or unfeasibility), supervisors will ensure that other safety-related work
practices are used to protect employees who may be exposed to the electrical hazards
involved. Such work practices shall protect employees against contact with energized circuit
parts directly with any part of their body or indirectly through some other conductive object.
The work practices that are used shall be suitable for the conditions under which the work is
to be performed and for the voltage level of the exposed electric conductors, circuit parts, or
materials. Only qualified company employees may work on electric parts or equipment that
have not been de-energized.
a. Authorized maintenance personnel. Only employees in the following job classification(s)

(once trained) are authorized to work on or near exposed energized parts.
Department Job Classification
4. Contractor personnel. Contractor personnel will be notified that they will be required to
provide proof of certification for working on energized circuits, and shall be familiar with the
proper use of special precautionary techniques, personal protective equipment, insulating and
shielding materials, and insulated tools.
5. Overhead lines. If work is to be performed near overhead lines, the lines shall be de-
energized and grounded, or other protective measures shall be provided before work is
started. If the lines are to be de-energized, arrangements shall be made with the person or
organization that operates or controls the electric circuits involved to de-energize and ground
them. If protective measures, such as guarding, isolating, or insulating are provided, these
precautions shall prevent employees from contacting such lines directly with any part of their
body or indirectly through conductive materials, tools, or equipment. Unqualified persons
are prohibited from performing this type of work.
a. Unqualified employees (elevated). When an unqualified employee is working in an

elevated position near overhead lines, the location shall be in such that the person and the
longest conductive object he or she may contact cannot come closer to any unguarded,
energized overhead line than the following distances:
HSE MANUAL
1) For voltages to ground 50kV or below—10 ft. (305 cm)
2) For voltages to ground over 50kV—10 ft. (305 cm) plus 4 in. (10 cm) for every
10kV over 50kV.
b. Unqualified employees (ground). When a qualified person is working in the vicinity of

overhead lines, whether in an elevated position or on the ground, the person may not
approach or take any conductive object energized parts than shown in the table below
unless:
1) The person is insulated from the energized part (gloves, with sleeves if necessary,
rated for the voltage involved are considered to be insulation of the person from the
energized part on which work is performed) or
2) The energized part is insulated both from all other conductive objects at a different
potential and from the person or
3) The person is insulated form all conductive objects at a potential different from that
of the energized part.
Approach Distance for Qualified Employees - Alternating Current

Voltage Range (Phase to Phase) Minimum Approach Distance
300V and less Avoid Contact
Over 300V, not over 750V 1 ft. 0 in. (30.5 cm)
Over 750V, not over 2kV 1 ft. 6 in. (46 cm)
Over 2kV, not over 15kV 2 ft. 0 in. (61 cm)
Over 37kV, not over 87.5kV 3 ft. 6 in. (107 cm)
Over 87.5kV, not over 121kV 4 ft. 0 in. (122 cm)
6. Vehicular and mechanical equipment.
a. Company vehicles or mechanical equipment capable of having parts of its structure

elevated near energized lines shall be operated so that a clearance of 10 ft. (305cm) is
maintained. If the voltage is higher than 50kV, the clearance shall be increased 4 in. (10
cm) for every 10kV over that voltage. However, under any of the following conditions,
the clearance may be reduced:
1) If the vehicle is in transit with its structure lowered, the clearance may be reduced to
4 ft. (122 cm). If the voltage is higher than 50kV, the clearance shall be increased 4
in. (10cm) for every 10kV over that voltage.
HSE MANUAL
2) If insulating barriers are installed to prevent contact with the lines, and if the barriers
are rated for the voltage of the line being guarded and are not a part of an attachment
to the vehicle or its raised structure, the clearance may be reduced to a distance within
the designated working dimensions of the insulating barrier.
3) If the equipment is an aerial lift insulated for the voltage involved, and if a qualified
person performs the work, the clearance (between the un-insulated portion of the
aerial lift and the power line) may be reduced.
b. Employees standing on the ground may not contact the vehicle or mechanical equipment
or any of its attachments, unless:
1) The employee is using protective equipment rated for the voltage.

2) The equipment is located so that no un-insulated part of its structure (that portion of
the structure that provides a conductive path to employees on the ground) can come
closer to the line than 10 ft. (305 cm). If the voltage is higher than 50kV, the
clearance shall be increased 4 in. (10 cm) for every 10kV over that voltage.
3) If any vehicle or mechanical equipment capable of having parts of its structure
elevated near energized overhead lines is intentionally grounded, employees working
on the ground near the point of grounding may not stand at the grounding location
whenever there is a possibility of overhead line contact.
7. Illumination.
a. Supervisors will ensure that employees do not enter spaces containing exposed energized
parts, unless illumination is provided that enables the employees to perform the work
safely.
b. Where lack of illumination or an obstruction precludes observation of the work to be
performed, employees may not perform tasks near exposed energized parts. Employees
may not reach blindly into areas that may contain energized parts. Additionally, unless
know otherwise, the space shall be evaluated to determine if it meets the criteria for
designation as a confined space. LABORDE MARINE, LLC confined space program
will be implemented to manage the entry.
8. Confined spaces. When an employee works in a confined or enclosed space (such as a

manhole or vault) that contains exposed energized parts, LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall
provide, and the employee shall use, protective shields, protective barriers, or insulating
materials as necessary to avoid inadvertent contact with these parts. Doors, hinged panels,
and the like shall be secured to prevent their swinging into an employee and causing the
employee to contact exposed energized parts. Additionally, unless known otherwise, the
space shall be evaluated to determine if it meets the criteria for designation as a confined
HSE MANUAL
space. LABORDE MARINE, LLC confined space program will be implemented to
manage the entry.
9. Conductive materials and equipment. Conductive materials and equipment that are in
contact with any part of an employee’s body shall be handled in a manner that will prevent
them from contacting exposed energized conductors or circuit parts. Supervisors will ensure
pre-written safety procedures are in place, and that all employees are trained when long
dimensional conductive objects (such as ducts and pipes) in areas with exposed live parts, are
used. Other protective measures (such as the use of insulation, guarding, and material
handling techniques) will considered and used to minimize the hazard.
10. Portable ladders. Portable ladders shall have conductive side rails if they are used where the
employee or the ladder could contact exposed energized parts.
11. Conductive apparel. Conductive articles of jewelry and clothing (such as watch bands,
bracelets, rings, key chains, necklaces, metalized aprons, cloth with conductive thread, or
metal headgear) may not be worn if they might contact exposed energized parts. However,
such articles may be worn if they are rendered nonconductive by covering, wrapping, or
other insulating means.
12. Housekeeping duties. Where energized parts present an electrical contact hazard, employees
may not perform housekeeping duties at such close distances to the parts that there is a
possibility of contact, unless adequate safeguards (such as insulating equipment or barriers)
are provided. Electrically conductive cleaning materials (including conductive solids such as
steel wool, metalized cloth, and silicon carbide, as well as conductive liquid solutions) may
not be used in proximity to energized parts unless procedures are followed which will
prevent electrical contact.
13. Interlocks. Only a qualified employee may defeat an electrical safety interlock, and then
only temporarily while he or she is working on the equipment. The interlock system shall be
returned to its operable condition when this work is completed.
G. USE OF EQUIPMENT
1. Portable electric equipment. This paragraph applies to the use of cord and plug-connected
equipment, including flexible cord sets (extension cords).
a. Handling. Portable equipment shall be handled in a manner that will not cause damage.
Flexible electric cords connected to equipment may not be used for raising or lowering
HSE MANUAL
the equipment. Flexible cords may not be fastened with staples or otherwise hung in such
a fashion as could damage the outer jacket or insulation.
b. Visual inspection
1) Portable cord and plug-connected equipment and flexible cord sets (extension cords)
shall be visually inspected before use on any shift for external defects (such as loose
parts, deformed and missing pins, or damage to outer jacket or insulation) and for
evidence of possible internal damage (such as pinched or crushed outer jacket). Cord
and plug-connected equipment and flexible cord sets (extension cords) which remain
connected once they are put in place and are not exposed to damage need not be
visually inspected until they are relocated.
2) If there is a defect or evidence of damage that might expose an employee to injury,
the defective or damaged item shall be removed from service, and no employee may
use it until repairs and tests necessary to render the equipment safe have been made.
3) When an attachment plug is to be connected to a receptacle (including any on a cord
set), the relationship of the plug and receptacle contacts shall first be checked to
ensure that they are of proper mating configurations.
c. Ground-type equipment
1) A flexible cord used with grounding-type equipment shall contain an equipment

grounding conductor.
2) Attachment plugs and receptacles may not be connected or altered in a manner, which
would prevent proper continuity of the equipment grounding conductor at the point
where plugs are attached to receptacles. Additionally, these devices may not be
altered to allow the grounding pole of a plug to be inserted into slots intended for
connection to the current-carrying conductors.
3) Adapters, which interrupt the continuity of the equipment grounding connection, may
not be used.
d. Conductive work locations. Portable electric equipment and flexible cords used in highly
conductive work locations (such as those inundated with water or other conductive
liquids), or in job locations where employees are likely to contact water or conductive
liquids, shall be approved for those locations.
e. Connecting attachment plugs.
1) Employee’s hands may not be wet when plugging and unplugging flexible cords and
cord-and plug-connected equipment, if energized equipment is involved.
HSE MANUAL
2) Energized plug and receptacle connections may be handled only with insulating
protective equipment if the condition of the connection could provide a conducting
path to the employee’s hand (if, for example, a cord connector is wet from being
immersed in water).
3) Locking-type connectors shall be properly secured after connection.
2. Electric power and lighting circuits
a. Routine opening and closing of circuits. Load rated switches, circuit breakers, or other
devices specifically designed as disconnecting means shall be used for the opening,
reversing, or closing of circuits under load conditions. Cable connectors not of the load-
break type, fuses, terminal lugs, and cable splice connections may not be used for such
purposes, except in an emergency.
b. Reclosing circuits after protective device operation. After a circuit is de-energized by a
circuit protective device, the circuit may not be manually re-energized until it has been
determined that the equipment and circuit can be safely energized. The repetitive manual
reclosing of circuit breakers or re-energizing circuits through replaced fuses is prohibited.
NOTE: When it can be determined from the design of the circuit and the overcurrent devices
involved that the automatic operation of a device was caused by an overload rather than a
fault condition, no examination of the circuit or connected equipment is needed before the
circuit is re-energized.
c. Overcurrent protection modification. Overcurrent protection of circuits and conductors

may not be modified, even on a temporary basis, beyond that allowed by 29 CFR 1910.
304(e), the installation safety requirements for overcurrent protection.
3. Test instruments and equipment
a. Use. Only company qualified persons may perform testing work on electric circuits or
equipment.
b. Visual inspection. Test instruments and equipment and all associated test leads, cables,
power cords, probes, and connectors shall be visually inspected for external defects and
damage before the equipment is used. If there is a defect or evidence of damage that
might expose an employee to injury, the defective or damaged item shall be removed
from service, and no employee may use it until repairs and test necessary to render the
equipment safe have been made.
c. Rating of equipment. Test instruments and equipment and their accessories shall be rated
for the circuits and equipment to which they will be connected and shall be designed for
the environment in which they will be used.
HSE MANUAL
4. Occasional use of flammable or ignitable material. Where flammable materials are present
only occasionally, electric equipment capable of igniting them shall not be used, unless
measures are taken to prevent hazardous conditions from developing. Such materials
include, but are not limited to: flammable gases, vapors, or liquids; combustible dust; and
ignitable fibers or flyings.
NOTE: Electrical installation requirements for locations where flammable materials are present on a
regular basis are contained Safeguards for personnel protection.
H. SAFEGUARDS FOR PERSONNEL PROTECTION
1. Use of protective equipment
a. Personal protective equipment
1) Employees working in areas where there are potential electrical hazards shall be
provided with, and shall use, electrical protective equipment that is appropriate for the
specific parts of the body to be protected and for the work to be performed.
2) Protective equipment shall be maintained in a safe, reliable condition and shall be
periodically inspected or tested.
3) If the insulating capability of protective equipment may be subject to damage during
use, the insulating material shall be protected. (For example, an outer covering of
leather is sometimes used for the protection of rubber insulating material.)
4) Employees shall wear non-conductive head protection wherever there is a danger of
head injury from electric shock or burns due to contact with exposed energized parts.
5) Employees shall wear protective equipment for the eyes or face wherever there is
danger of injury to the eyes or face from electric arcs or from flying objects resulting
from electrical explosion.
b. General protective equipment and tools
1) When working near exposed energized conductors or circuit parts, each employee
shall use insulated tools or handling equipment if the tools or handling equipment
might make contact with such conductors or parts. If the insulating capability of
insulated tools or handling equipment is subject to damage, the insulating material
shall be protected.
HSE MANUAL
a) Fuse handling equipment, insulated for the circuit voltage, shall be used to
remove or install fuses when the fuse terminals are energized.
b) Ropes and handlines used near exposed energized parts shall be non-conductive.
2) Protective shields, protective barriers, or insulating materials shall be used to protect

each employee from shock, burn, or other electrically related injuries while that
employee is working near exposed energized parts which might be accidentally
contacted or where dangerous electric heating or arcing might occur. When normally
enclosed live parts are exposed for maintenance or repair, they shall be guarded to
protect unqualified persons from contact with the live parts.
c. Ground Fault Protection:
1) All 120-volt, single phase, 15 and 20 ampere receptacle outlets, which are not part of
the permanent wiring of the building or structure and which are in use by employees,
shall have approved ground-fault circuit interrupters for personnel protection.
2) Specific written procedure governing the use should be available at the jobsite for
inspection and use by all affected employees.
3) A competent person will be designated at each jobsite who will be responsible for
identifying existing, potential, or working conditions hazardous to employees and
who will have the necessary authority to promptly correct or eliminate these
conditions.
4) Each cord set, as well as plug and receptacles of each cord set, or any equipment
attached by a cord set not exposed to damages must be visibly inspected prior to each
use on a daily basis. Any defects such as deformed or missing pins or insulation
damage or indications of internal damage shall not be used until repaired.
5) All electrical cord sets and receptacles shall be tested according to the following:
 All grounding equipment will be tested for continuity.

 All receptacle caps and plugs shall be tested for the correct attachment to the
grounding conductor.
 These tests will be conducted prior to each use, and before return to service
following any incident, which conceivably cause damage.
6) No employee is allowed to use any equipment which has not met any of the
requirements listed in above paragraph C-1 through 5.
HSE MANUAL
I. DEFINITIONS APPLICABLE TO THIS POLICY
Acceptable. An installation or equipment is acceptable to the Assistant Secretary of Labor and

approved within the meaning of this 29 CFR 1910 Subpart S:
 If it is accepted, or certified, or listed, or labeled, or otherwise determined to be safe by a

nationally recognized testing laboratory; or
 With respect to an installation or equipment of a kind which no nationally recognized

testing laboratory accepts, certifies, lists, labels, or determines to be safe, if it inspected or
tested by another Federal agency, or by a State, municipal, or other local authority
responsible for enforcing occupational safety provisions of the National Electrical Code
and found in compliance with the provisions of the National Electrical Code as applied in
this Subpart; or
 With respect to custom-made equipment or related installations which are designed,

fabricated for, and intended for use by a particular customer, if it is determined to be safe
for its intended use by its manufacturer on the basis of test data which the employer keeps
and makes available for inspection to the Assistant Secretary and his authorized
representatives. Refer to 29 CFR 1910.7 for definition of nationally recognized testing
laboratory.
Accepted. An installation is “accepted” if it has been inspected and found by a nationally

recognized testing laboratory to conform to specified plans or to procedures of applicable codes.
Accessible. (As applied to wiring methods.) Capable of being removed or exposed without
damaging the building structure or finish, or not permanently closed in by the structure or finish of
the building. (See “concealed” and “exposed”.)
Accessible. (As applied to equipment.) Admitting close approach; not guarded by locked doors,
elevation, or other effective means. (See “Readily accessible.”)
Ampacity. Current-carrying capacity of electric conductors expressed in amperes.
Appliances. Utilization equipment, generally other than industrial, normally built in standardized
sizes or types, which is installed or connected as a unit to perform one or more functions such as
clothes washing, air conditioning, food mixing, deep frying, etc.
HSE MANUAL
Approved. Acceptable to the authority enforcing 29 CFR 1910 subpart S. The authority enforcing
this subpart is the Assistant Secretary of Labor for Occupational Safety and Health. The definition
of “acceptable” indicates what is acceptable to the Assistant Secretary of Labor, and therefore
approved within the meaning of 29 CFR 1910 Subpart S.
Approved for the purpose. Approved for a specific purpose, environment, or application described
in a particular standard requirement. Suitability of equipment or materials for a specific purpose,
environment or application may be determined by a nationally recognized testing laboratory,
inspection agency or other organization concerned with product evaluation as part of its listing and
labeling program. (See “Labeled” or “Listed”.)
Armored cable. Type AC armored cable is a fabricated assembly of insulated conductors in a

flexible metallic enclosure.
Askarel. A generic term for a group of nonflammable synthetic chlorinated hydrocarbons used as
electrical insulating media. Askarels of various compositional types are used. Under arcing
conditions the gases produced, while consisting predominantly of noncombustible hydrogen
chloride, can include varying amounts of combustible gases depending upon the askarel type/
Attachment plug (Plug cap) (Cap). A device which, by insertion in a receptacle, establishes
connection between the conductors of the attached flexible cord and the conductors connected
permanently to the receptacle.
Automatic. Self-acting, operating by its own mechanism when actuated by some impersonal
influence, as, for example, a change in current strength, pressure, temperature, or mechanical
configuration.
Bare conductor. See “Conductor.”
Bonding. The permanent joining of metallic parts to form an electrically conductive path which will
assure electrical continuity and the capacity to conduct safely an current likely to be imposed.
Bonding jumper. A reliable conductor to assure the required electrical conductivity between metal
parts required to be electrically connected.
HSE MANUAL
Branch circuit. The circuit conductors between the final overcurrent device protecting the circuit
and the outlet(s).
Building. A structure which stands alone or which is cut off from adjoining structures by fire walls
with all openings therein protected by approved fire doors.
Cabinet. An enclosure designed either for surface or flush mounting, and provided with a frame,
mat or trim in which a swinging door or doors are or may be hung.
Cable tray system. A cable tray system is a unit or assembly of units or sections, and associated
fittings, made of metal or other noncombustible materials forming a rigid structural system used to
support cables.
 Cable tray systems include ladders, troughs, channels, solid bottom trays, and other
similar structures.
Cablebus. Cable bus is an approved assembly of insulated conductors with fittings and conductor
terminations in a completely enclosed, ventilated, protective metal housing.
Center pivot irrigation machine. A center pivot irrigation machine is a multi-motored irrigation
machine which revolves around a central pivot and employs alignment switches or similar devices to
control individual motors.
Certified. Equipment is “certified” if it:
 Has been tested and found by a nationally recognized testing laboratory to meet
nationally recognized standards or to be safe for use in a specified manner, or
 Is of a kind whose production is periodically inspected by a nationally recognized
testing laboratory, and
 It bears a label, tag, or other record of certification.
Circuit breaker.
 (600 volts nominal, or less). A device to open and close a circuit by nonautomatic
means and to open the circuit automatically on a predetermined overcurrent without
injury to itself when properly applied within its rating.
HSE MANUAL
 (Over 600 volts, nominal). A switching device capable of making, carrying, and
breaking currents under normal circuit conditions, and also making, carrying for a
specified time, and breaking currents under specified abnormal circuit conditions,
such as those of short circuit.
Class I locations. Class I locations are those in which flammable gases or vapors are or may be
present in the air in quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitable mixtures. Class I locations
include the following:
 Class I, Division 1. A Class I, Division 1 location is a location:
 In which hazardous concentrations of flammable gases or vapors may exist under

normal operating conditions; or
 In which hazardous concentrations of such gases or vapors may exist frequently
because of repair or maintenance operations or because of leakage; or
 In which breakdown or faulty operation of equipment or processes might release
hazardous concentrations of flammable gases or vapors, and might also cause
simultaneous failure of electric equipment.
NOTE: This classification usually includes locations where volatile flammable liquids or liquefied
flammable gases are transferred from one container to another; interiors of spray booths and areas in
the vicinity of spraying and painting operations where volatile flammable solvents are used;
locations containing open tanks or vats of volatile flammable liquids; drying rooms or compartments
for the evaporation of flammable solvents; locations containing fat and oil extraction equipment
using volatile flammable solvents; portions of cleaning and dyeing plants where flammable liquids
are used; gas generator rooms and other portions of gas manufacturing plants where flammable gas
may escape; inadequately ventilated pump rooms for flammable gas or for volatile flammable
liquids; the interiors of refrigerators and freezers in which volatile flammable materials are stored in
open, lightly stoppered, or easily ruptured containers; and all other locations where ignitable
concentrations of flammable vapors or gases are likely to occur in the course of normal operations.
 Class I, Division 2. A Class I, Division 2 location is a location:
 In which volatile flammable liquids or flammable gases are handled, processed, or

used, but in which the hazardous liquids, vapors, or gases will normally be confined
within closed containers or closed systems from which they can escape only in case
of accidental rupture or breakdown of such containers or systems, or in case of
abnormal operation of equipment; or
HSE MANUAL
 In which hazardous concentrations of gases or vapors are normally prevented by
positive mechanical ventilation, and which might become hazardous through failure
or abnormal operations of the ventilating equipment; or
 That is adjacent to a Class I, Division 1 location, and to which hazardous
concentrations of gases or vapors might occasionally be communicated unless such
communication is prevented by adequate positive-pressure ventilation from a source
of clean air, and effective safeguards against ventilation failure are provided.
NOTE: This classification usually includes locations where volatile flammable liquids or
flammable gases or vapors are used, but which would become hazardous only in case of an
accident or of some unusual operating condition. The quantity of flammable material that
might escape in case of accident, the adequacy of ventilating equipment, the total are
involved, and the record of the industry or business with respect to explosions or fires are all
factors that merit consideration in determining the classification and extent of each location.
Piping without valves, checks, meters, and similar devices would not ordinarily introduce a
hazardous condition even though used for flammable liquids or gases. Locations used for the
storage of flammable liquids or a liquefied or compressed gases in sealed containers would
not normally be considered hazardous unless also subject to other hazardous conditions.
Electrical conduits and their associated enclosures separated from process fluids by a single
seal or barrier are classed as a Division 2 location if the outside of the conduit and enclosures
is a non hazardous location.
Class II locations. Class II locations are those that are hazardous because of the presence of
combustible dust. Class II locations include the following:
 Class II, Division 1. A Class II, Division 1 location is a location
 In which combustible dust is or may be in suspension in the air under normal

operating conditions, in quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitable
mixtures; or
 Where mechanical failure or abnormal operation of machinery or equipment might
cause such explosive or ignitable mixtures to be produced, and might also provide a
source of ignition through simultaneous failure of electric equipment, operation of
protection devices, or from other causes, or
 In which combustible dusts of an electrically conductive nature may be present.
NOTE: This classification may include areas of grain handling and processing plants, starch
plants, sugar-pulverizing plants, malting plants, hay-grinding plants, coal pulverizing plants,
areas where metal dusts and powders are produced or processed, and other similar locations
HSE MANUAL
which contain dust producing machinery and equipment (except where the equipment is dust-
tight or vented to the outside). These areas would have combustible dust in the air, under
normal operating conditions, in quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitable
mixtures. Combustible dusts which are electrically non-conductive include dusts produced in
the handling and processing of grain and grain products, pulverized sugar and cocoa, dried
egg and mild powders, pulverized spices, starch and pastes, potato and woodflour, oil meal
from beans and seed, dried hay, and other organic materials which may produce combustible
dusts when processed or handled. Dusts containing magnesium or aluminum are particularly
hazardous and the use of extreme caution is necessary to avoid ignition and explosion.
 Class II, Division 2. A Class II, Division 2 location is a location in which:
 Combustible dust will not normally be in suspension in the air in quantities sufficient
to produce explosive or ignitable mixtures, and dust accumulations are normally
insufficient to interfere with the normal operation of electrical equipment or other
apparatus; or
 Dust may be in suspension in the air as a result of infrequent malfunctioning of
handling or processing equipment, and dust accumulations resulting there from may
be ignitable by abnormal operation or failure of electrical equipment or other
apparatus.
NOTE: This classification includes locations where dangerous concentrations of suspended

dust would not be likely but where dust accumulations might form on or in the vicinity of
electric equipment.
These areas may contain equipment from which appreciable quantities of dust would escape
under abnormal operating conditions or be adjacent to a Class II Division 1 location, as
described above, into which an explosive or ignitable concentration of dust may be put into
suspension under abnormal operating conditions.
Class III locations. Class III locations are those that are hazardous because of the presence of easily
ignitable fibers or flyings but in which such fibers or flyings are not likely to be in suspension in the
air in quantities sufficient to produce ignitable mixtures. Class III locations include the following:
 Class III, Division 1. A Class III, Division 1 location is a location in which easily
ignitable fibers or materials producing combustible flyings are handled,
manufactured, or used.
HSE MANUAL
NOTE: Such locations usually include some parts of rayon, cotton, and other textile mills;
combustible fiber manufacturing and processing plants; cotton gins and cotton-seed mills;
flax-processing plants; clothing manufacturing plants; woodworking plants, and
establishments; and industries involving similar hazardous processes or conditions. Easily
ignitable fibers and flyings include rayon, cotton (including cotton linters and cotton waste),
sisal or henequen, istle, jute, hemp, tow, cocoa fiber, oakum, baled waste kapok, Spanish
moss, excelsior, and other materials of similar nature.
 Class III, Division 2. A Class III, Division 2 location is a location, in which

easily ignitable fibers are stored or handled, except in process of manufacture.
Collector ring. A collector ring is an assembly of slip rings for transferring electrical energy from a
stationary to a rotating member.
Concealed. Rendered inaccessible by the structure or finish of the building. Wires in concealed
raceways are considered concealed, even though they may become accessible by withdrawing them.
[See “Accessible. (As applied to wiring methods.)]
Conductor.
 Bare. A conductor having no covering or electrical insulation whatsoever.
 Covered. A conductor encased within material of composition or thickness that is not

recognized as electrical insulation.
 Insulated. A conductor encased within material of composition and thickness that is

recognized as electrical insulation.
Conduit body. A separate portion of a conduit or tubing system that provides access through a
removable cover(s) to the interior of the system at a junction of two or more sections of the system
or at a terminal point of the system. Boxes such as FS and FD or larger cast or sheet metal boxes are
not classified as conduit bodies.
Controller. A device or group of devices that serves to govern, in some predetermined manner, the
electric power delivered to the apparatus to which it is connected.
HSE MANUAL
Cooking unit, counter-mounted. A cooking appliance designed for mounting in or on a counter
and consisting of one or more heating elements, internal wiring, and built-in or separately mountable
controls. (See “Oven, wall mounted.”)
Covered conductor. See “conductor”
Cutout. (Over 600 volts, nominal). An assembly of a fuse support with either a fuseholder, fuse
carrier, or disconnecting blade. The fuseholder or fuse carrier may include a conducting element
(fuse link), or may act as the disconnecting blade by the inclusion of a nonfusible member.
Cutout box. An enclosure designed for surface mounting and having swinging doors or covers
secured directly to and telescoping with the walls of the box proper. (See “Cabinet.”) Damp
location. See “Location.”
Dead front. Without live parts exposed to a person on the operating side of the equipment.
Device. A unit of an electrical system which is intended to carry but not utilize electric energy.
Dielectric heating. Dielectric heating is the heating of a nominally insulating material due to its
own dielectric losses when the material is placed in a varying electric field.
Disconnecting means. A device, or group of devices, or other means by which the conductors of a
circuit can be disconnected from their source of supply.
Disconnecting (or Isolating) switch. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) A mechanical switching device
used for isolating a circuit or equipment from a source of power.
Dry location. See “Location”.
Electric sign. A fixed, stationary, or portable self-contained, electrically illuminated utilization

equipment with words or symbols designed to convey information or attract attention.
Enclosed. Surrounded by a case, housing, fence or walls which will prevent persons from
accidentally contacting energized parts.
HSE MANUAL
Enclosure. The case of housing of apparatus, or the fence or walls surrounding an installation to
prevent personnel from accidentally contacting energized parts, or to protect the equipment from
physical damage.
Equipment. A general term including material, fittings, devices, appliances, fixtures, apparatus, and
the like, used as part of, or in connection with, an electrical installation. Equipment grounding
conductor. See “Grounding conductor, equipment.”
Explosion-proof apparatus. Apparatus enclosed in a case that is capable of withstanding an

explosion of a specified gas or vapor which may occur within it and of preventing the ignition of a
specified gas or vapor surrounding the enclosure by sparks, flashes, or explosion of the gas or vapor
within, and which operates at such an external temperature that it will not ignite a surrounding
flammable atmosphere.
Exposed. (As applied to live parts.) Capable of being inadvertently touched or approached nearer
than a safe distance by a person. It is applied to parts not suitably guarded, isolated, or insulated.
(See “Accessible” and “Concealed”.)
Exposed. (As applied to wiring methods.) On or attached to the surface or behind panels designed
to allow access. [See “Accessible. (As applied to wiring methods.)”]
Externally operable. Capable of being operated without exposing the operator to contact with live
parts.
Feeder. All circuit conductors between the service equipment, or the generator switchboard of an
isolated plant, and the final branch-circuit overcurrent device.
Fitting. An accessory such as a locknut, bushing, or other part of a wiring system that is intended
primarily to perform a mechanical rather than an electrical function.
Fuse. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) An overcurrent protective device with a circuit opening fusible
part that is heated and severed by the passage of overcurrent through it. A fuse comprises all the
parts that form a unit capable of performing the prescribed functions. It may or may not be the
complete device necessary to connect it into an electrical circuit.
HSE MANUAL
Ground. A conducting connection, whether intentional or accidental, between an electrical circuit
or equipment and the earth, or to some conducting body that serves in place of the earth.
Grounded. Connected to earth or to some conducting body that serves in place of the earth.
Grounded, effectively. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) Permanently connected to earth through a
ground connection of sufficiently low impedance and having sufficient ampacity that ground fault
current which may occur cannot build up to voltages dangerous to personnel.
Grounded conductor. A system or circuit conductor that is intentionally grounded.
Grounding conductor. A conductor used to connect equipment or the grounded circuit of a wiring
system to a grounding electrode or electrodes.
Grounding conductor, equipment. The conductor used to connect the non-current-carrying metal
parts of equipment, raceways, and other enclosures to the system grounded conductor and/or the
grounding electrode conductor at the service equipment or at the source of a separately derived
system.
Grounding electrode conductor. The conductor used to connect the grounding electrode to the
equipment grounding conductor and/or to the grounded conductor of the circuit at the service
equipment or at the source of a separately derived system.
Ground-fault circuit-interrupter. A device whose function is to interrupt the electric circuit to the
load when a fault current to ground exceeds some predetermined value that is less than that required
to operate the overcurrent protective device of the supply circuit.
Guarded. Covered, shielded, fenced, enclosed, or otherwise protected by means of suitable covers,
casings, barriers, rails, screens, mats, or platforms to remove the likelihood of approach to a point of
danger or contact by persons or objects.
Health care facilities. Building or portions of buildings and mobile homes that contain, but are not
limited to, hospitals, nursing homes, extended care facilities, clinics, and medical and dental offices,
whether fixed or mobile.
HSE MANUAL
Heating equipment. For the purposes of 29 CFR 1910.306(g), the term heating equipment includes
any equipment used for heating purposes if heat is generated by induction or dielectric methods.
Hoistway. Any shaftway, hatchway, well hole, or other vertical opening or space in which an
elevator or dumbwaiter is designed to operate.
Identified. Identified, as used in reference to a conductor or its terminal, means that such conductor
or terminal can be readily recognized as grounded.
Induction heating. Induction heating is the heating of a nominally conductive material due to its
own I \2\ R losses when the material is placed in a varying electromagnetic field.
Insulated conductor. See Conductor
Interrupter switch. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) A switch capable of making, carrying, and
interrupting specified currents.
Irrigation machine. An irrigation machine is an electrically driven or controlled machine, with one
or more motors, not hand portable, and used primarily to transport and distribute water for
agricultural purposes.
Isolated. Not readily accessible to persons unless special means for access are used.
Isolated power system. A system comprising an isolating transformer or its equivalent, a line
isolation monitor, and its ungrounded circuit conductors.
Labeled. Equipment is labeled if there is attached to it a label, symbol, or other identifying mark of
a nationally recognized testing laboratory which, (a) makes periodic inspections of the production of
such equipment, and (b) whose labeling indicates compliance with nationally recognized standards
or tests to determine safe use in a specified manner.
Lighting outlet. An outlet intended for the direct connection of a lampholder, a lighting fixture, or a
pendant cord terminating in a lampholder.
HSE MANUAL
Line-clearance tree trimming. The pruning, trimming, repairing, maintaining, removing, or
clearing of trees or cutting of bush that is within 10 feet (305 cm) of electric supply lines and
equipment.
Listed. Equipment is listed if it is of a kind mentioned in a list which, (a) is published by a

nationally recognized laboratory which makes periodic inspection of the production of such
equipment, and (b) states such equipment meets nationally recognized standards or has been tested
and found safe for use in a specified manner.
Location
 Damp location. Partially protected locations under canopies, marquee, roofed open
porches, and like locations, and interior locations subject to moderate degrees of
moisture, such as some basements, some barns, and some cold-storage warehouses.
 Dry location. A location not normally subject to dampness or wetness. A location

classified as dry may be temporarily subject to dampness or wetness, as in the case of a
building under construction.
 Wet location. Installations underground or in concrete slabs or masonry in direct contact

with the earth, and locations subject to saturation with water or other liquids, such as
vehicle-washing areas, and locations exposed to weather and unprotected.
May. If a discretionary right, privilege, or power is conferred, the word “may” is used. If a right,
privilege, or power is abridged or if an obligation to abstain from acting is imposed, the word “may”
is used with a restrictive “no,” “not,” or “only.” (E.g., no employer may…; an employer may no…;
only qualified persons may…)
Medium voltage cable. Type MV medium voltage cable is a single or multi-conductor solid
dielectric insulated cable rated 2000 volts or higher.
Metal-clad cable. Type MC cable is a factory assembly of one or more conductors, each
individually insulated and enclosed in a metallic sheath of interlocking tape, or a smooth or
corrugated tube.
HSE MANUAL
Mineral-insulated metal-sheathed cable. Type MI mineral-insulated metal-sheathed cable is a
factory assembly of one or more conductors insulated with a highly compressed refractory mineral
insulation and enclosed in a liquid-tight and gas-tight continuous copper sheath.
Mobile X-ray. X-ray equipment mounted on a permanent base with wheels and/or casters for
moving while completely assembled. Non-metallic-sheathed cable.
Nonmetallic-sheathed cable is a factory assembly of two or more insulated conductors having an

outer sheath of moisture resistant, flame-retardant, nonmetallic material. Nonmetallic-sheathed
cable is manufactured in the following types:
 Type NM. The overall covering has a flame-retardant and moisture-resistant finish.
 Type NMC. The overall covering is flame-retardant, moisture-resistant, fungus-resistant,

and corrosion-resistant. Oil (filled) cutout. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) A cutout in
which all or part of the fuse support and its fuse link or disconnecting blade are mounted
in oil with complete immersion of the contacts and the fusible portion of the conducting
element (fuse link), so that arc interruption by severing of the fuse link or by opening of
the contacts will occur under oil.
Open wiring on insulators. Open wiring on insulators is an exposed wiring method using cleats,
knobs, tubes, and flexible tubing for the protection and support of single insulated conductors run in
or on buildings, and not concealed by the building structure.
Outlet. A point on the wiring system at which current is taken to supply utilization equipment.
Outline lighting. An arrangement of incandescent lamps or electric discharge tubing to outline or

call attention to certain features such as the shape of a building or the decoration of a window.
Oven, wall-mounted. An oven for cooking purposes designed for mounting in or on a wall or other
surface and consisting of one or more heating elements, internal wiring, and built-in or separately
mountable controls. (See Cooking unit, counter mounted.)
Overcurrent. Any current in excess of the rated current of equipment or the ampacity of a
conductor. It may result from overload (see definition), short circuit, or ground fault. A current in
HSE MANUAL
excess of rating may be accommodated by certain equipment and conductors for a give set of
conditions. Hence the rules for overcurrent protection are specific for particular situations.
Overload. Operation of equipment in excess of normal, full load rating, or of a conductor in excess
of rated ampacity which, when it persists for a sufficient length of time, would cause damage or
dangerous overheating. A fault, such as a short circuit or ground fault, is not an overload. (See
Overcurrent.)
Panelboard. A single panel or group of panel units designed for assembly in the form of a single
panel; including buses, automatic overcurrent devices, and with or without switches for the control
of light, heat, or power circuits; designed to be placed in a cabinet or cutout box placed in or against
a wall or partition and accessible only from the front. (See Switchboard.)
Permanently installed decorative fountains and reflection pools. Those that are constructed in
the ground, on the ground, or in a building in such a manner that the pool cannot be readily
disassembled for storage and are served by electrical circuits of any nature. These units are
primarily constructed for their aesthetic value and not intended for swimming or wading.
Permanently installed swimming pools, wading and therapeutic pools. Those that are
constructed in the ground, on the ground, or in a building in such a manner that the pool cannot be
readily disassembled for storage whether or not served by electrical circuits of any nature.
Portable X-ray. X-ray equipment designed to be hand-carried.
Power and control tray cable. Type TC power and control tray cable is a factory assembly of two
or more insulated conductors, with or without associated bare or covered grounding conductors
under a nonmetallic sheath, approved for installation in cable trays, in raceways, or where supported
by a messenger wire.
Power fuse. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) See Fuse.
Power-limited tray cable. Type PLTC nonmetallic-sheathed power limited tray cable is a factory
assembly of two or more insulated conductors under a nonmetallic jacket.
Power outlet. An enclosed assembly which may include receptacles, circuit breakers, fuseholder,
fused switches, buses and watt-hour meter mounting means; intended to supply and control power to
HSE MANUAL
mobile homes, recreational vehicles or boats, or to serve as a means for distributing power required
to operate mobile or temporarily installed equipment.
Premises wiring system. That interior and exterior wiring, including power, lighting, control, and
signal circuit wiring together with all of its associated hardware, fittings, and wiring devices, both
permanently and temporarily installed, which extends from the load end of the service drop, or load
end of the service lateral conductors to the outlet(s). Such wiring does not include wiring internal to
appliances, fixtures, motors, controllers, motor control centers, and similar equipment.
Qualified person. One familiar with the construction and operation of the equipment and the
hazards involved.
 Note 1: Whether an employee is considered to be a “qualified person” will depend upon

various circumstances in the workplace. It is possible and, in fact, likely for an individual
to be considered “qualified” with regard to certain equipment in the workplace, but
“unqualified” as to other equipment. (See 29 CFR 1910.332(b)(3) for training
requirements that specifically apply to qualified persons.)
 Note 2: An employee who is undergoing on-the-job training and who, in the course of
such training, has demonstrated an ability to perform duties safely at his or her level of
training and who is under the direct supervision of a qualified person is considered to be a
qualified person for the performance of those duties.
Raceway. A channel designed expressly for holding wires, cables, or busbars, with additional
functions as permitted in this subpart. Raceways may be of metal or insulating material, and the
term includes rigid metal conduit, rigid nonmetallic conduit, intermediate metal conduit, liquidtight
flexible metal conduit, flexible metallic tubing, flexible metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing,
underfloor raceways, cellular concrete floor raceways, cellular metal floor raceways, surface
raceways, wireways, and busways.
Readily accessible. Capable of being reached quickly for operation, renewal, or inspections,
without requiring those to who ready access is requisite to clime over or remove obstacles or to
resort to portable ladders, chairs, etc. (See “Accessible”.)
Receptacle. A receptacle is a contact device installed at the outlet for the connection of a single
attachment plug. A single receptacle is a single contact device with no other contact device on the
same yoke. A multiple receptacle is a single device containing two or more receptacles.
HSE MANUAL
Receptacle outlet. An outlet where one or more receptacles are installed.
Remote-control circuit. Any electric circuit that controls any other circuit through a relay or an
equivalent device.
Sealable equipment. Equipment enclosed in a case or cabinet that is provided with a means of
sealing or locking so that live parts cannot be made accessible without opening the enclosure. The
equipment may or may not be operable without opening the enclosure.
Separately derived system. A premises wiring system whose power is derived from generator,
transformer, or converter winding and has no direct electrical connection, including a solidly
connected grounded circuit conductor, to supply conductors originating in another system.
Service. The conductors and equipment for delivering energy from the electricity supply system to
the wiring system of the premises served.
Service cable. Service conductors made up in the form of a cable.
Service conductors. The supply conductors that extend from the street main or from transformers
to the service equipment of the premises supplied.
Service drop. The overhead service conductors from the last pole or other aerial support to and
including the splices, if any, connecting to the service entrance conductors at the building or other
structure.
Service entrance cable. Service entrance cable is a single conductor or multi-conductor assembly
provided with or without an overall covering, primarily used for services and of the following types:
 Type SE, having a flame-retardant, moisture-resistant covering, but not required to have
inherent protection against mechanical abuse.
 Type USE, recognized for underground use, having a moisture-resistant covering, but not
required to have a flame-retardant covering or inherent protection against mechanical
abuse. Single-conductor cables having an insulation specifically approved for the
purpose do not require an outer covering.
HSE MANUAL
Service-entrance conductors, overhead system. The service conductors between the terminals of
the service equipment and a point usually outside the building, clear of building walls, where joined
by tap or splice to the service drop.
Service entrance conductors, underground system. The service conductors between the terminals
of the service equipment and the point of connection to the service lateral. Where service equipment
is located outside the building walls, there may be no service-entrance conductors, or they may be
entirely outside the building.
Service equipment. The necessary equipment, usually consisting of a circuit breaker or switch and
fuses, and their accessories, located near the point of entrance of supply conductors to a building or
other structure, or an otherwise defined area, and intended to constitute the main control and means
of cutoff of the supply.
Service raceway. The raceway that encloses the service-entrance conductors.
Shielded nonmetallic-sheathed cable. Type SNM, shielded nonmetallic-sheathed cable is a factory

assembly of two or more insulated conductors in an extruded core of moisture-resistant, flame-
resistant nonmetallic material, covered with an overlapping spiral metal tape and wire shield and
jacketed with an extruded moisture-, flame-, oil-, corrosion-, fungus-, and sunlight-resistant
nonmetallic material.
Show window. Any window used or designed to be used for the display of goods or advertising
material, whether it is fully or partly enclosed or entirely open at the rear and whether or not it has a
platform raised higher than the street floor level.
Sign. See Electric Sign
Signaling circuit. Any electric circuit that energizes signaling equipment.
Special permission. The written consent of the authority having jurisdiction.
Storable swimming or wading pool. A pool with a maximum dimension of 15 feet and a
maximum wall height of 3 feet and is so constructed that it may be readily disassembled for storage
and reassembled to its original integrity.
HSE MANUAL
Switchboard. A large single panel, frame, or assembly of panels which have switches, buses,
instruments, overcurrent and other protective devices mounted on the face or back or both.
Switchboards are generally accessible from the rear as well as from the front and are not intended to
be installed in cabinets. (See Panelboard.)
Switches
 General-use switch. A switch intended for use in general distribution and branch
circuits. It is rated in amperes, and it is capable of interrupting its rated current at its
rated voltage.
 General-use snap switch. A form of general-use switch so constructed that it can be

installed in flush device boxes or on outlet box covers, or otherwise used in conjunction
with wiring systems recognized by this subpart.
 Isolating switch. A switch intended for isolating an electric circuit from the source of
power. It has no interrupting rating, and it is intended to be operated only after the circuit
has been opened by some other means.
 Motor-circuit switch. A switch, rated in horsepower, capable of interrupting the

maximum operating overload current of a motor of the same horsepower rating as the
switch at the rated voltage.
 Switching devices. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) Devices designed to close and/or open
one or more electric circuits. Included in this category are circuit breakers, cutouts,
disconnecting (or isolating) switches, disconnecting means, interrupter switches, and oil
(filled) cutouts.
Transportable X-ray. X-ray equipment installed in a vehicle or that may readily be disassembled
for transport in a vehicle. Utilization equipment. Utilization equipment means equipment which
utilizes electric energy for mechanical, chemical, heating, lighting, or similar useful purpose.
Utilization system. A utilization system is a system which provides electric power and light for
employee workplaces, and includes the premises wiring system and utilization equipment.
HSE MANUAL
Ventilated. Provided with a means to permit circulation of air sufficient to remove an excess of
heat, fumes, or vapors.
Volatile flammable liquid. A flammable liquid is having a flash point below 380C (100 degrees F)
or whose temperature is above its flash point.
Voltage (of a circuit). The greatest root-mean-square (effective) difference of potential between
any two conductors of the circuit concerned.
Voltage, nominal. A nominal value assigned to a circuit or system for the purpose of conveniently
designating its voltage class (as 120/240, 480Y/277, 600, etc.). The actual voltage at which a circuit
operates can vary from the nominal within a range that permits satisfactory operation of equipment.
Voltage to ground. For grounded circuits, the voltage between the given conductor and that point
of the circuit that is grounded; for ungrounded circuits, the greatest voltage between the given
conductor and any other conductor of the circuit.
Watertight. So constructed that moisture will not enter the enclosure.
Weatherproof. So constructed or protected that exposure to the weather will not interfere with
successful operation. Rainproof, raintight, or watertight equipment can fulfill the requirements for
weatherproof where varying weather conditions other than wetness, such as snow, ice, dust, or
temperature extremes, are not a factor.
Wet location. See Location.
Wireways. Wireways are sheet-metal troughs with hinged or removable covers for housing and
protecting electric wires and cable and in which conductors are laid in place after the wireway has
been installed as a complete system.
HSE MANUAL
J. STATIC ELECTRICITY
This section describes hazards associated with the generation of static electricity during the
loading and discharging of cargo and during tank cleaning, dipping, ullaging and sampling.
Section 1.1 introduces some basic principles of electrostatics in order to explain how objects
become charged and to describe the effect of those charges on other objects in close
surroundings. The risks presented by static electricity discharges occur where a flammable
atmosphere is likely to be present. The main precaution for tankers against electrostatic risks is to
conduct operations with the cargo tanks protected by inert gas. Section 1.2 describes, in general
terms, precautions against electrostatic hazards in tanks that are not protected by inert gas; these
are discussed in more detail in Section 1.3 considers other likely sources of electrostatic hazards
in tanker and terminal operations.
1.1 Principles of Electrostatics
1.1.1 Summary
Static electricity presents fire and explosion hazards during the handling of flammable
liquids and during other tanker operations such as tank cleaning, dipping, ullaging and
sampling. Certain operations can give rise to accumulations of electric charge that may be
released suddenly in electrostatic discharges with sufficient energy to ignite flammable
product gas/air mixtures. There is, of course, no risk of ignition unless a flammable
mixture is present. There are three basic stages leading up to a potential electrostatic
hazard:
• Charge separation.
• Charge accumulation.
• Electrostatic discharge.
All three of these stages are necessary for an electrostatic ignition of a flammable
atmosphere. Electrostatic discharges can occur as a result of accumulations of charge on:
• Liquid or solid non-conductors, for example a static accumulator oil (such as

kerosene) pumped into a tank, or a polypropylene rope.
• Electrically insulated liquid or solid conductors, for example mists, sprays or

particulate suspensions in air, or an unbonded metal rod hanging on the end of a
rope. The principles of electrostatic hazards and the precautions to be taken to
manage the risks are described fully below.
HSE MANUAL
1.1.2 Charge Separation
Whenever two dissimilar materials come into contact, charge separation occurs at the
interface. The interface may be between two solids, between a solid and a liquid or
between two immiscible liquids. At the interface, a charge of one sign (say positive)
moves from material A to material B so that materials A and B become respectively
negatively and positively charged. While the materials stay in contact and immobile
relative to one another, the charges are extremely close together. The voltage difference
between the charges of opposite sign is then very small, and no hazard exists. However,
when the materials move relative to one another, the charges can be separated and the
voltage difference increased. The charges can be separated by many processes. For
example:
• The flow of liquid product through pipes.
• Flow through fine filters (less than 150 microns) that have the ability to charge
products to a very high level, as a result of all the product being brought into
intimate contact with the filter surface where charge separation occurs.
• Contaminants, such as water droplets, rust or other particles, moving relative to

product as a result of turbulence in the product as it flows through pipes.
• The settling of a solid or an immiscible liquid through a liquid (e.g. water, rust or other
particles through the product). This process may continue for up to 30 minutes
after completion of loading into a tank.
• Gas bubbles rising up through a liquid (e.g. air, inert gas introduced into a tank by the
blowing of cargo lines or vapour from the liquid itself, released when pressure is
dropped). This process may also continue for up to 30 minutes after completion of
loading.
• Turbulence and splashing in the early stages of loading product into an empty tank.
This is a problem in the liquid and in the mist that can form above the liquid.
• The ejection of particles or droplets from a nozzle (e.g. during steaming operations or
injection of inert gas).
• The splashing or agitation of a liquid against a solid surface (e.g. water washing
operations or the initial stages of filling a tank with product).
HSE MANUAL
1.1.3 Charge Accumulation

Charges that have been separated attempt to recombine and to neutralize each other. This
process is known as ‘charge relaxation’. If one or both of the separated materials carrying
charge is a very poor electrical conductor, recombination is impeded and the material
retains or accumulates the charge upon it. The period of time for which the charge is
retained is characterized by the relaxation time of the material, which is related to its
conductivity; the lower the conductivity, the greater the relaxation time.
If a material has a comparatively high conductivity, the recombination of charges is very
rapid and can counteract the separation process, and consequently little or no static
electricity accumulates on the material. Such a highly conductive material can only retain
or accumulate charge if it is insulated by means of a poor conductor, and the rate of loss
of charge is then dependent upon the relaxation time of this lesser conducting material.
The important factors governing relaxation are therefore the electrical conductivities of
the separated materials, of other conductors nearby, such as tanker’s structure, and of any
additional materials that may be interposed between them after their separation.
1.1.4 Electrostatic Discharge
Electrostatic discharge occurs when the electrostatic field becomes too strong and the
electrical resistance of an insulating material suddenly breaks down. When breakdown
occurs, the gradual flow and charge recombination associated with relaxation is replaced
by sudden flow recombination that generates intense local heating (e.g. a spark) that can
be a source of ignition if it occurs in a flammable atmosphere. Although all insulating
media can be affected by breakdowns and electrostatic discharges, the main concern for
tanker operations is the prevention of discharges in air or vapour, so as to avoid sources
of ignition.
Electrostatic fields in tanks or compartments are not uniform because of tank shape and
the presence of conductive internal protrusions, such as probes and structure. The field
strength is enhanced around these protrusions and, consequently, that is where discharges
generally occur. A discharge may occur between a protrusion and an insulated conductor
or solely between a conductive protrusion and the space in its vicinity, without reaching
another object.
1.1.4.1 Types of Discharge

Electrostatic discharge can take the form of a ‘corona’, a ‘brush discharge’, a ‘spark’ or a
‘propagating brush discharge’, as described below:
Corona is a diffuse discharge from a single sharp conductor that slowly releases some of
the available energy. Generally, corona on its own is incapable of igniting a gas.
Brush Discharge is a diffuse discharge from a highly charged non-conductive object to a

HSE MANUAL
single blunt conductor that is more rapid than corona and releases more energy. It is
possible for a brush discharge to ignite gases and vapours. Examples of a brush discharge
are:
• Between a conductive sampling apparatus lowered into a tank and the surface of
a charged liquid.
• Between a conductive protrusion (e.g. fixed tank washing machine) or structural

member and a charged liquid being loaded at a high rate.
Spark is an almost instantaneous discharge between two conductors where almost all of
the energy in the electrostatic field is converted into heat that is available to ignite a
flammable atmosphere. Examples of sparks are:
• Between an unearthed conductive object floating on the surface of a charged

liquid and the adjacent tank structure.
• Between unearthed conductive equipment suspended in a tank and the adjacent

tank structure.
• Between conductive tools or materials left behind after maintenance when

insulated by a rag or piece of lagging.
Sparks can be incendive if various requirements are met. These include:

• A discharge gap short enough to allow the discharge to take place with the
voltage difference present, but not so short that any resulting flame is quenched.
• Sufficient electrical energy to supply the minimum amount of energy to initiate

combustion.
Propagating Brush Discharge is a rapid, high energy discharge from a sheet of material of
high resistivity and high dielectric strength with the two surfaces highly charged but of
opposite polarity. The discharge is initiated by an electrical connection (short circuit)
between the two surfaces. The bipolar sheet can be in ‘free space’ or, as is more normal,
have one surface in intimate contact with a conducting material (normally earthed).
The short circuit can be achieved:
• By piercing the surface (mechanically or by an electrical break-through).
• By approaching both surfaces simultaneously with two electrodes electrically

connected.
• When one of the surfaces is earthed, by touching the other surface with an
earthed conductor.
HSE MANUAL
1.1.4.2 Conductivity
Materials and liquid products that are handled by tankers and terminals are classified as
being non-conductive, semi-conductive (in most electrostatic standards the term
‘dissipative’ is now preferred to ‘semi-conductive’) or conductive.
Non-Conductive Materials (or Non-Conductors)
These materials have such low conductivities that once they have received a charge they
retain it for a very long period. Non-conductors can prevent the loss of charge from
conductors by acting as insulators. Charged non-conductors are of concern because they
can generate incendive brush discharges to nearby earthed conductors and because they
can transfer a charge to, or induce a charge on, neighboring insulated conductors that
may then give rise to sparks.
Liquids are considered to be non-conductors when they have conductivities less than
50 pS/m (pico Siemens/metre). Such liquids are often referred to as static accumulators.
Reference should be made to a product’s (MSDS) to ascertain its conductivity.
The solid non-conductors include plastics, such as polypropylene, PVC, nylon and many
types of rubber. They can become more conductive if their surfaces are contaminated
with dirt or moisture.
Semi-Conductive Materials (or Dissipative Materials or Intermediate Conductors)
The liquids in this intermediate category have conductivities exceeding 50pS/m and,
along with conductive liquids, are often known as static non-accumulators. The solids in
this intermediate category generally include such materials as wood, cork, sisal and
naturally occurring organic substances. They owe their conductivity to their ready
absorption of water and they become more conductive as their surfaces are contaminated
by moisture and dirt. However, when new or thoroughly cleaned and dried, their
conductivities can be sufficiently low to bring them into the non-conductive range.
If materials in the intermediate conductivity group are not insulated from earth, their
conductivities are high enough to prevent accumulation of an electrostatic charge.
However, their conductivities are normally low enough to inhibit production of energetic
sparks.
For materials with intermediate conductivities, the risk of electrostatic discharge is small,
particularly if practices in this Guide are adhered to, and the chance of their being
incendive is even smaller. However, caution should still be exercised when dealing with
intermediate conductors because their conductivities are dependent upon many factors
and their actual conductivity is not known.
HSE MANUAL
Conductive Materials
In the case of solids, these are metals and, in the case of liquids, the whole range of
aqueous solutions, including sea water. The human body, consisting of about 60% water,
is effectively a liquid conductor. Many alcohols are conductive liquids.
The important property of conductors is that they are incapable of holding a charge unless
insulated, but also that, if they are insulated, charged and an opportunity for an electrical
discharge occurs, all the charge available is almost instantaneously released into the
potentially incendive discharge.
Table 3.1 provides information on the typical conductivity value and classification for a
range of products:
Product
Typical Conductivity
Classification
Non-Conductive
Xylene 0.1 Accumulator
Gasoline (straight run) 0.1 to 1 Accumulator
Diesel (ultra-low sulphur) 0.1 to 2 Accumulator
Lube oil (base) 0.1 to 1,000* Accumulator
Commercial jet fuel 0.2 to 50 Accumulator
Toluene 1 Accumulator
Kerosene 1 to 50 Accumulator
Diesel 1 to 100* Accumulator
Cyclohexane <2 Accumulator
Motor gasoline 10 to 300* Accumulator
Semi-Conductive
Fuel with anti-static additive 50 to 300 Non-accumulator
Heavy black fuel oils 50 to 1,000 Non-accumulator
Conductive crude >1,000 Non-accumulator
Bitumen >1,000 Non-accumulator
Alcohols 100,000 Non-accumulator
Ketones 100,000 Non-accumulator
Conductive
Distilled water 1,000,000,000 Non-accumulator
Water 100,000,000,000 Non-accumulator
HSE MANUAL
1.1.5 Electrostatic Properties of Gases and Mists
Under normal conditions, gases are highly insulating and this has important implications
with respect to mists and particulate suspensions in air and other gases. Charged mists are
formed during the ejection of liquid from a nozzle, for example:
• Products entering an empty tank at high velocity.

• Wet steam condensing.
• Water from tank washing machines.
Although the liquid, for example water, may have a very high conductivity, the relaxation of
the charge on the droplets is hindered by the insulating properties of the surrounding gas.
Fine particles present in inert flue gas, or created during discharge of pressurized liquid
carbon dioxide, are frequently charged. The gradual charge relaxation, which does occur,
is the result of the settling of the particles or droplets and, if the field strength is high, of
corona discharge at sharp protrusions. Under certain circumstances, discharges with
sufficient energy to ignite product gas/air mixtures can occur.
1.2 General Precautions Against Electrostatic Hazards
1.2.1 Overview
Whenever a flammable atmosphere could potentially be present, the following measures

must be taken to prevent electrostatic hazards:
• The bonding of metal objects to the metal structure of the tanker to eliminate the risk
of spark discharges between metal objects that might be electrically insulated. This
includes metallic components of any equipment used for dipping, ullaging and
sampling.
• The removal from tanks or other hazardous areas of any loose conductive objects that
cannot be bonded.
• Restricting the linear velocity of the cargo to a maximum of 1 metre per second at the
individual tank inlets during the initial stages of loading, i.e. until:
a) the filling pipe and any other structure on the base of the tank has been
submerged to twice the filling pipe diameter in order that all splashing and surface
turbulence has ceased and
b) any water collected in the pipeline has been cleared. It is necessary to load at
this
HSE MANUAL
restricted rate for a period of 30 minutes or until two pipeline volumes (i.e. from
shore tank to ship’s tank) have been loaded into the tank, whichever is the lesser.
Number of tanks open –
6'' / 150
1.2.2 Bonding
The most important countermeasure that must be taken to prevent an electrostatic hazard
is to bond all metallic objects together to eliminate the risk of discharges between objects
that might be charged and electrically insulated. To avoid discharges from conductors to
earth, it is normal practice to include bonding to earth (‘earthing’ or ‘grounding’). On
tankers, bonding to earth is effectively accomplished by connecting metallic objects to the
metal structure of the tanker, which is naturally earthed through the water.
Some examples of objects which might be electrically insulated in hazardous situations and
which must therefore be bonded are:
• Ship/shore hose couplings and flanges, except for the insulating flange or single
length of non-conducting hose required to provide electrical isolation between the ship
and shore.
• Portable tank washing machines.
• Manual ullaging and sampling equipment with conducting components.
• The float of a permanently fitted ullaging device if its design does not provide an
earthing path through the metal tape.
The best method of ensuring bonding and earthing will usually be a metallic connection
between the conductors. Alternative means of bonding are available and have proved
effective in some applications, for example semi-conductive (dissipative) pipes and ‘O’
rings, rather than embedded metallic layers, for GRP pipes and their metal couplings.
Any earthing or bonding links used as a safeguard against the hazards of static electricity
associated with portable equipment must be connected whenever the equipment is set up
and not disconnected until after the equipment is no longer in use.
1.2.5 Avoiding Loose Conductive Objects
Certain objects may be insulated during tanker operations, for example:
• A metal object, such as a can, floating in a static accumulating liquid.

• A loose metal object while it is falling in a tank during washing operations.
• A metallic tool, lying on a piece of old lagging, left behind after maintenance.
Every effort should be made to ensure that such objects are removed from the tank since
there is evidently no possibility of deliberately bonding them. This necessitates careful
HSE MANUAL
inspection of tanks, particularly after shipyard repairs.
1.3 Other Sources of Electrostatic Hazards
1.3.4 Filters
Three classifications of filter may be used as follows:

Coarse (greater than or equal to 150 microns).
These do not generate a significant amount of charge, and require no additional
precautions provided that they are kept clean.
Fine (less than 150 microns, greater than 30 microns).

These can generate a significant amount of charge and therefore require sufficient time
for the charge to relax before the liquid reaches the tank. It is essential that the liquid
spends a minimum of 30 seconds (residence time) in the piping downstream of the filter.
Flow velocity should be controlled to ensure that this residence time requirement is met.
Microfine (less than or equal to 30 microns).

To allow sufficient time for the charge to relax, the residence time after passing through
Micro fine filters must be a minimum of 100 seconds before the product enters the tank.
Flow velocity should be adjusted accordingly
1.3.5 Fixed Equipment in Cargo Tanks
A metal probe, remote from any other tank structure but near a highly charged liquid
surface, will have a strong electrostatic field at the probe tip. Protrusions of this type may
be associated with equipment mounted from the top of a tank, such as fixed washing
machines or high level alarms. During the loading of static accumulator oils, this strong
electrostatic field may cause electrostatic discharges to the approaching liquid surface.
Metal probes of the type described above can be avoided by installing the equipment
adjacent to a bulkhead or other tank structure to reduce the electrostatic field at the probe
tip. Alternatively, a support can be added running from the lower end of the probe
downward to the tank structure below, so that the rising liquid meets the support at earth
potential rather than the insulated tip of a probe. Another possible solution, in some
cases, is to construct the probe-like device entirely of a non-conductive material. These
measures are not necessary if the tanker is limited to conductive products or if the tanks
are inerted.
1.3.6 Free Fall in Tanks
Loading or ballasting over the top (overall) delivers charged liquid to a tank in such a
manner that it can break up into small droplets and splash into the tank. This may
produce a charged mist as well as an increase in the product gas concentration in the tank.
HSE MANUAL
3.3.4 Water Mists
The spraying of water into tanks, for instance during water washing, gives rise to
electrostatically charged mist. This mist is uniformly spread throughout the tank being
washed. The electrostatic levels vary widely from tank to tank, both in magnitude and in
sign. When washing is started in a dirty tank, the charge in the mist is initially negative,
reaches a maximum negative value, then goes back through zero and finally rises towards
a positive equilibrium value. It has been found that, among the many variables affecting
the level and polarity of charging, the characteristics of the wash water and the degree of
cleanliness of the tank have the most significant influence. The electrostatic charging
characteristics of the water are altered by re-circulation or by the addition of tank
cleaning chemicals, either of which may cause very high electrostatic potentials in the
mist. Potentials are higher in large tanks than in small ones. The size and number of
washing machines in a tank affect the rate of change of charge, but they have little effect
on the final equilibrium value.
The charged mist droplets created in the tank during washing give rise to an electrostatic
field, which is characterised by a distribution of potential (voltage) throughout the tank
space. The bulkheads and structure are at earth (zero) potential and the space potential
increases with distance from these surfaces and is highest at points furthest from them.
The field strength, or voltage gradient, in the space is greatest near the tank bulkheads
and structure, more especially where there are protrusions into the tank. If the field
strength is high enough, electric breakdown occurs into the space, giving rise to a corona.
Because protrusions cause concentrations of field strength, a corona occurs preferentially
from such points. A corona injects a charge of the opposite sign into the mist and is
believed to be one of the main processes limiting the amount of charge in the mist to an
equilibrium value.
The corona discharges produced during tank washing are not strong enough to ignite the
hydrocarbon gas/air mixtures that may be present. Under certain circumstances,
discharges with sufficient energy to ignite product gas/air mixtures can occur from
unearthed conducting objects already within, or introduced into, a tank filled with
charged mist. Examples of such unearthed conductors are a metal sounding
rod suspended on a rope or a piece of metal falling through the tank space.
An unearthed conductor within a tank can acquire a high potential, primarily by

induction, when it comes near an earthed object or structure, particularly if the latter is in
the form of a protrusion. The unearthed conductor may then discharge to earth giving rise
to a spark capable of igniting a flammable product gas/air mixture.
The processes by which unearthed conductors give rise to ignitions in a mist are fairly
complex, and a number of conditions must be satisfied simultaneously before an ignition
HSE MANUAL
can occur. These conditions include the size of the object, its trajectory, the electrostatic
level in the tank and the geometrical configuration where the discharge takes place.
As well as solid unearthed conducting objects, an isolated slug of water produced by the
washing process may similarly act as a spark promoter and cause an ignition.
Experiments have shown that high capacity, single nozzle, fixed washing machines can
produce water slugs which, owing to their size, trajectory and duration before breaking
up, may satisfy the criteria for producing incendive discharges. However, there is no
evidence of water slugs capable of producing incendive discharges being produced by
portable types of washing machine. This can be explained by the fact that, if the jet is
initially fine, the length of slugs that are produced are relatively small so that they have a
small capacitance and do not readily produce incendive discharges.
1.3.7 Inert Gas
Small particulate matter carried in inert gas can be electrostatically charged. The charge
separation originates in the combustion process and the charged particles are capable of
being carried through the scrubber, fan and distribution pipes into the cargo tanks. The
electrostatic charge carried by the inert gas is usually small, but levels of charge have
been observed well above those encountered with the water mists formed during
washing. Because the tanks are normally in an inert condition, the possibility of an
electrostatic ignition has to be considered only if it is necessary to inert a tank which
already contains a flammable atmosphere or if a tank already inerted is likely to become
flammable because the oxygen content rises as a result of ingress of air.
1.3.8 Discharge of Carbon Dioxide
During the discharge of pressurized liquid carbon dioxide, the rapid cooling which takes
place can result in the formation of particles of solid carbon dioxide that become charged
on impact and contact with the nozzle. The charge can be significant with the potential
for incendive sparks. Liquefied carbon dioxide should not be used for inerting, or injected
for any other reason into cargo tanks or pump rooms that may contain flammable gas
mixtures.
HSE MANUAL
Emergency 0 Sept. 1, 2011 37.0
Response Prepared By: Approved By: Page:
EMERGENCY RESPONSE/CONTINGENCY PLAN
A. PURPOSE
To provide a formal emergency preparedness program that protects human health and property in the
event of an emergency such as fire, explosion. This plan also formalizes the arrangements with local
police, fire departments, hospitals, and emergency response contractors, in case of an emergency.
The plan will be maintained in writing at the workplace, and available to all employees for review.
In the event that there are 10 or fewer employees, the plan may be communicated orally to all
employees.
1. Delegation and Assignment
The Emergency Response Plan identifies a number of individuals who are to coordinate the
response of the facility to the emergency events. These persons may not always be present at
the facility when an event occurs.
One of the Emergency Response Coordinators listed is always on call. If the on-call
Emergency Response Coordinator is not at the facility, then he/she is available to those
individuals present at the facility by use of a paging device or telephone. The on-call
Emergency Response Coordinator is listed in the on-call list. If the on-call Emergency
Response Coordinator is not available, he/she must make arrangements with one of the other
Emergency Response Coordinators to assure proper coverage.
If an emergency situation arises during business hours, an Emergency Response Coordinator

is always available at the facility.
If a situation arises after hours, notification to the Emergency Response Coordinator should
be done using the pager first, telephone second, and, if there is no response, the alternate
coordinator list should be used.
HSE MANUAL
2. Authority
The Emergency Response Coordinator has the authority necessary to carry out the
procedures outlined in the Emergency Response Plan in the event of an emergency. These
authorities detailed in the Emergency Response Plan include:
a. Deploy equipment
b. Direct company personnel
c. Contact regulatory agencies
d. Summon assistance from hospital
e. Shut-down operations and evacuate the facility
f. Summon assistance from emergency services
The Emergency Response Coordinator will also provide any additional information
pertaining to the plan or respective duties to any and all employees.
B. IMPLEMENTATION OF RESPONSE PROCEDURE
Appropriate and prudent response activities are initiated in the event of any incident, which results in
fire, explosion, or other emergency. An assessment of the situation is performed immediately by the
Emergency Response Coordinator or his designee, and a decision is made whether or not to
implement the Emergency Response Plane in whole or in part.
1. Initial Incident Response

The person observing an, incident which he/she believes could involve a threat to human
health or property will follow the following procedures:
a. Activate the incident-warning system (telephone, two-way radio) to notify facility

personnel.
b. Contact the Emergency Response Coordinator and report your name, location, nature,
and the extent of the incident.
c. Distinctive alarms will be used to identify each possible emergency situation predictable
at the work location.
2. Emergency Response Coordinator

HSE MANUAL
The Emergency Response Coordinator will take control of the affected area and any
resources necessary until the emergency has been eliminated and the necessary cleanup
and/or restoration is completed.
The Emergency Response Coordinator should direct the following activities during the
evaluation process:
a. Where applicable, see that the process and/or operations are stopped and ensures that
fires or explosions do not occur or spread.
b. Determine (if possible) the source/cause of the emergency and assess the primary and
secondary hazards.
3. Implementation of the Contingency Plan

Immediately upon making a decision to implement the Emergency Response, the Emergency
Response Coordinator will direct the following activities, as appropriate for the situation:
a. Initiation of containment and control procedures.

b. Accounting for all facility personnel/visitors by head count.
c. Implementation of internal notification and provide authorities with an assessment of the
situation, and request assistance.
d. Coordination of first-aid activities, if injuries are involved.
e. Evacuation through implementation of the Evacuation Plan.
4. Internal Notification and Responsibilities

Any employee discovering a fire or other emergency should take the precautions necessary to
preserve human health and safety in the immediate area and then notify the Emergency
Response Coordinator.
5. General Responsibilities
The Emergency Response Coordinator has the following responsibilities and authorities
during an emergency incident:
a. Coordinate all response measures.

b. Direct the emergency crew during each operating shift.
c. Designate other employees to assist where necessary.
d. Expend all necessary resources to appropriately address the situation in a timely manner.
e. Return used and expended equipment to operating condition, if reusable.
f. Proved and secure all necessary medical assistance.
HSE MANUAL
g. Solicit assistance of external response agencies.
h. Make all required immediate governmental notifications by telephone and file all
necessary written reports and notifications.
i. Notify local officials if the assessment of the emergency indicates that off-site areas
should be evacuated.
j. Designate a company employee to meet with regulatory agencies as they arrive until the
emergency situation is under control.
k. Will not allow re-entry by any employee into the facilities or assets until such time as all
unsafe conditions have been evaluated or remedied. A release from the appropriate
authorities is necessary.
l. Assess possible hazards to public health, safety, welfare or the environment.
The Emergency Response Coordinator’s comprehensive training in emergency response

should include the following:
a. Knowledge of the site evacuation plan.

b. Effective utilization of safety equipment and communication devices.
c. Emergency medical training including first-aid and CPR.
d. Fire fighting.
An Emergency Response Coordinator will always be on-call and able to be reached via
telephone or pager. Facility management personnel will maintain continuous communication
by radio or other communication line during an emergency event.
The Emergency Response Coordinator is authorized to activate emergency response
procedures by assembling equipment and determining its proper application.
All personnel reporting information to an off-site third-party response group will do so after
the Emergency Response Coordinator indicates the need. The person making such
notification will give the following information:
a. Name, telephone number, and location of facility.

b. Time and type of incident (e.g. fire, explosion, etc.).
c. Extent of injuries, if any.
6. Hazard Assessment
The Emergency Response Coordinator will assess possible hazards, both direct and indirect,
to human health and property, and subsequently notify the appropriate site personnel and
authorities.
HSE MANUAL
The hazard assessment of the Emergency Response Coordinator will include information
gathered from other site personnel. He will receive verbal reports form responsible
individuals as to the condition of all on-site personnel. At least one individual will relay
attendance information taken in those situations, which are deemed to be a direct, immediate
threat to the safety of site personnel. The Emergency Response Coordinator will also receive
information from other personnel concerning the presence and extent of what personal injury
or casualty situation exists (i.e. hospitals, ambulance, etc.).
Based on his/her knowledge of the existing conditions, the Emergency Response Coordinator
will determine the following:
a. Extent of injuries, if any.

b. Possible hazards to human health outside the facility.
c. Whether facility personnel can control the situation.
d. Whether to evacuate the facility.
e. Whether access to the general area of the facility should be restricted through control of
all entrance points.
NOTE: It is not expected that any employee fight any fire. Under no circumstances are
human lives to be placed in danger. Regardless of how small, the employee detecting a fire
must sound the alarm, vocally if necessary.
The following personnel will assist the Emergency Response Coordinator in responding to
the incidents as follows:
a. Communications Coordinator
1. Advise off-site response organizations as directed by the Emergency Response

Coordinator.
2. Notify families of injured employees and respond to other related human resource
functions as approved by the Emergency Response Coordinator.
b. Safety Control Officer
1. Assess extent of injuries or casualties if any.

2. Assure that prompt emergency medical attention is provided as needed.
HSE MANUAL
3. Assure that appropriate off-site medical organizations are notified and are responding
as necessary.
4. Report status to the Emergency Response Coordinator.
c. Personnel Coordinator
1. Coordinate the movement of personnel to designated gathering points in the event of

an evacuation.
2. Conduct a headcount and identify the location of all personnel present.
3. Establish access control to the facility.
4. Report status to the Emergency Response Coordinator.
C. CASUALTY CONTROL
During the course of an emergency, the prompt deliver of quality emergency medical attention to
injured persons is the first priority of the Safety Control Coordinator. Secondarily, the Safety
Control Coordinator is responsible for obtaining necessary off-site medical resources, whether they
be ambulance service or other delivery of injured personnel to medical facilities.
All injured personnel must be examined by a medical doctor prior to resuming work. Examination
of serious injuries may be provided on an immediate basis through the use of the local ambulance
service.
The Safety Control Coordinator performs these functions through the use of the following
procedures:
a. Assessment of the emergency situation to determine both the extent of injuries that already
have been manifested and injuries which may occur because of the current status of the
emergency.
b. Implementation of measures necessary to reduce the likelihood for further injury.
c. Summoning of appropriate off-site resources and coordination of their arrival.
d. Provision of relief to injured persons by coordination of personnel trained in emergency
medical treatment and use of medical equipment.
e. Coordination of the admission of any injured personnel to hospital.
D. EVACUATION PLAN
HSE MANUAL
The Emergency Response Coordinator or the senior management official present at the time of the
event are the only people authorized to order the evacuation of the facility in response to an
emergency which threatens the health and safety of the people at the facility. Evacuation of the
facility may be ordered based upon the judgment of the Emergency Response Coordinator or at the
request of local authorities.
All personnel will be trained in evacuation procedures prior to assignment at the work site.
 All employees shall evacuate the plant and surrounding property upon learning of a fire or
explosion or other emergency.
 No personnel will remain to operate equipment.
 The evacuation routes and assembly points are presented below.
 Upon evacuation, all employees shall report to the designated assembly points and will
remain there until dismissed by the Emergency Response Coordinator or designee.
 A head count will be conducted immediately after the evacuation. Any discrepancy shall be
reported immediately to the Emergency Response Coordinator and appropriate emergency
response personnel. Under no circumstances is an employee to go back inside the facility
after a missing person.
3. Facility Access and Egress
Only those persons who can contribute to the resolution of the emergency will be admitted to
the facility until the crisis has passed.
As in the case under normal times, all persons leaving the facility during an emergency will
be logged out (i.e. a record made of that person’s departure).
4. Procedure for Evacuation
The Emergency Response Coordinator, or senior management official present, will carry out
the evacuation of the facility in the following manner:
HSE MANUAL
a. Advise facility personnel of the source of danger and order them to evacuate by
announcement over paging system. Personal instruction to evacuate can also be used.
Where applicable before evacuating an operating area, operators, if the situation allows,
must shut down their respective operations.
b. The primary evacuation route will be used except when personnel must cross the incident
or pass downwind of the incident to reach the gathering point.
c. Dispatch representative to the collection points identified on the Evacuation Route Plan
to conduct a head count and report to the Personnel Coordinator.
d. Account for all personnel present at the facility.
5. Personal Considerations
There are certain procedures which should occur to ensure the safety of all in the plant while
evacuating and to make rescue and emergency personnel’s job safer. Please keep in mind
that utmost in anyone’s mind should be personnel evacuation and the following measures are
to be taken if and when possible during an emergency (your first concern should be to ensure
the safety of human life):
a. For your own personal safety and the safety of others: Stay Calm!
b. Sound the alarm for any emergency; let someone know help is required.
c. While evacuating – shut-off all electrical equipment.
d. If there is time and where applicable, place all flammables in their proper storage
cabinets. Cover containers.
e. Check your space for coworkers to see if anyone needs assistance or is unconscious.
(Never touch an electrocuted person).
f. Leave on all lights/secure fans (unless it is a vent-leave open).
g. Do not run, walk out of the area, running may cause panic and more injuries.
6. Re-Occupancy of the Facility
The determination that the facility may be safely re-occupied will be made by the Emergency
Response Coordinator, in consultation with responding emergency service agencies. Facility
activities will resume only after the Emergency Response Coordinator has given approval
E. POST-EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
Post-emergency procedures are intended to prevent the recurrence of the causative factors, to collect
and dispose residuals, decontaminate/cleanup equipment, restock utilized materials, and debrief
personnel.
HSE MANUAL
3. Prevention of Recurrency/Critique
The Emergency Response Coordinator will take all necessary steps to minimize the potential
of a recurrence of the emergency after the initial incident.
All operations that were shut down as a result of the incident will not be reactivated until
approved by the Emergency Response Coordinator, actions will be documented by the
implementation report.
4. Cleanup/Decontaminate
Once the emergency situation has been controlled, the Emergency Response Coordinator will
initiate the cleanup of the facility. This activity will occur as soon as possible after the event
in order to avoid further risk to human health.
5. Decontaminating and Servicing of Equipment
All equipment used during the response to the emergency event will be disposed of
appropriately or cleaned/decontaminated and prepared for further use after the event has
passed.
Expended equipment and supplies (i.e. fire extinguishers, etc.) will be recharged and
restocked as soon as possible. During this restocking and re-supply period, minimum levels
of equipment will be considered acceptable, provided expended items are reordered within
two business days, and if back-up equipment is used in its place.
6. Personnel Decontamination, Debriefing and Retraining
All personnel involved in responding to the emergency will be decontaminated if necessary,

and change of clothing will be provided prior to releasing responding personnel, the
Emergency Response Coordinator shall interview them to determine their interpretation of
the relevant events. Based upon this interview, the Emergency Response Coordinator may
make recommendations concerning the best methods to prevent or minimize the impact of
HSE MANUAL
the emergency situation. Revisions to either the Emergency Response Plan or operating
procedures may be made as a result of the event.
7. Resumption of Operations
Disrupted operations will be returned to normal following the emergency event once the
following items have been determined:
a. Affected areas have been cleaned and restored or arrangements have been made to
resume operations at temporary facilities.
b. All injured personnel are being provided with adequate medical care.
c. The appropriate governmental and regulatory authorities have been notified of the event,
the subsequent response activities and the intention to resume normal activities.
F. AMENDMENT TO THE EMERGENCY RESPONSE PLAN
The Emergency Response Plan is subject to review and amendment under the following
circumstance:
1. The Emergency Response Plan fails to meet reasonable expectations under an actual
emergency.
2. The facility alters the design and/or operation of its processes which significantly increase
the potential for fires, explosions, or other emergencies.
3. The regulations applicable to any facility change.
4. The inventory of emergency response equipment changes.
5. Key personnel change (e.g. Emergency Response Coordinator).
The plan will be reviewed with employees when:

1. The plan is developed or the employee is assigned to the job.
2. When the employee’s responsibilities under the plan change.
3. When the plan is changed.

HSE MANUAL
Fall Protection 1 July 1, 2012 38.0
FALL PROTECTION
A. BASIC
Approximately 30,000 disabling injuries occur in work-related falls each year. Eight-five
percent of workers surviving falls lose time from their job. This poses a serious problem for
exposed workers and their employer. The OSHA Safety Standards establish uniform
requirements to make sure that the hazards of all elevated falls in U.S. workplaces are
evaluated and that this hazard information is transmitted to all affected workers.
B. GENERAL
LABORDE MARINE, LLC will ensure that the hazards of all elevated falls over 6 feet in
height, within our facilities and assets are evaluated. Any accident/incident or near miss will
be investigated, written and documented by the HSE Director and related personnel. The
information generated and recommendations will be communicated to all personnel.
C. RESPONSIBILITY
LABORDE MARINE MANGEMENT, LLC HSE Director/Competent Person is

responsible for the administration of this program and has full authority to make necessary
decisions to ensure success of the program. All company employees are responsible for
safety at all times. This company has expressly authorized this person to halt any company
operation where there is danger of serious personal injury.
D. WRITTEN PROGRAM
LABORDE MARINE, LLC will review and evaluate this standard practice instruction:
 On an annual basis.
 When changes occur to 29 CFR 1910.66 that require prompt revision of this
document.
 When facility operational changes occur that require a revision of this document.
HSE MANUAL
 When there is an accident or close call that relates to this area of safety.
 Review the program any time fall protection procedures fail.
This written program will be communicated to all personnel that are affected by it. It
encompasses the total workplace, regardless of the number of workers employed or the
number of work shifts. It is designed to establish clear goals, and objectives. Effective
implementation of this program requires support from all levels of management within this
company along with specific responsibility to monitor safety, the competent person in charge
of the job in progress shall be responsible for the following:
 Recognition of hazards
 Notifying employees of hazards
 Be in visual sight of operation and located on same working surface
 Communication
 Monitoring of job site
E. STATEMENT OF POLICY
The hazards of potential falls at heights of 6 feet and above will be addressed in this
document, and should be made without regards to the use of PPE. This instruction describes
a systematic approach that must be used to protect and prevent people from falling. This
instruction also lists some of the most common fall hazards and provides recommendations
and guidelines for selecting fall arrest systems.
F. FACILITY/DEPARMENT EVALUATION
The workplace will be assessed before each assigned job for potential fall hazards. Proper
fall arrest equipment will be used for jobs requiring fall protection when elimination of
hazard(s) is not possible. This preliminary evaluation will detail the required steps for
protecting employees from fall hazards. A fall hazards assessment sheet will be used to
HSE MANUAL
document fall hazard assessments. A complete list of fall hazard locations and protective
measure procedures will be maintained.
G. TRAINING
A training program will be provided for all employees who will be exposed to fall hazards n
the work area, and will be conducted by competent personnel. The program will include, but
will not be limited to:
 A description of fall hazards in the work area
 Procedures for using fall prevention and protection systems
 Equipment limitations
 The elements encompassed in total fall distance
 Prevention, control and fall arrest systems
 Inspection and storage procedures for the equipment.
Generally, workers will be trained to recognize the hazards of falling from elevations and to
avoid falls from grade level to lower levels through holes or openings in walking/working
surfaces. Training programs will include prevention, control and fall arrest systems. It must
be ensured that appropriate fall arrest systems are installed, and that employees know how to
use them before beginning any work that requires fall protection.
1. Initial training. Training will be conduct prior to job assignment. LABORDE MARINE
MANGEMENT, LLC will provide training to ensure that the purpose, function, and
proper use of fall protection is understood by employees and that the knowledge and
skills required for the safe application and usage is acquired by employees. This standard
practice instruction will be provided to, and read by all employees receiving training.
The training will include, as a minimum, the following:
HSE MANUAL
a. Types of fall protection equipment appropriate for use.
b. Recognition of applicable fall hazards associated with the work to be completed and
the locations of such.
c. Load determination and balancing requirements.
d. Procedures for removal of protection devices from service for repair or replacement.
e. All other employees, whose work operations are or may be in an area where fall
protection devices may be utilized, will be instructed to an awareness level
concerning hazards associated with fall protection operations.
f. Fall protection equipment identification. Fall protection equipment having
identification numbers will be checked for legibility. Fall protection equipment
having illegible identification markings will be turned in to the supervisor for
inspection.
g. Equipment maintenance and inspection requirements.
h. Equipment donning and doffing procedures.
i. Equipment strengths and limitations.
j. Certification. This employer will certify that employee training has been
accomplished and is being kept up to date. The certification will control each
employee’s name and dates to training. Training will be accomplished by competent
personnel.
2. Refresher training. This standard practice instruction will be provided to and read by all
employees receiving refresher training. The training content will be identical to initial
training. Refresher training will be conducted on a semi-annual basis or when the
following conditions are met, whichever event occurs sooner.
a. Retraining will be provided for all authorized and affected employees whenever (and
prior to) a change in their job assignments, a change in the type of all protection
equipment used, or when a known hazard is added to the work environment which
affects the fall protection program.
b. Additional retraining will also be conducted whenever a periodic inspection reveals,
or whenever this employer has reason to believe, that there are deviations from or
inadequacies in the employee’s knowledge or use of fall protection equipment or
procedures.
c. Whenever a fall protection procedure fails.
d. The retraining will reestablish employee proficiency and introduce new or revised
methods and procedures, as necessary.
e. Certification. This employer will certify that employee training has been
accomplished and is being kept up to date. The certification will contain each
employee’s name and dates of training as well as the signature of the person
providing the training. Training will be accomplished by competent personnel.
HSE MANUAL
H. FALL HAZARD CONTROL PROCEDURES (FALL PREVENTION)
1. Control Procedures Development. Once a facility evaluation has been accomplished,

procedures will be developed, documented and utilized for the control of potential fall
hazards. Fall prevention plans will be designed by company competent individuals or
other competent personnel. Company engineers (where utilized) or other competent
personnel will be provided with any required specialized training to recognize fall
hazards, to understand and address fall prevention techniques, and to become familiar
with fall arrest equipment and procedures. It is critical that they consider fall protection
design for the safety of operation where employees must work at elevated heights. Safety
during access and egress from elevated work sites will also be considered. The following
guidelines will be used when planning work at elevated heights:
a. Involve the Safety Department early in the project planning/job planning so that they
can recommend appropriate fall-protection measures and equipment.
b. Involve qualified Engineers when load rating of anchorage points must be determined
or is in doubt. Required training will be provided as necessary.
c. Involve Engineering and Maintenance when anchorage points must be installed.
d. The HSE Director and Engineering Departments will use the expertise of fall
protection equipment manufacturers.
e. LABORDE MARINE, LLC will be specific in dealing with fall hazards when
developing contracts. Contractors will be required to provide a written fall protection
program, which describes the Contractors’ fall protection policies and procedures
when they will be working at elevated heights.
2. Procedural Format. The following format will be followed when developing fall
protection procedures. The Safety Officer will be responsible for the implementation of
these procedures. The procedures will clearly and specifically outline the scope, purpose,
authorization, rules, and techniques to be utilized to control fall hazards, and the means to
enforce compliance including, but not limited to, the following:
a. A specific statement of the intended use of the procedure.

b. A review of accident records, including OSHA 300 logs and Workers Compensation
documentation.
c. Interviews with employees and groups of employees whose work environment
includes, or may include, fall hazards.
d. Physical observations of the work environment(s) that involve fall hazards or the
potential of such.
e. Observations of individuals and their job tasks and work habits that expose them to
existing or potential fall hazards.
f. The procedures contained in LABORDE MARINE, LLC fall protection program.
HSE MANUAL
g. Specific procedural steps for the use and operation of body harness systems, and other
fall protection systems.
h. Specific procedural steps for the placement, erection, inspection, maintenance,
disassembly and transfer of fall protection systems or devices and the person(s)
responsible for them.
i. Specific requirements for testing fall protection systems or equipment to determine
and verify the effectiveness of the fall protection control measures (not load testing).
j. The correct procedures to provide prompt rescue for employees who have fallen.
k. The role of each employee in fall protection plans and applicable policies.
l. Specific requirements for testing fall protection systems or equipment.
I. PROTECTIVE MATERIALS AND HARDWARE
Appropriate fall protection devices will be provided for potential fall hazards. Selection of
the equipment will be based on the fall protection evaluation. Evaluations will be conducted
by authorized personnel to evaluate fall protection requirements.
1. Selection Criteria.
a. Fall Protection devices will be singularly identified; will be the only device(s) used
for controlling falls; will not be used for other purposes; and will meet the following
requirement;
1) Capable of withstanding the environment to which they are exposed for the
maximum period of time that exposure is expected.
2) Anchor points will not deteriorate when located in corrosive environments, such
as areas where acid and alkali chemicals are handled and stored.
3) Capable of withstanding the ultimate load of 5,000 lbs. For the maximum period
of time that exposure is expected.
4) Standardization within company facilities and assets. Fall protection devices will
be standardized whenever possible.
5) Pelican hooks are acceptable as a positioning device, but may not be used as a
primary means of connection.
6) Applicable ANSI & ASTM requirements.
J. FALL PROTECTION SYSTEMS
When fall hazards cannot be eliminated through any other means, fall arrest systems will be
used to control falls. The fall arrest systems purchased and used must meet the applicable
HSE MANUAL
ANSI & ASTM standards. Proper training on the use of fall arrest equipment is essential and
will be provided prior to use.
1. Full Body Harness Systems. A full body harness system consists of a full-body harness,
lanyard, energy shock absorber, and self-locking snap hook. Before using a full-body
harness system, the supervisor and/or the user must address such issues as:
a. Have all users been trained to recognize fall hazards and to use fall arrest systems
properly?
b. Are all components of the system compatible according to the manufacturer’s
instructions?
c. Have appropriate anchorage points and attachment techniques been reviewed?
d. Has free fall distance been considered so that a worker will not strike lower surface or
object before the fall is arrested?
e. Have swing fall hazards been eliminated?
f. Have safe methods to retrieve fallen workers been planned?
g. Has the full-body harness and all of its components been inspected both before each
use and on a regular semi-annual basis?
h. Is any of the equipment, including lanyards, connectors, and lifelines, subject to such
problems as welding damage, chemical corrosion, or sandblasting operations?
2. Retractable Lifelines
a. A retractable lifeline is a fall arrest device used in conjunction with other components
of a fall arrest system. Retractable lifelines should be used by one person at a time.
b. A properly inspected and maintained retractable lifeline, when correctly installed and
used as part of the fall arrest system, automatically stops a person’s descent in a short
distance after the onset of an accidental fall.
c. Retractable lifelines may be considered when working in areas such as on roofs and
scaffolds, or in tanks, towers, vessels, and manholes. Also, retractable lifelines
should be considered when climbing such equipment as vertical fixed ladders. Before
using a retractable lifeline, the supervisor and/or the user must address the following
questions.
1) Has the user been trained to use a retractable lifeline correctly?

2) Is the retractable lifeline being used in conjunction with a complete fall arrest
system?
3) Is the equipment under a regular maintenance program?
4) Has the equipment been inspected within the last six months?
HSE MANUAL
3. Standard Harness. Harnesses for general purpose work should be Class III, constructed
with a sliding back D-ring. All D-Rings must be a minimum of 2 1/4 inch inside
diameter. Standard harnesses are suitable for continuous fall protection while climbing,
riding, or working on elevated personnel platforms.
They are suitable for positioning, fall arrest, and the rescue and evacuation of people who
are working at elevated heights.
Pelican hooks are acceptable as a positioning device, but may not be used as a primary
means of connection.
When conventional fall protection methods are infeasible or create a great hazard to use,
LABORDE MARINE, LLC will develop and implement a fall protection plan, which is site
specific and meets the requirements of 29 CRF 1926.502. A supervisor who has been trained
as a competent person shall be responsible for developing this site specific plan.
K. INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
To ensure that fall protection systems are ready and able to perform their tasks, a program of
inspection and maintenance will be implemented and maintained. The following as a
minimum, will comprise the basic requirements of the inspection and maintenance program:
1. Equipment manufacturer’s instructions will be incorporated into the inspection and

preventive maintenance procedures.
2. All fall protection equipment will be inspected prior to each use, and a documented
inspection at intervals not to exceed 6 months, or in accordance with the manufacturers
guidelines
3. The user will inspect his/her equipment prior to each use and check the inspection date.
4. Any fall protection equipment subjected to a fall or impact load, will be removed from
service immediately and inspected by a qualified person (sent back to the manufacturer).
HSE MANUAL
5. Check all equipment for mold, damage, wear, mildew, or distortion.
6. Hardware should be free of cracks, sharp edges, or burns.
7. Ensure that no straps are cut, broken, torn or scraped.
8. Special situations such as radiation, electrical conductivity, and chemical effects will be
considered.
9. Equipment that is damaged or in need of maintenance will be tagged as unusable, and

will not be stored in the same area as serviceable equipment.
10. A detailed inspection policy will be used for equipment stored for periods exceeding one
month.
11. Anchors and mountings will be inspected before each use by the user and supervisor for
signs of damage.
L. CONTROLLED ACCESS ZONES
The sites where conventional fall protection is not used or not applicable will be identified
and classified as controlled access zones, i.e. where adequate stairs and landings are
provided, with handrails making the work are accessible without having to climb or use fall
protection.
1. Access zones shall be controlled by our line or by another means that restricts access.
2. When control lines are used, they shall be erected not less than 6 feet nor more than 25
from the unprotected or leading edge.
3. The control line shall extend along the entire length of the unprotected or leading edge
and shall be approximately parallel to the unprotected or leading edge.
4. The control line shall be connected on each side to a guardrail system or wall.
5. Control lines shall consist of ropes, wires, tapes, or equivalent materials, and supporting
stanchions as follows:
HSE MANUAL
a. Each line shall be flagged or otherwise clearly marked at not more than 6-foot
intervals with high-visibility material.
b. Each line shall be rigged and supported n such a way that its lowest point (including
sag) is not less than 39 inches from the walking/working surface and its highest point
is not more than 45 inches.
c. Each line shall have a minimum breaking strength of 200 pounds
M. SAFETY MONITORING SYSTEMS
Where no alternate methods have been implemented to monitor the overall system, a
competent person will be assigned as a safety monitor, to recognize any fall hazards at their
site, warn employees of the respective hazards when it appears that employees are unaware
of the hazard or working in an unsafe manner. The safety monitor shall be on the same
walking or working surface and be in visual sight and able to communicate orally with the
employee. They must not have any other duties which will interfere with any monitoring
function. Each employee working in a controlled access zone shall comply promptly with
fall hazard warning from safety monitors.
N. MOST COMMON AND MOST DANGEROUS FALL HAZARDS
The tasks and situations listed below present inherent fall hazards. Give special attention to
providing fall prevention and/or fall control for them, remembering that this attention is
necessary in the design, engineering, planning, and execution stages of work. Supervisors
will give special consideration to fall protection for the following tasks:
1. Working from crane booms and tower cranes.
2. Working: on top of machinery and equipment, such as overhead cranes, furnaces,

conveyors and presses.
3. Other work that involves fall hazards, such as ‘off-chutes’ from main piping in duct work
or boilers.
4. Working on roofs, with deteriorating or unsupported sections and framing.
5. Working over chemical tanks or open pits.
6. Working from a fixed or portable ladders, or climbing systems.

HSE MANUAL
7. Performing work on water towers, product tanks, silos, pipe racks, presses, and floor pits.
O. CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
In addition to complying with the fall protection requirements that apply to all company
employees, each contractor who is retained to perform operations that involve fall protection
will:
1. Obtain any available information regarding fall hazards and protective measures from
this company.
2. Coordinate fall protection operations with LABORDE MARINE, LLC, when both
company personnel and contractor personnel will be working in or near recognized fall
hazard locations.
3. Inform LABORDE MARINE, LLC of the fall protection program that the contractor
will follow and of any hazards confronted or created in conducting operations involving
fall protection within company owned facilities and assets through a debriefing
immediately prior to the operations.
P. DEFINITIONS
Anchorage – means a secure point of attachment for lifelines, lanyards or deceleration

devices
Body belt – mean a strap with means both for securing it around the waist and for attaching
it to a lanyard, lifeline, or deceleration device
Body harness – means straps which may be secured about the employee in a manner that
will distribute the fall arrest forces over at least the thighs, pelvis, waist, chest and shoulders,
with means for attaching it to other components of a personal fall arrest systems
HSE MANUAL
Competent person – means a person who is capable of identifying hazardous or dangerous
conditions in any personal fall arrest system or any component thereof, as well as in their
application and use with related equipment
Connector – means a device which is used to couple (connect) parts of the personal fall
arrest system and position device systems together. It may be an independent component of
the system, such as a carabiner, or it may be an integral component of part of the system.
Deceleration device – means any mechanism with a maximum length of 3.5 feet, such as a
rope grab, ripstitch lanyard, tearing or deforming lanyards, self-retracting lifelines, etc. which
serves to dissipate a substantial amount of energy during a fall arrest, or otherwise limit the
energy imposed on an employee during fall arrest.
Energy shock absorber – means a device that limits shock-load forces on the body.
Failure – means load refusal, breakage, or separation of component parts. Load refusal is
the point where the ultimate strength is exceeding.
Free Fall – means the act of falling before a personal fall arrest system begins to apply force
to arrest the fall.
Free fall distance – means the vertical displacement of the fall arrest attachment point on the
employee’s body belt or body harness between onset of the fall and just before the system
begins to apply force to arrest the fall (maximum of 6 feet). This distance excludes
deceleration distance, and lifeline/lanyard elongation, but includes any deceleration device
slide distance or self-retracting lifeline/lanyard extension before they operate and fall arrest
force occur.
Hole – means a gap or void 2 inches or more in its least dimension, in a floor, roof, or other
walking/working surface.
Lanyard – means a flexible line of rope, wire, or strap, which generally has a connector at
each end for connecting the body belt or body harness to a deceleration device, lifeline or
anchorage.
HSE MANUAL
Leading edge – means the edge of a floor roof, or formwork for a floor or other
walking/working surface which changes location as additional floor, roof, decking, or
formwork sections are placed, formed or constructed.
Lifeline – means a component consisting of a flexible line for connection to an anchorage are
one end to hang vertically or for connection to anchorages at both ends to stretch horizontally
and which serves as a means for connecting other components of a personal fall arrest system
to the anchorage.
Opening – means a gap or void 30 inches or more high and 18 inches or more wide, in a wall
or partition, through which employees can fall to a lower level.
Personal fall arrest system – means a system used to arrest an employee in a fall from a
working level. It consists of an anchorage, connectors, a body belt or body harness and may
include a lanyard, deceleration device, lifeline, or suitable combinations of these. As of
January 1, 1998, the use of a body belt for fall arrest is prohibited.
Positioning device system – means a body belt or body harness system rigged to allow an
employee to be supported on an elevated vertical surface, such as a wall, and work with both
hands free while leaning.
Qualified person – means one with a recognized or professional certificate and extensive
knowledge and experience in the subject field who is capable of design, analysis, evaluation
and specifications in the subject work, project, or product.
Retractable lifeline – means a fall arrest device that allows free travel without slack rope,
but locks instantly when a fall begins.
Rope grab – means a deceleration device which travels on a lifeline and automatically, by
friction, engages the lifeline and locks so as to arrest the fall of an employee. A rope grab
usually employs the principle of inertial locking, cam/level locking, or both.
Safety-monitoring system – means a safety system in which a competent person is

responsible for recognizing and warning employees of fall hazards.
HSE MANUAL
Self-retracting lifeline/lanyard – means a deceleration device containing a drum-wound
line which can be slowly extracted from, or retracted onto, the drum under slight tension
during normal employee movement, and which, after onset of a fall, automatically locks the
drum and arrests the fall.
Snaphook – means a connector comprised of a hook-shaped member with a normally closed

keeper, or similar arrangement, which may be opened to permit the hook to receive an object
and, when released, automatically closes to retain the object. Snaphooks are generally one of
two types:
- The locking type with a self-closing, self-locking keeper which remains closed and
locked until unlocked and pressed open for connection or disconnection; or
- The non-locking type with a self-closing keeper which remains closed until pressed open
for connection or disconnection. As of January 1, 1998, the use of a non-locking
snaphook as part of personal fall arrest systems and positioning device systems is
prohibited.
Toeboard – means a low protective barrier that will prevent the fall of materials and
equipment to lower levels and provide protection from falls for personnel.
Walking/Working – surface means any surface, whether horizontal or vertical on which an

employee walks or works, including, but not limited to, floors, roofs, ramps, bridges,
runways formwork and concrete reinforcing steel, but not including ladders, vehicles, or
trailers, on which employees must be located in order to perform their job duties.
Warning line system – means a barrier erected on a roof to warn employees that they are
approaching an unprotected roof side or edge, and which designates an area in which roofing
work may take place without the use of guardrail, body belt, or safety net systems to protect
employees in the area.
Work area – means that portion of a walking/working surface where job duties are being
performed.
HSE MANUAL
Fire 0 Sept. 1, 2011 39.0
Protection & Prepared By: Approved By: Page:
Prevention Safety MRC Page 1 of 10
FIRE PROTECTION/PREVENTION
A. INTRODUCTION
LABORDE MARINE, LLC will review and evaluate this program on an annual basis, when
changes occur to 29 CFR 1910, or when facility operational changes occur that require revision.
Effective implementation of this program requires support from all levels of management within this
company. This written program will be communicated to all personnel that are affected by it. It
encompasses the total workplace, regardless of number of workers employed or the number of work
shifts. It is designed to establish clear goals, and objectives.
B. SCOPE
Our fire prevention policy is designed to ensure that all reasonable steps are taken to preserve life
and property from exposure to fire hazards. The requirements listed here identify the basic elements
of our fire prevention program. They should be part of every manager’s day-to-day responsibilities.
While they generally apply to all company locations, they are especially important in those facilities
and assets that do not have full-time safety and fire prevention personnel.
Fire prevention is one of the considerations that must receive first priority in the design of a new
building, vessel, or in the occupancy of an existing building. All necessary steps should be taken to
ensure that fire prevention is an integral part of the design and construction of a new building,
vessel, or of an existing structure.
C. EMERGENCY NOTIFICATION PROCEDURES
The following services/agencies will be requested/notified in the event of a fire that cannot be
contained through the use of portable fire extinguishers.
1. Routine notification/requests for assistance will be made by Facility Guards, Company

Officers, or the HSE Director. Any one employee who cannot immediately contact a guard
or the HSE Director should immediately request assistance. This person would begin word-
of-mouth evacuation notification then immediately evacuate.
HSE MANUAL
Fire 0 Sept. 1, 2011 39.0
Off-site fire and emergency services

Type Service Location Contact Phone Number
D. WARNING AND EVACUATION SYSTEMS
At the time of an emergency, employees should know what type of evacuation is necessary and what
their role is in carrying out the plan. In some cases where the emergency is very grave, total and
immediate evacuation of all employees is necessary. In other emergencies, a partial evacuation of
nonessential employees with a delayed evacuation of others may be necessary for continued
operation. In some cases, only those employees in the immediate area of the fire may be expected to
evacuate or move to a safe area, such as when a local application fire suppression system discharge
employee alarm is sounded. Employees must be sure that they know what is expected of them in all
such emergency possibilities, which have been planned in order to provide assurance of their safety
from fire or other emergency.
1. General requirements.
a. The employee alarm system shall provide warning for necessary emergency action as
called for in the emergency action plan, or for reaction time for safe escape of employees
from the workplace or the immediate work area, or both.
b. The employee alarm shall be capable of being perceived above ambient noise or light
levels by all employees in the affected portions of the workplace. Tactile devices will be
used to alert those employees in areas where they would not otherwise be able to
recognize the audible or visual alarm.
c. The employee alarm shall be distinctive and recognizable as a signal to evacuate the work
area or to perform actions designated under the emergency action plan.
d. LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall explain to each employee the preferred means of
reporting emergencies, such as manual pull box alarms, public address systems, radio or
telephones. LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall post emergency telephone numbers near
telephones, or employee notice boards, and other conspicuous locations when telephones
serve as a means of reporting emergencies. Where a communication system also serves
HSE MANUAL
Fire 0 Sept. 1, 2011 39.0
as the employee alarm system, all emergency messages shall have priority over all non-
emergency messages.
e. LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall establish procedures for sounding emergency alarms
in the workplace.
NOTE: In areas with 10 or fewer employees in a particular workplace, direct voice
communication is an acceptable procedure for sounding the alarm provided all employees
can hear the alarm. Such workplaces need not have a back-up system.
f. All employee alarm systems will be restored to normal operating condition as promptly
as possible after each test or alarm. Spare alarm devices and components subject to wear
or destruction shall be available in sufficient quantities and locations for prompt
restoration of the system.
g. Maintenance and testing. LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall assure that all employee
alarm systems are maintained in operating condition, except when undergoing repairs or
maintenance.
h. Test frequency. LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall assure that a test of the reliability and
adequacy of non-supervised employee alarm systems is made every two months. A
different actuation device shall be used in each test of a multi-actuation device system so
that no individual device is used for two consecutive tests.
2. Types of warning systems. The following types of warning systems will be used by this
company to notify employees of a fire and the need to evacuate to the pre-designated
evacuation relocation point.
Facility Evacuation Warnings

Type Warning Meaning Duration Test Notes
E. EVACUATION
1. In the event the warning system is activated or if you are advised to evacuate the facility or
department, follow the below listed guidelines. Above all, use your common sense.
a. Panic kills; if you’re calm, it will help others

b. Move quickly in the opposite direction of known hazards towards the nearest
unobstructed exit.
c. Notify co-workers along the way, talk later
d. Once outside, relocate to the evacuation relocation point.
HSE MANUAL
Fire 0 Sept. 1, 2011 39.0
e. Report to your supervisor if he/she is present.
f. Senior employees will begin roll call immediately
g. Notify senior management of missing or injured persons.
h. Don’t forget facility visitors.
i. Refer any media representatives to company HSE Director
2. Exterior refuge or safe areas may include parking lots, open fields or streets
Which are located away from the site of the emergency and which provide sufficient space to
accommodate the employees. Employees should be instructed to move away from the exit
discharge doors of the building, and to avoid congregating close to the building where they
may hamper emergency operations.
F. FACILITY/DEPARTMENT EVALUATION
LABORDE MARINE, LLC will evaluate our facility(s) to determine where the potential for fuel
and ignition sources is high and where ignition sources are present.
1. Those area/jobs meeting the criteria for a high risk fire hazard area or having a known
potential to pose a hazard will be designated as high risk fire hazard areas. LABORDE
MARINE, LLC will inform exposed employees, by posting danger signs, conducting
awareness training.
2. Equipment: Suitable fire protection equipment will be provided, worn, and used where
machines, operations, or processes present a fire hazard. Any situation that could provide an
ignition source, fuel, or a combination of these hazards will be reviewed.
G. EMERGENCY ACTION PLAN
The emergency action plan will cover the actions LABORDE MARINE, LLC and its employees
must take to ensure employee safety from fire and other emergencies.
1. Emergency employees. LABORDE MARINE, LLC will list in detail the procedures to be
taken by employees who have been selected to remain behind to care for essential operations
until their evacuation becomes absolutely necessary. Essential operations include:
a. The monitoring of power supplies, water supplies, and other essential services, which
cannot be shut down for every emergency alarm.
HSE MANUAL
Fire 0 Sept. 1, 2011 39.0
2. Escape routes. Floor plans and/or workplace maps, which clearly show the emergency
escape routes, will be included in the emergency action plan. Color coding will be added to
aid employees in determining their route assignments.
3. Rescue and medical first aid duties. LABORDE MARINE, LLC will also develop and
explain in detail what rescue and medical first aid duties are to be performed and by whom.
All employees will be told what actions they are to take in these emergency situations.
4. Training. Before implementing the emergency action plan, LABORDE MARINE, LLC
will designate and train a sufficient number of persons to assist in the safe and orderly
emergency evacuation of employees.
Employees who have been designated to use fire fighting equipment as part of the emergency
action plan will be provided the training in the use of the appropriate equipment. Training
will be provided initially upon employment and annually thereafter.
H. FIRE PREVENTION PLAN
The following elements, at a minimum, will be included in the fire prevention plan:
1. A list of the major workplace fire hazards and the type of fire protection equipment or
systems, which can control a fire involving them.
2. Names or regular job titles of those personnel responsible for maintenance and use of
equipment and systems installed to prevent or control fires.
3. Training.
a. LABORDE MARINE, LLC will apprise employees of the fire hazards of the materials
and processes to which they are exposed and will review with each employee upon initial
assignment those parts of the fire prevention plan, which the employee must know to
protect the employee in the event of an emergency.
4. The written plan will be kept in the workplace and made available for employee review.
I. PORTABLE FIRE SUPPRESSION EQUIPMENT

HSE MANUAL
Fire 0 Sept. 1, 2011 39.0
The requirements of this section apply to the placement, use, maintenance, and testing of portable
fire extinguisher provided for the use of employees of LABORDE MARINE, LLC.
1. LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall provide portable fire extinguishers and shall mount,
locate, and identify them so that they are readily accessible to employees without subjecting
the employees to possible injury.
2. Only approved portable fire extinguishers shall be used to meet the requirements of this
section.
3. LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall assure that portable fire extinguishers are maintained in a
fully charged and operable condition and kept in their designated places at all times, except
during use.
4. Portable fire extinguishers shall be provided for employee use and selected and distributed
based on the classes of anticipated workplace fires and on the size and degree of hazard,
which would affect their use.
a. Classes of Fire:
1) Class A: Class A fires are classed as ordinary combustible or fibrous material, such
as wood, paper, clothe, rubber and some plastics. Portable fire extinguishers for use
by employees on Class A fires will be distributed so that the travel distance for
employees to any extinguisher is 75 feet (22.9m) or less.
2) Class B: Class B fires are classed as flammable or combustible liquids such as
gasoline, kerosene, plaint, paint thinners and propane. Portable fire extinguishers for
use by employees on Class B fires will be distributed so that the travel distance from
the Class B hazard area to any extinguisher is 50 feet (15.2m) or less.
3) Class C: Class C fires are classed as energized electrical equipment, such as
appliances, switches, panel boxes and power tools. Portable fire extinguishers for use
by employees on Class C fires will be distributed so that the travel distance from the
Class C hazard area to any extinguishing agent is 50 feet (15.2m) or less.
4) Class D: Class D fires are classed as certain combustible metals, such as magnesium,
titanium, potassium and sodium. Portable fire extinguishers or other containers of
Class D extinguishing agent used by employees will be distributed so that the travel
distance from the combustible metal working area to any extinguishing agent is 75
feet (22.9m) or less.
5. Inspection, maintenance and testing. LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall be responsible

for the inspection, maintenance and testing of all portable fire extinguishers used by this
HSE MANUAL
Fire 0 Sept. 1, 2011 39.0
company. Maintenance shall be in accordance with Maintenance and Use of Portable Fire
Extinguishers NFPA No. 10A-1970.
a. When portable fire extinguishers are removed from service for maintenance and
recharging, alternative equivalent protection shall be provided.
b. Monthly inspections. Portable extinguishers or hoses used as part of a standpipe system
in lieu of portable extinguishers will be visually inspected monthly and documented.
c. Annual Maintenance check. Portable fire extinguishers will be subjected to an annual
maintenance check and documented.
1) LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall record the annual maintenance date and retain this
record for one year after the last entry or the life of the shell, whichever is less.
d. Hydrostatic testing, LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall assure that hydrostatic testing is
performed by trained persons with suitable testing equipment and facilities. Alternate
equivalent protection will be provided when portable fire extinguishers are removed from
service for maintenance and recharging.
1) Test Documentation. LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall maintain and provide upon
request, evidence that the required hydrostatic testing of fire extinguishers has been
performed. Such evidence shall be in the form of a certification record, which
includes the date of the test, the signature of the person who performed the test and
the serial number, or other identifier, of the fire extinguisher that was tested. Such
records shall be kept until the extinguisher is hydrostatically retested at the time
interval specified or until the extinguisher is taken out of service, whichever comes
first.
e. Dry chemical extinguishers. LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall assure that stored
pressure dry chemical extinguishers that require a 12 year hydrostatic test are emptied
and subjected to applicable maintenance procedures every 6 years. Dry chemical
extinguishers having non-refillable disposable containers are exempt from this
requirement. When recharging or hydrostatic testing is performed, the 6 year
requirement begins from that date.
f. In addition to an external visual examination, an internal examination of cylinders and
shells will be made prior to being tested or subjected to hydrostatic tests.
g. Portable extinguishers will be hydrostatically tested at the intervals specified in Table 1
or when they show new evidence of corrosion or mechanical injury, except under any of
the following conditions:
1) When the unit has been repaired by soldering, welding, brazing, or use of patching
compounds.
HSE MANUAL
Fire 0 Sept. 1, 2011 39.0
2) When the cylinder or shell threads are damaged.
3) When there is corrosion that has caused pitting, including corrosion under removable
name plate assemblies.
4) When the extinguisher has been burned in a fire.
5) When calcium chloride extinguishing agent has been used in a stainless steel shell.
h. Hydrostatic test shall be performed on extinguisher hose assemblies, which are equipped
with a shut-off nozzle at the discharge end of the hose. The test interval shall be the same
as specified for the extinguisher on which the hose is installed.
1) Carbon dioxide hose assemblies with a shut-off nozzle are hydrostatically tested at
1,250 psi.
2) Dry chemical and dry powder hose assemblies with a shut-off nozzle are
hydrostatically tested 300 psi.
3) Hose assemblies passing a hydrostatic test do not require any type of recording or
stamping.
i. LABORDE MARINE, LLC will assure that carbon dioxide extinguisher and nitrogen or
carbon dioxide cylinders used with wheeled extinguishers are tested every 5 years at5/3
of the service pressure as stamped in to the cylinder. Nitrogen cylinders which comply
with 49 CFR 173.34(e)(15) may be hydrostatically tested every 10 years.
TABLE 1
Test
Interval
TYPE OF EXTINGUISHERS (years)
Soda acid (soldered brass shells) (until 1/1/82) 1
Soda acid (stainless steel shell) 5
Cartridge operated water and/or antifreeze 5
Stored pressure water and/or antifreeze 5
Wetting agent 5
Foam (soldered brass shells) (until 1/182) 1
Foam (stainless steel shell) 5
Aqueous Film Forming foam (AFFF) 5
Loaded stream 5
Dry chemical with stainless steel 5
Carbon dioxide 5
HSE MANUAL
Fire 0 Sept. 1, 2011 39.0
Dry chemical , stored pressure, with mild steel,
brazed brass or aluminum shells 12
Dry chemical, cartridge or cylinder operated,
with mild steel shells 12
Dry powder, cartridge or cylinder operated
with mild steel shells 12
6. Training. Where portable fire extinguishers for employee use are provided in the
workplace, LABORDE MARINE, LLC will also provide an educational program to
familiarize employees with the general principles of fire extinguisher use and the hazards
involved with incipient stage fire fighting.
Training will be provided initially upon employment an annually thereafter.
J. FIRE PREVENTION POLICY
1. Supervisors will ensure that the identity, address and phone number of the public fire
department and any other emergency units to be summoned in the event of a fire will be
posted in strategic locations within their respective departments.
2. Supervisors will ensure that complex process alarm systems are tested on a monthly basis to
ensure the system is in working order. A written record of alarm tests shall be maintained.
3. A monthly self-inspected shall be conducted to identify and correct recognizable fire hazards.
4. Exit doors, approved hardware and lock devices, exit signs, passageways, and means of
emergency exit shall be inspected on a regular basis to ensure their working condition and
unobstructed access. Locking of a designated fire exit door is prohibited.
5. Emergency lighting shall be inspected and tested on a monthly basis to assure good operating
condition.
6. Respiratory protection equipment designated for emergency use shall be inspected monthly
and the date recorded on a tag attached to the unit or storage container.
7. Procedures for a hot work permit system shall be established to control flame- or spark-
producing equipment.
HSE MANUAL
Fire 0 Sept. 1, 2011 39.0
8. Regulations shall be established to control smoking in hazardous areas.
9. Procedures shall be established for reporting and investigating fire and other incidents.
10. Fire drills shall be carried out in accord with a regular yearly schedule.
11. HSE Coordinator and fire prevention personnel shall make sure that specialized training is
provided to persons with responsibilities for maintenance of fire-fighting equipment, related
systems, and supplies.
HSE MANUAL
First 0 Sept. 1, 2011 40.0
Aid Prepared By: Approved By: Page:
FIRST AID
A. INTRODUCTION
First aid is the immediate and temporary care given to a person who has been injured or suddenly
taken ill. Administered properly, first aid may prevent death and further injury until professional
medical help becomes available. The following sections are not all-inclusive and should be used
only as a reference by trained personnel.
NOTE: Employees should follow all procedures/practices covered in OSHA’s Bloodborne

Pathogens Standard and LABORDE MARINE, LLC’s Bloodborne Pathogens Policy.
B. SCOPE
LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall ensure that medical services are in a near proximity of the work
site before work at the site begins. If medical services are not in a reasonable proximity of the work
site, LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall have employees that have valid first aid training from the
EMP International, American Red Cross, American Heart Association, National Safety Council or
equivalent available to render emergency first aid.
C. TRAINING
Training: At a minimum, one person per job site shall be First Aid/CPR trained, as well as at least
two (2) members of the office staff. Training should be repeated according to the accrediting
agencies requirements, but at a minimum, every two (2) years.
D. FIRST AID KIT
An adequate First Aid Kit, in a weatherproof container, shall be readily available at every work site.
The first aid kits shall be checked before being sent out on the work site by the HSE Director and
then at least weekly by the work site supervisor or the first aid trained employee. The employee that
checks the first aid kits shall replace any expended items and document the inspection on the
inspection log. The first aid kits shall contain at a minimum the required supplies to care for the
number of employees working at the site and a bloodborne pathogen PPE kit. First Aid kits should
contain the following, as per ANSI std. Z308, and any material used should be replaced as soon as
possible upon returning from the job site. Contents shall be in individual sealed packages.
HSE MANUAL
First 0 Sept. 1, 2011 40.0
1. 1 absorbent compress (32”)

2. 16 adhesive bandages (1 x 3”)
3. 1 roll adhesive tape (3/8” x 5 yd.)
4. 10 antiseptic applications (0.14 fl. Oz.)
5. 6 burn treatment applications (1/32 oz.)
6. 2 pairs medical exam gloves
7. 4 sterile pads (3” x 3”)
8. 1 triangular bandage (40”x40”x56”)
In addition to the above, there shall be several bottled eye wash stations located throughout the
worksite, to be used for flushing the eyes in an emergency. However, objects embedded in the eye
must be removed by a physician.
E. PROCEDURES
LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall ensure that a means of communication shall be available, prior to
beginning any job, to call necessary emergency personnel and/or ambulance services for prompt
transportation of injured employees to a physician or hospital. All emergency contact numbers shall
be posted and on the cover of first aid kits. If 911 is not available in the area, then numbers for local
emergency providers shall be posted Emergency numbers shall be updated by the Safety
Coordinator.
3. All areas at LABORDE MARINE, LLC that present a risk of contact to corrosive materials
or other chemicals shall have an emergency shower and/or eye wash immediately available
for employees to use in an emergency situation. These exposures should be treated as
detailed in Section H: Burns.
F. SEVERE BLEEDING
Loss of 1 quart of blood can present a life-threatening situation. Death by bleeding can occur in less
than 1 minute. The following procedures may be used if sever bleeding is present.
1. Applying direct pressure to the wound area with the hand or fingers will minimize the flow
of blood. The first aid responder should wear surgical gloves and utilize a compress of
sterilized gauze or cloth to cover the wound area.
HSE MANUAL
First 0 Sept. 1, 2011 40.0
2. Continue applying pressure until the bleeding stops. If blood soaks through the compress, do
not remove the compress, but add additional material.
3. Secure the compress by wrapping cloth, tape or other material directly over the pad and
wound area.
4. If injuries permit, elevate the area above the heart.
5. Beware of signs of shock and treat accordingly.
NOTE: A steady stream of dark red blood indicates venous bleeding. Control by using pressure
either on the wound directly or at a spot near the injury but away from the heart.
Spurting bright red blood indicates arterial bleeding. Control by using pressure either on the wound
directly or on the nearest pressure point in the direction of the heart.
G. SHOCK
Shock is a life threatening condition resulting from a depressed state of many vital functions. Shock
may be caused from severe injuries, hemorrhage, burns, loss of body fluid, heart attack, stroke,
poisoning, drugs, alcohol, or lack of oxygen. IN ANY ACCIDENT, ALWAYS TREAT FOR
SHOCK First aid treatments for shock should (1) improve blood circulation, (2) provide an
adequate supply of oxygen, and (3) maintain normal body temperature.
1. Early symptoms of shock may include:
a. Cold skin
b. Pale or bluish skin
c. Weakness
d. Rapid pulse (usually over 100) for adults
e. Increased breathing rate and/or shallow breathing
f. Deep, irregular breathing
g. Restlessness, anxiety, extreme thirst if shock is associated with hemorrhaging.
2. Latter symptoms of shock may include:
a. Apathy and relative unresponsiveness

b. Sunken eyes
c. Vacant expression
HSE MANUAL
First 0 Sept. 1, 2011 40.0
d. Dilated pupils
e. Mottled skin
3. First Aid shock treatment should include:
a. Keep the injured laying down

b. Cover the injured to prevent loss of body heat
c. Elevate the feet 7 – 10 inches
4. Obtain professional medical assistance as quickly as possible.
H. BURNS
1. Burn injuries are the result of exposure to heat, chemicals, electricity, or radiation.
Temperature, length of exposure, location, age, and victim’s medical condition all affect the
severity of the burn. Burns are typically classified by their source and depth (the deeper the
burn, the more sever it is). The three classifications of burns are: (1) First Degree
(superficial); (2) Second Degree (partial thickness); and (3) Third Degree (full thickness).
a. First Degree Burns – The burn is only on the skin surface, red in color, painful and
normally dry. Swelling may occur. First-degree burns normally heal in 5-6 days.
b. Second Degree Burns – The burn is deeper, red in color, painful and normally causes
blistering. The skin may look mottled and swelling is usually present. Second-degree
burns normally heal in 3-4 weeks with possible scarring.
c. Third Degree Burns – The burn extends through the skin to underlying structures. Third
degree burns may appear brown or black (charred) and can be extremely painful.
However, if nerve damage is present, the victim may not experience pain. Third degree
burns are life threatening and usually result in severe scarring.
2. First aid treatment of burns should include the following:
a. Look for burns to the face (especially the areas around the nose & mouth). These burns
may be an indication of lung and breathing airway damage. Monitor the victim’s
breathing for any irregularities.
b. Cool the burned area by immersing in cool water or by applying cool wet cloths.
Continue cooling the burn area until the pain subsides.
c. Carefully remove/cut clothing away from the burn area. DO NOT remove clothing that
is sticking to the skin.
d. Cover the burn area with loosely bandage, dry sterile dressings. If the burn area covers a
large portion of the body, use a clean, dry sheet or cloth.
HSE MANUAL
First 0 Sept. 1, 2011 40.0
e. Prevent infection from setting in. Do not break blisters.
f. Do not apply any ointments to burns requiring further medical attention.
g. Injuries allowing, elevate the burn area above the heart and provide first aid treatment for
shock.
NOTE: Electrical burn severity is not easily defined. If any doubt exists, seek immediate
professional medical help.
Chemical burns are the same burns caused by flame, steam, or hot liquids. Immediately was the
chemical off with water, remove clothing from the affected area and follow first aid instructions on
the chemical label/MSDS sheet. Then administer first aid burns caused by heat.
I. HEAT AND COLD EXPOSURE
1. Cold Emergencies: Two types of cold emergencies are Frostbite and Hypothermia.
a. Frost bite: Symptoms of frostbite include: lack of feeling and skin that appears waxy,
cold to the touch and/or discolored (blue, yellow, white).
1) Frostbite is the superficial or deep freezing of body tissues and can result in loss of
fingers, hands arms, legs, feet and toes. Frostbite normally occurs to exposed areas of
the body and is dependent on air temperature, length of exposure and wind factors.
2) Treatment for frostbite should include:
 Warming the affected area by soaking in warm water (1000 – 1050) until the skin
appears red and feels warm to the touch.
 Bandage the affected area with a dry, sterile dressing. Cotton or gauze should be
placed between effected fingers an/or toes.
 Avoid breaking any blisters.
 Seek professional medical attention.
b. Hypothermia
1) Hypothermia is a medical emergency caused by a drop in body temperature below
950F. As body temperature cools, the heart may begins to beat erratically and
eventually stop. SEEK PROFESSIONAL MEDICAL ASSISTANCE
IMMEDIATELY.
2) Symptoms of hypothermia include shivering, slow irregular pulse, numbness, glassy
stare and decreasing levels of consciousness.
3) Treatment for hypothermia should include:
HSE MANUAL
First 0 Sept. 1, 2011 40.0
 Immediately notifying professional medical services.

 Gradually warm the body by wrapping the victim in the blankets, putting on dry
clothing and moving the victim to a warm environment. DO NOT WARM THE
VICTIM TOO QUICKLY.
 Apply hot water bottles, heating pads and/or other heat sources to the body. A
barrier should be placed between the victim and the heat source to prevent
burning.
 If the victim is conscious and alert, warm liquids may be given.
 If the victim is unconscious, monitor breathing and other vital signs. Be prepared
to give CPR.
NOTE: Air temperature does not have to be below freezing to develop hypothermia. Poor nutrition,
alcohol, and medical conditions can adversely contribute to the body’s ability to maintain proper
body temperature. Wind chill factors should also be considered.
Commonly Asked Questions.
1. Does it kill? In cold water, the skin and external tissue become cooled very quickly, but it takes
10 to 15 minutes before the temperature of the heart and brain begin to cool. Intense shivering
occurs in a futile attempt to increase the body’s heat production and counteract the large heat
loss. Unconsciousness when the deep body temperature falls from the normal 98.60F to
approximately 89.60F.
NOTE: Heart failure is the usual cause of death when deep body temperature cools below 890F.
2. How long can I survive in cold water? Survival time varies depending upon the water
temperature, size of the person, the amount of body fat and the sex of the person. Movement in
the water also has an effect on the survival time.
Example: In 500F water, the predicted survival time is 2.5 to 3 hours.
3. Should I swim to keep warm? NO. Even though the body produces three times as much heat
when swimming slowly and steadily in cold water compared to holding still, this heat and more
is lost due to increased blood circulation to the arms, legs and skin and increased water
circulation through the clothing. Test results indicate that the average person swimming in a life
jacket cools 35% faster than when holding still.
HSE MANUAL
First 0 Sept. 1, 2011 40.0
4. How far can I swim? The shore may appear to be close enough to reach by swimming, despite
the faster cooling rate of the body with this activity. Tests on average people indicate that a
person in 500F water with a standard life jacket and light clothing could swim 0.85 of a mile
before being incapacitated by hypothermia. It is very difficult to judge distance when in the
water, especially under emergency conditions. In water temperatures of around 500F, the shore
should be within one mile before making the decision to swim. Exercise caution, as distances
can be deceiving.
5. What if I have no life jacket or other flotation device? In this unfortunate situation one is
forced to adopt either of the following tow anti-drowning techniques:
Treading Water: Continuous movement of the arms and legs will keep the head out of the water, but
the body cooling rate is approximately 34% faster than holding still.
Drown proofing: This involves restful floating with lungs full of air, interrupted every 10 to 15
seconds for raising the head out of the water to breathe. Heat loss using this process was 82% faster
than holding still in a life jacket. The reason for the great amount of heat loss was due to the head
being underwater. This method is the fastest way to die from hypothermia.
6. What areas of the body are most critical for heat loss? (A) the head, (B) sides of the chest, (C)
groin area due to large blood vessels near the surface. If an effort is made to conserve body heat,
these areas need special attention.
7. What behavior will increase my survival time? Based on the heat loss information in #5, the
position to assume is called the HELP or Heat Escape Lessening Posture. This technique
involves holding the inner side of the arms tight against the side of the chest. The thighs are
pressed together and raised to close of the groin area. In other words, ball up inwards to the
chest.
8. Do different style of Personal Flotation Devices offer more or less thermal protection?
YES…PFD’s are classed into three categories of thermal heat protection: Good, Fair, Poor.
NOTE All loose fitting PFD’s offer no significant protection from cold water.
9. Does it help to get your body out of the water? YES…The body surrenders its heat to the water
many times more quickly than to air of the same temperature. Once you are out of the water, it is
possible to stabilize body temperature.
HSE MANUAL
First 0 Sept. 1, 2011 40.0
10. Does alcohol consumption affect survival time? About one third of the boating fatalities
involve the use of alcohol. It is known that the use of alcohol will put you in the water, due to a
boating accident. Tests indicate that alcohol did not significantly increase the cooling rate of the
body. Cold water seems to overcome the mild anesthesia of intoxication. Tests were performed
on persons considered legally impaired with blood alcohol of 0.08 g/100ml.
11. Do people ever die from shock from falling into cold water? Falling into cold water causes
immediate major changes in body function. There have been isolated cases of sudden death.
The cases of sudden death are not clear. Heart attack is possible, but unlikely in a healthy
person. Another possible cause of death is hyperventilation (over breathing). The inhalation of
water could cause this situation. Prolonged hyperventilation can lead to unconsciousness and
subsequent drowning.
12. How do you warm someone who has been in cold water? This is not an easy question to
answer due to the large number of various circumstances. Nevertheless, in general the following
steps should be taken:
1. Warm person by your bodily contact.

2. Exercise the limbs of those with mild hypothermia.
3. Hot wet towels and water bottles.
4. Heating pads, electric or chemical type.
5. Hot sweet drinks.
*The above are to be used only on conscious people.
*If unconscious, handle the body gently to avoid jolts that may adversely affect the heart. Get the
person to a hospital or doctor’s office as soon as possible.
13. What if the person appears to be dead from hypothermia? Recent examples have shown that
persons who are apparently dead form hypothermia or drowning in cold water can often be
resuscitated successfully even after quite long periods without breathing and blood circulation
(10 to 40 minutes). The main reason for this is that cold body tissues required less oxygen than
when warm. Therefore, never give up. Maintain ventilation.
WIND CHILL CHART

HSE MANUAL
First 0 Sept. 1, 2011 40.0
Wind Speed MPH Temp 50 40 30 20 10 0 -10 -20 -30 -40

Equivalent Temperature Degrees F
Calm 50 40 30 20 10 0 -10 -20 -30 -40
5 48 37 27 16 6 -5 -15 -26 -36 -47
10 40 28 16 4 -9 -21 -33 -46 -58 -70
15 36 22 9 -5 -18 -36 -45 -58 -72 -85
20 32 18 4 -10 -25 -39 -53 -67 -82 -96
25 30 16 0 -15 -29 -44 -59 -74 -88 -104
30 28 13 -2 -18 -33 -48 -63 -79 -94 -109
35 27 11 -4 -20 -35 -49 -67 -82 -98 -113
40 26 10 -6 -21 -37 -53 -69 -85 -100 -116
Increasing Great Danger - flesh

Little danger to properly
Wind Speeds above clothed. Danger of may freeze within 30
40 MPH have little exposed flesh seconds.
additional effect.
2. Heat Emergencies: Heat cramps, exhaustion and stroke are three conditions caused by
overexposure to heat.
a. Heat Cramps:
1) The cause of heat cramps is believed to be a combination of fluid and salt loss due to
heavy sweating. Heat cramps develop rapidly and usually occur after heavy exercise
or work in warm and/or moderate temperatures.
2) Symptoms of heat cramps include: sever muscle spasms/contractions, usually in the
legs and abdomen but can occur in any voluntary muscle.
3) Treatment for heat cramps include:
 Move the employee to a cool environment

 Give the person cool water or sports drinks
 Lightly stretch and massage the effected muscle
 DO NOT GIVE THE VICTIM SALT TABLETS OR SALT WATER
b. Heat Exhaustion:
HSE MANUAL
First 0 Sept. 1, 2011 40.0
1) Heat exhaustion is the result of extended periods of heavy work in a hot environment
and is the early stage of heat related illness. Loss of fluid through sweating decreases
blood volume and increases the blood flow to the skin. This reduces blood flow to
vital organs and may cause the victim to go into shock.
2) Symptoms of heat exhaustion include: below normal body temperature,
cool/moist/pale or red skin, headache, nausea, dizziness, weakness and overall
exhaustion.
3) Treatment for heat exhaustion include:
 Move the victim to a cool environment

 Give the victim cool water
 Monitor for any worsening of the victim’s condition (i.e., vomiting, changes in
level of consciousness)
c. Heat Stroke:
1) Heat stroke is the most severe heat emergency and can result in convulsions, coma
and death. Heat stroke develops when the body systems are overwhelmed by heat
and begin to stop functioning. Sweating ceases, body temperature rises rapidly and
may reach a level where vital organs (brain, heart, kidneys) begin to fail. HEAT
STROKE IS A SERIOUS MEDICAL EMERGENCY. PROFESSIONAL
MEDICAL SERVICES SHOULD BE CONTACTED.
2) Symptoms of heat stroke include: red/dry/hot skin, progressive loss of consciousness,
rapid/weak pulse and rapid/shallow breathing.
3) Treatment for heat stroke should include:
 Move the victim to a cool environment

 Give the victim cool water, if conscious
 Loosen tight clothing
 Remove perspiration soaked clothing
 Apply wet, cool cloths to the skin and fan to increase evaporation
 Monitor for any worsening of the victim’s condition (i.e. vomiting, changes in
level of consciousness)
 Call for professional medical services
 Worsening conditions may require increased efforts to cool down the body. Place
soaked towels/sheets, ice packs and cold packs to the victim’s ankles, wrists,
neck, groin, and armpits to cool large blood vessels.
 Maintain an open airway and monitor vital signs
 Be prepared to administer CPR
HSE MANUAL
First 0 Sept. 1, 2011 40.0
J. FRACTURES
1. Three basic types of fractures may occur: compound, simple and commuted.
a. Compound Fracture: Fracture with an open wound extending from the break to the outer
skin.
b. Simple Fracture: Break in a bone not resulting in an open wound.
c. Commuted Fracture: A shattered broken bone with or without an open wound.
2. First aid treatment of fractures should include the following:
a. All bone injuries should be treated as fractures.

b. Apply a splint and bandage to keep broken bones and adjacent joints from moving.
c. Control the bleeding, if present, by applying gently direct pressure on a dressing over the
wound. In severe cases, use of a loosely applied tourniquet directly above the wound
may be required.
USE A TOURNIQUET ONLY AS A LAST RESORT.
d. Do not move broken, dislocated, sprained or strained injuries more than is absolutely
necessary.
NOTE: Treat back injuries as a broken back or neck. If moving the victim is absolutely
necessary, move the body as a unit minimizing twisting and turning of the body. Hold the
head and truck in traction while placing on a stretcher. If the victim has a head injury, use a
pillow, cushion or other soft material to support the head to prevent further internal injury.
K. POISON
1. A poison may be defined as any substance that causes injury or illness when introduced into
the body. Poisons may be a solid, liquid, or fume (gas/vapor). The severity of the poisoning
will depend on the types, amount, how it entered the body, and the victim’s weight, size and
age. Ingestion, inhalation, absorption and injection are the four (4) methods by which poison
may be introduced into the body.
a. Ingestion: means swallowing. Ingested poisons may include food (shellfish),

medication, cleaning supplies and/or pesticides.
b. Inhalation: means breathing in toxic fumes. Examples of inhaled poisons may include
hydrogen sulfide, carbon monoxide, nitrous oxide, chlorine fumes from household
products and drugs.
HSE MANUAL
First 0 Sept. 1, 2011 40.0
c. Absorption: mean the poison enters the body after coming in contact with the skin.
Absorbed poisons come from plants (poison ivy), pesticides and fertilizers.
d. Injection: means the poison enters the body through bites, stings or injections with a
hypodermic needle.
2. Symptoms of poisoning include:
a. nausea
b. vomiting
c. diarrhea
d. chest or abdominal pain
e. breathing difficulty
f. sweating
g. seizures
h. loss of consciousness
i. burning around the lips, tongue, skin
3. General First Aid treatment for poisoning should include:
a. Survey the environment to make sure it is safe to approach the victim.

b. If necessary, remove the victim from the source.
c. Assess the victim’s airway, breathing and circulation. Provide care for any life
threatening conditions.
d. If the victim is unconscious, gather additional information regarding cause. What type of
poisoning? How much was taken? When was it taken?
e. Call a Poison Control Center for instructions.
f. Never give the victim food or drink unless instructed to do so by professional medical
personnel.
HSE MANUAL
Forklift 0 Sept. 1, 2011 41.0
Operations Prepared By: Approved By: Page:
FORKLIFT OPERATIONS
A. INTRODUCTION
The purpose of this program is to establish Safe Practices for LABORDE MARINE, LLC
personnel operating forklifts. The following practices and procedure will set the standards for
forklifts being used by LABORDE MARINE, LLC and enable us to bring our operation in
compliance with OSHA 29 CFR 1910.178. They will apply to all Forklift Operations within
LABORDE MARINE MANGEMENT, LLC.
B. RESPONSIBILITIES
Management will be responsible for certifying that all authorized employees have completed the
training required by this procedure on all makes and models of equipment owned by LABORDE
MARINE, LLC.
1. Additional responsibilities include:
a. The implementation of this policy.

b. Take corrective actions on all violations or suspected violations of this procedure.
c. Documentation of completion by each employee.
The Safety Coordinator will be responsible for aiding in the implementation of this Procedure.
The Supervisor is responsible for providing assistance in the implementation of this policy.
1. Additional responsibilities include:
a. Ensuring that all company owned or leased forklifts in their operations meet OSHA
criteria.
b. Ensuring that proper inspections and maintenance records are completed and maintained
for future references.
Company personnel are responsible for acquainting themselves with this procedure and applying it
in their day-to-day operations.
HSE MANUAL
C. PROCEDURE
The following procedures will be in effect and adhered to throughout LABORDE MARINE, LLC
operations.
1. All forklifts used in company operations will meet company safety standards, whether
company owned, leased or rented.
2. Only trained and certified operators, including supervisors, are allowed to operate forklifts
while on company or client property.
Because of the varied types of worked performed, we will be exposed to many brands, types and
styles of forklifts for this reason each time an employee is required to operate a different type, brand,
or style of forklift it will be necessary that their competency must be checked on the specific unit to
be operated.
1. In most cases, this check-off will be conducted by a qualified employee of the client.
a. In the event that this is impossible, a certified trainer will be contracted to conduct this
exercise.
b. Each time that this exercise is done, proper documentation will be developed and
maintained in the employee’s training file.
All forklifts will be inspected and maintained as per manufacturer’s specifications. Operators must
insure vehicle is safe prior to operating.
2. All forklifts will be inspected daily prior to operation.
3. Refer to Exhibits for copy of the inspection form.
The forklift should be serviced daily to ensure it remains in good condition.
1. Proper maintenance records should be maintained.

HSE MANUAL
No guards, safety appliances or devices shall be removed or made ineffective unless immediate
repairs or adjustments are required, then only after power has been shut off.
All forklifts should be equipped with a warning horn or siren to indicate the vehicle has been placed
in reverse gear.
An oscillating light should be on top of the forklift to indicate the vehicle is in operation.
Forklift tires should be of the proper size and tread for operational safety and traction.
Holes should not be cut in the ends of the lift forks for the purpose of attaching lift slings or chains.
Gasoline engine forklifts should not be permitted in hazardous installations or areas.
Following adjustments or repairs, all guards should be placed on the forklift before it is placed back
in service.
Broken forks should be replaced, not welded.
Items such as the steering wheel, seat, muffler and operating levers should be replaces with original
equipment parts when broken or worn out.
Floor or deck openings in the vehicle’s area of travel should be covered or made level to ensure
steering control.
Loose objects should be kept off the floors or decks to prevent the truck’s loss of steering.
Oil, grease, mud, moisture, etc., should be kept off ramps and floors where the forklift travels to
ensure traction.
Adequate lighting should be present in the area where the forklift will be operated.
HSE MANUAL
No one other than the assigned or authorized forklift operator should operate the vehicle.
The vehicle should not be operated with the forks empty or loaded, elevated more than one foot off
the ground or floor.
The vehicle should not be driven forward while transporting a load that blocks the view of the driver.
The vehicle should not be operated if the overhead protection frame if off of the vehicle.
1. The engine should be stopped and the brake set before he/she gets off the machine.
The operator should reduce speed and sound the horn when starting around corners.
Always sound the horn to alert people in the area where the forklift is in motion.
The operator should be extra alert when maneuvering the forklift around fuel, oil or chemical
containers, high pressure lines, etc., to prevent ramming or puncturing them with the forks.
Extreme caution should be taken when operating the unit under or around power or electrical lines.
No one is permitted to ride with the operator or on the forks while the unit is in motion.
Personnel should not place hands or any other parts of the body on or around the forklift’s hydraulic
lift frame when it is in operation.
The operator should not stack material or supplies where walkways and emergency exits will be
blocked.
Before loading or unloading operations starts:
1. The operator will verify that:
a. The wheels of trucks/trailers that are to be loaded are chocked.

b. Dock to trailer/truck transition plates are in place.
HSE MANUAL
c. Any supports required are in place.
D. TRAINING REQUIREMENTS
The written training program includes formal instruction, practical training, and operator evaluation
in the workplace.
1. Formal instruction includes but not limited to:
a. Lecture
b. Discussion
c. Written material
d. Videos
2. Practical training involves instructor demonstrations and trainee exercises.

3. Operator evaluation includes the following:
a. Written test
1. Must be passed by a 70% score.

2. All questions missed must be reviewed and corrected with the trainee.
b. Hands on demonstration (Critique), includes the following:
1. Completion of a pre-trip inspection

2. An operator performance critique check-off sheet
All trainers must have the knowledge and ability to teach and evaluate the operators, and the training
and observations will be conducted by professional trainers or safety persons that qualify to conduct
this material. Training is currently conducted by Safety & Training Consultants, LLC of Houma,
LA.
The program content will consist of the following topics:
1. Understanding of the need for forklift safety.

HSE MANUAL
2. Understand the basic terms and concepts related to forklifts and other “powered industrial
trucks”.
3. Types and makes of units
4. Controls
5. Refueling/charging
6. Proper inspections
7. Maintenance
8. Operating instructions
9. Hazard recognition
10. Basic safety precautions for operating a forklift
11. Procedures for safe load handling
12. Understand safety precautions for special situations
13. Fulcrum principal
14. Load charts
15. Center of gravity
16. Stability triangle
17. Turn radius
18. Visibility
19. Ramps
HSE MANUAL
20. Docks
21. Difference between cars vs. forklifts
22. Chocking of trucks, trailers or rail cars
23. Personal protective equipment
E. TRAINING FREQUENCY
All operator personnel will be trained/certified according to the following schedule:
1. Prior to being required to work near or operate a forklift.
2. Recertification every three years.
Refresher training will be conducted when:
1. Operators are required to operate a different style or make of forklift
2. Whenever involved in an accident
3. When changes in work conditions occur
4. Observed operating equipment unsafely
F. CERTIFICATION
Operator certifications must be kept with the operator as well as copies located in individual
personnel files.
1. Operator certifications must include:
a. Training date
HSE MANUAL
b. Operator name
c. Evaluation date
d. Trainer/evaluator name
HSE MANUAL
Grounding 0 Sept. 1, 2011 42.0
Conductor Prepared By: Approved By: Page:
GROUNDING CONDUCTOR PROGRAM
A. INTRODUCTION
LABORDE MARINE, LLC will review and evaluate this standard practice on an annual basis, or
when changes occur that prompt revision of this document, or when facility operational changes
occur that require a revision of this document. This written program will be communicated to all
required personnel and made available at all work sites. A LABORDE MARINE, LLC supervisor
is responsible for implementation of this program.
B. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall be responsible for the safe condition of electrical tools and
equipment used by its employees, including tools and equipment, which may be furnished by
employees. LABORDE MARINE, LLC will develop assured grounding operational procedures
through the use of this document that will cover all cord sets, receptacles, which are not part of the
building or structure. After tool and equipment selection and evaluation, equipment will be used and
maintained in a safe condition. Supervisors will ensure that equipment utilized at each job site is
maintained in a safe condition. Any equipment that does not meet the requirements of this program
will not be allowed to be used. Inspections of cords and equipment shall be inspected on a daily
basis, prior to operation.
C. POWER TOOL & ACCESSORIES SELECTION, EVALUATION & CONDITION
The greatest hazards posed by power tools usually results from misuse and/or improper maintenance.
Tool selection sometimes is not considered a priority when arrangements are made to begin work.
All employees will consider the following when selecting tools:
1. Is the tool correct for the type of work to be performed?
2. Are grounding methods sufficient when working in wet conditions?
3. Is the grounding terminal present on the plug?
4. Is the polarity of connections correct? No grounded conductor can be attached to any

terminal or lead which results in a reversed designated polarity.
HSE MANUAL
5. Are grounding terminals or grounding-type devices on receptacles, cord connectors, or

attachment plugs used for the intended purpose?

attachment plugs defeated in any way?
7. Are all receptacles and attachment caps or plugs tested for correct attachment of the
equipment grounding conductor? The equipment grounding conductor must be connected to
its proper terminal.

attachment plugs defeated in any way?
9. Are all 12-volt, single-phase 15 and 20 ampere receptacle outlets on construction sites, which
are not a part of the permanent wiring of the building or structure, equipped with approved
ground-fault circuit interrupters for personnel protection?
10. Are conductors used as a grounded conductor identifiable and distinguishable from all other
conductors?
11. Is each cord set, attachment cap, plug and receptacle of cord sets, and any equipment
connected by cord and plug, visually inspected daily before use for external defects, such as
deformed or missing pins or insulation damage, and for indications of possible internal
damage? (Exception – cord sets and receptacles which are fixed and not exposed to
damage).
12. If equipment is found damaged or defective it must be removed from service until repaired or
replaced.
13. Are guards installed properly and in good condition?
14. Are all required test performed:
a. Before first use;

b. Before equipment is returned to service following repairs;
c. Before equipment is used after any incident which can be reasonably suspected to have
caused damage (for example, when a cord set is run over) and;
HSE MANUAL
d. At intervals not to exceed 3 months, except that cord sets and receptacles which are fixed
and not exposed to damage must be tested at intervals not to exceed 6 months.
15. All required tests must be documented, maintained and include the following:
a. Identity of all equipment having passed the test.

b. The last date tested or the testing interval.
c. Maintained until replaced by a more current record.
d. The above will be logged, documented and available for inspection at the job site.
16. Does the tool create sparks or heat? This must be considered when working around
flammable substances.
17. The Safety Coordinator and LABORDE MARINE, LLC qualified competent person will be
responsible for the overall implementation of the program and the safety of all employees
including contractors.
D. POWER TOOL PRECAUTIONS
Power tools can be hazardous when improperly used. This company uses several types. The
following precautions will be taken by employees of this company to prevent injury.
1. Power tools will always be operated within their design limitations.
2. Eye protection, gloves and safety footwear are recommended during operation.
3. Tools will be stored in an appropriate dry location when not in use.
4. Tool work will only be conducted in well illuminated locations.
5. Tools will not be carried by the cord or hose.
6. Cords or hoses will not be yanked to disconnect it from the receptacle.
7. Cords and hoses will be kept away from heat, oils, and sharp edges or any other source that
could result in damage.
HSE MANUAL
8. Tools will be disconnected when not in use, before servicing, and when changing accessories
such as blades, bits and cutters.
9. Observers will be kept at a safe distance at all times from the work area.
10. Work will be secured will be secured with clamps or a vice where possible to free both hands
to operate tools.
11. To prevent accidental starting, employees should be continually aware not to hold the start
button while carrying a plugged-in tool.
12. Tools will be maintained in a clean manner, and properly maintained in accordance with the
manufacturer’s guidelines.
13. Ensure that proper shoes are worn and that the work area is kept clean to maintain proper
footing and good balance.
14. Tools that are damaged will be removed from service immediately and tagged “Do Not Use”.
They will be reported and turned in for repair or replacement.
E. METHODS OF GUARDING
One or more methods of guarding shall be provided where required to protect the operator and other
employees in the area from hazards such as those created by point of operation, in running nip
points, rotating parts, flying chips and sparks. Examples of guarding methods are; barrier guards,
two-hand tripping devices, electronic safety devices, etc. The guard shall be such that it does not
offer an accident hazard in itself. Employee’s will:
1. Inspect tools without guards for signs of guard removal. If it is evident that a guard is
required, tag-out the tool and obtain a replacement. Tools will not be energized during
inspection.
2. Inspect tools having guards for proper operation and maintenance prior to use. Tools will not
be energized during inspection.
3. Never remove a guard during use.

HSE MANUAL
F. INITIAL TRAINING
Training shall be conducted prior to job assignment. LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall provide
training to ensure that the grounding requirements, purpose, function, and proper use of tools to be
used in the normal function of their jobs are understood by employees and that the knowledge and
skills required for the safe application, and usage is acquired by employees. This standard practice
instruction shall be provided to, and read by all employees receiving training. The training shall
include, as a minimum the following:
1. Grounding requirements for tools
2. Types of tools appropriate for use
3. Recognition of applicable electrical hazards associated with work to be completed.
4. Tool selection requirements
5. Procedures for removal of an electrical tool/accessory from service.
6. All other employees whose work operations are or may be in an area where tools, which
could present a hazard to other than the user, will be instructed to an awareness level
concerning hazards.
7. Tool identification
8. Certification. LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall certify that employee training has been
accomplished and is being kept up to date. The certification shall contain each employee’s
name and dates of training.
G. REFRESHER TRAINING
This standard practice instruction shall be provided to, and read by all employees receiving refresher
training. The training content shall be identical to initial training. Refresher training will be
conducted on an as required basis or when the following conditions exist, whichever occurs first.
HSE MANUAL
1. Retraining shall be provided for all employees whenever (and prior to) there is a change in
their job assignments, a change in the type of tools used, or when a know hazard is added to
the work environment.
2. Additional retraining shall also be conducted whenever a periodic inspection reveals, or

whenever there is reason to believe, that there are deviations from or inadequacies in the
employee’s knowledge or use of tools.
3. The retraining shall reestablish employee proficiency and introduce new or revised methods
and procedures, as necessary.
HSE MANUAL
Hand & 0 Sept. 1, 2011 43.0
Power Tools Prepared By: Approved By: Page:
HAND & POWER TOOLS
A. INTRODUCTION
This section is designed to comply with regulations set forth in 29 CRF 1926.300. The program
shall apply to all hand and power tools and similar equipment, whether furnished by the employer or
the employee. All such tools and equipment shall be maintained in a safe condition at all times.
The use of any tool, machinery, or equipment, which is not in compliance with any part of this
program, is prohibited. Tools, machinery, or equipment found not be in compliance shall
immediately be identified as being unsafe by locking and/or tagging out the controls to render it
inoperable or physically removing it from its place of operation.
B. GUARDING
1. Power operated tools, which are designed to accommodate guards, shall be equipped with
such guards when in use.
2. Belts, gears, shafts, pulleys, sprockets, spindles, drums, fly wheels, chains, or other
reciprocating, rotating or moving parts of equipment shall be guarded if such parts are
exposed to contact by employees or otherwise create a hazard. Guarding shall meet the
requirements as set forth in American National Standards Institute, B15.1-1953 (R1958),
Safety Code for Mechanical Power – Transmission Apparatus.
3. “Types of guarding.” One or more methods of machine guarding shall be provided to protect
the operator and other employees in the machine are from hazards such as those created by
point of operation, ingoing nip points, rotation parts, flying chips and sparks. Examples of
guarding methods are – barrier guards, two-hand tripping devices, electronic safety devices,
etc.
4. “Point of operation guarding.”
a. Point of operation is the area on a machine where work is actually performed upon the
material being processed.
b. The point of operation of machines, whose operation exposes an employee to injury, shall
be guarded. The guarding device shall be in conformity with any appropriate standards,
therefore, or, in the absence of applicable specific standards, shall be so designed and
HSE MANUAL
Hand & 0 Sept. 1, 2011 43.0
constructed as to prevent the operator from having any part of his body in the danger
zone during the operating cycle.
c. Special hand tools for placing and removing material shall be such as to permit easy
handling of material without the operator placing a hand in the danger zone. Such tools
shall not be in lieu of other guarding required by this section, but can only be used to
supplement protection provided.
d. Machines requiring point of operation guarding are:
 Guillotine cutters
 Shears
 Alligator shears
 Powered presses
 Milling machines
 Power saws
 Jointers
 Portable power tools
 Forming rolls and calendars.
e. “Exposure of blades.” When the periphery of the blades of a fan is less than 7 feet above
the floor or working level, the blades shall be guarded. The guard shall have opening no
larger than ½ inch.
f. “Anchoring fixed machinery.” Machines designed for a fixed location shall be securely
anchored to prevent walking or moving.
C. PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE)
All employees using hand and power tools and exposed to the hazards of falling, flying, abrasive,
and splashing objects, or exposed to harmful dusts, fumes, mists, vapors, or gasses shall be provided
with the particular personal protective equipment necessary to protect them from the hazard. PPE
determinations shall be made in accordance with the hazard assessment guidelines and the PPE
matrix. All personal protective equipment shall meet the requirements and be maintained as outlined
in the PPE program of this manual.
HSE MANUAL
Hand & 0 Sept. 1, 2011 43.0
D. SWITCHES
1. All hand-held powered platen sanders, grinders with wheels 2-inch diameter or less, routers,
planers, laminate trimmers, nibblers, shears, scroll saws, and jigsaws with blade shanks one
fourth of an inch wide or less may be equipped with only a positive “on-off” control.
2. All hand-held powered drills, tappers, fastener drivers, horizontal, vertical, and angle
grinders with wheels greater than 2 inches in diameter, disc sanders, belt sanders,
reciprocating saws, saber saws, and other similar operating powered tools shall be equipped
with a momentary contact “on-off” control and may have a lock-on control provided that
turnoff can be accomplished by a single motion of the same finer or fingers that turn it on.
3. All other hand-held powered tools, such as circular saws, chain saws, and percussion tools
without positive accessory holding means, shall be equipped with a constant pressure switch
that will shut off the power when the pressure is released.
E. HAND TOOLS
1. Wrenches, including adjustable, pipe, end and socket wrenches shall not be used when the
jaws are sprung to the point that slippage occurs.
2. Impact tools such as drift pins, wedges, and chisels, shall be kept free of mushroomed heads.
3. Wooden handles of tools shall be kept free from splinters or cracks and shall be kept tight in
the tool.
F. ELECTRIC TOOLS
1. Electric power operated tools shall either be of the approved double-insulated type or
grounded.
2. Using electric cords for hoisting or lowering tools is not permitted.

HSE MANUAL
Hand & 0 Sept. 1, 2011 43.0
G. PNEUMATIC TOOLS
1. Pneumatic power tools shall be secured to the hose or whip by some positive means to
prevent the tool from becoming accidentally disconnected.
2. Safety clips or retainers shall be securely installed and maintained on pneumatic impact tools
to prevent attachments form being expelled.
3. All pneumatically driven nailers, staplers, and other similar equipment provided with
automatic fastener feed, which operate at more than 100 PSI pressure at the tool shall have a
safety device on the muzzle to prevent the tool from ejecting fasteners, unless the muzzle is
in contact with the work surface.
4. Compressed air can only be used for cleaning purposes when it has been reduced to less than
30 PSI and effective guarding and appropriate PPE is used.
5. Manufacturer’s safe operating pressure for hoses, pipes, valves, filters, and other fittings shall
not be exceeded.
6. Using hoses for hoisting or lowering of tools is not permitted.
7. Hoses exceeding 1/2 inch inside diameter shall have a safety device at the source of supply or
branch line to reduce pressure in case of hose failure.
8. Airless spray guns of the type which atomize paints and fluids at high pressures (1,000
pounds or more per square inch) shall be equipped with automatic or visible manual safety
devices which will prevent pulling of the trigger to prevent release of the paint or fluid until
the safety device is manually released or a diffuser nut which will prevent high pressure, high
velocity release, while the nozzle tip is removed, plus a nozzle tip guard which will prevent
the tip from coming into contact with the operator, or other equivalent protection, shall be
provided.
9. Abrasive blasting cleaning nozzles shall be equipped with an operating valve, which must be
held open manually. A support shall be provided on which the muzzle may be mounted
when it is not in use.
HSE MANUAL
Hand & 0 Sept. 1, 2011 43.0
H. FUEL POWERED TOOLS
1. All fuel-powered tools shall be stopped while being refueled, serviced, or maintained, and
fuel shall be transported, handled, and stored in accordance with regulations.
2. When fuel-powered tools are used in enclosed spaces, proper ventilation shall be ensured
along with proper use of appropriate PPE in accordance with the hazard assessment.
I. HYDRAULIC POWER TOOLS
1. Fluid used in hydraulic powered tools shall be fire-resistant fluids approved under Schedule
30 of the U.S. Bureau of Mines, Department of the Interior, and shall retain its operating
characteristics at the most extreme temperatures to which it will be exposed.
2. The manufacturer’s safe operating pressures for hoses, valves, pipes, filters, and other fittings
shall not be exceeded.
J. POWDER-ACTUATED TOOLS
1. Only employees who have been trained in the operation of the particular tool in use shall be
allowed to operate a powder-actuated tool. Powder-actuated tools shall meet all applicable
requirements of American National Standards Institute, A10.3-1970, Safety Requirements for
Explosive Actuated Fastening Tools.
2. Daily inspection and testing in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations must
be done before loading to see that the safety devices are working properly and in good
condition.
3. Do not load tools until just prior to the intended fire time. Do not point empty or loaded tools
at anyone and hands shall always be kept clear of the open barrel end.
4. Do not leave loaded tools unattended.
5. Do not drive fasteners into very hard or brittle material such as cast iron, glazed tile, surface-
hardened steel, etc.
HSE MANUAL
Hand & 0 Sept. 1, 2011 43.0
6. When driving into materials which are easily penetrated these materials shall be backed by a
substance that will prevent the pin or fastener from passing completely through and creating
a flying missile hazard on the other side.
7. Fasteners shall not be driven into a spalled area caused by an unsatisfactory fastening.
8. Tools shall not be used in explosive or flammable atmospheres.
9. Tools shall be used with the correct shield, guard, or attachment recommended by the
manufacturer.
K. ABRASIVE WHEELS AND TOOLS
1. Power to grinding machines shall be supplied with sufficient power to maintain the spindle
speed at safe levels under all conditions of normal operation.
2. Guarding shall be provided in conformance with the requirements of American National

Standards Institute, B7.1-1970, Safety Code for the Use, Case and Protection of Abrasive
Wheels.
The guard shall cover the spindle end, nut and flange projections and be mounted so as to
maintain proper alignment with the wheel and the guard and its fastenings shall be of
sufficient strength to retain fragments of the wheel in case of accidental breakage. If the
work provides a suitable measure of protection to the operator, the guard may be constructed
that the spindle end, nut, and outer flange are exposed. If the nature of the work is such that
the entire side of the wheel is covered, the side covers of the guard may be omitted.
For machines designed as portable saws, the spindle end, nut, and outer flange may be
exposed.
“Guarding of abrasive wheel machinery – exposure adjustment.” Safety guards for bench,
floor stand, and cylindrical grinders, where the operator stands in front of the opening, shall
be constructed so that the peripheral protecting member can be adjusted to the constantly
decreasing diameter of the wheel. The maximum angular exposure above the horizontal
plane of the wheel spindle as specified below shall never be exceeded, and the distance
between the wheel periphery and the adjustable tongue or the end of the peripheral member
at the top shall never exceed ¼ inch.
HSE MANUAL
Hand & 0 Sept. 1, 2011 43.0
Bench and floor stands used for external grinding, shall be provided with safety guards
(protection hoods). The angular exposure of the grinding wheel periphery and sides for
safety guards shall not exceed 90 degrees or one-fourth of the periphery. Exposure shall
begin at a point not more than 65 degrees above the horizontal plane of the wheel spindle.
Whenever the work requires contact with the wheel below the horizontal plane of the spindle,
the exposure shall not exceed 125 degrees.
Cylindrical grinders. The maximum angular exposure of the grinding wheel periphery and
sides for safety guards used on cylindrical grinding machines shall not exceed 180 degrees.
Exposure shall begin at a point not more than 65 degrees above the horizontal plane of the
wheel spindle.
Cup type wheels used for external grinding shall be protected by either a revolving cup guard
or a band type guard in accordance with the provisions of the ANSI, B7.1-1970.
When the work location makes it impossible to use a guard, a wheel equipped with safety
flange shall be used.
When wheels 2 inches or less in diameter which are securely mounted on the end of steel
mandrel are used, no guard is required.
Portable abrasive wheels used for internal grinding shall be fitted with a safety flange unless
the wheel is 2 inches or less in diameter and securely mounted on the end of a steel mandrel
or if the wheel is entirely within the work being ground while in use.
When safety flanges are required, they shall be used only with wheels designed to fit the
flanges. Only safety flanges, or a type and design and properly assembled so as to ensure
that the pieces of the wheel will be retained in case of accidental breakage shall be used.
3. All abrasive wheels shall be closely inspected and ring-tested before mounting to ensure that
they are free from cracks or defects.
4. Grinding wheels shall fit freely on the spindle and shall not be forced on. The spindle nut
shall be tightened only enough to hold the wheel in place.
HSE MANUAL
Hand & 0 Sept. 1, 2011 43.0
5. Work rest on offhand machines, shall be used to support the work. They shall be made of a
rigid construction and designed to be adjustable to compensate for wheel wear. Work rest
shall be kept adjusted closely to the wheel with a maximum opening of 1/8 inch to prevent
the work from being jammed between the wheel and the rest, which may cause wheel
breakage. Adjustments shall not be made while the wheel is in motion.
L. WOODWORKING TOOLS
1. In addition to the following requirements, all woodworking tools and machinery shall meet
other applicable requirements of ANSI 01.1-1961.
2. Fixed power driven woodworking tools shall be provided with a disconnect switch that can
either be locked or tagged in the off position.
3. Speeds. For circulating saws over 20 inches in diameter or operating at over 10,000
peripheral feet per minute, the operating speed shall be etched or otherwise permanently
marked. Saws with this marking shall not be operated at a speed other than that marked on
the blade. When a marked saw is re-tensioned for a different speed, the marking shall be
corrected to show the new speed.
4. Self-feed. Whenever the nature of the work will permit, automatic feeding devices shall be
installed on machines. Feeder attachments shall have the feed rolls or other moving parts
covered or guarded so as to protect the operator.
5. Guarding. All portable, power-driven circular saws shall be equipped with guards above and
below the base plate or shoe. The upper guard shall cover the saw to the depth of the teeth,
except for the minimum arc required to permit the base to be tilted for bevel cuts. The lower
guard shall cover the saw to the depth of the teeth, except for the minimum arc required to
allow proper retraction and contact with work. When the tool is withdrawn from the work,
the lower guard shall automatically and instantly return to the covering position.
6. Radial saws. The upper hood shall completely enclose the upper portion of the blade down
to a point that will include the end of the saw arbor. The upper hood shall be constructed in
such a manner and of such material that it will protect the operator from flying splinters,
broken saw teeth, etc., and will defect sawdust away from the operator. The sides of the
lower exposed portion of the blade shall be guarded to the full diameter of the blade by a
device that will automatically adjust itself to the thickness of the stock and remain in contact
with stock being cut to give maximum protection possible for the operations being
performed.
HSE MANUAL
Hand & 0 Sept. 1, 2011 43.0
7. Hand-fed crosscut table saws and circular hand-fed ripsaws shall be guarded by a hood which
shall completely enclose the portion of the saw above the table and that portion of the saw
above the material being cut.
The hood and mounting shall be arranged so that the hood will automatically adjust itself to
the thickness of and remain in contact with the material being cut but it shall not offer any
considerable resistance to insertion of material to saw or to passage of the material being
sawed. The hood shall be made of adequate strength to resist blows and stains incidental to
reasonable operation, adjusting, and handling, and shall be so designed as to protect the
operator from flying splinters and broken saw teeth. It shall be made of a material that is soft
enough so that will be unlikely to cause tooth breakage. The hood shall be so mounted as to
insure that its operation will be positive, reliable and in true alignment with the saw; and the
mounting shall be adequate in strength to resist any reasonable side thrust or other force
tending to throw it out of line.
M. JACKS-LEVER AND RATCHET, SCREW AND HYDRAULIC
1. General requirements
a. The manufacturer’s rated capacity shall be legibly marked on all jacks and shall not be
exceeded.
b. All jacks shall have a positive stop to prevent over travel.
2. Blocking. Blocking or cribbing shall be used to provide a firm foundation for the base of the
jack whenever necessary. Where there is a possibility of slippage of the metal cap of the
jack, a wood block shall be placed between the cap and the load.
3. Operation and maintenance
a. Raised loads shall be cribbed, blocked, or otherwise secured at once.

b. If exposed to freezing temperatures, hydraulic jacks shall be supplied with an adequate
antifreeze liquid.
c. Jacks shall be properly lubricated at regular intervals.
HSE MANUAL
Hand & 0 Sept. 1, 2011 43.0
d. Each jack shall be thoroughly inspected at times, which depend upon the service
conditions. Inspections shall be not less frequent than the following:
 For constant or intermittent use at one locality, once every 6 months.

 For jacks sent out of shop for special work, when sent out and when returned.
 For a jack subjected to abnormal load or shock, immediately before and immediately
thereafter.
 Repair or replacement parts shall be examined for possible defects.
 Jacks, which are out of order, shall be tagged accordingly, and shall not be used until
repairs are made.
N. AIR RECEIVERS
1. This section applies to compressed air receivers, and other equipment used in providing and
utilizing compressed air from performing operations such as cleaning, drilling, hoisting, and
chipping.
2. All new air receivers installed after June 30, 1993 shall be constructed in accordance with the
1968 edition of the A.S.M.E. Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section VIII. In addition, all
safety valves shall be constructed, installed and maintained in the accordance with the same
code.
3. Installation. Air receivers shall be installed that all drains, handholes, and manholes therein
are easily accessible. Under no circumstances shall an air receiver be buried underground or
located in an inaccessible place.
4. Drains and traps. A drain pipe and valve shall be installed at the lowest point of every air
receiver to provide for the removal of accumulated oil and water. Adequate automatic traps
may be installed in addition to drain valves. The drain valve on the receiver shall be opened
and the receiver completely drained frequently and at such intervals as to prevent the
accumulation of excessive amounts of liquid in the receiver.
5. Every air receiver shall be equipped with an indicating pressure gage (so as to be readily
visible) and with one or more spring-loaded safety valves. The total relieving capacity of
such safety valves shall be such as to prevent pressure in the receiver from exceeding the
maximum allowable working pressure of the receiver by more than 10 percent. No valves of
any type shall be place between the air receiver and its safety valve or valves.
HSE MANUAL
Hand & 0 Sept. 1, 2011 43.0
6. Safety appliances, such as safety valves, indicating devices and controlling devices, shall be
constructed, located and installed so that they cannot be readily rendered inoperative by any
means, including the elements.
7. All safety valves shall be tested frequently and at regular intervals to determine whether they
are in good operating condition.
HSE MANUAL
Hazard 1 July 1, 2012 44.0
Communications Prepared By: Approved By: Page:
Right to Know Safety MRC Page 1 of 7
HAZARD COMMUNICATIONS PROCEDURES RIGHT-TO-KNOW
A. INTRODUCTION
1. The purpose of the LABORDE MARINE, LLC hazard communication program is to alert
employees to the presence of hazardous chemicals and the use of labels & MSDS in the
workplace and to show how to work safely with these chemicals. It is company policy that
each individual understand emergency procedures and safety precautions associated with
hazardous substances utilized both in the shop and field locations, including any non-English
speaking personnel. The program shall be presented to them in their language as well. This
written program meets all requirements of 29 CFR 1910.1200, the Occupational Safety and
Health Administration’s (OSHA) Hazard Communication Standard. This program applies
and will be made available to all LABORDE MARINE, LLC locations and their off-site
operations. Where multiple sites are in effect – the program can remain at the primary site.
If there is no primary site, then the program should be sent with employees. Any questions
concerning this policy shall be directed to the Safety Coordinator.
2. This written document shall also be made available for review by any interested employee,
authorized client representative, chemical suppliers, the Assistant Secretary & Director in
accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020 (e) or OSHA compliance officer.
B. RESPONSIBILITY
1. The site supervisor is responsible for the training of all employees in hazard communication
procedures and for developing, implementing, and maintaining a hazard communication
training program.
C. HAZARD DETERMINATION
1. Since LABORDE MARINE, LLC does not manufacture chemicals, LABORDE

MARINE, LLC will rely on suppliers of purchased chemicals to conduct hazard
determinations and provide Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
2. The HSE Director Jeff Fegenbush will be the HAZCOM program administrator and will be
responsible to see the following is completed. The HSE Director Jeff Fegenbush shall be
advised whenever any Company facility plans to introduce a new chemical into the
workplace. An MSDS shall be forwarded to the HSE Director Jeff Fegenbush for review
prior to the purchase of the new chemical. The HSE Director Jeff Fegenbush is responsible
HSE MANUAL
Hazard 1 July 1, 2012 44.0
for evaluating the data and communicating the information to management, as well as to all
affected employees before a final procurement decision is made.
3. The hazard determination process shall be repeated as necessary to insure the MSDS
warnings are current. Specifically, updates of MSDS on file should be requested form
suppliers at least bi-annually.
D. MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS (MSDS)
1. The HSE Director Jeff Fegenbush or designee shall be responsible for obtaining the MSDS
for each purchased chemical. A MSDS must be on file or included with the first shipment of
chemical when received.
2. Copies of MSDS shall be maintained in a file readily accessible to all facility employees.
“Readily accessible” means that the employee does not need to contact a supervisor to obtain
the information.
3. If LABORDE MARINE, LLC is supplying one or more chemicals to a customer, or

bringing a chemical into a customer’s facility, MSDS for each product will accompany the
shipment.
4. If a chemical cleaning solution is to be blended at the customer’s facility an MSDS for each
component chemical and the resulting blended product shall be included with the job
paperwork. An authorized client representative should be asked to acknowledge receipt of
this information. MSDS should remain at the job site until work is complete and shall be
made available to all workers in the area.
5. Other contractors performing work adjacent to, or in close proximity of “an” LABORDE
MARINE, LLC work site, will be provided with MSDS if requested by the contractor.
6. LABORDE MARINE, LLC personnel shall request copies of all MSDS for substances in
the client facility prior to performing any work with that (those) substance(s).
E. CHEMICAL LISTS
1. A listing of all chemicals currently in inventory and all chemicals purchased, inventoried,
and/or used within the past calendar year shall be maintained by each LABORDE
MARINE, LLC facility. This listing should serve as an index to the MSDS file for each
location, with a list maintained at each job site.
HSE MANUAL
Hazard 1 July 1, 2012 44.0
2. These lists shall be maintained and updated by the HSE Director. Chemical lists will be
periodically reviewed by the Safety and Environmental Committee and made available to
senior management upon request.
3. Our list of chemicals consists of the following:

HSE MANUAL
Hazard 1 July 1, 2012 44.0
F. LABELING
1. The contents of all stationary and portable containers at LABORDE MARINE, LLC
facilities and assets must be readily identifiable. Appropriate hazards warning including
name and address of the manufacturer or other responsible party, or alternatively, words,
pictures, symbols, or combination thereof, which provide at least general information
regarding the hazards of the chemicals, and which, in conjunction with the other information
immediately available to employees under the hazard communication program, will provide
employees with the specific information regarding the physical and health hazards of the
hazardous chemical. Employees must be able to identify which MSDS are associated with
each container or group of containers. The term “container” includes vessels, tanks, drums,
bags, pumps, and lab samples. Piping systems are not considered containers for the purpose
of this policy.
2. Company locations that include laboratory facilities are required to provide labels, tags, or
other means of identification on all laboratory supplies, lab samples, cans, bottles, or other
containers within the lab and lab storage areas.
3. Containers of chemicals purchased by LABORDE MARINE, LLC must be labeled by the

supplier. These labels shall not be removed or defaced for any reason unless the container is
emptied, properly cleaned and used for another purpose. They must also identify the
chemical, list appropriate warning, as well as the manufacturer.
4. The site supervisor is responsible for ensuring that all on-site containers are properly labeled
as described herein.
5. The site supervisor is also responsible for ensuring that all chemical containers leaving a
Company facility are labeled in compliance with the OSHA standards. The labeling
requirement for shipped products is in addition to and shall not conflict with any Department
of Transportation (DOT) requirements.
6. If it becomes necessary to “create” a label for any mixture of chemicals (other than waste
materials) the content and text of such labels shall be determined and reviewed by the Safety
Coordinator using the guidelines of the ANSI Z129.2-1982 Labeling Standard. These labels
shall be updated as necessary to insure the hazard warning are current with published toxicity
guidelines and physical hazard dates.
HSE MANUAL
Hazard 1 July 1, 2012 44.0
7. The following are current labels used by LABORDE MARINE, LLC.
8. Labels or other forms of warning shall be legible, in English, and prominently displayed on
the container, or readily available in the work area throughout each work shift. Labels shall
be added for non-English speaking employees as long as the information is presented in
English as well.
G. EMPLOYEE TRAINING
1. Information and documented training shall be provided by the Manager, or designee, to all
field employees upon program implementation. The training shall include successful
completion of the Hazardous Materials Training course and associated tests. In addition, the
management team shall ensure that an effective, on-going chemical safety training program
is in place.
2. Specific information on chemical hazards shall be included in the training which must occur
when:
HSE MANUAL
Hazard 1 July 1, 2012 44.0
a. Employees are newly hired or when they are assigned to a new location or facility for the
first time.
b. New chemical hazards are introduced to the work site.
c. New toxicity or physical hazard information becomes available.
3. The training requirements shall include: (i) a test on the chemical hazards normally
encountered in the workplace, (ii) reading and understanding MSDS and labels, (iii) personal
protective equipment, and (iv) steps which can be taken to acquire additional information.
4. Training for hazard communication is the responsibility of the Manage of Safety and
Training. Employees must be instructed in the following topics: (The provision of written
materials to employees will not by itself suffice as training.)
a. Requirements of the OSHA Standard;

b. Operations in the workplace where hazardous substances are present;
c. Locations and availability of MSDS, the LABORDE MARINE, LLC hazard
communication program, and the list of hazardous chemicals found in the workplace;
d. Methods to detect the presence or release of a hazardous substance in the workplace;
e. Physical and health hazards of identified hazardous substances in the workplace;
f. The measures employees can take to protect themselves from the hazards, including
specific procedures implemented, such as appropriate work practices, emergency
procedures, and personal protective equipment to be used;
g. Person protective equipment requirements for handling hazardous substances; and,
h. Details of LABORDE MARINE, LLC hazard communication program, including an
explanation of the labeling system and the material safety data sheet, and how employees
can obtain and use the appropriate hazard information.
The Personnel Manager must provide new employees with information on hazardous
chemicals in the employee’s work area at the time of initial assignment. Training must
also be provided when a new chemical is introduced into the work area, and refresher
training must be provided on a yearly basis. The Personnel Manager must maintain
training records in the employee’s personnel file.
5. Any hazards recognized involving non-routine tasks must be documented and

communicated to the affected worker by the HSE Director or competent person.
H. CONTRACT EMPLOYEES
1. All Contractors working for LABORDE MARINE, LLC are responsible for complying
with the Hazard Communication Standard as it applies to their business. If Contractors are
HSE MANUAL
Hazard 1 July 1, 2012 44.0
bringing chemicals to LABORDE MARINE, LLC facility or work site, such chemicals
shall be labeled and a MSDS shall be provided to the HSE Director or his designee.
2. The HSE Director or designee will advise contract employees of any chemical to which they
may be exposed while working under the direction of LABORDE MARINE, LLC
personnel. Contract employees shall be give access to information, including labels, MSDS,
and chemical inventory lists.
3. Contract employees shall receive training conforming with the requirements of the
Hazardous Communication Standard. The Contractor shall certify in writing that such
training has occurred.
I. COMMUNICATION REQUIREMENTS FOR “NON-ROUTINE”TASKS
1. The nature of LABORDE MARINE, LLC business makes it impractical to provide advance
training to all workers on all chemical hazards in the work place. As previously described,
all affected employees will receive “generic” training providing a general background of
chemical safety awareness. Additional “on the job” training and information may be
available through:
a. The work order or job report describing the work assignment.

b. Work permits issued by the client prior to beginning each job.
c. The “tail-gate” Safety Meeting conducted by the on-site supervisor before each job.
d. Labels and other markings on containers, equipment, vessels, and operating areas in the
client’s plant.
HSE MANUAL
HAZWOPER 0 Sept. 1, 2011 45.0
HAZWOPER
(Hazardous Waste Operations & Emergency Response Program)
A. INTRODUCTION
Hazardous Waste is a serious safety and health problem that continues to endanger human and
animal life and environmental quality. Unless hazardous waste is properly treated, stored, or
disposed of properly, it will continue to do great harm to our environment. There are an estimated
575,000 existing chemical products, and hundreds of new ones being introduced annually. This
poses a serious problem for exposed workers and their employer. The OSHA HAZWOPER
Standard covers workers employed in cleanup operations at uncontrolled hazardous waste sites and
at EPA-licensed waste treatment, storage, and disposal (TSD) facilities; as well as workers
responding to emergencies involving hazardous materials.
B. SCOPE
LABORDE MARINE, LLC will ensure that the hazards of all wastes used within our facility are
evaluated, and that operational procedures are developed and information concerning their hazards is
transmitted to all employees. This program is intended to address comprehensively the issues of;
evaluating the potential hazards of wastes, communicating information concerning these hazards,
and establishing appropriate operating procedures and protective measures for employees.
C. RESPONSIBILITY
LABORDE MARINE, LLC Safety Officer/HSE Coordinator is solely responsible for all facets of
this program and has full authority to make necessary decisions to ensure success of the program.
The Safety Officer/HSE Coordinator will develop written detailed instructions covering each of the
basic elements in this program, and is the sole person authorized to amend these instructions. The
Safety Officer/HSE Coordinator has authority to halt any operation where there is danger of serious
personal injury. This policy includes respiratory hazards.
D. PURPOSE
LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall develop and implement a written safety and health program for
employees involved in hazardous waste operations. The program shall be designed to identify,
HSE MANUAL
evaluate, and control safety and health hazards, and provide for emergency response for hazardous
waste operations.
E. CONTRACTORS AND SUB-CONTRACTORS
Should LABORDE MARINE, LLC retain contractor or sub-contractor services for work in
hazardous waste operations, LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall inform those contractors, sub-
contractors, or their representatives of any site emergency response procedures and any potential
fire, explosion, health, safety or other hazards of the hazardous waste operation that have been
identified by LABORDE MARINE, LLC
F. PROGRAM AVAILABILITY
1. LABORDE MARINE, LLC’s written safety and health program as well as the emergency
response plan shall be made available to:
a. Contractor or subcontractor or their representative who will be involved with the

hazardous waste operation.
b. All associated employees and their designated representatives.
c. OSHA personnel.
d. Authorized personnel of other Federal, state, or local agencies with regulatory authority
over the site.
G. RESPONSE PLAN
Work sites shall be evaluated in accordance with this program instruction to identify specific site
hazards and to determine the appropriate safety and health control procedures needed to protect
employees from the identified hazards. The following requirements apply:
1. Preliminary evaluation. A preliminary evaluation of a site’s characteristics shall be

performed prior to site entry in order to aid in the selection of appropriate employee
protection methods prior to site entry. Immediately after initial site entry, a more detailed
evaluation of the site’s specific characteristics shall be performed in order to further identify
existing site hazards and to further aid in the selection of the appropriate engineering controls
and personal protective equipment for the tasks to be performed.
2. Hazard identification. All suspected conditions that may pose inhalation or skin absorption
hazards that are immediately dangerous to life or health (IDLH), or other conditions that may
HSE MANUAL
cause death or serious harm, shall be identified during the preliminary survey and evaluated
during the detailed survey. Examples of such hazards include, but are not limited to:
a. Confined space entry.

b. Explosive or flammable situations
c. Visible vapor clouds.
d. Areas where biological or environmental indicators such as dead animals or vegetation
are located.
3. Required information. The following information to the extent available shall be obtained by
LABORDE MARINE, LLC prior to allowing employees to enter a site:
a. Location and approximate size of the site.

b. Description of the response activity and/or the job task to be performed.
c. Duration of the planned employee activity.
d. Site topography and how accessible.
e. Safety/health hazards expected at the site.
f. Pathways for hazardous substance dispersion.
g. Present status and capabilities of emergency response teams that would provide
assistance to hazardous waste clean-up site employees at the time of an emergency.
h. Hazardous substances and health hazards involved or expected at the site, and their
chemical and physical properties.
4. Personal protective equipment. Personal protective equipment (PPE) shall be provided and
used during initial site entry in accordance with the following requirements:
a. Based upon the results of the preliminary site evaluation, an ensemble of PPE shall be
selected and used during initial site entry which will provide protection to a level of
exposure below permissible exposure limits and published exposure levels for known or
suspected hazardous substances and health hazards, and which will provide protection
against other known and suspected hazards identified during the preliminary site
evaluation. If there is no permissible exposure limit or published exposure level,
LABORDE MARINE, LLC may use other published studies and information as a guide
to appropriate personal protective equipment. PPE selected shall meet the requirements
of 29 CFR Part 1910, Subpart I.
b. Performance characteristics of the PPE relative to the requirements and limitations of the
site, the task specific conditions and duration shall also be used when selecting the
appropriate PPE.
c. Positive pressure self-contained breathing apparatus, or positive pressure air-line
respirators equipped with an escape air supply shall be used when chemical exposure
HSE MANUAL
levels present will create a substantial possibility of immediate death, immediate serious
illness or injury, or impair the ability to escape.
d. If positive-pressure self-contained breathing apparatus is not used as part of the entry
ensemble, and if respiratory protection is warranted by the potential hazards identified
during the preliminary site evaluation, an escape self-contained breathing apparatus of at
least five minute’s duration shall be carried by employees during initial site entry.
e. Totally-encapsulating chemical protective suits equivalent to level A protection, shall be
used in conditions where skin absorption of hazardous substance may result in a
substantial possibility of immediate death, immediate serious illness or injury, or impair
the ability to escape.
f. The level of protection shall be increased when additional information or site conditions
show that increased protection is necessary to reduce employee exposures below
permissible exposure limitations. The level may be decreased when additional
information or site conditions show that decreased protection will not result in hazardous
exposures to employees.
g. If the preliminary site evaluation does not produce sufficient information to identify the
hazards or suspected hazards of the site, an ensemble providing protection equivalent to
Level B PPE shall be provided as minimum protection, and direct reading instruments
shall be used as appropriate for identifying IDLH conditions.
h. Once the hazards of the site have been identified, the appropriate PPE shall be selected
and used in accordance with the engineering controls, work practices, and PPE for
employee protection section of this instruction.
i. Totally-encapsulating suits shall protect employees from the particular hazards which are
identified during site characterization and analysis. The suits shall be capable of
maintaining positive air pressure and capable of preventing inward test gas leakage of
more than 0.5 percent.
j. The Personnel protective equipment program of LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall also
be referenced when developing the site specific safety and health plan and shall cover;
1) Selection based on hazards

2) Use and limitations
3) Work mission and duration
4) Maintenance and storage
5) Decontamination and disposal
6) Training and proper fit
7) Evaluation of effectiveness of the program
8) Limitations during temperature extremes, heat stress, and other appropriate medical
considerations.
5. Monitoring. The following monitoring shall be conducted during initial site entry when the
site evaluation produces information that shows the potential for ionizing radiation or IDLH
conditions, or when the site information is not sufficient reasonably to eliminate these
possible conditions:
HSE MANUAL
a. Monitoring with direct reading instruments for hazardous levels of ionizing radiation.
b. Monitoring the air with appropriate direct reading test equipment (i.e., combustible gas
meters, detector tubes) for IDLH and other conditions that may cause death or serious
harm (combustible or explosive atmospheres, oxygen deficiency, toxic substances).
c. Visually observing for signs of actual or potential IDLH or other dangerous conditions.
6. Air monitoring program. An ongoing air monitoring program will be implemented after site
characterization has determined the site is safe for the start-up of operations.
7. Risk identification. Once the presence and concentrations of specific hazardous substances
and health hazards have been established, the risks associated with these substances shall be
identified. Employees who will be working on the site shall be informed of any risks that
have been identified. In situations covered by the Hazard Communication Standard, 29 CFR
1910.1200, training required by that standard will not be duplicated. Risks to be considered
include, but are not limited to:
a. Exposures exceeding the permissible exposure limits and published exposure levels.
b. IDLH concentrations.
c. Potential skin absorption and irritation sources.
d. Potential eye irritation sources.
e. Explosion sensitivity and flammability ranges.
f. Oxygen deficiency.
8. Employee notification. Any information concerning the chemical, physical, and toxicologic
properties of each substance known or expected to be present on site that is available to
LABORDE MARINE, LLC and relevant to the duties an employee is expected to perform
shall be made available to the affected employees prior to the commencement of their work
activities. LABORDE MARINE, LLC may elect to utilize information developed for the
hazard communication standard for this purpose.
9. Site control. Appropriate site control procedures will be implemented to control employee
exposure to hazardous substances before clean-up work begins. Upon completion of a
response, remediation of waste and cleanup will be discussed and plans made with the
operator. Consideration will be given to using third party contractors for this task.
10. Site control program. A site control program for protecting employees which is part of
LABORDE MARINE, LLC’s site safety and health program will be developed during the
planning stages of a hazardous waste clean-up operation and modified as necessary as new
information becomes available.
HSE MANUAL
11. Elements of the site control program. Where these requirements are covered elsewhere they
will not be repeated with just cause. The site control program will, as a minimum, include:
a. A site map.
b. Site work zones.
c. The use of a “buddy system”.
d. Site communications including alerting means for emergencies.
e. The program instructions or safe work practices.
f. Identification of the nearest medical assistance.
H. PROCEDURES FOR EMERGENCY RESPONSE
1. The most senior official on the site who has the responsibility for controlling the operations
at the site, will be in charge of the site-specific Incident Command System (ICS). This
person shall coordinate and control all responders and their communication and shall be
assisted by each senior official for each employer on the site.
2. To the best extend possible, the ICS commander shall identify all hazardous substances or
conditions present and shall address as appropriate site analysis, use of engineering controls,
maximum exposure limits, hazardous substance handling procedure, and use of any new
technologies.
3. Based on the hazards present, the ICS commander will implement the appropriate emergency
operations, and assure that the appropriate PPE is being worn.
4. Employees engaged in emergency response who are exposed to inhalation hazards shall wear
a positive pressure self-contained breathing apparatus while performing emergency response.
Once the ICS commander determines, through use of air monitoring, that a decreased level of
respiratory protection will not result in hazardous exposure, SCBA use may be discontinued
provided that the appropriate respiratory protection for the hazard is available.
5. The ICS commander shall limit personnel at the site, in areas of potential or actual exposure,
to those who are actively performing emergency operations. Operations in hazardous areas
shall be performed using the buddy system in groups of two or more.
6. Back up personnel with the appropriate equipment ready to provide assistance or rescue shall
be standing by. Additionally, qualified basic life support personnel, shall also be standing by
with medical equipment and a means of transportation.
HSE MANUAL
7. A safety officer shall be designated by the ICS commander. The safety officer must be
knowledgeable in the operations at the emergency response site and has specific
responsibility to identify and evaluate hazards provide direction with respect to the safety of
operations for the emergency at hand.
8. The safety officer has the authority to alter, suspend, or terminate activities which he/she
judges to be IDLH and/or to involve an imminent danger condition. The safety officer shall
immediately inform the ICS commander of any actions needed to be taken.
9. The ICS commander shall implement appropriate decontamination procedures once the
emergency operations have terminated.
I. POST-EMERGENCY RESPONSE OPERATIONS
1. Upon completion of the emergency response, if it is determined that it is necessary to remove

hazardous substances, health hazards and materials contaminated with them from the site of
the incident, employees shall have completed the training requirements of the following: 29
CFR 1910.38, 1910.
J. TRAINING
All employees working on site (such as but not limited to equipment operators, general laborers and
others) exposed to hazardous substances, health hazards, or safety hazards and their supervisors and
management responsible for the site shall receive training before they are permitted to engage in
hazardous waste operations that could expose them to hazardous substances, safety, or health
hazards, and they shall receive review training as specified in this paragraph. Employees shall not
be permitted to participate in or supervise field activities until they have been trained to a level
required by their job function and responsibility. Elements to be covered include the following:
1. Names of personnel and alternates responsible for site safety and health.
2. Safety, health and other hazards present on the site.
3. Use of personal protective equipment.
4. Work practices by which the employee can minimize risks from hazards.
HSE MANUAL
5. Safe use of engineering controls and equipment on the site.
6. Medical surveillance requirements, including recognition of symptoms and signs which

might indicate overexposure to hazards.
7. The contents of the site safety and health plan.
8. Initial training requirements for hazardous waste clean-up sites.
Staff
Routine site employees 40 hours initial
24 hours field
8 hours annual refresher
Routine site employees (Minimal exposure) 24 hours initial

Supervisors/Managers of Routine site 40 hours initial
employees
24 hours field
8 hours HAZWASTE
Mgmt.
Routine site employees (minimal exposure) 24 hours initial

8 hours field
8 hours HAZWASTE
Mgmt.
Non-routine site employees 24 hours initial

8 hours field
8 hours HAZWASTE
Mgmt.
8 hours field
Non-routine site employees 24 hours initial

8 hours field
HSE MANUAL
9. Initial training requirements for treatment, storage, and disposal sites.
Staff
General site employees 24 hours initial or equiv.
Emergency Response personnel Trained to a level of competency

Annual refresher
10. Initial training requirements for emergency response staff.
Level 1 - First
responder (awareness Sufficient training or proven experience in
level) specific competencies, annual refresher
Level 2 - First Level 1 competency and 8 hours initial or

responder (operations proven experience in specific competencies
level) annual refresher
Level 3 - HAZMAT 24 hours of level 2 and proven experience in

technician specific competencies, annual refresher
Level 4 - HAZMAT 24 hours of level 3 and proven experience in

specialist specific competencies, annual refresher
Level 5 - On scene 24 hours of level 2 and additional competencies,

commander annual refresher
HSE MANUAL
a. DEFINITIONS
Level 1 – First responder. First responders at the awareness level are individuals who
are likely to witness or discover a hazardous substance release and who have been trained
to initiate an emergency response sequence by notifying the proper authorities of the
release. They would take no further action beyond notifying the authorities of the
release.
Level 2 – First responder. First responders at the operations level are individuals who
respond to release or potential releases of hazardous substances as part of the initial
response to the site for the purpose of protecting nearby persons, property, or the
environment from the effects of the release. They are trained to respond in a defensive
fashion without actually trying to stop the release. Their function is to contain the release
from a safe distance, keep it from spreading, and prevent exposures.
Level 3 – HASMAT Technician. Hazardous materials technicians are individuals who

respond to releases or potential release for the purpose of stopping the release. They
assume a more aggressive role than a first responder at the operations level in that they
will approach the point of release in order to plug, patch or otherwise stop the release of a
hazardous substance.
Level 4 – HAZMAT Specialist. Hazardous materials specialists are individuals who

respond with and provide support to hazardous materials technicians. Their duties
parallel those of the hazardous materials technician, however, those duties require a more
directed or specific knowledge of the various substances they may be called upon to
contain which could require the use of certain type of chemical protective clothing and
equipment. The hazardous materials specialist would also act as the site liaison with
Federal, state, local, and other governmental authorities in regards to site activities.
Level 5 – On-scene Commander. Assumes control of the incident scene beyond the
first-responder awareness level.
11. Qualifications for trainers. Trainers used by LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall be qualified
to instruct employees about the subject matter that is being presented in training. Such
trainers shall have satisfactorily completed a training program for teaching the subjects they
are exposed to teach, or they shall have the academic credentials and instructional experience
necessary for teaching the subjects. Instructors shall demonstrate competent instructional
skills and knowledge of the applicable subject matter.
HSE MANUAL
12. Training certification. Employees and supervisors that have received and successfully
completed the training and field experience shall be certified by their instructor or the head
instructor and trained supervisor as having successfully completed the necessary training. A
written certificate shall be given to each person so certified. Any person who has not been so
certified or who does not meet the requirements for entering the site shall be prohibited from
engaging in hazardous waste operations.
13. Emergency response. Employees who are engaged in responding to hazardous emergency
situations at hazardous waste clean-up sites that may expose them to hazardous substances
shall be trained in how to respond to such expected emergencies.
14. Refresher training. Employees, managers and supervisors will receive eight hours of
refresher training annually (any critique of incidents that have occurred in the past year that
can serve as training examples of related work, and other relevant topics).
15. Equivalent training. Equivalent training includes any academic training or the training that
existing employees might have already received from actual hazardous waste site work
experience. Employee’s who can show by documentation or certification that their work
experience and/or training has resulted in training equivalent to that training required for a 40
hour course will not be required to attend formal training. However, certified employee or
employees with equivalent training new to a site shall receive appropriate, site specific
training before site entry and have appropriate supervised field experience at the new site.
K. MEDICAL SURVEILLANCE
LABORDE MARINE, LLC, when engaged in hazardous waste operations, will institute a medical
surveillance program in accordance with the following:
1. Employees covered. The medical surveillance program shall be instituted by LABORDE

MARINE, LLC for the following employees:
a. All employees who are or may be exposed to hazardous substances or health hazards at
or above the permissible exposure limits.
b. All employees who wear a respirator for 30 days or more a year or as required by 29 CFR
1910.134.
c. All employees who are injured, become ill or develop sins or symptoms due to possible
overexposure involving hazardous substances or health hazards from an emergency
response or hazardous waste operation.
d. Any members of a HAZMAT team.
HSE MANUAL
2. Frequency. Medical examinations and consultations shall be made available by LABORDE
MARINE, LLC to each employee authorized on the following schedules.
a. Prior to assignment.
b. At least once every twelve months for each employee covered unless the attending
physician believes a longer interval (not greater than biannually) is appropriate.
c. At termination of employment or reassignment to an area where the employee would not
be covered if the employee has not had an examination within the last six months.
d. As soon as possible upon notification by an employee that the employee has developed
signs or symptoms indicating possible overexposure to hazardous substances or health
hazards, or that the employee has been injured or exposed above the permissible exposure
limits or published exposure levels in an emergency situation.
e. At more frequent times, if the examining physician determines that an increased
frequency of examination is medically necessary.
3. Content of medical examinations and consultations.
a. The content of medical examinations or consultations made available to employees will

be determined by the attending physician. Medical examinations will include a medical
and work history (or updated history if one is in the employee’s file) with special
emphasis on symptoms related to the handling of hazardous substances and health
hazards, and to fitness for duty including the ability to wear any required PPE under
conditions (i.e., temperature extremes) that may be expected at the work site.
4. Examination by a physician and costs. All medical examinations and procedures performed
by or contracted through LABORDE MARINE, LLC will be performed by or under the
supervision of a licensed physician, preferable one knowledgeable in occupational medicine,
and shall be provided without cost to the employee, without loss of pay, and at a reasonable
time and place.
5. Information provided to the physician. LABORDE MARINE, LLC will provide one copy
of 29 CFR 1910.120 any appendices to the attending physician, and in addition the following
for each employee:
a. A description of the employee’s duties as they relate to the employee’s exposures.

b. The employee’s exposure levels or anticipated exposure levels.
c. A description of any personal protective equipment used or to be used.
d. Information from previous medical examinations of the employee which is not readily
available to the examining physician.
HSE MANUAL
6. Physician’s written opinion. LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall obtain and furnish the
employee with a copy of a written opinion from the attending physician containing the
following:
a. The physician’s opinion as to whether the employee has any detected medical conditions,
which would place the employee at increased risk of material impairment of the
employee’s health from work in hazardous waste operations or emergency response, or
from respirator use.
b. The physician’s recommended limitations upon the employee’s assigned work.
c. The results of the medical examination and tests if requested by the employee.
d. A statement that the employee has been informed by the physician of the results of the
medical examination and any medical conditions which require further examination or
treatment.
e. The written opinion obtained by LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall not reveal specific
findings or diagnoses related to occupational exposures.
7. Recordkeeping. An accurate record of the medical surveillance shall be retained. This

record shall be retained for the period specified and meet the criteria of 29 CFR 1910.120,
and will include at least the following information:
a. The name and social security number of the employee.

b. Physician’s written opinions, recommended limitations, and results of examinations and
tests.
c. Any employee medical complaints related to exposure to hazardous substances.
d. A copy of the information provided to the examining physician by LABORDE
MARINE, LLC.
L. ENGINEERING CONTROLS, WORK PRACTICES, AND PERSONAL PROTECTIVE

EQUIPMENT FOR EMPLOYEE PROTECTION
LABORDE MARINE, LLC will ensure that engineering controls, work practices, personal
protective equipment, or a combination of these will be implemented in accordance with 29 CFR
1910.120. Engineering controls and work practices will be instituted to reduce and maintain
employee exposure to or below the permissible exposure limits, except to the extent that such
controls and practices are not feasible.
M. DEFINITIONS
Buddy system means a system of organizing employees into work groups in such a manner that
each employee of the work group is designated to be observed by at least one other employee in the
HSE MANUAL
work group. The purpose of the buddy system is to provide rapid assistance to employees in the
event of an emergency.
Clean-up operation means an operation where hazardous substances are removed, contained,
incinerated, neutralized, stabilized, cleared-up, or in any other manner processed or handled with the
ultimate goal of making the site safer for people or the environment.
Decontamination means the removal of hazardous substances from employees and their equipment
to the extent necessary to preclude the occurrence of foreseeable adverse health affects.
Emergency response corresponding to emergencies means a response effort by employees from

outside the immediate release area or by other designated responders (i.e., mutual-aid groups, local
fire departments, etc.) to an occurrence which results, or is likely to result, in an uncontrolled release
of a hazardous substance. Responses to incidental releases of hazardous substances where the
substance can be absorbed, neutralized, or otherwise controlled at the time of release by employees
in the immediate release area, or by maintenance personnel are not considered to be emergency
responses within the scope of this standard. Responses to releases of hazardous substances where
there is not potential safety or health hazard (i.e., fire, explosion, or chemical exposure) are not
considered to by emergency responses.
Facility means (A) any building, structure, installation, equipment, pipe or pipeline (including any
pipe into a sewer or publicly owned treatment works), well, pit, pond, lagoon, impoundment, ditch,
storage container, motor vehicle, rolling stock, or aircraft, or (B) any site or area where a hazardous
substance has been deposited, stored, disposed of, or place, or otherwise come to be located, but
does not include any consumer product in consumer use or any water-borne vessel.
Hazardous materials response (HAZMAT) team means an organized group of employee,

designated by LABORDE MARINE, LLC who are expected to perform work to handle and control
actual or potential leaks or spills of hazardous substances requiring possible close approach to the
substance. The team members perform responses to releases or potential releases of hazardous
substances for the purpose of control or stabilization of the incident. A HAZMAT team is not a fire
brigade nor is a typical fire brigade a HAZMAT team. A HAZMAT team however, may be a
separate component of a fire brigade or fire department.
Hazardous substance means any substance designated or listed under paragraphs (A) through (D)
of this definition, exposure to which results or may result in adverse affects on the health or safety of
employees:
HSE MANUAL
A. Any substance defined under section 101(14) of CERCLA.

B. Any biological agent and other disease-causing agent which after release into the
environment and upon exposure, ingestion, inhalation, or assimilation into any person,
either directly from the environment or indirectly by ingestion through food chains, will
or may reasonably be anticipated to cause death, disease, behavioral abnormalities,
cancer, genetic mutation, physiological malfunctions (including malfunctions in
reproduction) or physical deformations in such persons or their offspring.
C. Any substance listed by the U.S. Department of Transportation as hazardous materials
under 49 CFR 172.101 and appendices.
D. Hazardous waste as herein defined.
Hazardous waste means—
A. Waste or combination, as defined in 40 CFR 261.3.

B. Substances defined as hazardous wastes in 49 CFR 171.8
Hazardous waste operation means any operation conducted within the scope of 29 CFR 1910.120.
Hazardous waste site or Site means any facility or location within the scope of 29 CFR 1910.120.
Health hazard means a chemical, mixture of chemicals or a pathogen for which there is a
statistically significant evidence based on at least one study conducted in accordance with
established scientific principles that acute or chronic health effects may occur in exposed employees.
The term “health hazard” includes chemicals which are carcinogens, toxic or highly toxic agents,
reproductive toxins, irritants, corrosives, sensitizers, heptaotoxins, nephrotoxins, neurotoxins, agents
which act on the hematopoietic system, and agents which damage the lungs, skin, eyes, or mucous
membranes. It also includes stress due to temperature extremes. Further definition of the terms used
above can be found in appendix A to 29 CFR 1910.1200.
IDLH or Immediately dangerous to life or health means an atmospheric concentration of any

toxic, corrosive or asphyxiant substance that poses an immediate threat to life or would cause
irreversible or delayed adverse health effects or would interfere with an individual’s ability to escape
from a dangerous atmosphere.
HSE MANUAL
Oxygen deficiency means that concentration of oxygen by volume below which atmosphere
supplying respiratory protection must be provided. It exists in atmospheres where the percentage of
oxygen by volume is less than 19.5 percent oxygen.
Permissible exposure limit means the exposure, inhalation or dermal permissible exposure limit
specified in 29 CFR part 1910 (Subparts G and Z).
Published exposure level means the exposure limits published in “NIOSH Recommendations for
Occupational Health Standards” dated 1986 incorporated by reference, or if none is specified, the
exposure limits published in the standards specified by the American Conference of Governmental
Industrial Hygienists in their publication “Threshold Limit Values and Biological Exposure Indices
for 1987-88” dated 1987 incorporated by reference.
Post emergency response means that portion of an emergency response performed after the
immediate threat of a release has been stabilized or eliminated and clean-up of the site has begun. If
post emergency response is performed by an employer’s own employees who were part of the initial
emergency response, it is considered to be part of the initial response and not post emergency
response. However, if a group of an employer’s own employees, separate from the group providing
initial response, performs the clean-up operation, then the separate group of employees would be
considered to be performing post-emergency response.
Qualified person means a person with specific training, knowledge and experience in the area for
which the person has the responsibility and the authority to control
Site safety and health supervisor (or official) means the individual located on a hazardous waste
site who is responsible to LABORDE MARINE, LLC and has the authority and knowledge
necessary to implement the site safety and health plan and verify compliance with applicable safety
and health requirements.
Small quantity generator means a generator of hazardous wastes who in any calendar month
generates no more than 1,000 kilograms (2,205 pounds) of hazardous waste in that month.
Uncontrolled hazardous waste site means an area identified as an uncontrolled hazardous waste
site by a governmental body, whether Federal, state, local or other where an accumulation of
hazardous substances creates a threat to the health and safety of individuals or the environment or
both. Some sites are found on public lands such as those created by former municipal, county or
state landfills where illegal or poorly managed waste disposal has taken place. Other sites are found
HSE MANUAL
on private property, often belonging to generators or former generators of hazardous substance
wastes. Examples of such sites include, but are not limited to, surface impoundments, landfills,
dumps, and tank or drum farms. Normal operations at TSD sites are not covered by this definition.
HSE MANUAL
Hydrogen 0 Sept. 1, 2011 46.0
Sulfide Prepared By: Approved By: Page:
H2S Safety MRC Page 1 of 10
HYDROGEN SULFIDE H2S
A. INTRODUCTION
Effective implementation of this program requires support from all levels of management. This
program will be communicated to all personnel that are affected by it. It encompasses the total
workplace, regardless of the number of workers employed or the number of work shifts. It is
designed to establish clear goals and objectives.
B. SCOPE/OVERVIEW
Hydrogen Sulfide is a colorless gas possessing the disagreeable odor associated with rotten eggs. It
is occasionally encountered naturally as the result of decay of organic waste. Sewage and SWOmp
water, for example, typically contain dissolved hydrogen sulfide. However, in our work
environment, the oil and gas industry, it can be found in drilling operations, drilling fluids, tank
gauging, field maintenance, and refining operations.
C. HEALTH EFFECTS
Continued inhalation in an atmosphere containing hydrogen sulfide causes dizziness and the onset of
a headache. One deep breath of pure hydrogen sulfide is fatal; breathing a concentration of 600 ppm
by volume is fatal within 20 minutes. Since it possesses such a disagreeable odor, most people are
initially aware of its presence. However, hydrogen sulfide also deadens the sense of smell rapidly.
Thus individuals who remain in an atmosphere containing hydrogen sulfide become oblivious to its
presence and may inhale dangerous or lethal amounts unknowingly. Lack of oxygen to the brain
also destroys the phrenic nerve which controls the lungs that control our breathing. It also causes
severe burning and irritation of the eyes.
D. OSHA/NIOSH OVERVIEW
Hydrogen Sulfide is available industrially, mainly as a liquid, in containers. It is primarily used in

the chemical industry to produce other sulfur-containing compounds, by hydrogen sulfide is also
used in the metallurgical industry. In the workplace, OSHA regulates the exposure of employees to
hydrogen sulfide. NIOSH stipulates a permissible exposure limit of 10 ppm by volume of hydrogen
sulfide without personal protective equipment.
HSE MANUAL
E. DOT OVERVIEW
The Department of Transportation regulates Hydrogen Sulfide as a poisonous gas. Containers are
labeled POISON GAS and FLAMMABLE GAS, and their transport vehicles are similarly placarded.
F. NFPA OVERVIEW
Description: Colorless gas; offensive strong odor similar to rotten eggs.

Fire and Explosion Hazard: Flammable gas. Forms explosive mixtures with air.
Flammable Range: 4.3% and 45%.
Ignition Range: 500 degrees
Vapor Density: 1.2, (vapors are heavier than air) (air = 1.0) will seek lower areas.
Boiling Point: -76 degrees.
Freezing Point: -117 degrees
Chemical Abstract Service (CAS) Number: 7783-06-4.
G. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
LABORDE MARINE, LLC will establish Hydrogen Sulfide operational procedures through the
use of this document.
1. Facility Evaluation. This employer shall evaluate our facility(s) or host employer facilities to
determine if any work area meets the criteria for designation as a Hydrogen Sulfide Hazard
Area.
H. PERMIT-REQUIRED CONFINED SPACE PROGRAM
This employer will implement our confined space program when performing work in areas
designated as a confined space. The permit-required confined space program will conform to the
requirements of 29 CFR 1910.146. This employer shall:
1. Implement the measures necessary to prevent unauthorized entry.

HSE MANUAL
2. Identify and evaluate the hazards of permit spaces before employees enter them.
3. Pre-Entry requirements. Develop and implement the means, procedures, and practices
necessary for safe permit space entry operations, including, but not limited to, the following:


external hazard.
e. Verify that conditions in the permit space are acceptable for entry throughout the duration
f. Develop and utilize checklists based on this standard practice instruction and 29 CFR
1910.146.
4. Equipment requirements. Provide the following equipment at no cost to employees, maintain

that equipment properly, and ensure that employees are trained in the proper use of the
equipment.
a. Testing and monitoring equipment needed to determine if hazardous conditions exist or

to verify that they do not exist.
b. Ventilating equipment needed to obtain acceptable air quality entry conditions.
c. Communications equipment necessary for communication between personnel involved in

the entry operation.
d. Personal protective equipment insofar as feasible engineering and work practice controls
do not adequately protect employees.
e. Lighting equipment needed to enable employees to see well enough to work safely and to
exit the space quickly in an emergency.
HSE MANUAL
f. Barriers and shields are required to protect workers from pedestrian and vehicular traffic.
g. Ladders, needed for safe ingress and egress by authorized entrants.
h. Rescue, Retrieval, and Emergency equipment needed to extract or treat injured personnel,
except to the extent that the equipment and/or service is provided by rescue services that
are immediately available.
i. Any other equipment necessary for safe entry into and rescue from permitted spaces at
our facility.
I. PROCEDURES FOR ATMOSPHERIC TESTING
Atmospheric testing for Hydrogen Sulfide Hazard Areas is required for two distinct purposes:
Evaluation of the hazards of the work are and verification that acceptable entry conditions for entry
into that area exist.
Detection of H2S will be accomplished by either personal or area monitors which will alarm when
the PEL exceeds the preset level of 10 PPM.
1. Evaluation testing. LABORDE MARINE, LLC will ensure that the atmosphere is analyzed
using equipment of sufficient sensitivity and specificity to identify and evaluate any
hazardous atmospheres that may exist or arise. Evaluation and interpretation of these data,
and development of the entry procedure, will be done by, or reviewed by a competent person
based on evaluation of all serious hazards. The internal atmosphere will be tested, with a
calibrated direct-reading instrument, for the following conditions in the order given:
 Oxygen content (19.5% - 23.5%) OSHA Mandated

 Flammable gases and vapors OSHA Mandated
 Potential toxic air contaminants OSHA Mandated
 Airborne combustible dusts Site Specific
2. Verification testing. The atmosphere of a work area designated as a permit space which may
contain a hazardous atmosphere will be tested for residues of all contaminants identified by
evaluation testing using permit specified equipment to determine that residual concentrations
at the time of testing and entry are within the range of acceptable entry conditions. Results of
testing (i.e., actual concentration, etc.) will be recorded on the permit in the space provided
HSE MANUAL
adjacent to the stipulated acceptable entry condition. The atmosphere will be verified, wit a
calibrated direct-reading instrument, for the following conditions in the order given:

3. Duration of testing. Measurement of values for each atmospheric parameter will be made for
at least the minimum response time of the test instrument specified by the manufacturer.
4. Testing stratified atmospheres. When monitoring for entries involving a descent into
atmospheres that may be stratified, the atmospheric envelope will be tested a distance of
approximately 4 feet (1.22 m) in the direction of travel and to each side. If a sampling probe
is used, the entrant’s rate of progress will be slowed to accommodate the sampling speed and
detector response. The stratified atmosphere will be tested, with a calibrated direct-reading

J. TRAINING
1. Types of training. LABORDE MARINE, LLC will determine whether training required for
specific jobs will be conducted in a classroom or on-the-job. The degree of training provided
shall be determined by the complexity of the job and the Hydrogen Sulfide exposure hazards
associated with the individual job.
a. Initial Training. Prior to job assignment, LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall provide
training to ensure that the hazards with Hydrogen Sulfide are understood by employees
and that the knowledge, skills and personal protective equipment required by employees.
The training shall as a minimum include the following:

HSE MANUAL
 Each authorized employee shall receive training in the recognition of applicable
hazards involved with the particular job and job site, as well as the methods and
means necessary for safe work.
 The specific nature of the operation which could result in exposure to Hydrogen
Sulfide.
 The purpose, proper selection, fitting, use and limitation of personal protective
equipment (PPE).
 The adverse health effects associated with excessive exposure to Hydrogen Sulfide.
 The engineering controls and work practices associated with the employee’s job
assignment, including training of employees to follow relevant good work practices.
 The contents of any compliance plan in effect.
b. Refresher Training. Scheduled refresher training will be conducted on an annual basis.
K. RETRAINING
1. Retraining shall be provided for all affected employees as a minimum under the following
conditions:
a. Whenever there is a change in job assignments.

b. Whenever there is a change in personal protective equipment.
c. Whenever there is a change in equipment that presents a new hazard.
d. Whenever there is a change in processes that presents a new hazard.
e. Whenever their work takes them into hazardous areas.
f. Whenever there is a change in Hydrogen Sulfide safety procedures.
g. Whenever safety procedure fails resulting in a near-miss, illness, or injury.
2. Additional retraining. Additional retraining shall also be conducted whenever a periodic

inspection reveals, or whenever this employer has reason to believe, that there are deviations
from or inadequacies in the employee’s knowledge of known hazards, or use of equipment or
procedures.
3. The retraining shall reestablish employee proficiency and introduce new equipment, or
revised control methods and procedures, as necessary.
4. Certification. LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall certify that employee training has been
accomplished and is being kept up to date. The certification shall contain a synopsis of the
training conducted, each employee’s name, and dates of training.
HSE MANUAL
L. WORK OPERATIONS
1. Work operations in which Hydrogen Sulfide may be encountered involve welding, burning,
cutting, brazing, grinding, and abrasive blasting, and general pipe fitting work.
2. Employee crew size will vary and employee job responsibilities will be that of their craft as
stated in LABORDE MARINE, LLC’S policy manual. Specific additional responsibilities
will be:
a. HSE Director
 Monitors procedure to ensure compliance with this work practice.
b. Master
 Ensures that the initial determination for potential Hydrogen Sulfide or toxic
exposure has been accomplished before work begins.
 Supervises the safe performance of work in accordance with this and other related
work practices.
 Assigns jobs only to qualified employees.
3. Employees
 Use the protective and safety equipment as assigned and directed.

 Abide by the requirements of this and site-specific work practices.
M. MONITORING AND MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES
1. Eight Hour Time Weighted Average (TWA) Evaluations. Where possible 8hr TWA’s will
be taken so that the average eight-hour exposure is based on a single eight-hour sample. Air
samples will be taken in the employee’s breathing zone and by qualified personnel. The
PEL/TWA for acceptable and safe working environmental should not exceed 10 PPM
2. Ceiling Evaluations. Where possible, measurements to determine employee ceiling exposure

will be taken during periods of maximum expected airborne concentrations of hydrogen
Sulfide. Each measurement will consist of a fifteen (15) minute sample of series of
consecutive samples totaling fifteen (15) minutes. Air samples will be taken in the
employee’s breathing zone and by qualified personnel.
HSE MANUAL
3. Peak and Above Ceiling Evaluations. Measurements to determine employee peak exposure
will be taken during periods of maximum expected airborne concentrations of Hydrogen
Sulfide. Each measurement will consist of a ten (10) minute sample or series of consecutive
samples totaling ten (10) minutes. A minimum of three measurements will be taken on one
work shift and the highest of all measurements taken will be assumed to be an estimate of the
employee’s exposure. Air samples will be taken in the employee’s breathing zone and by
qualified personnel.
4. Sampling Methods. Sampling and analysis will be conducted in accordance with acceptable
industrial hygiene practices. Sampling data will be maintained for the duration of
employment of the affected employee plus 30 years.
5. Whenever alarms sound, stop work immediately and report to pre-established safe haven
areas for roll call. Never re-enter area without proper PPE
N. SPILL AND LEAK PROCEDURES
Spill and leak procedures will largely depend on the capability and emergency procedures of the host
employer. This employer will coordinate with the host employer to ensure adequate procedures are
in-place protection of all employees’ (host and contractor) and the surrounding area.
1. Persons not wearing protective equipment and clothing will be restricted from areas of spills
or leaks until cleanup has been completed.
2. Emergency Containment. Hydrogen Sulfide exposure can be fatal. Only authorized and
trained emergency response personnel should attempt containment. If you are not trained in
containment of Hydrogen Sulfide Gas, evacuate the area in accordance with established
procedures. If Hydrogen Sulfide is spilled or leaked the following steps as a minimum
should be taken.
a. Remove all ignition sources.

b. Ventilate the area of the spill or leak to disperse gas.
c. If in gaseous form, stop flow of gas. If source of leak is a cylinder and the leak cannot be
stopped in place, remove the leaking cylinder to a safe place in the open air and repair the
leak to allow the cylinder to empty.
d. If in a liquid form, allow to vaporize.
HSE MANUAL
O. EMERGENCY FIRST AID PROCEDURES
In the event of an emergency, institute first aid procedures and send for first aid or medical
assistance in accordance with local procedures.
1. Eye Exposure: Was immediately with large amounts of water. Lifting the lower and upper
lids occasionally, get medical attention as soon as possible.
2. Skin Exposure: Immediately flush with copious amounts of water. Remove any clothing
contaminated, and flush exposed skin areas, get medical attention as soon as possible.
3. Respiratory Exposure: Get the victim to open, fresh air immediately. If breathing has
stopped, perform CPR. Keep the victim warm and at rest. Get medical attention as soon as
possible.
4. Rescue Considerations: Don’t become a second victim – Put on SCBA then move the
affected person from the hazardous area. If the exposed person has been overcome, initiate
local emergency notification procedures. Understand the facility’s emergency rescue
procedures and know the locations of rescue equipment before the need arises.
P. PROTECTIVE CLOTHING AND PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE)
Where engineering controls, administrative controls, and job hazard analyses do not eliminate all job
hazards, employees will (where appropriate) wear personal protective equipment (PPE).
1. These include items such as caps, hair nets, face shields, safety goggles, glasses, hearing
protection, foot guards, gloves, NIOSH approved supplied air respirator (SAR, SCBA) etc.
Supervisors will ensure that equipment selected will meet the following requirements.
a. Any respirator used in an H2S environment MUST be a FULL face piece mask and be
positive pressure/pressure demand type NIOSH certified SCBA or airline respirator with
an escape SCBA.
b. It will be appropriate for the particular hazard.
c. It will be maintained in good condition.
d. It will be properly stored when not in use, to prevent damage or loss
e. It will be kept clean, fully functional and sanitary.
HSE MANUAL
2. Hazards associated with the wearing of protective clothing, PPE personal clothing and
jewelry. Protective clothing and PPE can present additional safety hazards. Supervisors will
ensure that workers wear appropriate clothing and PPE. The following items will be
monitored so as not to create additional hazards.
a. Personal clothing and jewelry. Clothing or jewelry that could become entangled in tools,
equipment or machinery or of an excessively flammable nature will be prohibited.
3. Documentation. PPE requirements will be documented on a “Protective Measure

Determination” form and properly filed.
Q. CONTINGENCY PLANS
These plans should be available and should establish precautionary measures, safety equipment,
emergency procedure, responsibilities and duties
All personnel should become familiar with these plans and sign off that they have read and
understand the overall plan. In addition everyone should also be familiar with all related safety
equipment and its use.
HSE MANUAL
NORM 0 Sept. 1, 2011 47.0
NORM
(NATURALLY OCCURRING RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL)
A. WHAT IS NORM?
1. Naturally Occurring Radioactive Material (NORM) is best described as radioactive material

(elements) existing in our natural environment. “Technological Enhanced Natural
Radioactive Material” (TENORM) is a more descriptive term for NORM as it occurs in oil
and gas production. This description simply defines the existence of NORM in our
production equipment as the result of applied technologies. Technological processes provide
for the transport of radioactive material from their existence beneath the Earth to the surface
where it collects in production equipment. For intensive purposes, the terms are to be
considered synonymous.
2. The majority of elements which create NORM are commonly found in oil and gas production
and processing operations such as production piping separators, treaters, frac-tanks and are
associated with the elements Uranium and/or Thorium. These unstable elements are in a
constant state of radioactive decay as they emit portions of the nucleus in the form of energy.
The energy given off is normally in the form of alpha, beta or gamma radiation.
a. Alpha radiation is a low energy, slow moving particulate form of radiation which travels
up to +/- 4 in. and can be shielded with a piece of paper or skin. Alpha radiation poses
little external hazard. However, it can pose a significant internal hazard to the body.
b. Beta radiation has less mass but higher energy particle radiation. Beta rays travel farther
(+/- 12 feet) and require greater shielding, such as a sheet of aluminum or polyethylene.
Beta radiation poses some external hazard to the body in addition to a significant internal
hazard.
c. Gamma radiation is a higher wave form energy and is usually associated with a Beta
emission. It requires large amounts of shielding (usually lead) to reduce intensity. X-ray
is a common form of this radiation. Gamma radiation is highly penetrating and is both an
external and internal hazard to the body.
All radiation which poses an internal personal hazard does so through inhalation or ingestion.
Personal exposure can be greatly reduced or eliminated through good hygiene.
3. The presence of NORM in producing formations cannot be accurately predicted. If NORM

is present in producing formations, it is normally transported to the surface with produced
liquids (primarily water) and to a lesser extent, with solids (primarily sand). The NORM
HSE MANUAL
NORM 0 Sept. 1, 2011 47.0
materials transported with liquids plate out and collect on the walls of production tubing and
hardware in the form of barium or strontium sulfate (scale).
4. The exception to this Radon gas which may be dissolved in produced water and released at
atmospheric pressure. However, since Radon is a gas, it usually follows the gas production
stream. Thus, Radon daughters (predominantly Lead-210) may accumulate in gas processing
equipment as thin, often detectable films on the interior surfaces of vessels, pumps, etc.
Regardless of the method of transportation as the materials accumulate, the ability to detect
their presence increases.
5. If NORM is detected or known to exist, work procedures and processes must adhere to
Federal regulations governing NORM. Although it is unlikely radiation levels significant
enough to harm personnel will be encountered, normal precautions must be taken to reduce
or eliminate exposure to personnel and the environment.
B. GENERAL POLICY
It is the policy of LABORDE MARINE, LLC to identify the presence of NORM in its operations
and control the exposure to company personnel as well as the environment.
LABORDE MARINE, LLC will control potential exposure to NORM through identification,
employee training, and safe handling procedures. Equipment and facilities with elevated
radioactivity will be identified prior to performing any work and LABORDE MARINE, LLC
personnel to NORM environments. Site identification, safe practice provisions, storage and
handling guidelines detailed in the remainder of this section apply to all facilities and assets where
an elevated level of radioactivity has been exhibited. The waste, property and equipment disposition
provisions are applicable where a radioactive level in excess of governmental mandated ceilings or
acceptable industry standards has been detected.
C. RESPONSIBILITIES
1. LABORDE MARINE, LLC plan administrator, HSE Director, has the responsibility of
insuring adherence to LABORDE MARINE, LLC NORM policy as well as the following.
2. Provide training covering personal protective equipment requirements (PPE), safety

precautions and handling procedures to all employees working with potential NORM tainted
equipment, material, sands and/or solids.
HSE MANUAL
NORM 0 Sept. 1, 2011 47.0
3. Ensure employees performing equipment repair (on-site, off-site) are advised of the potential
of NORM and that PPE requirements, safety precautions and handling procedures are being
followed.
4. Ensure proper packaging, shipping papers, labels, and placards are provided prior to transport
of NORM containing equipment, materials and sands and/or soils.
5. Ensure that a survey of tubing, equipment, materials, sands and/or soils is performed to
determine the presence of NORM prior to releasing for repair or disposal.
D. PERSONAL SAFETY
Measurements of NORM levels in the majority of producing operations to date have been well
below the standards for both public health and employee exposure protection. However, the purpose
of this guideline is to minimize employee exposure to the low levels of radioactivity in the
equipment where NORM does exist.
3. Basic Radiation Exposure Methods
a. External (penetration through the skin) Gamma radiation exposure.
 Contaminated equipment
 Contaminated soil
b. Internal (Alpha, Beta and Gamma) radiation exposure.
 Inhalation of Radon or NORM particles

 Ingestion of NORM radio-nuclides
2. Basic NORM Exposure Precautions
The following guidelines are applicable to all activities associated with exposure or potential
exposure to NORM and should be followed at all times.
a. Advise employees and contractors of the presence of NORM and any precautionary
guidelines to be followed.
HSE MANUAL
NORM 0 Sept. 1, 2011 47.0
b. Direct skin contact with NORM containing scale and solids will be avoided to the
maximum extent reasonably possible.
c. Eating, drinking, smoking and chewing will not be allowed in the immediate area where
work is being performed on contaminated equipment or contaminated soils are being
handled.
d. Personnel will thoroughly was their hands and face after working on or around
contaminated equipment and prior to eating, drinking, smoking, or chewing.
e. NORM containing scale and solids will be handled in the wet state to minimize airborne
particles.
f. The number of personnel in the work area will be kept to an absolute minimum.
g. Activities which could potentially create airborne NORM particles such as grinding,
drilling, polishing, welding or brazing will require the use of a NIOSH approved high
efficiency particulate respirator suitable for low level radio nuclides. NOTE: THE USE
OF A RESPIRATOR REQUIRES SPECIALIZED TRAINING AND PHYSICAL
EXAMINATIONS.
h. Suitable disposable coveralls, slicker suits, etc. shall be worn.
i. Impervious gloves and rubber boots shall be worn.
j. Work will be conducted in well ventilated areas. If natural ventilation is not sufficient,
forced ventilation will be installed to remove gases and airborne particulate.
k. Plastic ground covers shall be used whenever possible to contain contaminates which
may fall to the ground.
l. Additional radiation monitoring shall be conducted during the time work on
contaminated equipment is being performed.
m. Protective gloves, clothing, apparatus, rags, etc., should be decontaminated after use. If
decontamination is not possible, those articles should be placed in properly labeled drums
for subsequent disposal.
n. Personnel shall be monitored following completion of work.
2. NORM Surveys
A competent person by LABORDE MARINE, LLC plan administrator shall perform

NORM surveys for all suspected NORM contaminated materials.
Monitoring guidelines will be as follows:
a. Maximum allowable dose rate to an individual is 1250 mR/calendar quarter.

Approximately 2.4 mR/hour for an 8 hour shift in a 40 hour week.
b. Exposure monitoring is required for a dose exceeding 350 mR/calendar quarter.
Approximately 0.6 mR/hour an hour for an 8 hour shift.
c. OSHA regulates exposures to airborne radioactive material by reference to the Nuclear
Regulatory Commission regulations
HSE MANUAL
NORM 0 Sept. 1, 2011 47.0
3. Controlling and Minimizing Exposure
a. Measure all sources and levels of radiation.

b. Minimize time spent in radiation areas.
c. Maximize the distance between you and source.
d. Shields are to be used to block and reduce radiation levels.
E. TRAINING
4. Awareness Level Training
a. All employees engaged in work assignments where the potential for NORM
accumulation exists, will be trained to an awareness level on the subject of NORM.
Training will be done prior to exposure and annually thereafter.
b. Areas of training are as follows:
 Recognition of potential NORM containing equipment and material

 Health effects associated with exposure to low level radiation
 Methods by which NORM may enter the body
 Safety precautions and personal protective equipment
 Handling procedures for dismantling equipment, vessel and tank entry, scale removal,
equipment repair, pulling and rattling tubing, etc.
c. Records of persons receiving Awareness Level Training will be documented and

maintained in the training data base.
HSE MANUAL
Occupational 0 Sept. 1, 2011 48.0
Noise& Hearing Prepared By: Approved By: Page:
Conservation Safety MRC Page 1 of 5
OCCUPATIONAL NOISE & HEARING CONSERVATION

OSHA – 29 CFR 1910.95
A. INTRODUCTION
Approximately 16 million workers are exposed to excessive on-the-job noise levels on an annual
basis. In addition to causing hearing loss by destroying the inner ear, noise can put stress on other
parts of the body causing fatigue and unnecessary psychological stress. This preventable added
burden to the body can result in increased injury rates. This poses a serious problem for exposed
workers and their employer. The OSHA Occupational Noise Exposure Standard establishes uniform
requirements to make sure that the noise hazards associated with all U.S. workplaces are evaluated,
and that the hazards associated with high noise are transmitted to all affected workers so that
mitigation measures can be instituted.
The development and maintenance of our written noise exposure program will be reviewed on an
annual basis and updated as changes in company occur, or as changes are noted to 29 CFR 1910.95.
Effective implementation of this program requires support from all levels of management within this
company. This written program will be communicated to all personnel. It encompasses the total
workplace, regardless of the number of workers employed or the number of work shifts. It is
designed to establish clear goals and objectives.
B. HEARING CONSERVATION PROGRAM
LABORDE MARINE, LLC is dedicated to providing a safe and healthful working environment.
We believe that safety in all operations and activities is of primary importance. Ultimately however,
it is the employee’s responsibility to seek assistance when required, and to carry out the job in a safe
manner. LABORDE MARINE, LLC will administer a continuing, effective hearing conservation
program, as described in the following paragraphs, whenever employee noise exposures equal or
exceed an 8 hour time weighted average sound level (TWA) of 85 decibels measured on the A scale
(slow response) or, equivalently, a dose of fifty percent. For purposes of the hearing conservation
program, employee noise exposures will be computed without regard to any attenuation provided by
the use of personal protective equipment.
1. An 8 hour time weighted average of 85 decibels or a dose of fifty percent will also be
referred to as the action level.
2. Monitoring
HSE MANUAL
When information indicates that any employee’s exposure may equal or exceed an 8 hour
time weighted average of 85 decibels, this company will implement this monitoring program.
a. LABORDE MARINE, LLC will conduct sampling and will be designed to identify
employees for inclusion in the hearing conservation program and to enable the proper
selection of hearing protectors.
b. Where circumstances such as high worker mobility, significant variations in sound level,
or a significant component of impulse noise make area monitoring generally
inappropriate, this company will use representative personal sampling to comply with the
monitoring requirements of this instruction unless it can be shown that area sampling
produces equivalent results.
c. All continuous, intermittent and impulsive sound levels from 80 decibels to 130 decibels
will be integrated into the noise measurements.
1) Instruments used to measure employee noise exposure will have been calibrated to
ensure measurement accuracy.
d. Monitoring will be repeated whenever a change in production, process, equipment or

controls increases noise exposures to the extent that:
1) Additional employees may be exposed at or above the action level.

2) The attenuation provided by hearing protectors being used by employees may be
rendered inadequate to meet the requirements of paragraph (j) of 29 CFR 1910.95.
e. Employee notification
LABORDE MARINE, LLC will notify each employee exposed at or above an 8 hour
time weighted average of 85 decibels of the results of the monitoring.
f. Observation of monitoring
LABORDE MARINE, LLC will provide affected employees or their representatives
with an opportunity to observe any noise measurements conducted.
HSE MANUAL
3. Hearing protectors
LABORDE MARINE, LLC will make hearing protectors available to all employees
exposed to an 8 hour time weighted average of 85 decibels or greater at no cost to the
employees. Hearing protectors will be replaced at no cost as necessary.
a. LABORDE MARINE, LLC will ensure that hearing protectors are worn:
1) By any employee who is required by previous testing to wear personal protective

equipment.
2) By any employee who is exposed to an 8 hour time weighted average of 85 decibels
or greater, and who:
 has yet had a baseline audiogram established, or

 has experienced a standard threshold shift
b. Employees will be given the opportunity to select their hearing protectors from a variety
of suitable hearing protectors provided.
c. LABORDE MARINE, LLC will provide training in the use and care of all hearing
protectors provided to employees.
d. This employer will ensure proper initial fitting and supervise the correct use of all hearing
protectors.
4. Hearing protector attenuation
LABORDE MARINE, LLC will evaluate hearing protector attenuation for the specific
noise environment in which the protector will be used. One of the evaluation methods
described in Appendix B: Methods for Estimating the Adequacy of Hearing Protection
Attenuation will be used:
a. Selected hearing protectors will attenuate employee exposure at least to an 8 hour time
weighted average of 90 decibels.
b. For employees who have experienced a standard threshold shift, selected hearing
protectors must attenuate their exposure to an 8 hour time weighted average of 85
decibels or below.
c. The adequacy of hearing protector attenuation will be re-evaluated whenever employee
noise exposures increase to the extent that the hearing protectors provided may no longer
provide adequate attenuation. More effective hearing protectors will be provided where
necessary.
HSE MANUAL
C. TRAINING
LABORDE MARINE, LLC will institute a training program for all employees who are exposed to
noise at or above an 8 hour time weighted average of 85 decibels, and will ensure employee
participation in such program.
1. The training program will be repeated annually for each employee included in the hearing
conservation program. Information provided in the training program will be updated to be
consistent with changes in protective equipment and work processes. Each employee will be
informed of the following:
a. The effects of noise on hearing.

b. The purpose of hearing protectors, the advantages, disadvantages, and attenuation of
various types, and instructions on selection, fitting, use, and care.
2. Access to information and training materials. This employer will make available to affected
employees or their representatives copies of this standard practice instruction and 29 CFR
1910.95, and will also post a copy in the workplace.
a. LABORDE MARINE, LLC will provide to affected employees any informational

material pertaining to 29 CFR 1910.95 that are supplied by OSHA
b. LABORDE MARINE, LLC will provide, upon request, all materials related to the
employer’s training and education program pertaining to this standard to the Assistant
Secretary and the Director.
D. RECORDKEEPING
E. DEFINITIONS
Commonly found in the OSHA Occupational Noise Exposure Standard or that relate to the contents
of the standard practice instruction.
Action level - An 8 hour time weighted average of 85 decibels measured on the A-scale, slow
response, or equivalently, a dose of fifty percent.
HSE MANUAL
Audiogram – A chart, graph, or table resulting from an audiometric test showing an individual’s
hearing threshold levels as a function of frequency.
Audiologist – A professional, specializing in the study and rehabilitation of hearing, who is certified
by the American Speech-Language-Hearing Association or licensed by a state board of examiners.
Baseline audiogram - The audiogram against which future audiograms are compared.
Criterion sound level – A sound level of 90 decibels
Decibel (dB) – Unit of measurement of sound level.

Hertz (Hz) – Unit of measurement of frequency, numerically equal to cycles per second.
Medical pathology – A disorder or disease. For purposes of this instruction, a condition or disease
affecting the ear, which should be treated by a physician specialist.
Noise dose – The ratio, expressed as a percentage, of (1) the time integral, over a stated time or
event, of the 0.6 power of the measured SLOW exponential time-averaged, squared A-weighted
sound pressure and (2) the product of the criterion duration (8 hours) and the 0.6 power of the
squared sound pressure corresponding to the criterion sound level (90dB).
Noise dosimeter – An instrument that integrates a function of sound pressure over a period of time
in such a manner that it directly indicates a noise dose.
Otalaryngologist – A physician specializing in diagnosis and treatment of disorders of the ear, nose
and throat.
Representative exposure – Measurements of an employee’s noise dose or 8 hour time weighted
average sound level that the employers deem to be representative of the exposures of other
employees in the workplace.
Sound level – Ten times the common logarithm of the ratio of the square of the measured A-
weighted sound pressure to the square of the standard reference pressure of 20 micropascals. Unit:
decibels (dB). For use with this instruction, SLOW time response, in accordance with ANSI S1.4-
1971 (R1976), is required.
Sound level meter – An instrument for the measurement of sound level.
Time weighted average sound level – That sound level, which if constant over an 8 hour exposure,
would result in the same noise dose as is measured.
HSE MANUAL
PPE 0 Sept. 1, 2011 49.0
PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE)
A. INTRODUCTION
Personal protective equipment, or PPE, when properly worn, is designed to reduce or eliminate
hazards from the work environment that cannot be controlled by other means. It is considered the
last barrier of protection for the employee. Other means of protecting employees, such as
Engineering controls or administrative methods, must be pursued first.
LABORDE MARINE, LLC is required by law (OSHA 29 CFR 1910.132) to provide Personal
Protective Equipment and train our employees in its use, to protect them from hazards in the work
environment. The training is intended to provide employees with the necessary protective
equipment to guard against hazards in the workplace and enhance on-the-job safety. It also furnishes
the employee direction on the selection, use, and care of protective equipment. LABORDE
MARINE, LLC provides this equipment at no cost to the employee. PPE not designated herein and
required by a specific job task or customer requirement shall be provided by LABORDE MARINE,
LLC.
B. RESPONSIBILITIES
Management is responsible for ensuring that employees have completed the training required by this
procedure and the documentation of this process. The Safety Coordinator is responsible for ensuring
that company personnel conduct a PPE Hazards Assessment by completing a Job Safety Analysis
form prior to beginning a project. These assessments of JSA’s should be conducted on each job
before any work is done. The results of the assessment of JSA’s will also determine what Personal
Protective Equipment will be used. LABORDE MARINE, LLC Supervisor’s are responsible for
providing assistance in the implementation of this policy. Company personnel are responsible for
learning and following LABORDE MARINE, LLC policy/procedure regarding their use and
maintenance.
C. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Protective equipment, including personal protective equipment for eyes, face, head, and extremities,
protective clothing, respiratory devices, and protective shields and barriers, shall be provided, used
and maintained in a sanitary and reliable condition whenever it is necessary by reason of hazards or
processes or environment, chemical hazards, radiological hazards, or mechanical irritants
encountered in a manner capable of causing injury or impairment in the functions of any part of the
body through absorption, inhalation or physical contact.
HSE MANUAL
PPE 0 Sept. 1, 2011 49.0
1. Equipment – LABORDE MARINE, LLC provides most all the necessary protective
equipment to perform any job encountered as they apply to our operations, the majority of
these include but are not limited to: eye, face, ear, head and head protection, fall protection,
protective clothing, aprons and respiratory protection at no cost to the employee. The only
exception is safety toe shoes or boots.
2. Training – LABORDE MARINE, LLC will also provide the necessary training regarding
all PPE to each employee who is required to use the PPE. Training shall include:
 When PPE is necessary

 What PPE is necessary
 How to properly don & doff, adjust and wear properly
 PPE Limitations
 Proper care, maintenance
LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall also verify that each employee has understood the
required training through written testing along with documentation showing name of
employees, dates of training, and the instructor.
LABORDE MARINE, LLC will provide retraining when changes to the workplace make
the previous training obsolete; the PPE changes; or when the employee demonstrates lack of
use, improper use, or insufficient skill or understanding.
LABORDE MARINE, LLC will verify training by retaining a copy of the certificate
including:
 The employee’s name

 The dates of training
 The certification subject
3. Employee Owned Equipment – Where PPE equipment is furnished or owned by the

employee, the HSE Director will be responsible for assuring the equipment meets regulatory
standards (OSHA, NIOSH, etc.) and is properly maintained, cleaned and sanitized.
4. Hazard Assessment – LABORDE MARINE, LLC will assess the workplace to ascertain if
and where hazards exist or are likely to exist; at which time LABORDE MARINE, LLC
will select the respective PPE to be used, that will protect any affected employee from the
HSE MANUAL
PPE 0 Sept. 1, 2011 49.0
hazards identified in the assessment. This assessment will be performed with a written
certification identifying the workplace evaluated along with the person conducting the
assessment and the dates completed.
See appendix A for hazard assessment certification.
PPE selection – See appendix B for guidance on PPE selection based on task being
performed or work area/location.
PPE must be properly fitted to each affected employee and training in donning, doffing,
cleaning, and maintenance will be provided as outlined in section 2 of this chapter.
The protective equipment to be used by employees will be determined by the advance

analysis of the job and by conditions that occur as work progresses. However, on all jobs the
following are the minimum:
 Face shields, along with safety glasses with side shields or goggles shall be worn by
employees who are engaged in chipping, grinding or performing any other operations that
present flying fragment hazards.
 Safety hats and glasses will be worn by all employees and visitors, at all times while in
the plant’s designated area(s).
 Safety shoes are required for all employees on all projects. Tennis shoes, open-toed
shoes and sandals are prohibited.
 Long-sleeve shirts with sleeves rolled down and buttoned are suggested at all times on
projects.
 Personnel with beards will not be permitted to enter certain locations. This will include
contractor employees, subcontractor employees, and vendor representatives, etc.
5. Protective Equipment and Clothing – Maintenance and Repair
 Personal protective equipment is vital to safety in your work locations. The equipment
shall be properly cleaned, inspected after use, and stored in clearly marked and properly
designated area.
 Any equipment that no longer provides adequate protection shall be repaired or replaced
immediately. Unusable equipment shall be destroyed.
a. Ears
HSE MANUAL
PPE 0 Sept. 1, 2011 49.0
1) Appropriate hearing protection is provided by LABORDE MARINE, LLC and must be
worn by all personnel in areas where signs are posted warning of excessive noise levels.
Hearing protection shall also be worn in un-posted areas that are suspected of temporary
excessive noise.
b. Eyes
1) Approved ANSI z.87 safety glasses with side shields shall be provided by LABORDE
MARINE, LLC and must be worn by all employees.
 In areas designated by LABORDE MARINE, LLC facility safety program.

 During the execution of job assignments posting a potential eye hazard.
 As defined by customer safety procedures on location.
2) Complete coverage eye protection must be worn when dust hazards exist and when using
any type of pneumatic tools.
3) Individuals must wear splash-proof goggles when they are handling hazardous chemical
liquids, powders, or vapors. They must also wear the goggles when they are in the
immediate vicinity of these chemicals.
4) A person near other persons who are doing work that requires the use of safety goggles
must wear such goggles.
5) Employees engaged in helping welders should not look directly at the welding process
and must use approved eye protection.
6) Goggles with No.5- or 6-shade lenses must be worn when material is cut with acetylene
gas. Helpers engaged in such work shall wear goggles with No. 4-shade lenses.
7) Electric arc welding requires the use of welding helmets or hand shield fitted with No. 10
or darker shade lenses.
8) Cover glasses must be used with all welding goggles, helmets, and shield.
9) Suitable goggles must be worn when inspecting tubing under hydraulic pressure.
c. Feet and Toes
1) Approved ANSI Z41 or ASTM F2412/F2413 safety shoes or boots are not provided by
LABORDE MARINE, LLC but are required to be worn at all times.
2) Tennis shoes, sandals, and other similar shoe types are not to be worn at any time on the
job site. The wearing of low-quarter steel toe shoes is discouraged.
3) Rubber boots with safety toe protection shall be used on jobs where exposure to
hazardous chemicals is eminent, i.e., calcium chloride, zinc bromide.
HSE MANUAL
PPE 0 Sept. 1, 2011 49.0
d. Hands
1) Wearing gloves prevents many minor injuries resulting from rough materials or irritating
substances. Wear gloves whenever possible. Leather or leather-palm gloves shall be
worn when wire rope is being handled. Cloth gloves afford adequate protection when
normal work is done.
2) Appropriate gloves must be worn when acids, caustic soda, and soda ash are handled.
3) Insulated or heat-resistant gloves must be worn when regular work gloves cannot
adequately protect against burns.
4) LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall provide all cotton, latex and rubber gloves.
e. Head and Face
1) LABORDE MARINE, LLC shall supply safety hats to the employees and visitors.
These must be worn by employees and visitors in the field, the shop, or any location
where head injury hazards exist. Safety hats are selected for their protective qualities,
and no others may be worn on the job. Safety hats must fit properly to provide maximum
protection, and they must be maintained to ensure their protective qualities. Safety hats
must not be painted or modified in any manner.
2) Hair long enough to constitute as a hazard while a person is working near moving
machinery or rotating tools and equipment must be secured by a net or tied back.
3) Beards that constitute a hazard while a person is near moving machinery or rotating tools
are not permitted.
f. Respiratory
Please refer to Respiratory Protection section of this Safety Manual for more detailed
safety policy information.
1) Employees must be taught how to use respiratory protection before its actual use is
required. Specific training requirements vary for respiratory types. Training must be
conducted in accordance with applicable regulations. Periodic refresher training shall be
held as appropriate. This training will identify individuals who, because of their physical
conditions, cannot use the equipment.
2) Respirators must be worn when personnel are working in an atmosphere contaminated
with harmful mists, fogs, gasses, smokes, sprays, and vapors. Respirators must be one of
the following types approved by the National Institute of Occupations Safety and Health
(NIOSH):
HSE MANUAL
PPE 0 Sept. 1, 2011 49.0
a) Dust respirators – Used to protect from nuisance and toxic dusts. Not to be
used for vapors, mists, or fumes unless specified by the manufacturer/supplier.
b) Chemical cartridge respirators – Used to protect from mist or vapor such as
paint spray. Not to be used for dusts or fumes unless specified by the
manufacturer or supplier.
c) Make sure that all respiratory protective equipment is regularly inspected,
cleaned, and maintained in good working condition.
g. Other Protective Equipment
Other protective equipment shall be provided by LABORDE MARINE, LLC.
1) Chemical goggles, full face shield, protective gloves and an acid-proof apron shall
be worn for handling chemicals that may be harmful to the skin or eye when
exposure to spillage is possible. Certain materials such as acids and caustic soda
required additional protection.
h. Clothing
Clothing may be provided by LABORDE MARINE, LLC to the employee

depending on the specific job requirement.
1) If clothing becomes saturated with oil, gasoline, or chemicals, the employee shall
immediately wash the exposed skin area with soap and water and change clothes
to prevent skin irritation. The employee must avoid all sources or fire, including
cigarettes, pipes, or cigars before changing clothes and washing the affected skin
with soap and water. Doctor should be consulted if skin rash develops.
i. Personal Flotation Devices

Personal Flotation Devices shall be provided by LABORDE MARINE, LLC.
1) Each individual must wear a personal flotation device (PFD Type V) as specified
below, except in rare instances where conditions make such a greater hazard. A
PFD must be a Type V approved for the service intended by the United States
Coast Guard and must be fastened when worn. A PFD must be worn:
a) When doing repairs and maintenance of warehouse wharf and bulkhead areas.
b) When loading and unloading barges of sack products and bulk type products.
HSE MANUAL
PPE 0 Sept. 1, 2011 49.0
D. PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE
Company personnel are responsible for keeping PPE equipment sanitary and properly maintained.
Damage or defective PPE shall not be worn. Any damaged PPE will be repaired or replaced as soon
as it is detected. In the event that the PPE is not repairable it will be replaced. This process will be
documented and filed with the safety coordinator.
E. GUIDELINES
All personal protective equipment shall be cleaned, maintained, and stored in a sanitary and reliable
condition, as per manufacturers’ guideline. Periodical inspections of the equipment will be
conducted to identify signs of damage or wear. At no time shall PPE be modified or altered in any
way that degrades the integrity of the equipment.
HAZARD ASSESSMENT
HSE MANUAL
PPE 0 Sept. 1, 2011 49.0
Location/Area/Task:__________________________________________________
Check YES for each basic hazard found, then list sources of that hazard. If YES, mark the body area
affected.
YES______
NO ______ IMPACT (Flying fragments, objects, large chips, particles sand, dirt, etc.)
Sources:___________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
______________________
BODY AREA AFFECTED:
Eyes_____Face_____Head_____Foot_____Hand_____Body_____
YES______
NO ______ PENETRATION (Falling, dropping object, sharp objects that cut or piece)
Sources:________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________
BODY AREA AFFECTED:
HSE MANUAL
PPE 0 Sept. 1, 2011 49.0
YES_____
NO _____ COMPRESSION (roll-over or pinching)
Sources:________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________
BODY AREA AFFECTED:
YES_____
NO _____ CHEMICAL (Splash, irritating mists)
Sources:________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________
BODY AREA AFFECTED:
YES_____
NO _____ HEAT (Hot sparks, splashes form molten metals, high temperature exposures)
HSE MANUAL
PPE 0 Sept. 1, 2011 49.0
Sources:________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________
BODY AREA AFFECTED:
YES_____
NO _____ HARMFUL DUST (Nuisance dust)
Sources:________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________
BODY AREA AFFECTED:
HSE MANUAL
PPE 0 Sept. 1, 2011 49.0
YES_____
NO _____ LIGHT (OPTICAL) RADIATION (Optical radiation, poor vision)
Sources:________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________
BODY AREA AFFECTED:
YES_____
NO _____ OTHER (Any other hazard not mentioned above)
Sources:________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________
HSE MANUAL
PPE 0 Sept. 1, 2011 49.0
HSE MANUAL
Respiratory 0 Sept. 1, 2011 50.0
Equipment Prepared By: Approved By: Page:
RESPIRATORY EQUIPMENT PROGRAM
A. BASIS
About 32 million workers are potentially exposed to one or more chemical hazards on a daily basis.
There are an estimated 575,000 existing chemical products, and hundreds of new ones being
introduced annually. This poses a serious problem for exposed workers and their employer. The
OSHA Respiratory Protection Standard establishes uniform requirements to make sure that the
respiratory hazards of all U.S. workplaces are evaluated, and that engineering controls, and work
practices controls are implemented, and where not feasible, a respiratory protection program
instituted.
B. GENERAL
LABORDE MARINE, LLC will ensure that respiratory hazards within our facility are evaluated,
and that information concerning these hazards is transmitted to all employees. This standard
practice instruction is intended to address comprehensively the issues of; evaluating the potential
respiratory hazards, communicating information concerning these hazards, and establishing
appropriate engineering, work practice, or respiratory protective measures for employees. This
program will be evaluated and updated by the HSE Director annually or as regulatory changes
require.
C. RESPONSIBILITY
LABORDE MARINE, LLC Safety Officer is solely responsible for all facets of this program and
has full authority to make necessary decisions to ensure success of the program. The HSE Director
will develop written detailed instructions covering each of the basic elements in this program, and is
the sole person authorized to amend these instructions. This company has expressly authorized the
HSE Director to halt any operation of LABORDE MARINE, LLC where there is danger of serious
personal injury. This policy includes respiratory hazards.
D. INTRODUCTION
This respiratory program has been established to ensure that employees and contractors under
LABORDE MARINE, LLC’s supervision are provided with proper respiratory protection. This
program shall be administered by the location Manager and shall describe the conditions in which
personnel will be required to wear respirators. The manager, in conjunction with the HSE Director,
HSE MANUAL
shall be authorized to review respiratory protection policy, initiate policy changes, and to clarify
areas of ambiguity. If the policy does not cover a specific situation, the location manager shall
designate proper operating procedures. In order to provide an effective program, the following
standard operating procedures have been established.
In many cases, the respirator protection equipment selection will have been already identified for
specific operations regularly performed at LABORDE MARINE, LLC facilities and assets, and/or
job sites. However, proper selection of respiratory protection equipment must be made at job sites
where the environmental variables and site conditions have not been evaluated. In such cases, a
qualified person will evaluate the site specific conditions and determine respirator selection.
E. EMPLOYER AND EMPLOYEE RESPONSIBILITY
1. Employer’s Responsibility
a. Respirators will be provided by this employer when they are necessary to protect
employee health.
b. The respirator provided will be suitable for the intended use.
c. This employer will offer at least three types of respirators for employees to select from.
d. LABORDE MARINE, LLC will be responsible for establishing and maintaining a
respiratory program whenever respirators are used. A program administrator (HSE
Director) will oversee the program.
2. Employee’s Responsibility
a. The employee will use the respiratory protection in accordance with instructions and
training received or contracted by LABORDE MARINE, LCC.
b. The employee will guard against damage to the respirator, and immediately replace
suspect respirators.
c. The employee will report any trouble with or malfunction of the respirator to his/her
supervisor.
F. POLICY STATEMENT
1. Engineering controls. To control and/or minimize the threat of occupational diseases caused
by breathing air contaminated with harmful dusts, fogs, fumes, mists, gases, smokes, sprays,
or vapors. The primary objective of this program will be to prevent atmospheric
contamination. This will be accomplished as far as feasible by accepted engineering control
measures (for example, enclosure or confinement of the operation, general and local
HSE MANUAL
ventilation, and substitution of less toxic materials). When effective engineering controls are
not feasible, or while they are being instituted, appropriate respirators will be used.
2. Respirators. Respirators will be provided by this employer during emergency situations or

when such equipment is necessary to protect the health of the employee. This employer will:
a. Provide the respirators, which are applicable and suitable for the purpose intended.
Oxygen deficient (<19.5%) atmospheres, or airborne contaminants.
b. Be responsible for the establishment and maintenance of a written respiratory protective
program which will include the requirements outlined in 29 CFR 1910.134.
3. The employee will use the provided respiratory protection in accordance with instructions
and training received.
4. Respirators will be selected on the basis of hazards to which the worker is exposed.
5. The user will be instructed and trained in the proper use of respirators and their limitations.
6. Respirators will be regularly cleaned and disinfected. Those used by more than one worker
will be thoroughly cleaned and disinfected after each use.
7. Respirators will be stored in a convenient, clean, and sanitary location.
8. Respirators used routinely will be inspected during cleaning. Worn or deteriorated parts will
be replaced. Respirators for emergency use such as self-contained devices will be thoroughly
inspected at least once a month and after each use.
9. Appropriate surveillance of work area conditions and degree of employee exposures or stress
will be maintained.
10. There will be regular inspection and evaluation to determine the continued effectiveness of
the program.
11. Employees will not be assigned to tasks requiring use of respirators unless it has been
determined that they are physically able to perform the work and use the equipment. A
physician will determine what health and physical conditions are pertinent. The respirator
user’s medical status will be reviewed on an annual basis.
HSE MANUAL
12. Only NIOSH approved or accepted respirators will be used when respiratory hazards are
present. The respirator furnished will provide adequate respiratory protection against the
particular hazard for which it is designed.
G. PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS
This program as a minimum will include the following elements:
1. Procedures for selecting respirators for use in the workplace;
2. Medical evaluations of employees required to use respirators;
3. Fit testing procedures for tight-fitting respirators;
4. Procedures for proper use of respirators in foreseeable emergency situations;
5. Procedures and schedules for cleaning, disinfecting, storing, inspecting, repairing, discarding,
and otherwise maintaining respirators;
6. Procedures to ensure adequate air quality, quantity, and flow of breathing air for atmosphere-
supplying respirators;
7. Training of employees in the respiratory hazards to which they are potentially exposed
during routine and emergency situations.
H. RESPIRATORY SELECTION POLICY
This employer will allow employees to select respirators from at least three different types of
respirator models and sizes so that the respirator is acceptable to, and correctly fits, the user.
Selection of respirators will be made according to the specific hazard involved 29 CFR 1910.1000
and will be selected in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions or other related requirements
(OSHA or ANSI standards, NIOSH, etc.)
1. Filter cartridges and canisters. Filter cartridges and canisters will be used and stored
according to manufacturer’s guidelines. Change-out filters will be done based on the
individual job.
HSE MANUAL
2. Identification of filters, cartridges, and canisters. This employer will ensure that all filters,
cartridges and canisters used in the workplace are labeled and color coded with the NIOSH
approved label and that the label is not removed and remains legible.
3. Where a specific OSHA standard exists. Each task/job having the potential for respiratory
hazards will be evaluated to determine worker protection requirement. The specific OSHA
standard will be consulted to determine delineated respiratory requirements. The standards
are listed in the “Z” tables to 29 CFR 1910.1000-1101.
4. Where a specific OSHA standard does not exist, prudent Industrial Hygiene practices will be
used. After all criteria have been identified and evaluated and after the requirements and
restrictions of the respiratory protection program have been met, the class of respirators that
should provide adequate respiratory protection will be determined.
5. Air quality. Compressed air, compressed oxygen, liquid air, and liquid oxygen used for
respiration will be of high purity.
a. Oxygen will meet the requirements of the United States Pharmacopoeia for medical or
breathing oxygen.
b. Breathing air will meet at least the requirements of the specification for Grade D
breathing air as described in Compressed Gas Association Commodity Specification G-
7.1-1966.
c. Compressed oxygen will not be used in supplied-air respirators or in open circuit self-
contained breathing apparatus that have previously used compressed air. Oxygen must
never be used with air line respirators. Breathing air may be supplied to respirators from
cylinders or air compressors.
1) Compressed breathing air will meet at least the requirements for Type 1-Grade D
breathing air described in ANSI/Compressed Gas Association Commodity
Specification for Air, G-7.1-1989, to include:
 Oxygen content (v/v) of 19.5-23.5%;

 Hydrocarbon (condensed) content of 5 milligrams per cubic meter of air or less;
 Carbon monoxide (CO) content of 10 ppm or less;
 Carbon dioxide content of 1,000 ppm or less; and
 Lack of noticeable odor.
2) For oil-lubricated compressors, a high-temperature or carbon monoxide alarm, or

both, shall be used to monitor carbon monoxide levels. If only high-temperature
HSE MANUAL
alarms are used, the air supply shall be monitored at intervals sufficient to prevent
carbon monoxide in the breathing air from exceeding 10 ppm.
NOTE: Compressed oxygen may not be used in atmosphere-supplying respirators

that have previously used compressed air.
d. Compressed oxygen will not be used in supplied-air respirators or in open circuit self-
contained breathing apparatus that have previously used compressed oxygen.
e. This employer will ensure that cylinders used to supply breathing air to respirators meet
the following requirements:
1) Cylinders are tested and maintained as prescribed in the Shipping Container

Specification Regulations of the Department of Transportation (49 CFR part 173 and
part 178);
2) Cylinders of purchased breathing air have a certificate of analysis from the supplier
that the breathing air meets the requirements for Type 1—Grade D breathing air;
3) The moisture content in the cylinder does not exceed a dew point of –500F (-45.60C)
at 1 atmosphere pressure. Cylinders will be tested and maintained as prescribed in
the Shipping Container Specification Regulations of the Department of
Transportation (49 CFR part 178).
6. Use of Respirators. This employer may provide respirators at the request of employees or
permit employees to use their own respirators, if it is determined that such respirator use will
not in itself create a hazard. If voluntary respirator use is permissible, this employer will
provide the respirator user(s) with the necessary information for safe and effective use. In
addition, we will ensure that any employee using a respirator voluntarily is medically able to
use that respirator, and that the respirator is cleaned, stored, and maintained so that its use
does not present a health hazard to the user. This employer will provide respirators, training,
and medical evaluations at no cost to the employee. There are five conditions under which
respirators must be used:
a. In regulated areas within the facility;

b. In emergencies;
c. Where engineering and work practice controls are inadequate;
d. Where exposures exceed permissible limits, and;
e. During maintenance and repair activities during brief or intermittent operations where
engineering and work practice controls are not feasible or required.
HSE MANUAL
1) This document will specify standard procedures for respirator use. These will include
all information and guidance necessary for their proper selection, use, and care.
Possible emergency and routine uses of respirators will be, where possible,
anticipated and planned for.
2) The correct respirator will be specified for each job. The respirator type will be
specified in the work procedures by HSE Director who supervises the respiratory
protective program. The individual issuing them will be adequately instructed to
ensure that the correct respirator is issued.
3) Fit instructions. Every respirator wearer will receive fitting instructions including
demonstrations and practice in how the respirator should be worn, how to adjust it,
and how to determine if it fits properly. Respirators will not be worn when conditions
prevent a good face seal. Such conditions may be a growth of beard, sideburns, a
skull cap that projects under the facepiece, jewelry or temple pieces on glasses. Also
the absence of one or both dentures can seriously affect the fit of a facepiece and
interfere with the face-to-facepiece seal or valve function.
4) Fit Evaluation (wearer). The facepiece fit will be checked by the wearer each time
he/she puts on the respirator. This will be done by following the manufacturer’s
facepiece fitting instructions.
5) Fit Evaluation (company). Checks of employees while wearing respirators will be
done periodically in accordance with the manufacturer’s facepiece fitting instructions.
6) Hair/apparel. If hair growth or apparel interfere with a satisfactory fit, then they will
be altered or removed so as to eliminate interference and allow a satisfactory fit. If a
satisfactory fit is still not attained, the employee must use a positive-pressure
respirator such as powered air-purifying respirators, supplied air respirator, or self-
contained breathing apparatus.
7) Corrective vision requirements (full-face respirators). Full-face respirators having
provisions for optical inserts will be reviewed for use by this company. These inserts
when used will be used according to the manufacturer’s specification. When
employees must wear optical inserts as part of the facepiece, the facepiece and lenses
will be fitted by qualified individuals to provide good vision, comfort, and a gas-tight
seal. This company will provide corrective lenses for respirators based on optometry
recommendations from an optometrist.
a) Conventional eyeglasses. Conventional eyeglasses will not be used with full-face
respirators. A proper seal cannot be established if the temple bars of eye glasses
extend through the sealing edge of the full facepiece.
b) Contact lenses. Contact lenses will not be used with full-face respirators.
Wearing of contact lenses in contaminated atmospheres with a respirator will not
be allowed.
c) If corrective spectacles or goggles are required, they will be worn so as not to
affect the fit of the facepiece. Proper selection of equipment will minimize or
avoid this problem.
HSE MANUAL
8) Use of personal protective equipment. If an employee wears corrective glasses or
goggles or other personal protective equipment, the equipment must be worn in a
manner that does not interfere with the seal of the facepiece to the face of the user.
9) User seal check procedures. The following procedures must be performed to ensure
that an adequate seal is achieved each time the respirator is put on. Either the positive
and/or negative pressure checks listed below will be performed, or the respirator
manufacturer’s recommended user seal check method is to be used:
I. Facepiece Positive and/or Negative Pressure Checks.
A. Positive pressure check. Close off the exhalation valve and exhale gently into the facepiece.
The face fit is considered satisfactory if a slight positive pressure can be built up inside the
facepiece without any evidence of outward leakage of air at the seal. For most respirators this
method of leak testing requires the wearer to first remove the exhalation valve cover before
closing off the exhalation valve and then carefully replacing it after the test.
B. Negative pressure check. Close off the inlet opening of the canister or cartridge(s) by covering
with the palm of the hand(s) or by replacing the filter seal(s), inhale gently so that the facepiece
collapses slightly, and hold the breath for ten seconds. The design of the inlet opening of some
cartridges cannot be effectively covered with the palm of the hand. The test can be performed by
covering the inlet opening of the cartridge with a thin latex or nitrile glove. If the facepiece
remains in its slightly collapsed condition and no inward leakage of air is detected, the tightness
of the respirator is considered satisfactory.
II. Manufacturer’s Recommended User Seal Check Procedures

The respirator manufacturer’s recommended procedures for performing a user seal check may be
used instead of the positive and/or negative pressure check procedures provided that it can be
demonstrated that the manufacturer’s procedures are equally effective.
7. Hazard Evaluation. This employer will identify and evaluate the respiratory hazard(s) in the
workplace using the “Job Hazard Analysis Program,” this evaluation will include a
reasonable estimate of employee exposures to respiratory hazard(s) and an identification of
the contaminant’s chemical state and physical form. Where exposure cannot be identified or
reasonably estimated, the area or location will consider the atmosphere to be immediately
dangerous to life or health (IDLH).
a. Respirators for IDLH atmospheres. This employer will provide the following respirators
for employee use in IDLH atmospheres:
HSE MANUAL
1) A full facepiece pressure demand SCBA certified by NIOSH for a minimum service
life of thirty minutes, or
2) A combination full facepiece pressure demand supplied-air respirator (SAR) with
auxiliary self-contained air supply.
3) Respirators provided only for escape from IDLH atmospheres will be NIOSH-
certified for escape from the atmosphere in which they will be used.
4) All oxygen-deficient atmospheres will be considered IDLH. Exception: If it can be
demonstrated that, under all foreseeable conditions, the oxygen concentration can be
maintained within the acceptable ranges specified in 29 CFR 1910.134 (i.e., for the
altitudes set out in the table), then any atmosphere-supplying respirator approved by
the Safety Officer may be used.
5) Available brands/sizes
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_________________________
b. Respirators for atmospheres that are not IDLH. This employer will provide a respirator
that is adequate to protect the health of the employee and ensure compliance with all
other OSHA statutory and regulatory requirements, under routine and reasonably
foreseeable emergency situations.
1) The respirator selected will be appropriate for the chemical state and physical form of
the containment.
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_________________________
c. Respirators for protection against gases and vapors. This employer will provide:
1) An atmosphere-supplying respirator, or
2) An air-purifying respirator, provided that the respirator is equipped with an end-of-
service-life indicator (ESLI) certified by NIOSH for the contaminant; or if there is no
ESLI appropriate for conditions a change schedule for canisters and cartridges will be
implemented that is based on objective information or data that will ensure that
canisters and cartridges are changed before the end of their service life. This
employer will describe in the respirator program the information and data relied upon
HSE MANUAL
and the basis for the canister and cartridge change schedule and the basis for reliance
on the data.
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_________________________
d. Respirators for protection against particulates. This employer will provide:
1) An atmosphere-supplying respirator; or
2) An air-purifying respirator equipped with a filter certified by NIOSH under 30 CFR
part 11 as a high efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filter, or an air-purifying respirator
equipped with a filter certified for particulates by NIOSH under 42 CFR part 84; or
3) For contaminants consisting primarily of particles with mass median aerodynamic
diameters (MMAD) of at least 2 micrometers, an air-purifying respirator equipped
with any filter certified for particulates by NIOSH.
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________
e. Standby personnel must be provided when using SAR/SCBA equipment in order to

maintain communication with user.
f. Approved retrieval equipment will be accessible whenever personnel are working down
in areas deeper than 5’.
g. All Air Purifying Respirators (APR) will be furnished at no cost to employees.
8. Inspection, Maintenance, and Care of Respiratory Equipment. This employer will provide
for the cleaning and disinfecting, storage, inspection, and repair of respirators used by our
employees. Equipment will be properly maintained to retain its original state of
effectiveness.
a. Cleaning and disinfecting. This employer will provide each respirator user with a
respirator that is clean, sanitary, and in good working order. This employer will ensure
that respirators are cleaned and disinfected using OSHA approved procedures or
procedures recommended by the respirator manufacturer, provided that such procedures
are of equivalent effectiveness. The respirators will be cleaned and disinfected at the
following intervals:
HSE MANUAL
1) Exclusive use respirators. Respirators issued for the exclusive use of an employee
will be cleaned and disinfected as often as necessary to be maintained in a sanitary
condition.
2) Respirators issued to more than one employee. Respirators issued to more than one
employee will be cleaned and disinfected before being worn by different individuals.
3) Respirators maintained for emergency. Respirators maintained for emergency use
will be cleaned and disinfected after each use.
4) Respirators used in fit testing. Respirators used in fit testing and training will be
cleaned and disinfected after each use.
5) Procedures for Cleaning Respirators.
a) Remove filters, cartridges, or canisters. Disassemble facepieces by removing

speaking diaphragms, demand and pressure – demand valve assemblies, hoses, or
any components recommended by the manufacturer. Discard or repair any
defective parts.
b) Wash components in warm (430C [1100 F] maximum) water with a mild
detergent or with a cleaner recommended by the manufacturer. A stiff bristle (not
wire) brush may be used to facilitate the removal of dirt.
c) Rinse components thoroughly in clean, warm (430C [1100F] maximum),
preferably running water. Drain.
d) When the cleaner used does not contain a disinfecting agent, respirator
components should be immersed for two minutes in one of the following:
(1) Hydrochlorite solution (50 ppm of chlorine) made by adding approximately

one milliliter of laundry bleach to one liter of water at 430C (1100 F); or,
(2) Aqueous solution of iodine (50 ppm iodine) made by adding approximately
0.8 milliliters of tincture of iodine (6-8 grams ammonium and/or potassium
iodide/100 cc of 45% alcohol) to one liter of water at 430 (1100F); or,
(3) Other commercially available cleansers of equivalent disinfectant quality
when used as directed, if their use is recommended or approved by the
respirator manufacturer.
e) Rinse components thoroughly in clean, warm (430C [1100 F] maximum),

preferably running water. Drain. The importance of thorough rinsing cannot be
overemphasized. Detergents or disinfectants that dry on facepieces may result in
dermatitis. In addition, some disinfectants may cause deterioration of rubber or
corrosion of metal parts if not completely removed.
f) Components should be hand-dried with a clean lint-free cloth or air-dried.
g) Reassemble facepiece, replacing filters, cartridges, and canisters where necessary.
h) Test the respirator to ensure that all components work properly.
HSE MANUAL
b. Storage of respirators.
1) All respirators will be stored to protect them from damage, contamination, dust,
sunlight, extreme temperatures, excessive moisture, and damaging chemicals, and
they will be packed or stored to prevent deformation of the facepiece and exhalation
valve.
c. Emergency respirators. Emergency respirators will be:
1) Kept accessible to the work area;

2) Stored in compartments or in covers that are clearly marked as containing emergency
respirators; and
3) Stored in accordance with any applicable manufacturer instructions.
d. Inspection. Respirators will be inspected as follows:
1) All respirators used in routine situations will be inspected before each use and during
cleaning in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications.
2) Inspection records will be maintained in the main office.
e. Routine use respirators. All routine use respirators will be inspected before and after
each use. The respirator manufacturer’s inspection criteria will be used as the basis for
the inspection. Routinely used respirators will be collected, cleaned, and disinfected as
frequently as necessary to ensure that proper protection is provided for the wearer.
1) Routine use respirators. Routinely used respirators, such as dust respirators, may be
placed in plastic bags. Respirators having removable cartridges with imbedded
compounds that could evaporate into a sealed bas should be removed so as not to
permeate into the rubber parts of the respirator. Respirators should not be stored in
such places as lockers or tool boxes unless they are in carrying cases or cartons.
9. Respiratory Protection Training Program. This company will develop a standardized training
format to meet the requirement for a respiratory protection training program. The training
will be comprehensive, understandable, and recur annually, and more often if necessary.
a. Previous training. If a new employee is able to demonstrate that he or she has received
training within the last 12 months that addresses the training required by 29 CFR
1910.134 the employee will not be required to repeat the training provided that the
HSE MANUAL
employee can demonstrate knowledge. Training not repeated initially by this employer
must be provided no later than 12 months from the date of the previous training.
b. Basic advisory information. The basic advisory information on respirators, as presented
in 29 CFR 1910.134, Appendix D, will be provided by this employer in any written or
oral format to employees who wear respirators.
c. Program evaluation. This employer will conduct evaluations of the workplace to ensure
that the written respiratory protection program is being properly implemented. We will
consult employees to determine and ensure that they are using their respirators properly
by asking about fit, selection, use, maintenance, etc.
d. Workplace evaluations. This employer will conduct evaluations of the workplace as
necessary to ensure that the provisions of this written program are being effectively
implemented and that it continues to be effective.
e. When training will be provided. Training will be provided to each affected employee:
1) Before the employee is first assigned duties that require respiratory protection.
2) Before there is a change in assigned duties.
3) Whenever there is a change in operations that present a hazard for which an employee
has not previously been trained.
4) Whenever this employer has reason to believe that there are deviations from
established respiratory procedures required by this instruction or inadequacies in the
employee’s knowledge or use of the procedures.
f. The training content that will be provided. Training of employees will as a minimum
include:
1) Putting on and removing respirators (donning and doffing).

2) Any limitation on their use.
3) Maintenance requirements.
4) Procedures for regularly evaluating the effectiveness of the program.
5) Where respirator use is not required.
g. Demonstration of knowledge. This employer will ensure that the administrator of the
program as well as each employee can demonstrate knowledge of at least the following:
1) Why the respirator is necessary and how improper fit, usage, or maintenance can
compromise the protective effect of the respirator.
2) What the limitations and capabilities of the respirator are;
3) How to use the respirator effectively in emergency situations, including situations in
which the respirator malfunctions;
4) How to inspect, put on and remove, use, and check the seals of the respirator;
HSE MANUAL
5) What the procedures are for maintenance and storage of the respirator;
6) How to recognize medical signs and symptoms that may limit or prevent the effective
use of respirators; and
7) The general requirements of 29 CFR 1910.134.
h. Employee involvement. This employer will regularly consult employees required to use
respirators to assess the employee’s views on program effectiveness and to identify any
problems. Any problems that are identified during this assessment will be corrected.
Factors to be assessed include, but are not limited to:
1) Respirator fit (including the ability to use the respirator without interfering with
effective workplace performance);
2) Appropriate respirator selection for the hazards to which the employee is exposed;
3) Proper respirator use under the workplace conditions the employee encounters; and
4) Proper respirator maintenance.
i. Employee proficiency. The training will establish employee proficiency in the duties
required by this instruction and will introduce new or revised procedures, as necessary,
for compliance with this instruction or when future revisions occur.
j. Trainer qualification. This employer will designate a program administrator who is
qualified by appropriate training or experience that is commensurate with the complexity
of the program to administer or oversee the respiratory protection program and conduct
the required evaluations of program effectiveness.
k. Training certification. This employer will certify that the training required by 29 CFR
1910.134 has been accomplished. The certification will contain each employee’s name,
the signatures or initials of the trainers, and the dates of training. The certification will be
available for inspection by employees and their authorized representatives.
10. Retraining and Refresher Training. Retraining will be administered annually. Retraining
will reestablish employee proficiency and introduce new or revised control methods and
procedures, as necessary. Retraining will be administered when the following situations
occur (as a minimum):
a. Changes in the workplace or the type of respirator render previous training obsolete;
b. Inadequacies in the employee’s knowledge or use of the respirator indicate that the
employee has not retained the requisite understanding or skill; or
c. Any other situation arises in which retraining appears necessary to ensure safe respirator
use.
11. Continuing Respirator Effectiveness. Appropriate surveillance will be maintained of work

area conditions and degree of employee exposure or stress. When there is a change in work
HSE MANUAL
area conditions or degree of employee exposure or stress that may affect respirator
effectiveness, this employer will reevaluate the continued effectiveness of the respirator.
a. This employer will ensure that employees leave the respirator use area under the
following conditions:
1) To wash their faces and respirator facepieces as necessary to prevent eye or skin
irritation associated with respirator use; or
2) If they detect vapor or gas breakthrough, changes in breathing resistance, or leakage
of the facepiece; or
3) To replace the respirator or the filter, cartridge, or canister elements.
4) If the employee detects vapor or gas breakthrough, changes in breathing resistance, or
leakage of the facepiece, this employer must replace or repair the respirator before
allowing the employee to return to the work area.
12. Respirator Fit Testing. This employer will conduct fit testing before an employee is required
to use any respirator. The employee must be fit tested with the same make, model, style, and
size of respirator that will be used.
a. This employer will establish and retain a record of the qualitative and quantitative fit tests
administered to an employee including:
 Date of test;
 Type of fit test performed;
 The name or identification of the employee tested;
 Specific make, model, style, and size of respirator tested;
 Fit test records will be retained for respirator users until the next fit test is
administered;
b. Before an employee may be required to use any respirator with a negative or positive
pressure tight-fitting facepiece, the employee must be fit tested with the same make,
model, style, and size of respirator that will be used.
1) Qualitative Fit Test – Qualitative fit testing of respirators shall be accomplished by

temporarily converting the respirator user’s actual facepiece into a negative pressure
respirator with appropriate filters, or by using an identical negative pressure air-
purifying respirator facepiece with the same sealing surfaces as a surrogate for the
atmosphere-supplying or powered air-purifying respirator facepiece.
2) Quantitative Fit Test – Quantitative fit testing of respirators shall be accomplished by
modifying the facepiece to allow sampling inside the facepiece in the breathing zone
HSE MANUAL
of the user, midway between the nose and mouth. This requirement shall be
accomplished by installing a permanent sampling probe onto a surrogate facepiece, or
by using a sampling adapter designed to temporarily provide a means of sampling air
from inside the facepiece.
c. The employer shall ensure that employees using a tight-fitting facepiece respirator pass
an appropriate qualitative fit test (QLFT), or quantitative fit test (QNFT).
d. Any employee using a tight-fitting facepiece respirator must be fit tested prior to initial
use of the respirator, whenever a different respirator facepiece (size, style, model or
make) is used, and at least annually thereafter.
e. An additional fit test shall be conducted whenever the employee reports, or the employer,
PLHCP, supervisor, or program administrator makes visual observations of, changes in
the employee’s physical condition that could affect respirator fit. Such conditions
include, but are not limited to, facial scarring, dental changes, cosmetic surgery, or an
obvious change in body weight.
f. The fit test shall be administered using an OSHA-accepted QLFT or QNFT protocol.
g. QLFT may only be used to fit test negative pressure air-purifying respirators that must
achieve a fit factor of 100 or less.
h. If the fit factor, as determined through an OSHA-accepted QNFT protocol, is equal to or
greater than 100 for tight-fitting half facepieces, or equal to or greater than 500 for tight-
fitting full facepieces, the QNFT has been passed with that respirator.
13. Medical Evaluation. Using a respirator may place a physiological burden on employees that
varies with the type of respirator worn, the job and workplace conditions in which the
respirator is used, and the medical status of the employee. This employer will provide a
medical evaluation, at no cost to the employee, to determine the employee’s ability to use a
respirator before the employee is fit tested or required to use the respirator in the workplace.
This employer may discontinue an employee’s medical evaluations when the employee is no
longer required to use a respirator.
a. Medical evaluation procedures. This employer will identify a Physician or other

Licensed Health Care Professional (PLHCP) to perform medical evaluations using a
medical questionnaire or an initial medical examination that obtains the same information
as the medical questionnaire.
b. Follow-up medical examination. This employer will ensure that a follow-up medical
examination is provided for an employee who gives a positive response to any question
among questions 1 through 8 in the medical evaluation questionnaire (See Section 14.
Forms Used in Conjunction With This Instruction.) and/or demonstrates the need for a
follow-up medical examination. The follow-up medical examination will include any
medical tests, consultations, or diagnostic procedures that the PLHCP deems necessary to
make a final determination.
HSE MANUAL
c. Administration of the medical questionnaire and examinations. The medical
questionnaire and examinations will be administered confidentially during the
employee’s normal working hours or at a time and place convenient to the employee.
The medical questionnaire will be administered in a manner that ensures that the
employee with an opportunity to discuss the questionnaire and examination results with
the PLHCP.
d. Information to be provided to the PLHCP. The following information will be provided to
the PLHCP before he or she makes a recommendation concerning an employee’s ability
to use a respirator:
 The expected physical work effort;
 Additional protective clothing and equipment to be worn;
 Temperature and humidity extremes that may be encountered;
 The type and weight of the respirator to be used by the employee;
 The duration and frequency of respirator use (including use for rescue and escape);
 Any supplemental information provided previously to the PLHCP regarding an
employee need not be provided for a subsequent medical evaluation if the information
and the PLHCP remain the same;
 Copy of the written respiratory protection program;
 Copy of the 29 CFR 1910.134 plus Appendices.
NOTE: When this employer replaces a PLHCP, we will ensure that the new PLHCP obtains this
information, either by providing the documents directly to the PLHCP or having the documents
transferred from the former PLHCP to the new PLHCP. However, employees do not have to be
medically reevaluated solely because a new pLHCP has been selected
e. Medical determination. In determining the employee’s ability to use a respirator, this

employer will accomplish the following:
 Obtain a written recommendation regarding the employee’s ability to use the

respirator.
 Determine any limitations on respirator use related to the medical condition of the
employee, or relating to the workplace conditions in which the respirator will be used,
including whether or not the employee is medically able to use the respirator;
 Determine the need, if any, for follow-up medical evaluations; and
 Ensure that the PLHCP has provided the employee with a copy of the PLHCP’s
written recommendation.
 If the respirator is a negative pressure respirator and the PLHCP finds a medical
condition that my place the employee’s health at increased risk if the respirator is
used, this employer will provide a powered air-pressure respirator (PAPR) if the
PLHCP’s medical evaluation finds that the employee can use such a respirator; is a
subsequent medical evaluation finds that the employee is medically able to use a
HSE MANUAL
negative pressure respirator, then this employer is no longer required to provide a
PAPR.
a. Additional medical evaluations. As a minimum, this employer will provide additional

medical evaluations based on the following conditions:
 If an employee reports medical signs or symptoms that are related to his or her ability
to use a respirator;
 If a PLHCP, supervisor, or the respirator program administrator informs this
employer that an employee needs to be reevaluated;
 If information from the respiratory protection program, including observations made
during fit testing and program evaluation, indicates a need for employee reevaluation;
or
 If a change occurs in workplace conditions (e.g., physical work effort, protective
clothing, temperature) that may result in a substantial increase in the physiological
burden place on an employee.
a. All records regarding medical evaluations, fit testing, training, and testing will be
maintained by the Program Administrator/HSE Coordinator in a confidential file.
Records retained under this program will be retained and made available to employees in
accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1020.
14. Definitions
Air purifying respirator means: A respirator with an air-purifying filter, cartridge, or canister
that removes specific air contaminants by passing ambient air through the air-purifying
element.
Atmosphere-supplying respirator means:
Canister or cartridge means: A container with a filter, sorbent, or catalyst, or combination of

these items, which removes specific contaminants form the air passed through the container.
Demand respirator means: An atmosphere-supplying respirator that admits breathing air to

the facepiece only when a negative pressure is created inside the facepiece by inhalation.
HSE MANUAL
Emergency situation means: Any occurrence such as, but not limited to, equipment failure,
rupture of containers, or failure of control equipment that may or does result in an
uncontrolled significant release of an airborne contaminant.
Employee exposure means: Exposure to a concentration of an airborne contaminant that

would occur if the employee were not using respiratory protection.
End-of-service-life indicator (ESLI) means: A system that warns the respirator user of the
approach of the end of adequate respiratory protection, for example, that the sorbent is
approaching saturation or is no longer effective.
Escape-only respirator means: A respirator intended to be used only for emergency exit.
Filter or air purifying element means: A component used in respirators to remove solid or
liquid aerosols from the inspired air.
Filtering facepiece (dust mask) means: A negative pressure particulate respirator with a filter
as an integral part of the facepiece or with the entire facepiece composed of the filtering
medium
Fit factor means: A quantitative estimate of the fit of a particular respirator to a specific
individual, and typically estimates the ration of the concentration of a substance in ambient to
its concentration inside the respirator when worn.
Fit test means: The use of a protocol to qualitatively or quantitatively evaluate the fit of a
respirator on an individual. (See also Qualitative fit test QLFT and Quantitative fit test
QNFT.)
Helmet means: A rigid respiratory inlet covering that also provides head protection against
impact and penetration.
High efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filter means: A filter that is at least 99.97% efficient
in removing monodisperse particles of 0.3 micrometers in diameter. The equivalent NIOSH
42 CFR 84 particulate filters are the N100, R100, and P100 filters.
HSE MANUAL
Hood means: A respiratory inlet covering that completely covers the head and neck and may
also cover portions of the shoulders and torso.
Immediately dangerous to life or health (IDLH) means: An atmosphere that poses an

immediate threat to life, would cause irreversible adverse health effects, or would impair an
individual’s ability to escape from a dangerous atmosphere.
Interior structural firefighting means: The physical activity of fire suppression, rescue or
both, inside of building or enclosed structures which are involved in a fire situation beyond
the incipient stage. (See 29 CFR 1910.155)
Loose-fitting facepiece means: A respiratory inlet covering that is designed to form a partial
seal with the face.
Negative pressure respirator (tight fitting) means: A respirator in which the air pressure
inside the facepiece is negative during inhalation with respect to the ambient air pressure
outside the respirator.
Oxygen deficient atmosphere means: An atmosphere with an oxygen content below 19.5%
by volume.
Physician or other licensed health care professional (PLHCP) means: An individual whose
legally permitted scope of practice (i.e., license, registration, or certification) allows him or
her to independently provide, or be delegated the responsibility to provide, some or all of the
health care services required by the respiratory protection standard.
Positive pressure respirator means: A respirator in which the pressure inside the respiratory
inlet covering exceeds the ambient air pressure outside the respirator.
Powered air-purifying respirator (PAPR) means: An air-purifying respirator that uses a

blower to force the ambient air through air-purifying elements to the inlet covering.
Pressure demand respirator means: A positive pressure atmosphere-supplying respirator that

admits breathing air to the test agent.
HSE MANUAL
Qualitative fit test (QLFT) means: A pass/fail fit test to assess the adequacy of respirator fit
that relies on the individual’s response to the test agent.
Quantitative fit test (QNFT) means: An assessment of the adequacy of respirator fit by
numerically measuring the amount of leakage into the respirator.
Respiratory inlet covering means: That portion of a respirator that forms the protective
barrier between the user’s respiratory tract and an air-purifying device or breathing air
source, or both. It may be a facepiece, helmet, hood, suit, or a mouthpiece respirator with
nose clamp.
Self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) means: An atmosphere-supplying respirator for

which the breathing air source is designed to be carried by the user.
Service life means: The period of time that a respirator, filter or sorbent, or other respiratory
equipment provides adequate protection to the wearer.
Supplied-air respirator (SAR) or airline respirator means: An atmosphere-supplying

respirator for which the source of breathing air is not designed to be carried by the user.
Tight-fitting facepiece means: A respiratory inlet covering that forms a complete seal with
the face.
User seal check means: An action conducted by the respirator user to determine if the
respirator is properly seated to the face.
HSE MANUAL
Rigging 0 Sept. 1, 2011 51.0
RIGGING
A. INTRODUCTION
The purpose of this program is to identify for LABORDE MARINE, LLC personnel the
requirements for working safely with cranes, hoists, slings and related equipment, and aid
LABORDE MARINE, LLC in complying with API 2D, 2C, and ANSI B30.5. The program
applies to material handling and related equipment on customer and LABORDE MARINE, LLC
premises both on and offshore. It contains information to enable company personnel to work safely
while rigging and while in the vicinity of cranes and other lifting equipment.
B. DEFINITION
Qualified Rigger – Anyone who attaches or unattaches lifting equipment to loads or lifting devices
and who gives signals to crane operators. This person must have also successfully completed an
approved training program prior to being used as a qualified rigger.
C. RESPONSIBILITIES
The management is responsible for ensuring that employees have completed the training required by
this procedure, as well as:
 Ensuring that employees-including riggers, crane operators, and inspectors-have been

properly trained.
 The implementation of this policy.
 Taking corrective actions on all violations or suspected violations of this procedure.
 Documentation of completion for each employee
The HSE Director is responsible for aiding in the implementation of this procedure. The supervisor
is responsible for providing assistance in the implementation of this policy by:
HSE MANUAL
Rigging 0 Sept. 1, 2011 51.0
 Ensuring that proper inspections and maintenance records are completed and maintained
LABORDE MARINE, LLC personnel are responsible for acquainting themselves with this
procedure and applying it in their day to day operations.
D. GENERAL INFORMATION
Rigging consists of the ropes, cables, chains, slings, pulleys, winches and related materials used to
stabilize, lift or move items. Safe rigging operations require observance of correct procedures and
knowledge of the materials used. Remember the following:
 Your primary responsibility is to verify the weight of the load.
 Always be certain that cables are in a safe condition and heavy enough to carry the load.
 Be sure that the rigging is safe and the loads are properly balanced.
 Be sure the load to be lifted is not greater than the capacity of the lifting device.
 Keep yourself and others clear of loads being lifted.
Serious injuries and extensive property damage can result from failure to observe the design
limitations of hoisting equipment or from failure to recognize evidence of wear, weakening or
damage. Hoisting equipment is made according to rigid standards, and it is tested and its limits
verified by such national societies as American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM). Thus the
user is assured that an individual item is suitable for use within certain load limits.
E. TRAINING REQUIREMENTS
The rigger training program as per API-RP-2D, most recent edition will consist of the following,
including both classroom and hands on training:
 Crane components
 Working safely around cranes

HSE MANUAL
Rigging 0 Sept. 1, 2011 51.0
 Standard operating hand signals
 Complete familiarization with:
1) Rigging hardware
2) Slings and usage
3) Inspections and maintenance
4) Lift planning and procedures
Hands on training to include:
 Inspection of equipment
 Actual rigging of equipment
 Selection of slings
 Use of hand signals
 Both written and practical exams
All training will be documented and kept in personnel and training files covering:
 Name of student
 Date of training
 Name of instructor
F. REFRESHER TRAINING
Riggers will be trained according to the following schedule:

HSE MANUAL
Rigging 0 Sept. 1, 2011 51.0
 Before being assigned to do any rigging, or
 If their work shows lack of proficiency.
 As required by RP-2D
G. SLING CONSTRUCTION
1. Single-Part Sling: A single-part sling is comprised of a single wire rope commonly used for
lifting easy to handle, light to medium weight loads.
2. Multi-Part Sling: These are continuous plaiting or braiding of several single ropes together
that form a single braided sling.
3. Multi-Leg Sling: These types of slings consist of two, three, or four legs (single slings)
secured in a master link. These generally provide better load stabilization when the load is
distributed equally among the legs. They also provide increased capacity over the single leg
sling.
4. Synthetic Web Slings: Used primarily for painted surfaces or fine instrumentation that wire
rope could damage.
The following guidelines are intended to help a rigger make the proper sling selections for a
particular job.
H. SELECTION PROCEDURE
1. Determine Weight – Make sure that the weight of the load to be lifted is known. If not, take
proper steps to ensure the sling has more than adequate capacity.
2. Decide on Hitch or End Attachment – Make sure that the hitch accommodates the load’s
shape and size as well as its weight. Selection must take into consideration any possible
physical damage to the load as well as providing a positive attachment. The hitch or end
attachment chosen may affect the choice of sling construction.
3. Check Lifting Device – Make sure that the lifting device has sufficient capacity, is in proper
working condition, and provides the maneuverability required once the load is lifted.
HSE MANUAL
Rigging 0 Sept. 1, 2011 51.0
4. Consider Room to Lift – Make sure that the lifting device has sufficient room to pick up the
load and handle it when the length of the sling is added to the hook.
5. Determine Sling Length – Make sure to use the longest sling possible for completing the lift,
since the longest sling will provide the smallest angle of spread between the sling legs.
6. Check Rated Capacity – Find out the sling’s safe working load capacity. DO NOT guess, use
Rated Capacity Chart. Double check that the length, type and diameter of the sling chosen
will accommodate the load to be lifted.
7. Determine Leg Styles – Considering the capacity above, multi-part slings will be more
flexible, more easily handled, than single-part slings and will often provide the only practical
means for handling extremely heavy lifts.
8. Check Everything – Before attempting a lift, take a light strain on the rigging, checking to
see that blocking, sling and load protection and all safety devices are in place and that the
load is free of any restraints.
9. Put It Away! – After you’ve completed the job, check the sling for any damage. If it’s
damaged, red tag it immediately or advise the sling inspector. If it is undamaged, return it to
the sling storage rack for safekeeping until the next usage. Slings should be stored where
they will not be subject to damage.
I. SAFETY FACTOR
To guard against possible rope failure, the actual load on a sling should be only a fraction of the
manufacturer’s rated breaking strength. Applying a factor of safety to this value provides the margin
of strength. Applying a factor of safety to this value provides the margin of strength necessary to
handle loads safely.
The maximum safe working load of a rope can be determined by dividing the manufacturer’s rated
breaking strength of the particular rope by the appropriate factor of safety (5:1, 3:1, 2:1). For rigging
ropes, the minimum acceptable safety factor is 5; for ropes used to hoist personnel, the safety factor
is 10.
NOTE: A factor of safety is NOT a reserve strength. It CANNOT be used to provide

additional rope capacity; and it must NEVER be lowered.
HSE MANUAL
Rigging 0 Sept. 1, 2011 51.0
When a rigger is confronted with a load problem and references for wire rope are not available,
either of these two approximate methods will give safe serviceable results.
1. Change rope diameter into eights (1/8’s) of an inch; square the number of eights; then
multiply this result by 250 to determine working strength in pounds.
2. Square the diameter of the rope in inches; then multiply result by 8 to determine working
strength in tons.
J. RATED LOAD
The working load limit is the same as the “Rated Load” which is indicated on the heavy duty tags
attached to each type of sling at the time the component is manufactured. If the capacity tag is not
attached, do not use the sling. Never apply a load greater than the rated load. A rated load can also
be found on rigging hardware such as hooks and shackles.
K. PROOF TEST
This test is applied to a product solely to determine injurious material or manufacturing defects. As
per API RP 2D the proof load, which is the force applied at a proof test, for single-leg slings with
mechanical or poured attachments shall be twice the sling’s vertical rated capacity. Slings with
hand-tucked splice attachments shall be proof loaded to the vertical rated capacity. The proof load
for multiple-leg bridle slings shall be applied to each of the individual legs.
L. DYNAMIC LOADS
Dynamic loads take place when cargo is on deck attached to a slack hoist line and the deck quickly
falls from under the load, leaving the load hanging in mid air and resulting in a Shock Load. This
causes a large jolt to be sent throughout the crane and its rigging. Under API 2C all offshore cranes
must be equipped with a Dynamic Load Chart.
M. INSPECTION
Several industry standards including ANSI and API (The American Petroleum Institute) require
inspections of Rigging Hardware. ANSI requires an “initial” inspection when rigging its originally
purchased and placed into service, a “frequent” inspection prior to each day’s activities, and a
“periodic” inspection which must be conducted at least annually with record keeping.
HSE MANUAL
Rigging 0 Sept. 1, 2011 51.0
The frequency of documenting sling inspections will be determined by the Owner based on the
following criteria:
 Frequency of sling use
 Severity of service conditions
 Nature of type of lifts being made
 Experience based on service life of slings used in similar applications
Inspection records must be written, dated, initialed and kept readily available for a period of two
years at an appropriate location. The person performing the inspection must be clearly identified on
the inspection record.
Each person that uses rigging equipment such as slings and shackles must inspect them prior to use
and should avoid assumptions that all new pieces of rigging equipment are fully functional.
Additionally, all riggers must be trained sufficiently to recognize the appropriate application for each
piece of rigging equipment. A certified sling, regardless of age or newness, may not fit a specific
application.
If you have any doubt about the safe condition of a piece of rigging equipment, do not use it.
Equipment should also be inspected daily before it is used and again before it is returned to storage.
Some companies have a daily report where the condition of all rigging equipment is recorded at the
end of a shift.
Do not try to repair defective equipment. It should be tagged with a warning and removed from
service immediately – either permanently or until it is repaired and proof tested by the manufacturer
or another authorized person.
Never leave damaged or worn equipment where someone else might pick it up and use it.
HSE MANUAL
Rigging 0 Sept. 1, 2011 51.0
N. GUIDELINE TO INSPECTIONS & REPORTS
1. Maintain all inspection records and reports for the length of time deemed appropriate.
2. Prior to each daily use, the following procedures is set as a guideline:
a. Check all equipment functions.

b. Lower load blocks and check hooks for deformation or cracks.
c. During lowering procedure and the following raising cycle, observe the rope and the
reeving. Particular notice should be paid to kinking, twisting, or other deformities.
d. Check wire rope and slings for visual signs of anything causing them to be unsafe to use:
broken wires, excessive wear, kinking or twisting. Particular attention should be given to
a new damage during operation.
3. Monthly inspections are recommended with a singed report by an authorized competent

inspector. The Monthly Reports should include the inspection of the following:
a. All functional operating mechanisms for excessive wear of components, brake system
parts and lubrication.
b. Limit Switches.
c. Crane hooks for excess throat opening or twisting along with a visual for cracks.
d. Wire rope and reeving for conditions causing possible removal.
e. Wire rope slings for excessive wear, broken wires, stretch, kinking, twisting, and
mechanical abuse.
f. All end connections: hooks, shackles, turnbuckles, plate clamps, sockets, etc. for
excessive wear, distortion and broken wires.
g. Electrical apparatus for signs of pitting or deterioration of controller containers, push
button stations, limit switches and other electrical controls.
O. WIRE ROPE
Wire rope consists of a number of singles wires that are laid (not twisted) into a number of strands.
These are often laid, or helically bent, around a core, which may be either of fiber (natural or
synthetic) or of wire, and serves to support the outer strands and prevents them from crushing when
the wire is wrapped around a drum. Also helps keep outer strands in proper position while in use.
Characteristics of Wire Rope

HSE MANUAL
Rigging 0 Sept. 1, 2011 51.0
 Flexibility
 Strength
 Easy maintenance
 Easily inspected for wear
P. CHAIN
Only alloy steel chain is suitable for slings used in overhead lifting and should have the letter “A”
and/or the number “8” stamped on each link.
Currently available is grade 8 or 100 alloy steel chain rated by the National Association of Chain
Manufacturing (NACM) which offers higher working load limits and is in compliance with OSHA
standards.
Available in both single and multiple-leg style slings where ruggedness, high temperature and
abrasion resistance are required.
Even though a chain is strong, it should NEVER be welded on or exposed to temperatures above
6000 F: it will lose its rated strength.
Chains will also stretch under excessive loading. The links become elongated and ultimately will
fall.
NOTE: Whenever a chain sling is hooked back on itself (into the chain, rather than to the master
link) the capacity of the sling should be reduced by ¼. Thus choker hitch ratings according to
manufacturer safe load ratings are less than the ratings for vertical hitches.
Q. SYNTHETIC WEBBING
Synthetic webbing is used primarily for rigging loads that must not be marred or scratched, such as
finely machined, highly polished or painted surfaces. They have however a number of advantages
over slings made of other materials.
 Softness and bearing width

HSE MANUAL
Rigging 0 Sept. 1, 2011 51.0
 Flexibility
 Elasticity
 Long life
 Stability
 Non-sparking
 Non-rusting
 Minimize twisting
 Less likely to cause injury
Synthetic web sling capacities are based on:
 Proper fabrication efficiency
 Safety factor of 5:1
 Horizontal sling angle not less than 300
 Type of hitch
They are available in one, two, three or four-ply webbing, with metal end fittings (triangle and
choker, or triangles), standard eye and eye, twisted eye, and endless or grommet configuration.
Folding, bunching or pinching of synthetic slings, which occurs when used with improperly sized
shackles, hooks or other misapplications, will reduce the rating.
For this reason web slings should not be constricted between the ears of a clevis or a shackle.
Selecting a shackle for use with a web sling requires proper working load limit and enough room to
allow the sling to fit without bunching.
HSE MANUAL
Rigging 0 Sept. 1, 2011 51.0
Special fittings designed for synthetic web slings are available to eliminate bunching and to simplify
use.
R. EFFECTS OF LOAD ANGLE
Any load angle other than 90 degrees decreases the rigging equipment’s rated capacity.
Each corner of a square is a 900 angle. Most rigging equipment will support its full rated capacity at
a 900 angle.
A diagonal between opposite corners of the square divides the 90-degree angle into two 450 angles.
A sling rigged at a 450 angle to the load has only 70.7% of its full lifting capacity.
In any triangle with all three legs the same size, each of the angles is 600. A sling with a 600 load
angle has on 86.6% of its full rated capacity.
Half of that 600 angle is 300 and should never be used to lift. The smallest load angle you should
ever use for overhead lifting is 450.
Effect of Sling Angle on the Rated Capacity of the Sling

Assumed Load
Assumed Actual Actual Load
(Pounds per Error %
Sling Angle Angle (Pounds per Leg)
Leg)
90o 500 85o 502 0.4$
o o
75 518 70 532 2.8%
60o 577 55o 610 5.7%
o o
45 707 40 778 9.1%
o o
30 1,000 25 1,183 18.3%
o o
15 1,932 10 2,800 49.0%
HSE MANUAL
Rigging 0 Sept. 1, 2011 51.0
NOTE: When the pull is not vertical, the load in the leg is always increased.
S. CENTER OF GRAVITY
Any load should be rigged so the center of gravity is directly beneath the hoist hook and if
possible, below or level with the attachment points.
If the center of gravity is not directly under the hook, the load will shift when it is picked up. If it is
above the attachment points, the load may tip over.
A load’s center of gravity is the point where the weight is concentrated. For most regular shapes,
the center of gravity is in the middle of the load. But for an irregularly shaped load, or one that is
composed of different materials, the center of gravity will probably not be at the physical center of
the load. When rigging an irregular load, start by positioning the hook above the point where you
estimate the center of gravity to be.
Each leg of the sling should be strong enough to support the weight of the entire load, just in
case the load should slip. Whenever a load is off balance, the chances that something might go
wrong are greatly increased.
When the load is rigged for the probable center of gravity, it should be raised just off of the ground
to test its stability. If the load shifts or tips more than 5 degrees, it should be set down so the hitch
can be adjusted. One or more of the sling legs may have to be lengthened or shortened.
HSE MANUAL
Rigging 0 Sept. 1, 2011 51.0
T. LIFTING CAPACITY
Slings are rated with a lifting capacity for vertical, choker and basket hitches. However, this rated
capacity is affected by the angle formed between the sling and the load. You can find the rated
capacity of a sling on a table or on an ID tag attached to the sling. Rope may or may not be
tagged. Other slings must be tagged. Do not use a synthetic web, metal mesh, or chain sling if the
ID tag is missing or illegible.
U. HARDWARE
The hardware or end attachments are as important as the wire rope itself. One must consider
proper selection and capacity. Wire rope attachments do not always equal or have the same load
capacity as the rope. The application determines the type of end attachment used. However, a safe
working load should be stamped on the fitting. There are several types of end attachments we will
discuss such as clips, shackles, hooks, wedges, etc.
a. CLIPS
The most common method of making an eye or attaching a wire rope to a piece of equipment is
with the cable or crosby clip. These consist of the separate U-Bolt and saddle clip or the double
saddle safety (fist grip) clip.
U-Bolts must be placed on the rope with the U-Bolts bearing on the short or dead end of the wire
rope, and the saddle on the long or live end of the rope. These clips should be placed not less than
six (6) diameters of the rope apart and in no case less than that recommended by manufacturer.
Clip efficiency will depend on the arrangement, care in tightening, and the number used:
1. Properly attached U-Bolts (80% efficiency) all on dead end.
2. Staggered clip attachment (75% efficiency).
3. U-Bolts (all on live or load end) (70% efficiency).
4. Improperly tightened nuts (50% efficiency)

HSE MANUAL
Rigging 0 Sept. 1, 2011 51.0
Double saddled or fist grip type clips develop approximately 95% strength of the rope, thus one
less clip is required. Also, they can be installed without regard to which part goes on live or
dead end of cable.
b. HOOKS
There are many different types of safety hooks used in rigging and it is recommended that you use
only hooks made from forged alloy steel with the rated capacity stamped on hook.
Make sure that all hoisting hooks except grab and sorting types are equipped with safety catches.
Hooks on load blocks, overhaul balls and other such crane hoisting devices shall have the ability to
close the throat opening, lock and may employ the use of a pin or other such retaining device to
ensure closure.
All hooks used for support of personnel must be of the type that can be closed and locked, including
a safety latch with a double locking latch.
Remember a hook’s safe working load applies only when the load is applied directly on the saddle
of the hook. The load placed anywhere else on the hook will reduce the hook’s rated safe working
load. There are several types of hooks used in the industry.
Hooks also need to be inspected at regular intervals. One needs to check for wear in the saddle,
cracks, hooks that are sprung open, corrosion, twists, etc. Some inspection tests can be done with x-
ray, ultra-sound or magna-flux.
All tests should be recorded when checking for overloading (most common problem). A
measurement of the hooks throat opening should be taken when new, if overloaded the throat will
show an increase in length. Anything over a 15% increase should be discarded. Never use heat
on a hook.
c. SHACKLES
The two (2) most common types of shackles used in rigging operations are the anchor (bow
shaped) and the chain (D-shaped) shackles. Both types are available with screw pins, round
HSE MANUAL
Rigging 0 Sept. 1, 2011 51.0
pins, or bolt type closures. Again, as with other types of end attachments, always use shackles
made from forged alloy steel with the safe rated load stamped on the body of the shackles. Never
use a shackle when the rated load is not stamped on it.
Always ensure that the load pulls evenly when using shackles. If it is pulled at an angle, the load
capacity is reduced considerably. Use washers or spacers to center the load if necessary. Also,
never replace a shackle pin with a bolt and nut. Use cotter pins with any round pin shackle. If
there is a chance that the pin might roll when loaded, DO NOT use a screw type pin shackle, the
rolling action could loosen the pin. Destroy all shackles that show wear greater than 10% on the
crown or pin from original diameter.
Shackles are sized by diameter of the steel in the crown, not by pin size. Only stainless and
forged alloy steel types should be used. Safety shackles are required on loads with permanently
attached slings (pre-rigged). All shackles must have the rated capacity clearly embossed.
REMEMBER!!! Never replace a shackle pin with a bolt. Bolts are not intended to take the
bending stress applied to the pin.
d. THIMBLES
Primarily used to prevent the eye of the sling from spreading out exposing the core and from
cutting the fibers of the sling on the load.
Also used when connecting two straight lengths of rope together. Use clips to form an eye (with a
thimble) in each end connecting the eyes together.
e. EYE BOLTS
Eyebolts are sometimes inserted into the load as attachment points for the sling. Check the condition
of the:
1. Shank: The threads should be in good condition, and the shank should not be cracked or
bent.
2. Eye: Check for damage or excessive wear.

HSE MANUAL
Rigging 0 Sept. 1, 2011 51.0
3. Hole: You also need to check the hole the eyebolt is going to go into. The threads must be
good, and it must be the correct diameter and depth for the eyebolt.
For a lift at any load angle less than 90 degrees it is best to use a swivel eyebolt. The ring turns to
the correct lifting position as the load is applied. Swivel eyebolts must be torqued according to the
manufacturer’s recommendations.
If swivel eye bolts are not available for an angular pull, the eyebolt you must have a shoulder on it,
and the shoulder must be flush with the surface of the load. Do not use eyebolts if the angle
between the sling and the load is less than 45 degrees.
If the hitch is not vertical, the angular pull on the eyebolt should be from the side of the eyebolt, not
from the top. If necessary, use washers to shim the eyebolt so it can be turned in the right direction
and still be flush with the surface of the load.
Never lift a load with the hook or sling run through the eyebolt. Use a shackle.
When attaching a sling to eyebolts, always pull on line with the bolt axis. When hitching to bolts
screwed into or attached to a load, a side pull may break the bolts.
f. TURNBUCKLES
All turnbuckles used in rigging industry should be of weldless construction and fabricated from
alloy steel. There are a variety of end fittings used on turnbuckles; some of these are:
 Eye and eye
 Hook and hook
 Jaw and jaw
 Hook and eye

HSE MANUAL
Rigging 0 Sept. 1, 2011 51.0
All turnbuckles of comparable size have equal, rated load capacities, except hook end types, which
because of their configuration, have lower ratings. It would be wise to make sure all hook ends are
fitted with safety latches.
Also, if the turnbuckle is to be used in an application where vibration is present, it is extremely

important to lock the frame to the end fittings to prevent loosening. Lock nut or jam nuts are
sometimes not effective and add greatly to the load in the screw thread.
g. SPREADER BARS
Slings are used more efficiently if load angles are as near 90o as possible. The use of a spreader bar
can definitely minimize unnecessary stress on your rigging equipment by increasing your sling load
angle. Spreader bars are generally used on long loads such as pipe or beams.
NOTE: However, remember to add the weight of all spreader bar hardware into the load weight.
The hoist hook must be able to support everything it is holding. Also, make sure that the weight of
the load is within the S.W.L. (Safe Working Load) Capacity of the spreader bar.
Use a spreader bar with double basket hitches to reduce tendency of slings to slide together and to
keep loads level. By adjusting the hook point and using a come-along or chain block to support the
heavy end, the load can be kept level during the lift.
V. SAFE RIGGING PROCEDURES
It is extremely important to rig the load so that it is stable. Unless the center of gravity of the load is
below the hook, the load will shift. A separate section dealing with centers of gravity has been
included in this manual.
1. The safety of personnel involved in rigging and hoisting operations largely depends upon
care and common sense. Remember these safe practices.
1) Always maintain good balance when handling any load, be especially cautious of finger
and hand pinch points when attaching or un-hooking loads, and always have an escape
route, don’t put yourself in a position where you can get caught between loads.
2) Know the safe working load of the equipment and tackle being used. Never exceed this
limit. (Figure 1)
HSE MANUAL
Rigging 0 Sept. 1, 2011 51.0
3) Determine the load weight before rigging it.
4) Examine all hardware, equipment, tackle and slings before using it and destroy defective
components. Discarded equipment may be used by someone not aware of the hazards or
defects.
5) The load must be kept under control at all times. Where necessary, when personnel may
be endangered by the rotation, one or more guide ropes or tag lines shall be used to
prevent the rotation or uncontrolled motion, unless it has been determined that their use
creates an unsafe condition.
6) Make sure that all personnel stand clear while loads are being lifted and lowered or while
the slings are being drawn from beneath the load.
7) Never allow the load to be carried over the heads of any personnel.
8) Never work under a suspended load unless the load has been adequately supported from
the floor.
9) Rigging equipment not in use shall be removed from the immediate work area as not to
present a hazard to employees in the area.
HSE MANUAL
Rigging 0 Sept. 1, 2011 51.0
W. CRANE SIGNALS
HSE MANUAL
SSE 1 July 1, 2012 52.0
SSE Short Service Employees

1.0 Purpose: To ensure that employees with less than six months experience are identified, adequately
supervised, trained and managed so as to prevent injury to themselves or others, property damage,
or environmental harm.
2.0 Scope: Laborde Marine LLC
3.0 Responsibility: All Employees
4.0 Guidelines:
These guidelines are to be followed to determine which employees are defined as short service, the
method of identifying a short service employee, notification to affected employees and customers,
and monitoring of short service employees.
4.1 Short Service Employees - Defined
SSE will be defined as an employee with fewer than 6 months of experience in the same job type
or with Laborde Marine. A change in position or job type within Laborde Marine will also be
considered a SSE for 6 months.
Non-SSE employees who are new to a location should be considered by the local supervisor for
inclusion in the SSE program based on the specifics of their assignment. Factors to consider
include significant differences in:
 Job responsibilities/duties from previous assignments
 Work processes/practices from previous assignments
 Equipment/tools from previous assignments
 Skill level, familiarity with co-workers.
4.2 Documentation of a Short Service Employee
A “SSE” form must be completed by Crew Coordinator or Operations for each individual SSE.
The form must be submitted to the vessel Master upon the SSE’s arrival on board. Customer
specific forms may be used as appropriate forms for this policy.
4.3 Crew Complement Recommendations

Crews with 4 persons or less:
 Single person “crew: cannot be a SSE
HSE MANUAL
SSE 1 July 1, 2012 52.0
 2-4 person crews should have only 1 SSE per crew
Crews with 5 persons or more:

 Crew complements should normally not exceed 20% SSE
 Crew complements that are greater than 20% shall be permitted with documented
approval of the Operations Department.
 For purposes of this policy, a crew is defined as those employees working on a single
vessel.
4.4 Requirements While Aboard the Vessel

All SSE personnel and personnel new to a vessel must attend a location-specific HSE
orientation upon boarding the vessel and prior to beginning work on the vessel.
All SSE personnel must be assigned an experienced mentor to assist the employee during
his/her “SSE” period. In most cases the mentor will be a vessel officer. It is the mentor’s
responsibility to closely supervise the assigned SSE and prevent him/her from performing
tasks for which they are not properly trained.
4.5 Identification of Short Service Employees
SSE personnel will be identified by:
 A Hi-Vis Orange Hard Hat, which may be supplemented with visible stickers, placed
on his/her hard hat that must include the letters “SSE”. The stickers should be of
black letters on a white background and be at least 2”x 3” in size. Sticker placement
should be every 120 degrees to affect 360-degree visibility.
4.6 Removal from Short Service Employee status
 To be removed from SSE status, an employee must exhibit safe behavior for 6
months (e.g., incident free performance, proactive participation in HSE programs
such as incident reporting (including near misses, BBS, JSA development, safety
meetings, etc.) and have a general awareness and working knowledge of Laborde
Marine LLC HSE policies. The Operations Department may recommend a reduction
of the 6 months requirement based on the employee’s performance and relevant
industry experience. The Operations Manager must approve this reduction and
concurrence must be received from the vessel Masters, Marine Superintendent, Crew
Coordinator and HSE personnel who are familiar with the person’s safety
performance and attitude.
o Employees who do not qualify for release from SSE status after 6 months may
continue work only with the documented approval of the Operations Manager.
o Sub-contractors and vendors will be managed in alignment with this policy.

HSE MANUAL
SSE 1 July 1, 2012 52.0
o Documentation (SSE form) should be maintained for a period of 1 year after a
contractor employee has been removed from SSE status.
HSE MANUAL
SSE 1 July 1, 2012 52.0
I. SSE Information
Contractor Company
Name: Laborde Marine LLC Request Date:
SSE Name:
Date of
Employment: Current Job Title
Experience in Current
Years Oil Field Exp Pos Yrs Mos
Is this employee in compliance with your Substance Abuse Policy? Yes No
Have site contractor and HES policies been reviewed with SSE? Yes No
Who has been assigned as the SSE’s
mentor?
Mentor’s Experience: Yrs Mos

List all training provided to the SSE: List any previous special training:
SSE(s) identified
by: Hard Hat – Hi Vis Orange
II. SSE Crew Composition Requirements

Choose one of the crew types below. If any of the stated limitations are exceeded, proceed to
the variance form on the back of this sheet.
Single person crew – cannot be an SSE (Variance Required)
2 – 4 person crew – no more than one SSE
5 or more person crew – no more than 20% SSE(s) per crew
Exceeding 20% SSE per crew (Variance Required)
III. SSE Review and Approval

Contractor Manager: Date
Operator Location
Supervisor: Date
HSE MANUAL
Lockout 0 Sept. 1, 2011 Appendix 1.0
Form Safety MRC Page 1 of 1
HSE MANUAL
Fall Protection 0 Sept. 1, 2011 Appendix 2.0
Work Plan Prepared By: Approved By: Page:
HSE MANUAL
Fall Protection 0 Sept. 1, 2011 Appendix 2.0
Work Plan Prepared By: Approved By: Page:
HSE MANUAL
Hot Work 0 Sept. 1, 2011 Appendix 3.0
Permit Prepared By: Approved By: Page:
Forms Safety MRC Page 1 of 2
HSE MANUAL
Hot Work 0 Sept. 1, 2011 Appendix 3.0
HSE MANUAL
Confined Space Entry 0 Sept. 1, 2011 Appendix 4.0
HSE MANUAL
HSE MANUAL
HSE MANUAL
HSE MANUAL
Contractor 0 Sept. 1, 2011 Appendix 5.0
Acknowledgement Prepared By: Approved By: Page:
HSE MANUAL
Sub Contractor 0 Sept. 1, 2011 Appendix 6.0
Safety Review Prepared By: Approved By: Page:
HSE MANUAL
HSE MANUAL
HSE MANUAL
HSE MANUAL
0 Sept. 1, 2011 Appendix 7.0
MOC Prepared By: Approved By: Page:
MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE REPORT FORM

Report originated by Facility or Shorebase: Date:
Description of Change: MOC, What Procedure, if any, is involved?
TEMPORARY _________ PERMANENT __________

Mitigation: (includes actions taken on board, requested shorebase assistance, MOC and any other
recommendations that would correct this change)
Any permanent changes to the facility Plan Approval:

or ANY procedure changes require
Signature _________________
Laborde Marine Shorebase approval.
Print Name ________________
Date:__________
CLOSEOUT APPROVAL: DATE:

HSE MANUAL
0 Sept. 1, 2011 Appendix 8.0
SSE Prepared By: Approved By: Page:
I. SSE Information
Contractor Company
Name: Laborde Marine LLC Request Date:
SSE Name:
Date of
Employment: Current Job Title
Experience in Current
Years Oil Field Exp Pos Yrs Mos
Is this employee in compliance with your Substance Abuse Policy? Yes No
Have site contractor and HES policies been reviewed with SSE? Yes No
Who has been assigned as the SSE’s
mentor?
Mentor’s Experience: Yrs Mos

List all training provided to the SSE: List any previous special training:
SSE(s) identified
by: Hard Hat – Hi Vis Orange
II. SSE Crew Composition Requirements

Choose one of the crew types below. If any of the stated limitations are exceeded, proceed to
the variance form on the back of this sheet.
Single person crew – cannot be an SSE (Variance Required)
2 – 4 person crew – no more than one SSE
5 or more person crew – no more than 20% SSE(s) per crew
Exceeding 20% SSE per crew (Variance Required)
III. SSE Review and Approval

Contractor Manager: Date
Operator Location
Supervisor: Date

LLC HSE Edition 1 Rev 1 2012

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

LLC HSE Edition 1 Rev 1 2012

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

LABORDE MARINE

EDITION 1, REVISION 1, JULY 1, 2012

Section Section Title Pages

1. To use as few hazardous waste products as possible.

GOALS AND EXPECTATIONS

CORPORATE SAFETY POLICY

To describe the Safety and Environmental Policies of the company

All Corporations that use this System as Guidelines to Manage Safety

 The responsibility, authorities and accountabilities are placed on every employee

Continue to improve the quality of occupational health management by:

Reduce the number of injuries occurring by:

 Using leading indicators to measure proactive performance.

Continue to improve environmental management by:

 Reporting on appropriate environmental indicators.

HSE PERFORMANCE IMPROVEMENT PLAN

4. Follow-up meeting dates will be set as listed below:

GENERAL RULES, PRACTICES AND PROCEDURES

A controlled area is defined as any environment where LABORDE MARINE, LLC is

Contractors and subcontractors performing work on LABORDE MARINE, LLC property

E. ALCOHOL AND CONTROLLED SUBSTANCE-CONTRABAND

H. SAFE WORK PROCEDURES

Various safe work procedures have been implemented by LABORDE MARINE

1. Work according to good safety practices as posted, instructed, and discussed.

2. Report any unsafe situation or act to his/her supervisor immediately.

3. Report any injury, no matter how trivial, to his/her supervisor.

4. Keep walkways clear so as not to create a tripping hazard.

5. Smoking will be permitted in smoke areas only. There will be NO SMOKING in

BASIC SAFETY RULES APPLICABLE TO ALL JOBS

confronted with new work procedures or unfamiliar job assignments.

B. GENERAL RULES FOR THE SUPERVISOR

precautions required to execute the job without incident.

2. Keep tools and working materials in proper containers, toolboxes, etc.

4. Properly store all materials and tools.

6. Keep small items in boxes or bins.

8. Keep walkways clear of obstructions.

11. Clean up tools and work areas as you job progresses.

14. Maintain clear access to all work areas.

5. All portable hand lights used in hazardous locations must be explosion-proof.

 When PPE is necessary

4. Employee Owned Equipment – Where PPE equipment is furnished or owned by the

5. Protective Equipment and Clothing – Maintenance and Repair

1) Appropriate hearing protection is provided by LABORDE MARINE, LLC and must

 In areas designated by LABORDE MARINE, LLC facility safety program.

c. Feet and Toes

e. Head and Face

2) Respirators must be worn when personnel are working in an atmosphere

g. Other Protective Equipment

i. Personal Flotation Devices

Physical hazard – any material/chemical scientifically determined to be a combustible liquid,

3. Never add water to acid; if dilution is needed, add acid to water.

4. Dispose of chemically soaked material in the proper container.

G. SIGNS AND BARRICADES

4. Signs must be legible.

7. Observe the following guidelines for danger tags:

a) Confined Space/Tank Entry Permit:

 Work of any type as required by federal guidelines, customer or company policy.

c) Hot Work Permit:

10. ANYONE WHO MAKES A HOLE OR OPENING IS RESPONSIBLE FOR HAVING IT

fire extinguishers on incipient stage fires.

The training shall include but not limited to the following:

3. Classes of Fires and Extinguishers

4. Proper selection and use of extinguishers

Training will be provided upon initial employment and annually thereafter:

Inspection and Maintenance